JP2019068886A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To notify reliability of performance by making it easy for a player to understand it.SOLUTION: A game board 700 of a game machine is placed nearly in the center and includes a center case 40 in which a display device 41, a board performance device 44, a movable frame 701, a first notification device 702, a second notification device 703, a third notification device 704, and a fourth notification device 705 are arranged. In the game machine, the display device 41 displays performance of a game. In the game machine, a second area 708 in the first notification device 702, the second notification device 703, and a second area 708 in a display screen 706 of the display device 41 notify reliability (the degree of expectations) of performance which serves as both reliability that a variable display game leads to win and reliability of a relottery by lighting modes of respective display parts during the performance of the game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 160

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  There are gaming machines that report the reliability of effects in games.

JP, 2016-185451, A

However, when the effects on the gaming machine become complicated and diversified, the player may not be able to grasp the reliability at first glance.
In one aspect, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can be easily understood by a player and can report the reliability of presentation.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine comprises rendering means, notifying means, and control means. The effect means performs effects in the game.
The notification means notifies the reliability in the effect by using a plurality of indicator lights that can switch on and off states. The control means controls the lighting mode of the plurality of indicator lights to the lighting mode according to the reliability of the effect.

According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, the reliability of the effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine of a first embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of a game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the package display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 12 is a second diagram showing a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of payment command transmission processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of structure of a number-of-wins counter area of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting opening 1 switch process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting opening 2 switch process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 usual process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 usual process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of the special figure 1 change start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 change start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 change start process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of a variation start information setting process of the first embodiment; FIG. 13 is a second diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start information setting processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability change frequency update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 1 change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 1 change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 1 during special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 1 during special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 2 during a special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 2 during a special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flow chart of processing under special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment; FIG. 13 is a second diagram showing the flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command analysis process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (1) which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 26 is a third diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the flame | frame of 2nd Embodiment, a count result, and the relationship of an expectation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of execution timing of count production in the 2nd embodiment, convective line production, and big hit information production. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation mode determination processing at the time of count presentation execution of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the attitude | position state of the sub display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol variation by symbol switching in the sub display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol variation by the horizontal scroll in the sub display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the display production determination processing in the production control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of push button LED in the push button of 3rd Embodiment, and a touch sensor. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between push-button operation of 3rd Embodiment, and the attitude | position change state of a sub display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the attitude | position change state of the sub display apparatus of the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment, and a fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows an example of the attitude | position change state of the sub display apparatus of the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment, and a fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display in the sub display apparatus of the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (1) which shows an example of the change display in the sub display of modification 4 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the fluctuation display in the sub display of modification 4 of a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 15 shows an example of a gaming state transition diagram and a probability fluctuation state of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 4th embodiment. It is FIG. (3) which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the big symbol display aspect classified by conditions at the time of the small hit of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hitting symbol determination process in the presentation control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of pending | holding memory and small hit design of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of a game board of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation start memory display of 5th Embodiment, and its display mode. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the effect lamp of 5th Embodiment, and a display mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation | movement aspect of the board production apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern of the presentation game which the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment performs. It is a figure which shows an example of the reach derivation display in the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the reach production display in the sub display of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the reach production display in the sub display of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocking display in the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of 3 symbol temporary stop derivation | leading-out display in the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production start memory count increase process in the production control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation game execution opportunity determination processing in the presentation control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation game pattern setting process in the presentation control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation game skip process in the presentation control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of a 5th embodiment plays an effect game with pattern 1. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of a 5th embodiment plays an effect game with a pattern 2. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of a 5th embodiment plays an effect game with a pattern 3. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of a 5th embodiment plays an effect game by pattern 4. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of a 5th embodiment plays an effect game by pattern 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the music selection display in the sub display apparatus of the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of modification 1 of a 5th embodiment performs an effect game with a pattern 1. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production game execution opportunity determination processing in the production control apparatus of the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case a production control device of modification 3 of a 5th embodiment performs a production game in multiple times in a special figure change display game. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case a production control device of modification 4 of a 5th embodiment performs a production game over a plurality of special figure change display games. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case a production control device of modification 5 of a 5th embodiment performs a production game over a plurality of special figure change display games. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the presentation game in the sub display apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of operation guidance of a push button using a display of a 6th embodiment, a sub display, and an effect lamp. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of operation guidance of a push button using a display of a 6th embodiment, a sub display, and an effect lamp. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of a reservation notice effect with change of a display mode of a reservation display or a reservation display of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of a reservation notice effect with change of a display mode of a reservation display or a reservation display of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of a reservation notice effect with change of a display mode of a reservation display or a reservation display of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of the display mode and the degree of anticipation in the reservation notice production of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding notice production | presentation with a change of the display mode of a pending | hold display or a pending | holding digestion display of the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of the pending | holding advance announcement production of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the expectation degree alerting | reporting of the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a pending | holding change aspect determination process in the presentation control apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation game setting process in the presentation control apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the operation guidance setting process in the presentation control apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the corresponding | compatible guidance setting process in the presentation control apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of the pending | reporting preliminary production effect of the modification 2 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the prior notice of the pending | holding notice production | presentation of the modification 2 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding notice production | presentation with a change of the display mode of the pending | hold display of a modification 3 of 6th Embodiment, or a pending | save digestion display. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of a reservation notice preparation with change of a display mode of a reservation display or a reservation display of a modification 4 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of a reservation notice effect with change of a display mode of a reservation display or a reservation display of a modification 4 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding notice production | presentation with a change of the display mode of the pending | hold display of a modification 5 of 6th Embodiment, or a pending | save digestion display. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the production | presentation lamp of the modification 6 of 6th Embodiment, a corresponding | compatible display, and a pending | holding display. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lamp of the modification 7 of 6th Embodiment, a corresponding | compatible display, and a relationship of a pending | holding display. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in 7th Embodiment displays, and a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode and the degree of expectation in the pending | holding display in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state transition of the pending | holding display of the intervention latent aspect in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the conditions of the state transition of the reservation display of the intervention latent aspect in a 7th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the conditions of state transition of a reservation display of an intervention latent aspect in a 7th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the state transition of the suspension display of the intervention latent aspect in a 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in 7th Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the intervention latent aspect pending | holding display prohibition flag setting process in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the PB production prohibition flag setting processing in a 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the state transition timing of the non-intervention latent aspect in 7th Embodiment, and the display mode after state transition. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition aspect of the pending | holding display of the non-intervention latent aspect in 7th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the change timing of the effectiveness invalidity of intervention operation in modification 1 of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending | holding display of the intervention latent aspect of the active state and the invalid state in the intervention operation in the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the intervention operation determination processing in the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the intervention operation determination processing in the modification 3 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the conditions of the state transition of the pending | holding display of the intervention latent aspect in the modification 4 of 7th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the change timing of the effectiveness invalidity of intervention operation in modification 5 of a 7th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the change timing of the effectiveness invalidity of intervention operation in modification 6 of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in the modification 6 of 7th Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between PB press mode and intervention operation in the modification 6 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a modification 7 of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a modification 7 of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition diagram of 8th Embodiment, and the execution conditions of special small hit effects. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen in the display of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen in the display of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) showing an example of the display screen in the display of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure (the 5) which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 6) showing an example of the display screen in the display of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hitting symbol display process in the presentation control apparatus of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the meter full production process of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the meter full display of the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the small hitting classification of the modification of 8th Embodiment, and the parameter for special small hitting presentation for every small hitting classification. It is a figure which shows an example of the small hitting design of the modification of 8th Embodiment, and the parameter for special small hitting presentation for every small hitting design. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the game board of the gaming machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the movable frame in 1st Embodiment, a 1st alerting | reporting apparatus, and a 2nd alerting | reporting apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the lighting aspect and reliability in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in 9th Embodiment displays. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of a display mode of a game machine in a 9th embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the display mode of the game machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of a display mode of a game machine in a 9th embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) showing an example of a display mode of a game machine in a 9th embodiment. It is a timing chart (the 1) which shows an example of lighting of the 1st informing device and the 2nd informing device in a 9th embodiment, and movement execution timing of a movable frame. It is a figure (the 5) which shows an example of the display mode of the game machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 6) showing an example of a display mode of a game machine in a 9th embodiment. It is a figure (the 7) showing an example of a display mode of a game machine in a 9th embodiment. It is FIG. (8) which shows an example of the display mode of the game machine in 9th Embodiment. It is FIG. (9) which shows an example of the display mode of the game machine in 9th Embodiment. It is FIG. (10) which shows an example of the display mode of the game machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 11) showing an example of a display mode of a game machine in a 9th embodiment. It is a timing chart (the 2) which shows an example of lighting of the 1st informing device and the 2nd informing device in a 9th embodiment, and movement execution timing of a movable frame. It is a figure (the 12) showing an example of a display mode of a game machine in a 9th embodiment. It is a figure (the 13) which shows an example of the display mode of the game machine in 9th Embodiment. It is FIG. (14) which shows an example of the display mode of the game machine in 9th Embodiment. It is FIG. (15) which shows an example of the display mode of the game machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 16) showing an example of a display mode of a game machine in a 9th embodiment. It is a timing chart (the 3) which shows an example of lighting of the 1st informing device and the 2nd informing device in a 9th embodiment, and movement execution timing of a movable frame. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the content of alerting | reporting in the modification 1 of 9th Embodiment, and the position of a movable frame. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the lighting number in the modification 2 of 9th Embodiment, and the position of a movable frame. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol of 10th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure (the 5) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure (the 6) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure (the 7) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the pseudo | simulation mutual display symbol determination processing in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the non-pseudo-interactive display symbol determination processing in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol of the modification 2 of 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the pending | holding memory in pending | holding alerting production | presentation of 11th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen in the display of an 11th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen in the display of an 11th embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of the display screen in the display of an 11th embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) showing an example of the display screen in the display of an 11th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation pattern in the change notification production | presentation of 11th Embodiment, and a pending | holding notification production | presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in pattern in the change alert production of 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart in the change alerting production | presentation of 11th Embodiment, and a pending | support notice production | presentation. It is a figure showing an example of game state transition of a 12th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol of 12th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 12th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 12th embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 12th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the element production state transition of 13th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 13th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 13th embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 13th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the element production state transition of the modification of 13th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
First Embodiment
First, a first embodiment will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame).
It is attached to 11 so as to be able to open and close. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12.

In addition, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs, etc. are internally incorporated to display decoration or effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, an alarm notification color (for example, Frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing) and
For example, a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound effects is provided. further,
A speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal contents are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. Note that
A lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage tray) 21 for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There is provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state in which the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device. Furthermore, the upper plate 2
At the upper edge portion of 1, an option setting unit 25 is provided for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25 is provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25.
a is provided, and a determination button switch 25 b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit for the player to set the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as an determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

In addition, when the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 1
In the case of 0, based on the operation of the player received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is made to intervene. For example,
The effect of the player's operation being intervened is the effect in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device (the variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). A character to be displayed can be operated, or identification information in the decorative special-image variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Further, to the right of the option setting unit 25, the player operates the ball lending button 27, which is operated when the ball lending is received from the adjacent ball lending machine, and to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied with the game balls from the upper plate 21 in the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Launch towards (see Figure 2). Also, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b can be set, and the brightness of the game board 30 can be set, for example. .

Next, the gaming board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is made of resin side cases 3 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively.
3 and a guide rail 31 are configured. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 encloses the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward beyond the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so that it is difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, on the display screen, an image for presentation based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image,
A fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc. are displayed.

Further, on the upper portion of the center case 40, there is provided a board effect device 44 that effects the game by operating. The panel effect device 44 can display the display device 4 from the state shown in FIG.
It is operable toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common view variation display game. The game ball (the game ball passing through the common drawing start gate 34) winning the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Also, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, two general winning openings 3
5 is disposed, and one general winning opening 35 is disposed on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right portion of the special variation winning device 38 described later. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 forming a first start winning opening (start winning area) for giving a start condition of the first special view variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) (Starting opening 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, the right side of the center case 40 at a position lower than the common view start gate 34,
A normal fluctuation winning device 37 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the first special view fluctuation display game (special view 1 fluctuation display game) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 (starting opening 1) is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right, and this movable member The numeral 37b is normally almost vertical and holds a closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow.
Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is turned so that the upper end side falls to the right by the common electric solenoid 37c (refer to FIG. 3) as a driving device The game ball can easily change into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be harder to win than in the open state. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary motor vehicle (Puden).

On the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, there is formed a flow-off path 91 through which gaming balls can flow, and gaming balls that have not won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 flow downward through the flow-off path 91. A start-up winning opening 92 is provided in the lower part of the flowing down passage 91, and a guiding portion 93 is provided below the flowing down passage 91.
Is provided. The upper surface 94 of the guiding portion 93 is inclined to the left, and the upper surface 94 receives game balls flowing downward without winning in the start winning hole 92, and the left is a special fluctuation winning device 38 described later. It is designed to guide you.

The start winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (starting winning area) for giving the start condition of the second special view variation display game (special view 2 variation display game). The winning game ball is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the start winning opening 36 in the game area 32, a special fluctuation winning device (not capable of accepting the gaming ball and a state capable of accepting the gaming ball) can be converted according to the result of the special view fluctuation display game (
Lower large winning opening, large winning opening 1) 95 is disposed. The special variation winning device 95 has an opening / closing member 9
5c, and as a result of the special view variation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 9
The closing member 5c converts the gaming ball flowing through the gaming area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) from the closed state 5c closing the big winning opening (a closed state disadvantageous to the player). That is, the special variation winning device 95 has a large winning opening 1 solenoid 9 as a drive device.
The small hit game state (second 2) according to the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game having a large winning opening (lower large winning opening, large winning opening 1) opened and closed by the opening and closing member 95c driven by 5b (see FIG. 3) During the special game state), the game ball is made to easily flow into the big winning hole by converting the big winning hole from the closed state to the open state, and the player is given a predetermined gaming value (prize ball) It is supposed to In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. .

In the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special fluctuation winning device (upper prize winning opening, big prize winning) which can be converted into a state where the game ball is not accepted or a state easy to accept Mouth 2) 38 is provided. The special variation winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c, and the opening / closing member 38c is closed as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. In the closed state, the opening / closing member 38 c retracts to convert the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) which can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 38 has a special winning opening (upper large winning opening, large winning opening 2) opened and closed by the opening / closing member 38c driven by the large winning opening 2 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. Small hit game state (second special game state) during the big hit game state (first special game state) by the result of the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game, or the result of the special view 2 change display game In the middle, it is made to facilitate the flow of gaming balls into the big winning opening by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, and gives the player a predetermined gaming value (prize ball) ing. In addition, inside of the special winning opening (winning area)
A large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the gaming ball that has entered the special winning opening.

When there are a plurality of large winning opening switches as in the present embodiment, one or two large winning opening switches 38a are provided as a whole (see FIG. 3). In the case of the first embodiment, the special variation winning device 95 forming the first special variation winning device (lower large winning opening, large winning opening 1) is provided with only one large winning opening switch 38a. On the other hand, the special variation winning device 38 forming the second special variation winning device (upper large winning opening, large winning opening 2) is a large winning opening switch 38.
A plurality (for example, two) of a are disposed. The special variation winning device 95 is, for example, a winning device (so-called mini-attacker) whose large winning opening is smaller than the special variation winning device 38.

Further, on the left side of the center case 40, a warp port (warp inlet) 39a is provided. The gaming balls having flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a roll on the stage in the center case 40, and a portion thereof is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp outlet 39b is located immediately above the start winning opening 36, and the gaming ball guided to the warp outlet 39b has a start winning opening 36.
It becomes easy to win a prize.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is the right gaming area It is assumed. Then, the player adjusts the launch force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike), whereby the start winning hole 36, the special fluctuation winning device 95, the general winning hole 35 (the right of the special fluctuation winning device 38 The game can be aimed at winning a prize in the club (except for the general winning opening 35), and the game ball is fired to the right-hand game area (so-called right-handed) by the common drawing start gate 34 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, special fluctuation winning It is possible to aim for winning in the device 38 and the like.

In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game and the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 that make up the special view change display game are displayed. Batch display device 50 for displaying a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information
Is provided.

The collective display unit 50 includes a round display unit 51 configured of an LED or the like, a special view 1 suspension display unit 52, a special view 1 symbol display unit 53, a special view 2 symbol display unit 54, and a common pattern symbol display unit 55, the common view holding display unit 56, and the state display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

Next, a control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111. A central processing unit (CPU) unit 110 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like;
It consists of a data bus 140 etc. which connects between the unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and the operation clock and timer interrupts of the gaming microcomputer 111 and the reference of the random number generation circuit. Oscillator circuit that generates the clock
Crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are DC (Di (Di) generated by the power supply apparatus 400.
DC current of a predetermined level such as 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V is supplied and enabled.

The power supply 400 generates AC (the DC 32 V DC voltage from the 24 V AC power supply).
Alternating Current)-DC converter or DC32V to DC12V, DC5V
Power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
10, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage at the time of a power failure to RAM (Random Access Memory) in the gaming microcomputer 111, and a power failure monitoring circuit; A control signal generation unit 430 or the like that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal to be notified.

In the first embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, , And may be provided on the main substrate. Game board 30
Since the game control device 100 is subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the first embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (see FIG.
In particular, it is supplied to the built-in RAM, and the data stored in the RAM is maintained even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. Control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by normal power supply unit 410 and detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, to change the power failure monitoring signal and reset signal after a predetermined time. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 Takes place. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the microcomputer 1 for gaming.
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program to be executed. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read Only Memory (ROM) 111 B and any time readable / writable RA
M111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores unchanged information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as ROM 111 B or R
As the AM 111 C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table means that the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 stored as the start memory are stored in the CPU 111A.
Is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern by referring to. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching a reach state (a second half fluctuation group table, a second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.)
A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the special outcome mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state), at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed, This refers to a display state in which the display result derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the fluctuation display areas of left, middle and right (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the following order: "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premierreach". Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for the solenoid and the display device. Control the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (ms)) to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. Have.

In addition, CPU 111A, in the processing regarding the special figure fluctuation display game, ROM 111B
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the table is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, and a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state Condition), the operation condition (time saving operation condition) of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 as the current gaming condition, the number of starting memories, etc., any one fluctuation pattern table is selected from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables Get. Where CP
U111A is a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. Controls to drive out and pay out the winning balls. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10,
Control to pay out the lent ball.

In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, the start opening 1 switch 36 in the start winning opening 36
a, start port 1 switch 37a in the normal variation winning apparatus 37, start port 2 switch 92a in the start prize port 92, gate switch 34a in the common view start gate 34, prize port switch 35a,
A signal of negative logic such as 11V for high level and 7V for low level supplied from these switches is connected to the special winning prize device 38 and the special winning prize device 95 of the special variation winning device 95, 0V-5V Interface chip (proximity I /
F) 121 is provided. The proximity I / F 121 also receives a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10. In addition, the proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is incorrectly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The winning opening switch 35a will be described with reference to FIG.
Although shown in individual blocks, a plurality (N) of winning opening switches 35a (three in this embodiment) are actually provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals are close by different signal lines. I
/ F 121 has been input. Further, although the special winning opening switch 38a is shown in one block in FIG. 3, a plurality (X) of special winning opening switches 38a (three in the present embodiment) are actually shown.
) Are provided on the game board 30. And, these plural winning a prize mouth switch 38a,
Each is connected by a different signal line, or, for example, the switch and the game control device 10
It is connected to the game control apparatus 100 by a method called wired OR on a relay substrate (not shown) which exists between 0 (main substrate). The board radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, and may also be connected to the game control apparatus 100 by a method called wired OR.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F
Among the outputs of 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switches 36a and 37a, the start opening 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the big winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. In addition, about the output (output from proximity I / F 121) of the signal of starting opening 1 switch 36a, 37a which is the starting opening switch of the special figure 1, although it is shown by one signal line in FIG. There are two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. Further, a detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10, a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (the front frame 1)
A signal output based on detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided in 2), and a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command) is also input. It has become. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal of the vibration sensor switch may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control apparatus 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start opening 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. There is.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 asserts an enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) to a valid level by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. Change) can be read out. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, a main frame opening detection provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10, etc. Detection signal of switch 64, payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), chute ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of gaming ball before payout), overflow switch signal (lower tray 23 has gaming ball at a predetermined amount) A signal output when the above storage (full) is detected), a touch switch signal (a signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) is taken, and the data bus 140 A first input port 122 is provided to supply the gaming microcomputer 111 via the interface.

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has a function to remove noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET denoised by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
While being directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, it is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay substrate 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test emission test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay substrate 70 for output to the test emission test device. It is configured to Also,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the direct shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent the malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying special design symbol information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a notable authorized organization not shown via a relay board 70 An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied as they are to the test shooting test device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The error signal indicating that control can not be performed is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer. ing. In the port on the relay board 70, the gaming microcomputer 11 is
A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and a signal of a port selected and controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the shot-test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, a special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b for opening and closing the opening and closing member 95c of the special variation winning device 95 (first winning opening 1), a special variation winning device 38 (large winning opening 2) And a second output port 134 for outputting open / close data of a common current solenoid 37c for opening / closing the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. LE
The fourth to output on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of D is connected
An output port 136 is provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with an external information terminal board 71 with information regarding the gaming machine 10 such as a big hit information.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. Can be supplied to an external device via a photorelay. Note that part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 136. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives open / close data signals of the special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b, the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b, and the common solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. The first driver (drive circuit) 138a, the second driver 138b for outputting the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the output from the fourth output port 136 Driver 3 for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of the batch display device 50
A fourth driver 138d is provided for outputting an external information signal supplied from the third output port 137 or the fourth output port 136 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12 V or 5 V.

A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 490. Photocoupler 139
Are configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 490 by serial communication. In addition, transmission and reception of such data is
Since this is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC
And a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 31 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies, sound effects and the like from the speakers 19a and 19b
It has four.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
PROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read only memory), RAM 322 for providing a work area, FeRAM (which can hold stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of a power failure)
A Ferroelectric RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 which is a clocking means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.). A RAM 311 a for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a command (rendering command) from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, and the decoration lamp Lighting, motor and solenoid drive control,
Execute processing such as management of presentation time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311
C, a synchronization signal STS which gives data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP 312
The main control microcomputer 311 is notified of the state of waiting for reception of commands and data from the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. Signals WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSY from VDP 312 to signal conversion circuit 313
The NC and the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Also, an interrupt signal I from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311
NT is supposed to be input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The voiced sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). The gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a function of level conversion of signals.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) or the like provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on a glass frame 15, a game board 30 (center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls a panel effect device 44 (e.g., a movable character etc. which enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) provided in the display device. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame effect device is provided. Good.

Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and the effect role switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. 47 a function of detecting the on / off state of the 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, the effect control device 300
A switch input circuit 336 is provided which has a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the circuit and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
And DC 32 V for driving a motor or a solenoid to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to electronic components controlled thereby, a display device 41 comprising a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving a motor or LED, DC5 to be the power supply voltage of command I / F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC voltage of 15 V for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker. Furthermore, when using an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V as the main control microcomputer 311, DC 3.3 V based on 5 V DC
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2 V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal) and the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
And an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, etc., to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board that constitutes the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random number value for hitting determination of the common drawing is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, Performs processing to determine hit. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the regular symbol display portion 55 of the batch display device 50, processing is performed to display a general view variation display game to be stopped and displayed. If the result of this common view variation display game is a hit, while displaying the special result aspect corresponding to each of the first stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol on the common symbol symbol display section 55, the common current solenoid 37c Is controlled to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 functions as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing symbol display unit 55.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting opening 1 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, the starting winning (
The first special figure fluctuation display game is stored by storing the starting memory), and based on the starting memory, extracting the big hit judgment random number value of the first special figure fluctuation display game and comparing it with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B. Performs processing to determine hit. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 92a provided in the starting winning opening 92 stores the starting memory, based on the starting memory, the second special view fluctuation display for big hit judgment disturbance Extract the numerical value ROM 111
The second special figure variation display game is compared with the determination value stored in B to determine the hit of the game.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs control signals (rendering control command, rendition command) including the determination results of the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game to the presentation control device 300. Do. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, processing for displaying the special view variation display game Do. That is, the start winning winning area of the game ball in which the game control device 100 flows down the playing area 32 (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37,
The game control means controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning on the start winning opening 92).

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the effect state, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 has a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect in the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54. While displaying the special game state and the small hit game state (that is, the process of executing the special game and the small hit game). In the processing for generating the special gaming state due to the result of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game becoming a big hit, the CPU 111A, for example, the special fluctuation winning device by the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b Control is performed to open the opening and closing member 38 c and to allow the game ball to flow into the big winning opening 2. In this special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, either a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls win in the special winning opening 2, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening 2. One round is to open the large winning opening 2 until the condition is achieved, and control (cycle game) to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds is performed. Further, in the processing for generating a small hit gaming state due to the result of the first special view change display game (special view 1 change display game) becoming a small hit, the CPU 111A is, for example, by the special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b. Control is performed to open the opening / closing member 95 c of the special variation winning device 95 and to allow the game ball to flow into the big winning opening 1. Further, in the processing for generating a small hit gaming state due to the result of the second special view variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) becoming a small hit, the CPU 111A is, for example, by the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b. Control is performed to open the opening / closing member 38c of the special variation winning device 38 and allow the game ball to flow into the big winning opening 2. The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the special winning opening performed in the small hit gaming state is, for example, an operation of maintaining the opening / closing member in the open state for only 200 ms.
It is something which is done 4 times at 0 millisecond interval. As described above, the game control device 100 functions as a special winning opening / closing control unit that performs control to open / close the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of CPU111A,
Control is performed to display a result mode of deviation on the special view 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special view 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50.

Further, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 can generate the high probability state as the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. This high probability state is
The probability of winning in the special view variation display game is higher than the normal probability state.
Also, the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view game, regardless of which special view fluctuation display game of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game is a high probability state. Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (specific gaming state, common figure high probability state) as a gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. In this short state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be a hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is a normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common view variation display game (general view change time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common view stop time for displaying the result of the common view change display game is, for example, 600 ms. When the game variation display game hits and results in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 being released, the opening time (the time for general electric power release) and the number of times open (for example,
500 ms × 1 time), the opening time of the second stop symbol (general power open time) and the number of times open (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the third open stop symbol (general time open time) and opening Number of times (
For example, it can be set to be 1700 ms × 3).

In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set so as to control the common drawing fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (E.g., 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 70
4 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability (general drawing probability) to be a hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/1, for example,
It is possible to have a high probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251) higher than 251).

In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of common power release, the common power open time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In addition, either of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected in the case of a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated. In addition, the time saving state is the normal power support state (during normal power support or during power support)
It can also be called.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game control device 100 performs the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation) after the end of the time saving state (after the end of power support) generated by the predetermined big hit. Special figure 2 special mode (in which the probability of the result of the display game) becoming a small hit is
It is possible to generate a specific result high probability state) in which the second special figure variation display game increases the probability that the specific result is obtained. This special view 2 special mode is a kind of high probability state.

Next, an outline of the game (standard capture method) of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. The game nature of the gaming machine 10 is a normal game state (in the special figure 2 special mode mentioned above, a special game state, a state which is neither time nor time state), the left strike is performed and a big hit is made in the special figure 1 variation display game. Aim, in the special game state (big hit state) or time saving state (during power support) do a right-handed, in special figure 2 special mode aim a small hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game by right-handed, special game state or time-shortened state Or, when the special figure 2 special mode ends and it becomes the normal game state, it returns to the left strike. In addition, by providing the above-mentioned special view 2 special mode, there is a possibility that the player can play with maintaining a sense of expectation higher than the normal gaming state even after the time saving state ends, and the interest of the game is improved. Do.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 has seven segments LED_d1 and seven segments LED_d2, and 16 LEs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
It has D. The batch display device 50 has 7 segments LED_d1 and 7 segments LED_d
2 and various states are displayed by lighting modes of LED_d3 to LED_d18.

The batch display device 50 distributes various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2 and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, thereby displaying the round display 51, the special view 1 suspension display 52, and the special view 1 symbol display 53 And a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a common figure symbol display unit 55, a common drawing reserve display unit 56, a state display unit 57, and a special figure 2 reserve display unit 58. The round display unit 51 has four LEDs, LED_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special figure game is displayed according to the lighting mode of. The special view 1 suspension display unit 52 displays the number of reservations in the special view 1 game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 has eight segments of seven segments LED_d1.
The symbols in the special view 1 game are displayed by the lighting mode of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). Special figure 2 symbol indicatory department 54 indicates the design in the special figure 2 game with the lighting feature of 8 LED (7 segment LED and 1 dot LED) of 7 segments LED d2. The common-design symbol display unit 55 displays the symbols in the common-play game by lighting modes of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The common drawing reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reservations in the common drawing game by lighting modes of the two LEDs of LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display unit 57 indicates LED_d7, LE.
The game mode in the special view game is displayed by the lighting mode of the three LEDs D_d9 and LED_d17. The special view 2 suspension display unit 58 displays the number of reservations in the special view 2 game by lighting modes of two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 8 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 7, a stack pointer for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc. when an interrupt occurs after performing the processing for inhibiting the interrupt (step S1) A setting process (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and a predetermined register (for example, D register)
The upper address of the AM top address is set (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the higher order is 00h.
Take 01h. In step S4, 00h at the top of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5).
. The release permission signal is set to the prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6),
A process of setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for the program to start properly is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

Also, the power on delay timer counts the validity of the data held by the RAM area (
This is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the checksum calculation). As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting of the standby time or the RAM initialization switch is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time 11
It is necessary to keep operating 2 and so on. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations, and the operation of initialization performed at the time of turning on the power It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

Next, a process of setting a power on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7)
After performing the above, the process of counting the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S8), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on A determination is made (step S9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10).
. Then, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S1)
0: N) is returned to the judgment (step S9) as to whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y),
That is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits for the power supply of the gaming machine 10 to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at power on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power off are kept held,
When a power failure occurs here, there is no need to perform backup processing or the like. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure occurs, the power on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value is “0”. It is determined whether it is "" (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time is over, the RAM 111C
And permits read / write access to a readable / writable RWM (Read Write Memory) such as EEPROM (step S13), and outputs off data to all output ports (setting to a state without output) (step S14).

Next, the serial port (the port installed in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111,
In the first embodiment, the power failure inspection area check data 1 (in which the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal) is set (used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step S15). For example, it is determined whether it is 5 Ah) or not (step S16).

Then, if the value of the blackout inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether the value of the blackout inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal blackout inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17), if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (Step S17; Y
) And a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (step S18), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power-off match (step S19).

Here, in the checksum calculation process performed in step S18 and step S43 described later, the sum of the data for the game control work area and the data for the state display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the game control The checksum may be separately calculated from the data of the work area for work and the data of the work area for state display, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the game control work area. The game control work area is RW
It is a work area used for game control among storage areas in M. The work area for state display is a work area used for state display among storage areas in the RWM.

Next, if the checksums match (step S19; Y), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 has been turned on from the previously read first input port 122 state (
Step S20) When the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (Step S20; N)
) Proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7), and performs processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

In addition, it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or the checksum is not normal (step S1).
9: N), the process proceeds to step S21, and in steps S21 to S24, initialization processing (first initialization processing) at the time of data abnormality is performed. That is, the game control device 10
Data stored in RWM (data of all areas including the access prohibited area) based on 0 being determined that the data in RWM (for example, RAM 111C) is abnormal
The first initialization means to initialize the

Then, when the process proceeds to step S21, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S21), and all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are zero cleared (step S22). And the RAM access inhibited area is set to access inhibited (step S23). Next, the RAM to be initialized
The initial value at the time of initialization is saved (step S24), and the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area having a value other than the value (zero) written in step S22 of the game control work area and the state display work area as an initial value, and in the present embodiment, It is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demo and setting of the rendering mode.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), and the initialization process at the time of the initialization operation (steps S27 and S28) 2) Perform initialization processing). That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is data (for example, RAM 111C) stored in accordance with the operation of the initialization operation unit. The second initialization means is provided to initialize the data of the area not including the access prohibited area).

Then, when the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), the RWM (for example, the RAM 111) is
Clear the data of the game control work area in the storage area of C) (an area not including the access prohibited area) to zero (step S27), and save the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step S27) S28), the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demo and the setting of the effect mode in the present embodiment.

As described above, the game control device 100 according to the first embodiment performs initialization processing when data is abnormal (
Since it has a function (first initialization means, second initialization means) that distinguishes and executes the first initialization process) and the initialization process (second initialization process) at the time of initialization operation, It is possible to realize optimal and wasteful initialization processing according to the requirements.

Next, when the process proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S25), and the special drawing status (set in the special drawing status area described later) The command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the condition indicated by the data
Transmit to the effect control device 300) (step S26), and proceed to step S31.

Here, the area to be initialized in step S25 is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In step S25, the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is considered to be in an undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined.

Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in step S26, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the information on the number of effects and the information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. In addition, with the command of screen specification, the control state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are usually processed (during fluctuation, big hit (first special game state), small hit (first 2) A command for instructing display of a customer waiting demo screen if none of them is a special gaming state), and a command for instructing display of a recovery screen otherwise.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S24 or S28 to step S29, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S29)
, And proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a command for RAM initialization (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying predetermined A plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted.
Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the information on the number of effects and the information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

In step S31, a CT that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform processing to activate the C circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a divider circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and the CPU 1 based on the divided signal.
A CTC circuit is provided which generates a signal CTC for giving a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms) and a trigger for updating the random number supplied to the random number generation circuit to 11A.

After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit
It is done by A. In addition, hardware random numbers generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit (
Here, setting of the bit transposition pattern of the big hit random number is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that determines how to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition) is there. By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and to improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

Thereafter, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power on
The initial value of the corresponding various initial value random numbers (big hit symbol pattern initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value random number, hit initial value random number, hit symbol initial value random number in the case of the first embodiment) After saving as a value) in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), an interrupt is permitted (step S34).

Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of random number (big hit symbol random number) that determines big hit stop symbol of special figure, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is small hit stop of special figure It is a random number which becomes an initial value of a random number (small hitting symbol random number) which determines a symbol. In addition, "the initial value random number per hit" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (random number per hit) that determines the hit in the common pattern change game, and "the initial symbol random number random" determines the per character It is a random number that is an initial value of a random number (per symbol random number). In addition, small hit design random numbers do not exist in models without small hits, and there may be cases in which a hit initial symbol random number does not exist depending on the model.

The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. By setting it as the start value), it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

Subsequently, initial value random number update processing (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number updating process is a process of updating (initially incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, “+1”. As described above, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuously updating the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number is a random number generated by the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program CTC output that has the same cycle as timer interrupt processing, which is a processing unit
It is a "slow counter" updated based on CTC (CTC 2) other than C0).
Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value change method to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number Is adopted. Note that each of the above random numbers is “+1” or “−1.
In this case, it is also possible to use a counter type update according to “,” or a random type update in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process of step S35, the number of times of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus (for example, twice)
Is set (step S36), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check (loop process) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

In addition to the main processing, there is also a method in which the initial value random number update processing is performed also in the timer interrupt processing in the above-described step S35 of the initial value random number update processing. In order to avoid the execution of the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. As in the embodiment, when the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
). And when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S
38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step S39) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step S40) are performed.

Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41).
), The blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42).
Further, a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power supply interruption of the RWM, and a process for saving the calculated checksum in a checksum area (step S44)
After performing the process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S45), the CPU waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be determined at the time of reinjection.

From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, for performing various control according to the instruction from the main control means).
In the gaming machine provided with the effect control device 300 etc., the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device at the time of power on. The means (game control apparatus 100) and the power failure monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period.

In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit And the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the waiting time.

Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the game control apparatus 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process which occurs in the above-described main process from the time when the interrupt permission is issued until the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39). The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S1).
21). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, the input from various sensors and switches, and the taking in of signals, that is, the input processing (step S123) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S124) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening 1 solenoid 95b, big winning opening 2 solenoid 38b, and common electric solenoid 37c). ). Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal of the firing permission is output by performing the output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating a state of release permission as viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating a state of release permission as viewed from the payout control device 200.
Are also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when the two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are allowed to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S125) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S126),
The random number updating process 2 (step S127) is performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number which is the target of the initial value random number update processing. . Further, the random number updating process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switches 36a, 37a, the start opening 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a of the common drawing, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) is performed to perform monitoring (whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is opened). In addition, starting opening switch monitoring processing (step S129) which monitors winning of the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a and the starting opening 2 switch 92a, special figure 1 game processing (step S130a) which performs processing concerning special figure 1 fluctuation display game, A special figure 2 game process (step S130b) for performing a process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game, and a regular drawing game process (step S130c) for performing a process relating to a common drawing variation display game are performed.

In the start opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the start winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 which makes the first start winning opening, or the starting winning opening 92 which makes the second start winning opening, various random numbers (The big hit random number etc) is extracted, the game result prior decision which decides the game result based on the particular prize beforehand in the stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game is done.

Next, a segment LED (for example, an LE such as the special view 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50) provided in the gaming machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of special view variation display game and game
Segment LED editing process (step S13) to drive D) to display the desired content
1), a magnet irregularity monitoring process (step S132) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality (step S132); checks the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S134) for setting signals output to various external devices to the output buffer (step S134), and status display editing output processing for status display (step S1)
Do step 35) to complete timer interrupt processing.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) are interrupts. It is performed automatically at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of payout command transmission processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a view showing an example of the structure of the winning number counter area according to the first embodiment.

First, an example of the number-of-winnings counter region will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, for example, the number-of-winnings counter region 1 comprises three prize ball counters, ten prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters. The winning counter can be stored up to 65535 winnings. Next, as shown in FIG. 10, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, winning number counter area 2 includes three winning ball counters, ten winning ball counters, and 14 winning ball counters, and each winning number counter can store up to 255 winnings. It has become. In the check of the count number of the winning number counter area, the address of the winning number counter area is updated in step S202 and the like described later to check the above counters in order from the top (from the three winning ball counter).

Next, in FIG. 9, the left column is processing for updating (increasing) the number of times of output of the main winning ball signal, and the right column is processing for transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described in FIG. 10, the counters of the plurality of winning number counter areas 2 provided for the number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). Among them, it is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the counter to be checked (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and checking of the counting numbers of all counters in winning number counter area 2 is completed. It is determined whether or not it is (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y),
The count number of the counter of the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted ("-1" updated) (step S204), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 (for example, three, ten, etc. mentioned above) One of the 14) is acquired (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining prize ball area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining prize ball area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208) It is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209). In step S209, the subtraction result is "0.
If it is determined that the above is true (step S209; Y), the number of times the main prize ball signal output is “+1”.
Update (step S210) and save the subtraction result in the number-of-remaining balls area (step S211).
).

In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described later, the main prize ball signal is output based on the number of times the main prize ball signal is updated in step S210. Here, as the winning ball signal (main winning ball signal), the main substrate (game control device 1)
From 00), one pulse is output for every 10 pieces of delivery schedule, and the delivery substrate (delivery control device 200
1 pulse is output every 10 pieces of delivery.

Next, in the determination of step S203, all the checks are finished (step S203;
If it is determined that the result of subtraction is not "0" or more (step S209; N) in the determination of Y) or in step S209, the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", and the payout command transmission timer Is updated by “−1” (step S 212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” because the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set. From that, no subtraction will be done.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213).
If it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, as a condition for the payout busy signal to be on (busy), "diverting operation", "ball lending operation", "shooting ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave illegal occurrence""Medium","due to a drop of ball detection switch (switch to monitor dispensed balls)", "due to underdelivery error", "due to overdelivery error", "a prize to be dispensed in the memory of the dispensing control board When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of acquired game balls) (when it is not 0) or the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215) and the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 If there is no count (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all the areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, when there is a count in the target counter of winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by “−1” (step S2)
18) Acquire a payout amount command corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 (step S219), and write the acquired command in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S2)
20). Then, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

In step S213, the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213).
If it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy in step S214 (step S214; Y), the check of all the areas is completed in step S217 (step S217). If it is determined that Y; Y), or if the process of step S 221 ends, the payout command transmission process ends.

As can be understood from the configuration in which the processing is terminated without executing steps S215 and later depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed. Have been sent since. In addition, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control substrate side can pay out the winning balls.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 8) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of the first embodiment. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first,
Prize winning opening monitor table 1 (for example, a port number to which a detection signal from the count switch is input or the like corresponding to two big prize winning opening switches 38a (count switches) in the large winning prize openings (special variation winning device 38) Data indicating the bit position and the like in the port of the signal is stored (step S271). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S272) is performed to monitor whether there is an injustice (illegal prize) for winning in the big prize mouth despite the fact that the big prize mouth is not open. .

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to one large winning opening switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (special variation winning device 95) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning or not. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S274) for detecting a prize is executed.
Then, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in the general public (step S275a), and monitor whether there is an incorrect winning and detect the normal winning while the fraud & winning monitoring process ( Step S275 b) is performed.

Next, a winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring processing, that is, a winning opening switch that can always win
Here, a winning number counter updating process (step S277) for preparing the winning opening monitoring table of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35 (step S276) And the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (step S278) is performed.

Next, the value of the state scan counter for designating in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals to monitor the error state of the gaming machine 10 is to be the target of this monitoring is "0". To "3" (step S279). Thereafter, according to the value of the state scan counter, any of the switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection of the switch, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch and the dispensing abnormality error. Prepare a gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting monitoring of errors based on heels (step S280)
). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S281) is performed to determine whether an error has occurred.

Next, according to the value of the status scan counter, prepare the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring of the error based on the glass frame open, the main body frame open, the frame radio wave fraud and the touch switch. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S283) is performed to determine whether an error has occurred.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284).
If the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is ended. In this case, the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next is
Is the case where there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine state. If the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine status is based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection of the switch or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. Prepare the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the game (step S285)
. And, the game machine state check process which determines whether or not an error has occurred (step S
286), a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is ended. The payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is performed once every four times, and since the remaining three times are passed, monitoring of a cycle of 16 ms is performed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, start port switch monitoring processing in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (step S129)
Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 3
7) The prize monitor table of 7) is prepared (step A101), hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and it is determined whether there is a prize to the starting opening 1 (step A103)
).

When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the starting opening 1 (step A103;
In N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the starting opening 1 (step A1)
In step A104, it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state to be hit to the right (for example, a general power support state, a big hit, etc.).

When it is determined in step A104 that it is not the predetermined state to be hit on the right (step A10)
4; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the vehicle is in the predetermined state to be swayed (step A104; Y), a stern command notification command is prepared (step A105), and a rendering command setting process (step A106) Do. That is, the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment
In the case of 0, except for the routine power support state, it hardly wins unless it is left-handed to the starting opening 1, and if there is a winning on the starting opening 1 with a predetermined state to be right-handed, it is the predetermined state to be right-handed However, it is possible to estimate that the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 and notification (warning) instructing the right control operation is performed by the effect control device 300.

Then, after preparing the table for setting the information of the hold by the starting opening 1 (step A10)
7) The special view starting opening 1 switch processing (step A108) is performed.
Next, prepare a prize monitoring table for the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92) (step A109).
The hard random number acquiring process (step A110) is performed to determine whether there is a winning on the starting opening 2 (step A111).

When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the starting opening 2 (step A111;
N) ends the starting opening switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the starting opening 2 (step A1)
11; Y) determines whether or not the gaming state is the normal power support state (time reduction state) (step A112), and if it is determined that the general power support state is not (step A112; N) It is determined whether there is any (step A113). If it is determined in step A113 that the jackpot is not in progress (step A113; N), it is determined whether the special view fluctuation display game is in the final movement of the general power support (step A114).

If it is determined in step A114 that the power conversion support is not in the final change (step A114; N), a left-handed command notification command is prepared (step A115), and effect command setting processing (step A116) is performed. That is, since it should be left-handed if it is not a normal power support state, a big hit, or a general power support final variation, a process of transmitting a left-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

Then, when it is determined in step A112 that it is in the general power support state (step A112; Y), when it is determined in step A113 that it is in the big hit (step A113; Y), the general power support final in step A114. If it is determined that it is changing (step A114; Y), the process proceeds to step A117 when the process of step A116 is completed.

In step A117, a table for setting information on hold by the starting opening 2 is prepared (step A117), and the special view starting opening 2 switch processing (step A118) is performed to end the starting opening switch monitoring processing.

If it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the starting opening 2, for example, before executing step A112, the common electric power fraudulent (normal though the normal change winning device 37 is closed, it is normal There is provided a step of determining whether or not there is a prize in the variable winning device 37 being detected (improper detection), and if it is determined that this general electric power fraud is occurring, the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended without executing step A112 or later. The configuration may be such that the second start memory (start memory of Toku-zu 2) is not generated any more if there is a common electric power fraud.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the hard random number acquisition process in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process (step A102)
, A110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37)
Among the starting openings 2 (starting winning opening 92), the winning no information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A121), and the starting openings 1 switch 36a, 37a and the starting opening 2 switch 92a
Among them, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122)
. Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123)
, Determine whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124)
).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. When latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125).
). Then, of the starting opening 1 and the starting opening 2, the winning prize information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.

[Special figure starting port 1 switch processing]
Next, the special view starting opening 1 switch processing in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring processing (step A)
The details of 108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view starting opening 1 switch process of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port 1 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (the start winning of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special view starting opening 1 switch processing, first, the starting opening signal 1 output, which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of times of output overflows (step A1).
33). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal 1 output number area (step A134), step A1.
It shifts to processing of 35. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133;
Y) passes step A 134 and proceeds to the process of step A 135. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal 1 output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” when “+1” is updated, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 reservations (number of start memories of special figure 1) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored is less than the upper limit (for example, less than 4). (Step A135). When the number of special figure 1 reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (Step A135)
N) ends the special view start port 1 switch process. If the number of special figure 1 reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting of fluctuation information (for example, for sorting of pre-reading fluctuation pattern) ( Step A136) The special figure 1 pending number to be updated is updated by “+1” (step A137).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number storage area of RWM is prepared in step A125. (Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A 142), and the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 The data is saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A143), and the special map reservation information determination process (step A144) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special drawing 1 holding number command corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number to be monitored is prepared (step A145),
The effect command setting process (step A146) is performed, and the special view start port 1 switch process is ended.

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special view changing display game A start winning memory storing means is provided which stores a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory which becomes an execution right of the above. In addition, the start winning memory storage means (RAM 111C) is the first start of the various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37), with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Store as a memory.

[Special figure starting mouth 2 switch processing]
Next, the special view starting opening 2 switch processing in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring processing (step A)
The detail of 118) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view starting opening 2 switch process of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port 2 switch process is a process that is performed when there is an input of the starting port 2 switch 92a to be monitored (starting winning of the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special view starting opening 2 switch processing, first, the starting opening signal 2 output number of times which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the starting opening 2 switch 92a to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 is loaded ( Step A151) Update the loaded value by “+1” (Step A152)
), It is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (step A153). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the start opening signal 2 output number area of RWM (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A153; Y), step A
After passing 154, the process proceeds to step A155. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal 2 output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" when "+1" is updated.
It is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations (starting memories) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 92a to be monitored is less than the upper limit (for example, less than 4) (step A155).
If the number of special views 2 to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A 155; N), the special view starting opening 2 switch process is ended. If the number of special figures 2 to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A 155; Y), set the special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting of fluctuation information (for example, for sorting of prefetch fluctuation patterns) ( Step A156) The special figure 2 pending number to be updated is updated by “+1” (step A157).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is calculated (step A158), and the big hit random number storage area of RWM is prepared in step A125. (Step A159). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted and prepared (step A160), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A161).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A 162), and the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 The data is saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A 163), and the special map reservation information determination process (step A 164) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special drawing 2 holding number command corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding number to be monitored is prepared (step A 165),
An effect command setting process (step A166) is performed, and the special view start port 2 switch process is ended.

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the gaming balls into the starting winning area of the starting winning opening 92 and starts the right to execute the special view fluctuation display game. The start winning storage means stores a predetermined number as the upper limit as the storage. In addition, the start winning memory storage unit (RAM 111C) stores various random number values extracted based on the game ball winning on the starting opening 2 (start winning opening 92) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view reserve information determination process (step A144, step A164) in the special view start port 1 switch process and the special view start port 2 switch process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special-image hold information determination process of the first embodiment.

The special view reserve information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (during high probability) (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that the high probability is in progress (step A172; Y), the special image holding information determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A172 that the probability is not high (step A172; N
), It is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (step A173). If it is determined in step A173 that a big hit is in progress (step A173; Y), the special image storage information determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is not in progress at step A173 (step A173; N
The jackpot determination process (step A174) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a big hit depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (step A17)
5). And, if the judgment result is a big hit (step A175; Y), the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2 type) It sets (step A176), acquires the stop design information which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is prepared at step A140 or A160 (step A177), it moves to the processing of step A184 and does the processing after that.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), the small hit determination process (step A179) to determine whether it is a small hit by whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do. Thereafter, it is determined whether the determination result of the small hitting determination processing is a small hit (step A180). And when a judgment result is not a small hit (Step A 180)
N) sets the stop symbol information of the detachment (step A183), proceeds to the processing of step A184, and performs the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set, and a small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162. Are set (step A182), and the process proceeds to step A184 to perform the subsequent processes.

And if it transfers to step A184, the prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in either step A177, step A182 or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and production command setting processing (step) A18
Do 5). Next, a special pattern information setting process (step A186) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game. Do.

Thereafter, a prefetch variation pattern corresponding to a first half variation number indicating a first half variation pattern (variation pattern up to reach action start) and a second half variation pattern (variation pattern after reach action start) in a variation pattern of the special view variation display game A command is prepared (step A188), an effect command setting process (step A189) is performed, and the special figure hold information determination process is ended.

The special figure information setting process in step A186 and the variation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process (special figure 1 routine process or special figure 2 routine process described later). Is similar to the That is, when the special view reserve information determination process is executed in step A144, since the special view type is special view 1, the process of steps A186 and A187 is the special view 1 information setting process and special view 1 variation described later. Since the special drawing type is the special figure 2 when the special figure holding information determination process is executed in step A164, which is the same as the pattern setting process, the process of steps A186 and A187 will be described later in the special figure 2 information. The setting process and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process are respectively the same.

Through the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special view variation display game based on the start storage of the prefetch target and the prefetch variation pattern command including information of the variation pattern in the special view variation display game based on the start storage It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not the big hit or the change pattern type) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be informed, in particular the display 41
It is possible to notify the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decorative special view start memory display displayed on the screen.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained) Judgment) Makes prior judgment means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the starting winning combination when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. Good.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 game process (step S130a) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a view showing a flowchart of the special view 1 game process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 game process, monitoring of the input of the special winning opening switch 38a, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 1 (identification information which is variably displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game)
Set the display of. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit in the special figure 2 or small hit (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state according to the result of the special view 2 fluctuation display game) (step A1) . When it is not in the middle hit or small hit of the special figure 2 (step A1
In N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of gaming balls at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 and the special variation winning device 95.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or small hit in the special figure 2 (step A1; Y) and the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is finished, the process proceeds to step A3. If the game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, to branch to the processing corresponding to the special view 1 game processing number The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step A5)
The branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special view 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

If the special figure 1 game processing number is “0” in step A7, the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the setting and effect setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special Fig. 1 Special figure 1 routine processing (step A8) to set information etc. necessary to perform processing during fluctuation
Do.

At step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 is used to set the stop display time of the special figure 1, set the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. (1) Perform a process during fluctuation (step A9).

If the special figure 1 game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big of each big hit Setting of fanfare time according to the winning opening opening pattern, fanfare /
Special processing 1 Display processing (special figure 1) which performs setting of information necessary to perform processing during interval
Perform step A10).

If the special processing 1 game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the updating of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).

If the special figure 1 game processing number is "4" in step A7, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, the big winning opening A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for performing the remaining ball process.

If the special figure 1 game processing number is "5" in step A7, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / in-interval processing, etc., the final round For example, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing special figure 1 big hit end processing, etc. Do.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end processing (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for special figure 1 normal processing.

At step A7, when the special processing 1 game processing number is "7", the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the predetermined big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, the small hit processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set information etc. necessary for the execution.

At step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “8”, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hitting medium movement transition processing, the command of the small hitting end screen, the small hitting remaining ball processing, etc. The small hit middle process (step A16) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game process number is "9", the small hit residual ball process (step A17) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end process.

At step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", special figure 1 small hit end processing (step A18) is performed to set information etc. necessary for special figure 1 normal processing.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed, and the special figure game process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processing Do.

Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display), and when the condition device is activated, a big hit condition occurs, for example, and it is a special special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Special figure 2 game processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 game process (step S130 b) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a view showing a flowchart of the special view 2 game process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 game process, the monitoring of the input of the special winning opening switch 38a, the control of the entire process concerning the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 (identification information which is fluctuated and displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
Set the display of. In the special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit or small hit of the special figure 1 (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state according to the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game) (step A31) . When it is not in the middle hit or small hit of the special figure 1 (step A
31: N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of gaming balls at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 and the special variation winning device 95.

Next, when it is determined that the jackpot of special figure 1 is medium or small hit (step A31; Y)
If the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, step A33
And the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" and "-1" is updated (step A3)
3). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special view 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether there is any (step A35). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by "-1" (step A36). In the special processing 2 game processing timer area which is an area for storing the value of the game processing timer, a long fluctuation timer value (for example, 6
0000 ms) is saved (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A35;
In Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (step A38), and the special figure 2 game process number is Acquire the branch destination address of the process corresponding to (step A39)
. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A4)
7).

At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game and the setting of the effect, the special Fig. 2 Special figure 2 routine process (Step A4) to set the information necessary to perform the process during fluctuation
Do 8).

At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is “1”, the special figure 2 is used to set the stop display time of the special figure 2, set the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, etc. 2) Perform a process during fluctuation (step A49).

If the special figure 2 game processing number is "2" in step A47, and if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit,
The special figure 2 display process (step A50) is performed to set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, the setting of the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of opening, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. The fanfare / interval process to be performed (step A51) is performed.

At step A47, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A52) is performed to set information required to perform ball processing.

If the special figure 2 game processing number is "5" in step A47, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / in-interval processing, etc., the final round For example, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A53) for setting the information necessary for performing special figure 2 big hit end processing, etc. Do.

At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6," special figure 2 big hit end processing (step A54) is performed to set information necessary for performing special figure 2 usual processing.

At step A47, when the special processing 2 game processing number is “7”, the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the predetermined big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, the small hitting middle processing Processing during small hit fanfare that performs setting of information necessary to perform
Perform step A55).

At step A47, if the special processing 2 game processing number is "8", the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hitting medium movement transition processing, the command of the small hitting end screen, the small hitting remaining ball processing, etc. The small hit middle process (step A56) is performed.

At step A47, when the special figure 2 game process number is "9", the small hit residual ball process (step A57) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process.

At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", special figure 2 small hit end processing (step A58) is performed to set information necessary for special figure 2 normal processing.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A59), the symbol variation control process (step A60) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special figure game process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" at step A34 (step A34; N), that is, if the time is not up or the process at step A37 is completed, step A59 is performed. It shifts to processing and performs processing after that.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 routine process (step A8) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view 1 ordinary process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 can start changing (that is, whether the special figure 1 variable display game can be started) (step A251). In this determination, the gaming state is
In the case of the state of the period from the end of fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 2 (start of processing under the special figure 2 display) to the end of the hit action (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state), When FIG. 2 is true, it is determined that the special figure 1 can not start changing, and when it is not a period, it is determined that the special figure 1 can start changing.

Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 can start changing (step A251; Y), whether or not the left hitting instruction notification has been made (that is, the left hitting instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300,
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the right-handed command notification command has not been transmitted (step A2).
52). In step A252, it is determined that the left hitting instruction notification has been completed if the left hitting instruction notification flag is set, and it is determined that the left hitting instruction not notified is not set if the left hitting instruction notification flag is not set. It may be a configuration.

If the left hitting instruction notification has not been made (step A252; N), prepare a left hitting instruction notification command (step A253), perform rendering command setting processing (step A254), and set the left hitting instruction notification flag (step A254) A255).

If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step A 252; Y) and if step A 255 is ended, the process proceeds to step A 256, and the number of special drawing 1 reservations (first start memory number) is “0” It is determined whether or not it is (step A256). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (step A256; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current special condition variation display game probability state is prepared (step A257). The setting process (step A258) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) is performed.
Prepare the decoration special drawing reserve number command corresponding to the reserve number (step A 260), perform the rendering command setting process (step A 261), and select the special figure status area in RWM 1
Information indicating that it is fluctuating (during special figure 1 fluctuating display game) is set (information addition) (step A 262), and it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuating display game is high probability (step A26)
3).

In the special view status area, information indicating that special figure 1 is moving (during special figure 1 variable display game) and information indicating that special figure 2 is moving (during special figure 2 variable display game) This is an area to be stored independently, and the state indicated by the information set in the special view status area is the special view status. When step A 262 is executed, the special view status is either “special figure 1 in change” or “special figure 1 in change + special figure 2 in change”.

Also, in the special figure 1 change start process (step A 259), a process of saving "1" which is a process number related to the special figure 1 in-process process in the special figure 1 game process number area (step A31 described later)
8, A319), the process of saving the flag during fluctuation in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A322 described later), the process in which the fluctuation time is set as the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (step A307, A497 described later ) Etc.

Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A264), and the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A264;
The special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set to N) (step A 265). It is to be noted that the determination as to whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is being performed is performed by a high probability final fluctuation flag described later. That is, if the high probability final change flag is set, it is determined that the high probability final change is in progress.

Then, when step A265 is completed, when it is determined that the high probability is in progress (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that the high probability final variation is in progress (step A264;
In Y), the special process 1 during process transition setting process (step A266) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 can not start changing (step A251; N), and when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" at step A256 (step A256; Y), Set “0” (Step A 267), save the processing number “0” in the special figure 1 game processing number area which is the area for storing the special figure 1 game processing number in RWM (step A 268) 1 Finish processing normally.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination result of step A 251 is positive.
If the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0", special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A 259) and the like is executed, even if special figure 2 is fluctuating (during special figure 2 fluctuation display game execution) , Special figure 1 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the first start memory is the variable display based on the second start memory It is a control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 routine processing (step A48) in the special view 2 game processing described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special processing 2 usual processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 routine processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 can start changing (that is, whether the special figure 2 variable display game can be started) (step A271). In this determination, the gaming state is
In the case of the state of the period from the end of fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 1 (start of processing under the special figure 1 display) to the end of the hit action (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state), When FIG. 1 is correct, it is determined that the special figure 2 can not start changing, and when it is not a period, it is determined that the special figure 2 can start changing.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 can start to change (step A271; Y), the special figure 2 is determined.
It is determined whether the number of reservations (second start memory number) is "0" (step A272). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" (step A 272; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure variation display game is prepared (step A 27).
3) Perform rendering command setting processing (step A 274), perform special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A 275), and execute special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area in RWM (during special figure 2 fluctuation display game) Set information (information addition) (step A276),
It is determined whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is high or not (step A277).

Here, the state indicated by the information set in the special view status area (that is, the special view status) is “during special figure 2 fluctuating” and “special figure 1 fluctuating + special figure 2 fluctuating” when step A 276 is executed. It will be in one of two states.

Also, in the special figure 2 change start process (step A 275), a process of saving "1" which is a process number related to the special figure 2 in-process process in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A34 described later)
8, A349), the process of saving the flag during fluctuation in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352 described later), the process in which the fluctuation time is set as the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A337, A497 described later ) Etc.

In addition, for example, after executing step A 275, prepare a decorative special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation number, and then execute a rendering command setting process, and then shift to step A 276 (namely, special drawing 2) Also in the case of (1), the decoration special drawing reservation number command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the normal processing).

Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A 277; N), it is judged whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A 278), and the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A 278;
The special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set to N) (step A279).

When step A279 is completed, when it is determined that the high probability is in progress (step A277; Y), and when it is determined that the high probability is in final change (step A278;
Y) performs special process 2 transition processing setting process (step A280), and ends special process 2 process.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A272; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is "0" (step A281), and the special figure 1 reservation number is If it is determined that it is "0" (step A281; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in motion (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (step A282). Then, if the special figure 1 is not moving (step A 282; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A 283),
If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A283; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and a rendering command setting process (step A286) is performed. In addition, the command prepared when performing the rendering command setting process (
Here, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Then, when step A 286 ends, when it is determined that the special figure 2 can not start changing (step A 271; N), and when the special figure 1 reservation number is not “0” (step A 281)
If the special figure 1 is changing (step A282; Y) and if the customer waiting demo has been started (step A 283; Y), “0” is set as the process number Step A287) Save the processing number, ie, “0” in the special figure 2 game processing number area which is an area for storing the special figure 2 game processing number in the RWM (step A288), and the special figure 2 routine processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination result of step A 271 is positive.
If the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0", special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A275) and the like is executed, even if special figure 1 is fluctuating (during special figure 1 fluctuation display game execution) , Special figure 2 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (step A 259) in the special view 1 normal process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special view 1 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment; FIG. 22 is a second diagram of the flowchart of the special view 1 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment;

The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1) is set (step A301). A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A302) for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (step A)
After performing 303), the special figure 1 information setting process (step A 304) for setting the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of special figure 1 is performed, and the first special figure variation display game changes A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information on setting of patterns is set, is prepared (step A305). After that, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step A306) which sets fluctuation pattern which is fluctuation aspect in the 1st special figure fluctuation display game, is executed, fluctuation start information setting which sets information of fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game A process (step A307) is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special view variable display game is high or not (step A308).

Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A309), and the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A309;
In N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in motion (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (step A310). If the special figure 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311). Special figure 2
If the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not "0" (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A)
312), if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not more than "4", for example (step A312; N), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

Note that the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is in the variation start information setting process of step A 337 described later when the special figure 2 game processing timer is in a state of a time value sufficient for 2 bytes (for example, 60000 ms). It is set to "0" (see, for example, step A500 described later).

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be calculated from the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area). Specifically, step A
At 313, the long variation timer value (for example, 60000) saved at step A37 described above
The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 can be calculated by adding the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area at that time to the result of multiplying the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer by m seconds).

Also, when the long fluctuation timer value is, for example, 60000 ms (= 60 seconds), the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is 240 Second (= 4 × 60 seconds) or more, which is longer than the longest fluctuation time of
In that case, since it is not necessary to perform step A315 and step A316 which will be described later, step A312 is provided to determine it. Therefore, step A312
The numerical value "4" in is merely an example of a numerical value for determining in advance by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure 1. Absent.

Next, when step A313 is completed, and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311; Y), the process proceeds to step A314, and the special figure 1 to be started from now on Fluctuation time (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A306)
However, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 which is currently fluctuating (the calculation result of step A 313 or the special figure 2
If the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is zero, it is determined whether or not it is shorter than the time determined by the value of the special processing 2 game processing timer (step A 314).

And, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A3)
14; N) prepare a command to notify that the variation time of the special drawing 1 is longer (step A315), and perform rendering command setting processing (step A316).

Next, in the case of high probability (step A308; Y), in the case of high probability final fluctuation (step A308; Y)
Step A309; Y), when the special figure 2 is not changing (step A310; N), the special figure 2
When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312;
Y), the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A 314; Y
And, when step A316 is completed, the process proceeds to step A317 (FIG. 22).

At step A317, the high probability change number update process (step A317) is performed, and “1” is set as the process number (step A318). In the game processing number area, the processing number, ie, “1”
Is saved (step A319), and the waiting for customer demonstration flag area which is an area for setting the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the RWM is cleared (step A320). After that, save the signal related to the special figure 1 fluctuation start (the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is on) in the test signal output data area (step A321) and save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of RWM (
Step A322) Save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special display 1 symbol display unit 53) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area of RWM (step A323). In the symbol number area in FIG. 1 variation, an initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved (step A324), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended. Note that the reason for saving "0" in the symbol number area during special figure 1 variation in step A324 is to start the variation indication of the special figure 1 from the blank symbol.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 fluctuation start process (step A 275) in the special view 2 normal process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. 23 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special view 2 variation start process of the first embodiment; FIG. 24 is a second diagram of the flowchart of the special view 2 variation start process of the first embodiment;

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is set (step A331), and the second special figure fluctuation display game is A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A332) for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information) (step A)
After performing 333), the special figure 2 information setting process (step A334) for setting the special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 is performed, and the second special figure variation display game changes A special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of patterns is set, is prepared (step A335). After that, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step A336) which sets the fluctuation pattern which is fluctuation aspect in 2nd special figure fluctuation display game, is executed, fluctuation start information setting which sets information of fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game A process (step A337) is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special view variable display game is high or not (step A338).

Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A338; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A339), and the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A339;
In N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is in motion (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step A340; Y), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 can be calculated from the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area).

Next, when step A343 is completed, the process proceeds to step A344, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) to be started from now is the special figure 1 currently being fluctuated. It is determined whether it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (the calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

And, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A3)
44; N) prepare a command to notify that the variation time of the special drawing 2 is longer (step A345), and perform rendering command setting processing (step A346).

Next, if it is in the high probability (step A338; Y), if it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A338; Y)
Step A339; Y), if Special Figure 1 is not moving (Step A340; N), Special Figure 2
If the fluctuation time of the time t is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A344; Y),
When step A346 is completed, the process proceeds to step A347 (FIG. 24).

At step A347, the high probability change number update process (step A347) is performed, and "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 is an area for storing the special process 2 game process number in RWM. In the game processing number area, the processing number, ie, “1”
Is saved (step A349), and the waiting for customer demonstration flag area which is an area for setting the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the RWM is cleared (step A350). After that, save the signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation start (the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is on) in the test signal output data area (step A351) and save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of RWM (
Step A352) Save the initial value (100 ms, for example) of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area of RWM (step A353). During the variation, the initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended. It is to be noted that the reason for saving "0" in the symbol number area during special figure 2 variation in step A354 is to start variation indication of special figure 2 from the blank symbol.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A307 and A337) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described using FIG. 25 and FIG.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of variation start information setting processing according to the first embodiment (part 1);
It is. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of variation start information setting processing according to the first embodiment (FIG.
That is 2).

In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of the object, the fluctuation pattern random number 2,
And clear the information of the random number storage area of the variation pattern random number 3. That is, it is determined whether the information setting of the special view 1 is in progress (step A 491), and the information setting of the special view 1 is in progress (step A).
491; Y) clear information (for holding ball 1) of random number storage area (for holding ball 1) of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2 and fluctuation pattern random number 3 of Toku-zu 1 (step A491a) ). In addition, when the information setting in the special figure 1 is not being performed (step A 491; N), the information in the random number storage area of the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern random number 3 in the special figure 2 is cleared (step A491 b).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step A 496), and the added value is the target figure game processing timer area (that is, the special figure 1 game processing timer area during information setting of While the information setting of the special figure 2 is made, it saves in the special figure 2 game processing timer area) (step A 497).

Next, it is determined whether the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step A 498), and when the information setting of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step A 498; N), it is determined whether the long fluctuation start of the special figure 2 is (step A49
9), if the special figure 2 does not start the long fluctuation (step A499; N), the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the area storing the repeat count of the special figure 2 game processing timer in RWM) Save 0 "(step A500).

On the other hand, if it is the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step A 499; Y), “9” is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A 501). Then, when the information setting in the special view 1 is being performed (step A 498; Y), when the processing in steps A 500 and A 501 is finished, the process proceeds to step A 502.

In addition, in order to make fluctuation of time which is not enough with 2 byte special figure game processing timer, special figure 2
The number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer) is set for the long variation. If 60000 ms, for example, is set in the special view 2 game processing timer area in step A 497 as the addition result in step A 496 and “9” is saved as the number of repetitions in step A 501, timer interrupt processing (step A 33 described above) Special figure 2 The value of the game processing timer is subtracted, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game processing timer is decremented by 1 in step A36, and in step A37, the special figure 2 game processing timer area is
0000 ms is set. Therefore, in this case, as a result, the total fluctuation time of the special figure 2 becomes a fluctuation time of 10 minutes at 60000 ms × 10 in this embodiment. In fact, since it is a 4 ms timer interrupt, 2 bytes can be set up to about 262 seconds, but for ease of understanding 60
The case where it can be expressed by multiplication of seconds is described as an example.

Next, in step A502, data (MODE) of the fluctuation command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is prepared (step A502), and data (ACTION) of the fluctuation command corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is prepared (step A503) And effect command setting processing (step A504).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, the prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) are written to the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. As a result, a rendering command composed of the prepared command data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the rendering control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the gaming control device 100. The same applies to the case where the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like a rendering command, but it may be configured in more bytes. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to the multi-byte configuration may be used.

Next, when step A 504 is finished, it is judged whether or not the information setting of the special figure 1 is in progress (step A).
505) If special model 1 information setting is in progress (step A505; Y), update the special figure 1 reservation number by “-1” (step A506) and set the address of the random number storage area of special figure 1 It sets and shifts the random number storage area of the said address (step A507), clears the information of the vacant area after shift (step A508), and complete | finishes a fluctuation | variation start information setting process.

On the other hand, when the information setting of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step A505; N), the special figure 2 reservation number is updated by “−1” (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 is set. The random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information on the free space after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the variation start information setting process is ended.

Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is,
The game control apparatus 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the effect command setting process described above, and the effect control device 300 based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game The detailed effect contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set according to the determined fluctuation pattern, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is executed. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game For example, a variation command (sometimes referred to as a variation pattern command) including information related to a pattern may be mentioned, and for example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of this embodiment. .

[High probability change frequency update processing]
Next, the high probability change number of times updating process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (
The details of steps A317 and A347) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 shows the first
It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability fluctuation | variation frequency update process of embodiment.

In the high probability variation count updating process, first, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability (step A551), and the special figure height probability is not in the process (step A551; N
End the high probability change number update process.

In addition, when one of the types of the special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is a big hit game state, the hit probability of the other variation display game is always controlled to a low probability, but one is small In the case of a hit, the other may be in high probability.

If the probability is high (step A551; Y), the number of times of high probability fluctuation managing the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the high probability state is updated by “-1” (step A552). It is determined whether the number is "0" (step A553).

If the high probability fluctuation number is not "0" (step A553; N), the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. If the high probability fluctuation number is "0" (step A553; Y),
A signal regarding the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A555).
Note that the signal related to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

Then, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & short time (high probability & short or no high probability & short) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 556). In addition, the signal about the end of the high probability & time short is the signal to turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signal to turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal off Signals to be
A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. Further, even in the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the common drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric utility 1 open extension state signal are always off.

Then, the number in the low probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A 557), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A559)
), The high probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start fluctuation is set (step A 560), and the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

The high probability final change flag includes information that can determine the type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game that is the high probability final variation. In addition, since the internal probability becomes low probability at the start of fluctuation in high probability final fluctuation, the information to show that it is fluctuation started in high probability even if it is low probability now is high It is a probability final change flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high probability final change, the probability state (the set state in the game control apparatus 100) of the target special figure is returned to the low probability at the change start time. Thus, when the gaming ball wins the starting opening during the final round in the high probability state, it is possible to prevent the problem that the hit determination for the starting winning will be determined with high probability.

[Process during special figure 1 change]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 during fluctuation process (step A9) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described using FIG. 28 and FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 during variation processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 29 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 during variation processing of the first embodiment.

In special figure 1 fluctuation processing, first, the number of times of symbol fixed frequency output is updated “+1” (step A5)
71) Load the command (decorative special figure 1 command including information of stop symbol about special figure 1) from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepare (step A572), and perform effect command setting processing (step A573) .

Next, the decoration special figure 1 stop command (pattern stop command about special figure 1) is prepared (step A 574), the rendering command setting process (step A 575) is performed, and the final high probability final state according to the state of high probability final variation flag It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A576). And, if it is not the high probability final change (step A 576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process The display time for the high probability final change is set as the stop display time of the (step A577) and the high probability final change (step A576; Y)
The stop display time of the variable display game is set (step A578), and the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579.

In the case of the first embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern. In some cases, 2000 ms is set as the display time, and 136 ms is set as the display time if the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern.
In addition, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A579 (FIG. 29), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 1 fluctuation display game is released based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing. (Step A579) In the case of detachment (Step A579; Y), Step A
If it moves to 594 and it is not falling off (step A579; N), the special figure 2 is also fluctuating now (
It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (step A 580).

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is fluctuating should be made by any of the information of the special figure 2 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area or the information of the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area Can. In other words, if "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, it may be determined that it is in the changing state. If the special figure 2 changing state is set in the special figure status area, it is determined that it is in the changing state. It may be a configuration, it may be a configuration in which it is determined that a variation flag is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag region, or a configuration in which it is determined by a combination of these conditions.

Then, when the special figure 2 is also changing (step A 580; Y), it is judged whether the process is being executed during the special figure 2 display (step A 581) and the special figure 2 is not being executed. In the case (step A 581; N), the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by “+1” (step A)
582).

Next, when step A 582 is ended, and the special figure 2 display processing is being executed (step A 581; Y), the display time of the present special figure 1 (the time set in step A 577 etc.) For example, the result obtained by adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (step A58).
3) Save the display time of the special figure 2 in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A5)
84). When the special view 2 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special view 2 is reset by the processing of steps A583 and A584. By this resetting, the display time of the special view 2 is basically extended, but in some cases it may be shortened.

After that, a command (the decoration special figure 2 command including information on the stop symbol about the special drawing 2) is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A585), and effect command setting processing (step A586) is performed. Next, the decoration special figure 2 stop command (pattern stop command about the special figure 2) is prepared (step A 587), and the rendering command setting process (step A)
In step 588), the special processing 2 display process transition setting processing 2 (step A 589) is performed.

In addition, according to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, if the present special figure 1 fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is hit (big hit or small hit) from now on, the special figure being changed at the same time It will end the fluctuation display of 2 forcibly.

Next, when step A 589 is finished, and when the special figure 2 is not changing (step A5)
80; N) loads a command from the decoration special figure 1 command area, saves it in a hit symbol command area (step A 590), and determines whether the special figure 1 variation display game this time is a small hit (step A 591) .

And, if it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A591; N), information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area to control the big hit game after the special figure 1 fluctuation end (special figure 1
Special figure 1 round number upper limit value information which determines the round number upper limit value is loaded, it saves in the round number upper limit value information area (step A 592), loads information from the special figure 1 large winning a prize opening open information area, The file is saved in the mouth open information area (step A593).

Next, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of this time is a disconnection (step A579; Y), and when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of this time is a small hit (step A591; Y), a step A5
If it has ended 93, the process moves to step A594. Moving to step A 594,
Information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A 594), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step A 595) is performed. The special figure 1 during fluctuation processing ends. In addition, in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, the special figure 1
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

As described above, the game control apparatus 100 functions as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the first start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variable display game based on the second start memory currently being executed.

[Special figure 2 during processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 during variation process (step A49) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 30 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during variation of the special view 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 during variation processing of the first embodiment;

In special figure 2 fluctuation processing, first, the number of times of symbol fixed frequency output is renewed “+1” (step A6
01) Load the command from the decoration special figure 2 command area (the decoration special figure 2 command including information on the stop symbol about the special drawing 2), prepare (step A602), and perform the rendering command setting process (step A603) .

Next, the decoration special figure 2 stop command (pattern stop command about special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), the rendering command setting process (step A605) is performed, and the final state of the high probability final variation flag It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A606). And, if it is not the high probability final change (step A 606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process The display time for the high probability final change is set as the stop display time of the (step A 607) and the high probability final change (step A 606; Y).
The stop display time of the variable display game is set (step A608), and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A 607 and A 608 is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A 609.

In the case of the first embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, for example. Even in the case where there is a display time of 600 ms, the display time is set to 600 ms even when the stop design pattern is a small hit design pattern. In addition, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms. In addition, in the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern by the removal symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A 609 (FIG. 31), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 2 fluctuation display game is released based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 2 setting process. (Step A 609), step A 609 in the case of disconnection (Step A 609; Y)
If it moves to 624 and it does not fall off (Step A 609; N), the special figure 1 is also fluctuating now (
It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (step A610).

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 is fluctuating should be performed by any of the information of the special figure 1 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area, or the information of the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. Can. In other words, if "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area, it may be determined that it is in the changing state, or if the special figure 1 in the changing state is set in the special figure status area It may be a configuration, it may be a configuration in which it is determined that a variation flag is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area, or a configuration in which it is determined by a combination of these conditions.

Then, if the special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is judged whether the special figure 1 display process is being executed (step A611) and the special figure 1 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A611; N), the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by "+1" (step A)
612).

Next, when step A 612 is ended, and when the special figure 1 display processing is being executed (step A 611; Y), the display time of the current special figure 2 (the time set in step A 607 etc.) For example, the result obtained by adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 1 (step A61)
3) Save the display time of the special figure 1 in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A6)
14). When the special view 1 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special view 1 is reset by the processing of the steps A613 and A614. By this resetting, the display time of the special view 1 is basically extended, but in some cases it may be shortened.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 1 command including information on stop symbol about special figure 1) is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A615), and effect command setting processing (step A616) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (pattern stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A 617), and a rendering command setting process (step A)
618) is executed, and the special processing 1 display transition processing setting processing 2 (step A619) is performed.

In addition, according to the processing of the steps A 609 to A 619 described above, if the present special figure 2 fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is hit (big hit or small hit) from now on, the special figure being changed simultaneously. It will end the fluctuation display of 1 forcibly.

Next, when step A 619 is finished, and when the special figure 1 is not changing (step A 6)
10; N) Loads a command from the decoration special figure 2 command area, saves it in a hit symbol command area (step A620), and determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game this time is a small hit (step A621) .

And when it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A 621; N), information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area to control the big hit game after the special figure 2 change end (special figure 2
The special figure 2 round number upper limit value information which determines the round number upper limit value is loaded, it saves in the round number upper limit value information area (step A 622), the special figure 2 large winning a prize opening opening information area loads information, The file is saved in the mouth open information area (step A623).

Next, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of this time is a disconnection (step A609; Y) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of this time is a small hit (step A621; Y), a step A6
When the step S23 is completed, the process moves to step A624. Moving to step A 624,
Information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A624), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A625) is performed, The special figure 2 in the process of changing In addition, in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, the special figure 2
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

As described above, the game control apparatus 100 functions as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the second start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variable display game based on the first start memory currently being executed.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, in the special figure 1 during the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation process, the special figure 1 being displayed process transition setting process 1 (step A
The details of 595) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 1 during display of the special view 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special process 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the process number "2" relating to the special figure 1 display process is set as the process number (step A631), and the special process 1 game process number area Save the number, ie "2" (step A632).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation.

Then, as information for control of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53,
The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A634), and the processing shift setting process 1 during the special figure 1 display is ended.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, in the special figure 2 during the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation process, during the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A
The details of 625) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 1 during a special view 2 display of the first embodiment.

In special processing 2 display processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number "2" which is processing number concerning the special processing 2 display processing is set as the processing number (step A641), the special processing 2 game processing number area Save the number "2" (step A 642).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation.

Then, as information for control of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54,
The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A644), and the process transition setting process 1 during the special figure 2 display is ended.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2]
Next, the process of setting the special process 1 during the process of the special figure 2 in the above-mentioned process of changing 2
The details of 619) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 2 during display of the special view 1 of the first embodiment. It should be noted that when the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is a hit when the special figure 2 variation display game which has started variation is a hit, the special figure 1 variation display game which is simultaneously changing is forcibly ended with a break It is processing to make it happen. That is, it is a process for information setting when it is forcibly stopped by having hit the other pattern.

In the special process 1 process transition setting process 2, first, the process number "2" relating to the special figure 1 process is set as the process number (step A651), and the special process 1 game process number area Save the number "2" (step A652).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation.

Then, as information for control of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A654) and the stop stop pattern pattern is stopped stop pattern pattern area (area for storing stop design pattern in RWM ) (Step A655). In this stop symbol pattern area, a special stop symbol pattern (usually depending on the extracted random number in the stop symbol pattern of the hit in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process) is usually already performed for the special view 1 fluctuation display game under execution. In some cases, the saved symbol pattern is saved, but here, even if the saved symbol pattern saved is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the missing symbol pattern. Similarly, in the subsequent steps A 656 to 661 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the normal step, it is cleared or reset for forced termination at the end.

Next, clear the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (area for storing special figure 1 round number upper limit value information in RWM) (step A 656), and special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (RW
Clear the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information storage area in M) (step A657),
The shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step A658). Deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and the information on whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is the small hit or not This is an area of RWM that stores various information, and information is normally set in the big hit flag 1 setting process,
The information is reset here.

Next, clear the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step A 660), save the shift stop symbol number in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A 661), and end the processing transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display. .

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
Next, in the special figure 1 during the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation process, the special figure 2 being displayed process transition setting process 2 (step A
The details of 589) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 2 during display of the special view 2 of the first embodiment. The process transition setting process 2 during the special figure 2 display forcibly ends the special figure 2 variation display game which is simultaneously varying when the special figure 1 variation display game which has started variation is a hit. It is processing to make it happen. That is, it is a process for information setting when it is forcibly stopped by having hit the other pattern.

In the special processing 2 display processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number "2" relating to the special processing 2 display processing is set as the processing number (step A671), and the processing in the special processing 2 game processing number area Save the number "2" (step A672).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation.

Then, as information for control of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A 674), and the out-of-stop symbol pattern area is the stop symbol pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in RWM ) (Step A675). In this stop symbol pattern area, a special stop symbol pattern in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (usually depending on the extracted random number is a stop symbol pattern of the hit in the special symbol 2 change display game under execution). In some cases, the saved symbol pattern is saved, but here, even if the saved symbol pattern saved is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the missing symbol pattern. Similarly, in the subsequent steps A 676 to 681 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the normal step, they are cleared or reset for forced termination at the end.

Next, clear the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (area for storing special figure 2 round number upper limit value information in RWM) (step A 676), and special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (RW
Clear the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information storage area in M) (step A677),
The shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A678). Deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and the information on whether the special figure 2 variation display game is the small hit or not or the big hit This is an area of RWM that stores various information, and information is normally set in the big hit flag 2 setting process,
The information is reset here.

Next, clear the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step A 680), save the shift stop symbol number in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A 681), and end the processing shift setting process 2 during the special figure 2 display. .

[Process while displaying special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 in-display process (step A10) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of a special view 1 in display processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 37 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of a special view 1 in display processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 38 is a diagram (No. 3) illustrating a flowchart of the special view 1 display processing of the first embodiment;

In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 701), and the information of the small hit flag 1 area of RWM is It clears (step A702).

Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information on the big hit flag 1 area of RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is judged whether or not the big hit flag 1 loaded is a big hit (step A 705), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 705; Y), a big hit of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1) Save the signal related to the start of the big hit) in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A706), prepare the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command (step A707), perform the rendering command setting process (step A708) An upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal about the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal to turn on the signal during the condition device operation, a signal to turn on the item continuous action device operation, and a signal to turn the signal per special symbol 1 Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, “16” or “
4 "and others, for example," 8 "or" 2 "may be acquired, and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area of the RWM and prepared (step A 712), effect command setting processing (step A 71)
Do 3). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A)
714), Perform rendering command setting processing (step A 715).

Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned on if it is 2R hit big in high probability, and it is turned off if it is 2R hit big hit in low probability. Also, the big hit 3 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned off if it is 2R hit in high probability, and it is turned on if it is 2R hit in low probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (for example 5000m
s, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) (step A717)
The set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step A 718), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the big winning opening (special variation winning device 38) (step A 719).

If it is a big hit of the opening of the large winning prize opening (step A719; Y), clear the information of the upper winning a prize opening illegal winning number area (step A720) Are saved (step A721), and the process proceeds to step A724.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit for opening the upper prize winning opening (Step A 719; N), clear the information on the lower winning prize opening fraud winning number area (Step A 722) and monitor the fraud for the lower winning prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A723), and the process proceeds to step A724.

At step A724, 3 is set as the process number (step A724), the process number, ie, "3" is saved in the special view 1 game process number area (step A725), and fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step A 726) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing ends.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit at step A705 (step A705)
N) determines whether the small hit flag 1 loaded is a small hit (step A 727)
If it is determined that the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A 727; Y), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A 728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the high probability final change is in progress (step A)
In 728; Y), prepare a probability information command related to the information to make the probability that the hit result will be the normal probability state (low probability state) in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game (step A729) , Effect command setting processing (step A 730) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A731), and the right strike instruction notification flag is cleared (step A731) A732). In addition, step A732 assumes a mode in which a right-handed command notification is made in the high probability state, and since the high-probability state is determined as the high-probability final variation, the right-handed command notification flag is cleared. It is illustrated. However, if the present embodiment is a mode in which the right-handed command notification is not performed in the high probability state, Step A
732 is the deleted configuration (or left hit indication notification in a high probability state and step A732
In this case, there may be an aspect in which the left strike instruction notification flag is cleared).

Next, when step A732 ends and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A)
728; N) Load and prepare a command from the hit symbol command area (step A)
733), Perform rendering command setting processing (step A734). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and the effect command setting process (step A736) It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be hit to the left (for example, a state which is not in the general power support state, the big hit or the special mode) (step A737).

When it is determined in step A737 that the predetermined state is to be hit to the left (step A73)
7) Save the signal relating to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal relating to the left-handed command is, for example, a signal for turning off the shooting position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the display LED in the right strike, the gaming state display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A742.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state is to be left-handed (step A 737; N), the signal regarding the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 740).
). The signal relating to the right-handed command is, for example, a signal that turns on the emission position designation signal 1. Next, in order to light the display LED in the right strike, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right strike state (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A742.

If it transfers to step A742, it will be determined whether it is a small hit which opens upper large winning a prize opening (special change winning a prize device 38) (step A742). If it is a small hit of upper large winning a prize opening opening (step A742; Y), the information of upper large winning a prize opening incorrect winning a prize number territory is cleared (step A743)
The flag for the fraud monitoring period outside is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A7).
44), Go to step A747.

On the other hand, if it is not a small hit of opening the upper large winning a prize opening (step A742; N), clear the information of the lower large winning a prize opening incorrect winning number area (step A745) The out-of-monitoring period flag is saved (step A746), and the process proceeds to step A747.

When the process proceeds to step A747, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium middle process transition setting process (step A747) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is ended. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, a process to save "7" as a process number in the special figure 1 game process number area, small hit fanfare time in the special figure 1 game process timer area (for example, 4
Perform processing such as saving m seconds).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A748).
When it is determined in step A 748 that the high probability final change is in progress (step A)
In 748; Y), prepare a probability information command related to the information to make the probability that the hit result is a normal probability state (low probability state) in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game (step A749) , Effect command setting process (step A750) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A751), and the right-handed command notification flag is cleared (step A 752), it is determined whether or not the special view 2 variation display game is middle hit (middle hit or middle hit) (step A 753). Note that step A 752 is just an example that assumes an aspect in which a right-handed indication is issued in the high probability state, as in the above-described step A 732.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is not hitting (step A 753; N)
To save the signal related to the left-handed command (fire position specification signal 1 off) in the test signal output data area (step A754) and turn off the display LED during right-handling, the game state display number 2 area is left The number in the strike state is saved (step A755). In the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is middle hit (middle hit or small hit middle), the upper prize winning opening (special variation winning device 38) opened at that time is aimed at and right If the special figure 2 is in the middle (step A 753; Y), it becomes step A 754, A because it is in a state to be hit.
Pass 755 and proceed to step A756. In addition, also when step A755 ends, it moves to step A756.

And, when it moves to step A756, the special figure 1 of the special figure status field in RWM
Clear the information showing that it is fluctuating (during special figure 1 fluctuating display game) (information subtraction) (step A 756), the special figure 1 game processing number area processing number concerning special figure 1 normal processing, namely “0”
Are saved (step A757), and the special figure 1 display processing is ended. Step A75
When 6 is executed, the special view status is either in the state in which only the special view 2 is changing, or in the state in which neither the special view 1 nor the special view 2 is in the changing state.

[Process during special figure 2 display]
Next, details of the special figure 2 in-display process (step A50) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of a special view 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special view 2 in display processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 41 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the special view 2 in display processing of the first embodiment;

In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 761), and the information of the small hit flag 2 area of RWM is It clears (step A762).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special view 2 variation start process is loaded (step A 763), and the information on the big hit flag 2 area of RWM is cleared (step A 764). Then, it is judged whether or not the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 765), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 765; Y), the big hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2) Save the signal related to the start of the big hit) in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A766), prepare the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command (step A767), perform the rendering command setting process (step A768) An upper limit table is set (step A769). In addition, the signal about the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the signal which turns on the signal during condition device operation, the signal which turns on the character continuous operation device operation signal, and the signal which turns on the special symbol 2 signal. Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A 769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, “16” or “
4 "and others, for example," 8 "and" 2 "may be acquired, and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A770). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A 771).

Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit special drawing command area of the RWM and prepared (step A772), rendering command setting processing (step A77)
Do 3). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A)
774), Perform rendering command setting processing (step A775).

Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned on if it is 2R hit big in high probability, and it is turned off if it is 2R hit big hit in low probability. Also, the big hit 3 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned off if it is 2R hit in high probability, and it is turned on if it is 2R hit in low probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (for example 5000m
s, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) (step A 777)
The set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A778), and it is judged whether or not it is a big hit for opening the big winning opening (special variation winning device 38) (step A779).

If it is a big hit for opening the big winning opening (step A 779; Y), clear the information on the upper winning opening fraudulent winning number area (step A 780), flag over fraudulent monitoring period flag area for upper winning prize opening fraud flag Are saved (step A 781), and the process proceeds to step A 784.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit for opening the upper prize winning opening (step A 779; N), clear the information on the lower winning prize opening incorrect winning number area (step A 782) and monitor illegally in the lower winning prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A783), and the process proceeds to step A784.

At step A784, 3 is set as the process number (step A784), and the process number, ie, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A785), fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step A786) is performed, and the special figure 2 display processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit at step A765 (step A765)
N) determines whether the small hit flag 2 loaded is a small hit (step A 787)
If it is determined that the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A 787; Y), it is determined whether or not the high probability final change is in progress (step A 788).

When it is determined in step A 788 that the high probability final change is in progress (step A)
In 788; Y), prepare a probability information command related to the information to make the probability of being hit in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A 789) , Effect command setting processing (step A 790) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A791), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A 792). In addition, step A 792 assumes a mode in which a right-handed command notification is made in the high probability state, and since the high-probability state is determined as the high-probability final variation, the right-handed command notification flag is cleared. It is illustrated. However, if the present embodiment is a mode in which the right-handed command notification is not performed in the high probability state, Step A
792 is the deleted configuration (or left hit indication notification in a high probability state
In this case, there may be an aspect in which the left strike instruction notification flag is cleared).

Next, when step A 792 is finished and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A)
788; N) Load and prepare a command from the hit symbol command area (Step A)
793), Perform rendering command setting processing (step A794). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and the effect command setting process (step A796) It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be hit to the left (for example, a state that is not in the general power support state, the jackpot, or the special mode) (step A 797).

If it is determined in step A 797 that the predetermined state is to be hit to the left (step A 79)
In step 7; Y), a signal relating to a left-hand drive instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A798). The signal relating to the left-handed command is, for example, a signal for turning off the shooting position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the display LED in the right strike, the gaming state display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A802.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state is to be left-handed (step A 797; N), the signal regarding the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 800).
). The signal relating to the right-handed command is, for example, a signal that turns on the emission position designation signal 1. Next, in order to light the display LED in the right strike, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right strike state (step A801), and the process proceeds to step A802.

If it transfers to step A802, it will be determined whether it is a small hit which opens upper large winning a prize opening (special change winning a prize device 38) (step A802). If it is a small hit of upper large winning a prize opening opening (step A802; Y), clear the information of upper large winning a prize opening unfair winning a prize number territory (step A803)
The flag for the fraud monitoring period outside is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A8).
04), shift to step A807.

On the other hand, if it is not a small winning of the opening of the large winning opening (step A802; N), clear the information of the lower winning opening unfair winning number area (step A805), incorrect in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area The out-of-monitoring period flag is saved (step A806), and the process proceeds to step A807.

If it transfers to step A807, special figure 2 small hitting fanfare medium middle processing migration processing setting processing (step A807) is done, the special figure 2 display processing is ended. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, the process to save “7” as the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area, the small hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game process timer area (for example, 4
Perform processing such as saving m seconds).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A808).
When it is determined in step A 808 that the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A)
In 808; Y), prepare a probability information command related to the information to make the probability to be hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game be the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A 809) , Effect command setting processing (step A 810) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A811), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A812), it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit or not (
Step A813). Note that step A 812 is merely an example assuming a mode in which a right-handed indication is issued in the high probability state, as in the above-described step A 792.

Next, when it is determined that the special view 1 variation display game is not a big hit (step A813; N
) To save the signal related to the left strike instruction (fire position designation signal 1 off) in the test signal output data area (step A 814) and turn off the display LED during the right strike, in the game state display number 2 area The number in the left-handed state is saved (step A815). In the present embodiment, when the special view 1 variation display game is in the middle of a big hit, it will be in a state to hit the upper large winning opening (special variation winning device 38) opened at that time If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step A 813; Y), it passes steps A 814 and A 815 and shifts to step A 816. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special view 1 variation display game is in a small hit, it is in a state to hit the left with the lower large winning opening (special variation winning device 95) opened at that time. If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step A 813; N) (including the case where the special figure 1 is a small hit), the steps A 814 and A 815 are performed and the step A 81 is performed.
Move to 6 However, the processing content regarding such a right-handed-left-handling changes depending on the board configuration and game characteristics of the gaming machine, and is merely an example. Also here, step A815
If the process ends, the process moves to step A816.

And if it transfers to step A816, the special figure 2 of the special figure status field in RWM is carried out.
Clear the information showing that it is fluctuating (during special figure 2 fluctuating display game) (subtract information) (step A 816), the special figure 2 game processing number area processing number concerning special figure 2 normal processing, namely “0”
Are saved (step A 817), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. Step A81
When 6 is executed, the special view status is either in the state in which only the special view 1 is changing, or in the state in which neither the special view 1 nor the special view 2 is in the change.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a second diagram of the external information editing process according to the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S125), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal control device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device are created and set in the output buffer.

In the external information editing process, first, information is set in accordance with an error state or a security state. In the process of setting information according to the error state or the security state, the door / frame is in the process of setting the glass frame opening error (step C71; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is being generated (step C72; Y) The on data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, when neither glass frame open error nor main frame open error occurs (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C75) Save the off data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, the security signal control timer which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like is “0
If not, "-1" is updated (step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". And the value of the security signal control timer is "0"
It is determined whether or not (step C78).

If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, the value of the security signal control timer is "0".
(Step C78; Y), that is, when time is up, step C79
Processing is passed. That is, from the time when the security signal control timer saves the initial value (for example, 256 ms) to the initialization of the data stored in the RAM in the main process described above and until the security signal control timer times out The on data of the security signal is output as external information.

Next, during magnet fraud (step C80; Y), board radio fraud is occurring (step C81;
Y), the frame radio wave fraud occurrence (step C82; Y), the big winning opening fraud occurrence (step C83)
Save the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area when Y is Y or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step C84; Y) (step C85) and ON data of the gaming machine error status signal The test signal output data area is saved (step C86). Even in the case where the common electric power is fraudulent, similarly, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) It is good also as composition.

On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, common electric power fraud, big winning prize fraud, or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred (step C80 to C84; N), switch abnormality 1 or It is judged whether or not a switch abnormality of switch abnormality 2 is occurring (step C87)
If no switch abnormality occurs (step C87; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C88).

Then, when any switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C8).
6). Here, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation, switch abnormality and the like are abnormalities monitored in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process in the timer interrupt process.

Next, after completing step C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, the starting opening 1 (
The start opening 1 signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal (starting opening 1 signal) of the start winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37) which are the start winning opening of the special figure 1 is performed. A starting opening 2 signal editing process (step C90) is performed to edit the winning signal (starting opening 2 signal) of the starting winning opening 92) which is the starting winning opening of FIG. Subsequently, main prize ball signal editing processing (step C91) is performed to edit the main prize ball signal related to the prize ball number to be paid out, and the symbol determination number signal is generated based on the symbol determination number output number (pattern determination number signal output number). The symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step C92) is performed to edit the, and the external information editing process is ended.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits an interrupt.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial setting of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit initializes the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits an interrupt.

[Step D15] The control unit permits display data generation. That is, the control unit
A display circuit (not shown) in the DP 312 accesses a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and permits generation of display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is processing for setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the srand function, or uses a value created based on the ID value of the CPU etc. so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may

[Step D17] The control unit controls the RWM (eg, the RAM 322) of the effect control device 300.
The initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized in (1) (for example, a flag area for presentation (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control processing of the presentation control apparatus 300)).

[Step D18] The control unit clears WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes effect button input processing. The effect button input process is a process for performing editing when the effect button (the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b) is operated when it is activated. In addition, since the effect button is not turned on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform processing for detecting input of the effect button within the effect button input processing, or may be performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes hall / player setting mode processing. In the hall / player setting mode process, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness of the LED or the display device 41, the volume, etc.
This is a process for receiving an operation by the player such as changing the brightness of the LED or the display device 41, or changing the volume.

[Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. The random number update process is, for example, r
This is processing of updating pseudo random numbers at least once in each control cycle of the main processing using the and function. Since the rand function generates random numbers based on the specified generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain random numbers only by executing the rand function. In addition, you may use the counter which increments by "1" like a main board | substrate (game control apparatus 100) as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes reception command check processing. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is V
This is processing for setting various commands for instructing the DP 312 on the drawing contents on the display device 41 and the parameters thereof. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table in the effect display editing process.

[Step D <b> 24] The control unit performs setting for ending drawing command preparation. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that preparation of all the commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is ended.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is frame switching timing, and if it is frame switching timing, the process proceeds to Step D26, and if it is not frame switching timing, it waits for frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is V blank interrupt (
This timing is a timing that arrives at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 sec ≒ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 sec) of the V sync interrupt. The V blank interrupt is generated each time one scan of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 seconds, as described above. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt is generated twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 seconds). (For example, 1/30 sec 3 33.33 ms
)become. However, the present invention is not limited to this aspect, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image updating) may be performed in a cycle of 1/30 seconds or more, or less than 1/30 seconds Frame switching may be performed in a cycle.

As a result of the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is performed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. In addition, time management which needs to be synchronized with the effect contents is performed in units of this frame (that is, in units of the processing cycle). In the case where the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, it becomes 100 ms in 3 frames. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit causes the VDP 3 to conform to the command set in Step D23.
Instruct 12 to draw a screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table form, and instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of audio from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes a decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process of controlling various LEDs and the like such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes movable body control processing. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body (for example, the board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

[Step D30] The control unit executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets launch related information based on the launch state flag, and effects according to the special view rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of lent balls)). Is a process for performing mode correction of

After performing step D30, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter, step D1.
The processing of 8 to step D30 is repeatedly executed. That is, step D18 to step D
The loop processing 30 is repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after the effect control device 300 is started (
In some cases, this is called main loop processing).

The control unit executes the processing of step D27 to step D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the effect of the screen, but the signals and data generated or set by these control processing (in particular, various LEDs and motors) The process of actually outputting the drive control signal etc.) to the port is performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when using an IC specialized for control of various devices, there is also a case where the output of a signal or the like is not performed by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the reception command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of reception command check processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The reception command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The receive command (render command) is data of MODE (1 byte) and ACTIO
The game control device (main substrate) 100 transmits N effect data sequentially to the effect control device 300. Below, such data which comprises a command is called data of command or command data.

In addition, the processing of command reception from the main board is not shown "command reception interrupt processing"
It is done by That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when reception of a command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. It is only necessary to take out from the buffer, but in the above-mentioned "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking the loaded command data for abnormality, the relevant command Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and updating is performed to increase the value of the command reception counter by “1” by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply “store” means to readably store in a predetermined storage area so as to be used for the later control process (the same applies to the following). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. The command buffer is constituted of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311 a (or the RAM 322) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be equal to or more than the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in a system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 seconds).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311 a).
Set to Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the command reception counter stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) (time for one cycle of the above processing cycle).

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether the number of received commands is not “0 (zero)”. If the number of received commands is not “0”, the process proceeds to Step D43, and the number of received commands is “0”. For example, the reception command check process ends. In the present application, as in the step D41, “load data” in the control process refers to the RAM (the effect control device 300 of this example).
Means to retrieve data from the RAM 322 or RAM 311a).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
Assuming that A: value of command reception counter and B: number of commands received, step D41.
"A = B" immediately after the execution of. Then, immediately after the execution of step D43, “A = A−B =
The normal movement is “0”, but in the aspect of this example, the effect control device 300 is a game control device (
Since the command reception interrupt from the main substrate 100 is given the highest priority without interrupt inhibition, there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the process of step D41 and the process of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is shifted, so step D43.
Here, the subtraction process “A−B” is performed. However, when serial communication is used to transmit / receive a command from the main board as in this embodiment, the value of A is not increased between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153 by disabling interrupts. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be "A.rarw.0".

[Step D44] The control unit determines the contents of the reception command buffer (corresponding to a command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as a command buffer) (that is, command data stored in an address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to a command area (sometimes called a command storage area). The command area is, for example, in a storage area in the RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO (first-in first-out) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the controller reads the data in the command buffer, the controller increments the value of the command read index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, by, eg, 1 in the range of 0 to 31. Do. Here, "0" to "31"
The range of corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] Whether or not the control unit has finished copying the number of commands received
That is, it is determined whether or not step D44 and step D45 have been repeatedly executed by the number of received commands. The control unit proceeds to step D47 when copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copying is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (the first stored data among the unread data in the command area, that is, the data to be read next) Do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes reception command analysis processing. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing data of a loaded command (hereinafter, referred to as a current command). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the command reception number has not been completed, and ends the reception command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit changes the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in Step D47 of the received command check process to MODE and the lower byte to ACT.
Separate from each other and stored. In the case of a variable system command that instructs a variation pattern of a special drawing, the upper byte data stored as MODE instructs a first half variation pattern, and AC
The lower byte data stored as T is for instructing the second half fluctuation pattern.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in Step D51 is in the normal range. The control unit performs step D53 when the value of MODE is within the normal range.
Proceed to step 3, and if the value of MODE is not within the normal range, terminate the received command analysis process. Note that
The value of MODE is not defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that the value is out of the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether the value of ACT separated in Step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the value of ACT is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the value of ACT is not in the normal range.

Further, whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 in step D53 is in the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of this ACT is a predetermined ACTION check table (
In step D53, it is checked whether or not the value of ACT separated within the upper limit and lower limit falls within the above range, and if it falls within this range, it is determined as a normal range (at this point, a tooth described later) I have not been able to check for omissions).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the value of ACT separated from the value of MODE separated is a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 if the value of ACT is a correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process if the combination is not a correct combination. The determination of whether or not the value of ACT is a correct combination can be made, for example, using a match check table. In the match check table, all valid ACT values (action values) for the value of MODE are registered in order from the top address, and are provided for each value of MODE. Then, if there is a value of ACT separated in the match check table corresponding to the value of MODE, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no value of ACT separated in the match check table, it is correct It can be determined that it is not a combination.

The determination as to whether or not the value of ACT is a correct combination is executed including a missing tooth check as to whether or not the combination of ACT is a normal combination of ACT. Because there is a plurality of valid ACTs for one MODE, but their values are not continuous (that is, values that do not exist discontinuously or have missing values), the command We are comparing and checking if is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, one of them is compared and checked one by one.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the variation system command range. The control unit executes variable system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the variation system command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the data of MODE is not within the variation system command range. .

Here, the data of MODE is data of MODE stored separately in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). A variation system command (also referred to as a variation command or variation pattern command) is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, and the range that can be taken by data of this variation command is a variation system command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the big hit system command range. The control unit executes big hit system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the big hit system command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the data of MODE is not within the big hit system command range. . The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (a display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) relating to a big hit medium effect, and the range which can be taken by the data of the big hit system command is a big hit system command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the symbol system command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the data of MODE is not within the symbol system command range. . A symbol system command (sometimes referred to as a symbol command or a decoration special figure command) is a command for instructing information on a special figure symbol (for example, what to make the stop figure of the special figure, etc.), this symbol command The range that the data of can take is the symbol system command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the one-shot system command range. The control unit executes one-shot system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the one-shot system command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the data of MODE is not within the one-shot system command range. . In addition, unlike a command that makes sense in combination like a symbol command and a variable system command, a command that stands alone is referred to as a one-shot system command. The one-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. The range that can be taken by the data of this one-shot command is the one-shot system command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the prefetch symbol system command range. The control unit executes pre-reading symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the pre-reading symbol system command range (step D64), and when the data of MODE is not within the pre-reading symbol system command range Go to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the prefetch change command range. The control unit executes the prefetch variation system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the prefetch variation system command range (step D66), and receives the data when the mode data is not within the prefetch variation system command range. Terminates command analysis processing.

The pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading fluctuation system command are commands for pre-reading effect. In addition, when the process in any one of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 ends, the reception command analysis process ends.

Here, with pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect), the start winning memory (the start winning memory hold or just hold) for which the variable display game of the special drawing is not executed.
In order to inform the player in advance with predetermined reliability, whether or not to become a big hit (or what fluctuation pattern will be) when the variable display game corresponding to is played subsequently It is an effect such as performing in a mode different from normal. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the retention of the starting winning a prize memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

Second Embodiment
In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a sub display device (movable combination) whose position can be switched (movable), and performs display effects using the sub display device.

First, the sub-display device of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 48.
These are figures which show an example of the sub display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 47 (1) and (2), the game board 500 includes a display device 41 and a board effect device 44.
(Movable part) and the sub display device 501 (movable part).
The sub display device 501 has the position shown in FIG. 47 (1) (first position) or FIG.
Movable switchable to the position (second position) shown in. The second position is a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than the first position. That is, the visibility of the sub display device 501 at the second position is higher than the visibility of the sub display device 501 at the first position. Further, the sub display device 501 is provided on the front side (player side) of the display device 41 (main display device).

The sub display device 501 includes a display unit 501 a, a display unit 501 b, a display unit 501 c, and a display unit 5.
01 d, five seven-segment LEDs of the display unit 501 e, and a movable mechanism 501 f.

The movable mechanism 501 f takes charge of movement (movable switching) of the position of the sub display device 501. The movable mechanism 501 f includes a motor (not shown) and the like, and the sub display device 5 is driven by driving the motor or the like.
Movable switching of the position of 01 is performed.

Note that the movable mechanism 501 f can also movably switch the position of the sub display device 501 not only to the first position and the second position but also to another position (for example, a position between the first position and the second position). it can. For example, the movable mechanism 501f is not limited to movably switching the sub display device 501 to a position shifted in the vertical direction, but can also movably switch to a position shifted in the horizontal direction.

Further, the movable mechanism 501 f is not limited to the movable switching of the position of the sub display device 501, and can also switch the movable of the inclination. For example, the movable mechanism 501f can tilt the sub display device 501 such that the right side is inclined upward (left side is downward), or the upper portion of the sub display device 501 is inclined forward (the lower side is backward). You can also In addition, it is preferable that the gaming machine 10 movably switch the sub display device 501 to a position where the visibility of the small symbol group, the special figure 1 reservation number display, and the special figure 2 reservation number display described later is not impaired.

The display unit 501 a to the display unit 501 e are electrically connected to the effect control device 300, and the display unit 501 a to the display unit 501 e are controlled by the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 controls the control signal of the display unit 501e from the display unit 501a to the sub display device 501.
Output to

Further, the motor or the like of the movable mechanism 501 f is electrically connected to the effect control device 300, and the movable mechanism 501 f is controlled by the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 outputs a control signal of the movable mechanism 501 f to the sub display device 501.

Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the second embodiment will be described. Figure 49.
These are figures which show an example of the display screen of the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment.
The display screen 502 shown in FIG. 49 (1) is the display content of the display device 41 when the variable display game is in symbol variation and the sub display device 501 is at the first position.

The display screen 502 includes, in the display content, two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 pending number indication 505, a special figure 2 pending number indication 506, a pending indication 507, and a pending decision indication 508.
The two decorative patterns have a large symbol group 503 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 504 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 503 is in charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 503 is displayed large at the approximate center of the display device 41. Large symbol group 503
Includes the left symbol 503L, the middle symbol 503C, and the right symbol 503R. The left symbol 503L, the middle symbol 503C, and the right symbol 503R of the display screen 502 indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

Generally, the large symbol group 503 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 503L, the right symbol 503R, and the middle symbol 503C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 503L, the right symbol 503R, and the middle symbol 503C. Therefore, in the large symbol group 503, in many cases, the left symbol 503L and the right symbol 503R form a reach aspect, and it is possible to wait for the stop of the middle symbol 503C to form the big hit aspect.

The symbols constituting the large symbol group 503 (left symbol 503L, middle symbol 503C and right symbol 503R)
Mainly due to the decorative design with high designability.
The small symbol group 504 is in charge of reporting of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 504 does not interfere with the display effect by the large symbol group 503, so that the peripheral portion of the display device 41 is secured (if the sub display device 501 is at either the first position or the second position). Even if it does not overlap, it is displayed small. Small group 5
04 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the small symbol group 504 of the display screen 502 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

In general, the large symbol group 503 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 504, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be largely changed. On the contrary, small symbol group 504 is
Compared with the large symbol group 503, the display is small and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, position fixing).

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can ensure visibility of the small symbol group 504 while securing a variety of display effects for the large symbol group 503, and can easily grasp the gaming state of the player.

The special figure 1 reservation number display 505 displays the number of pending storages (starting number of memories) of the special figure 1 game. For example, the retention storage of the special view 1 game is generated triggered by a winning on the start winning opening 36. A special figure 2 pending number display 506 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. For example, the reserve storage of the special figure 2 game is generated triggered by the prize winning on the normal variation prize winning device 37. Special figure 1 pending number indication 5
The 05 and the special view 2 reservation number display 506 are displayed in a non-overlapping portion even when the sub display device 501 is at the second position.

The hold display 507 can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view variable display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 507 is either the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 505 or the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 506 according to the gaming state It corresponds to the total number of both.

The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 507 is a value from “0” to “4”, and the number of pending storages exceeding this is excluded from the display target. The gaming machine 10 can secure the accurate display of the number of pending storages by the special view 1 pending number display 505 and the special view 2 pending number display 506 even when the pending display 507 excludes a part of the pending storage.

The holding and digest display 508 can indicate that the special view variable display game is in the variable display state and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform the on-hold notice effect by using the on-hold display 507 and the on-hold digest display 508. The reserved advance presentation effect is an aspect of the prefetched presentation effect performed using the held display 507 and the held digest display 508.

The display screen 502 shows that the number of pending storages for the special view 1 game indicated by the special view 1 suspension number display 505 is “1”.
Since the number of pending storages of the special view 2 game indicated by the special view 2 pending number display 506 is “0”, the number of pending storages indicated by the pending display 507 is also “1”. In addition, the display screen 502 indicates that the special-image variation display game is in symbol variation by means of the holding and digest display 508.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the variation mode in the variation display different for the large symbol group 503 and the small symbol group 504. For example, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the large symbol group 503 and the small symbol group 504 when vertically scrolling the large symbol group 503. In addition, even when the gaming machine 10 may update the symbols asynchronously between the large symbol group 503 and the small symbol group 504, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player.

The display screen 509 shown in FIG. 49 (2) is the display content of the display device 41 when the variable display game is in symbol change and the sub display device 501 is at the second position.
When the sub display device 501 is at the second position, the sub display device 501 is disposed at a position corresponding to the hold display 507 and the hold termination display 508 on the display screen 502. Therefore, the display screen 509 includes the hold display 507 and the hold digest display 50 among the display elements of the display screen 502.
Eight is excluded. Even in this case, the special figure 1 pending number display 505 and the special figure 2 pending number display 506 are displayed in portions that do not overlap even when the sub display device 501 is at the second position. The gaming machine 10 can secure the accurate display of the number of pending storages by the special view 1 pending number display 505 and the special view 2 pending number display 506.

As described above, when the display device 41 displays the display screen from which the display element in the portion overlapping with the sub display device 501 is removed, the gaming machine 10 can not see a part of the display element in the overlapping portion (a part) Can reduce the discomfort caused by Furthermore, by displaying the display screen from which the display element of the portion where the display device 41 overlaps with the sub display device 501 is removed, the gaming machine 10 can improve the visibility of the sub display device 501.

Next, the effects of the variable display game executed by the gaming machine 10 using the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of an effect mode in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a second diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a third diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

The effect mode 511 shown in FIG. 50 (1) shows the state at the time of the start of the variable display (the state where the variable display game is started). In the effect mode 511, the sub display device 501 is at the first position, the panel effect device 44 is stopped, and the display device 41 displays the display screen 502 of the configuration when the sub display device 501 is at the first position. ing.

The effect mode 512 shown in FIG. 50 (2) is an aspect after the effect mode 511, and the effect using the sub display device 501 (corresponding to the duration time at the second position, the numeral from "0" The aspect after starting the count production | presentation which carries out a count-up display is shown. In addition, count production is
It is an example of an effect in which the sub display device 501 displays a display corresponding to the duration positioned at the second position.

In the effect mode 512, the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the first position to the second position as the counting effect is started. Then, the display device 41 displays the display screen 509 having a configuration in which the sub display device 501 is at the second position in response to the sub display device 501 being movably switched from the first position to the second position. There is.

The effect mode 513 shown in FIG. 50 (3) is an aspect after the effect mode 512, and counts up the numbers from "0" corresponding to the duration time at which the sub display device 501 is positioned at the second position in the count effect. Indicates the state of starting display.

In the effect mode 513, the sub display device 501 indicates that the number is being counted up and the current count number is “0” (immediately after the start).
The sub display device 501 displays the number (count number) in the count-up display by the three three-segment LEDs (display section) in the middle during the count-up display, and the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides Explicitly indicate that the count-up display is in progress.

That is, the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides of the sub display device 501 are in charge of reporting the execution state of the count-up display, and the three 7-segment LEDs in the middle of the sub display device 501 indicate the count-up display. Responsible for notification of numbers.

For example, the sub-display device 501 clearly indicates that the count-up display is continuing by lighting any one of the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides while changing the lighting part in a predetermined order. For example, in the count effect, the sub display device 501
Count up numbers up to "100".

Further, an expected degree (reliability) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game is set to the count number at the end of the count-up in the count effect, that is, the count-up result (count result). , Count up so that the count result according to the degree of expectation. That is, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game according to the count result of the sub display device 501.

As described above, in order to count up so that the count result corresponds to the degree of expectation, the gaming machine 10 increases the player's interest in the effect contents (count result) of the count effect of the sub display device 501, It is possible to make the effect performed by the sub display device 501 look more closely. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the player's interest by the effect that the sub display device 501 executes.

The degree of expectation is set, for example, to be higher as the count result becomes larger. By setting the degree of expectation in this way, the time (duration time) located at the second position
As the length of L increases, the degree of expectation also increases, and the gaming machine 10 can give value (meaning) to the time (duration) in which the sub display device 501 (movable role) stands by at the second position. That is, the gaming machine 10 can maintain and improve the interest even after the movable role is displaced. Further, the degree of expectation is not limited to that corresponding to the jackpot possibility, and may correspond to the development stage of the variable display effect such as reach and super reach.

In the gaming machine 10, the increase speed of the count number in the count effect is not limited to a fixed speed, and may be a variable speed. For example, the gaming machine 10 may change the increase speed of the count number in synchronization with the display on the display screen (for example, in synchronization with the rotation speed of the large symbol group),
The increase speed is high (when the update frequency of the count number is high) immediately after the start of counting.
When the count is close to the end of the count, the rate of increase of the count may be low (the frequency of updating the count may be low). By this, the gaming machine 10 can adjust the time of the count effect regardless of the count result, and for example, the time of the count effect is made the same in the case where the count result is large and the case where the count result is small. It can also be done.

Further, the increment value of the count in the count effect is not limited to being fixed, but may be a variable value. For example, the gaming machine 10 may count up by “5” when it is immediately after the start of counting, and may count up by “1” when it is close to the end of counting. By this, the gaming machine 10 can adjust the time of the count effect regardless of the count result, and for example, the time of the count effect is made the same in the case where the count result is large and the case where the count result is small. It can also be done.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is triggered by a predetermined count number (for example, the count number "20", "4
A message (for example, a message that specifies the relationship between the count number and the expectation) may be displayed on the display screen at “0”, “60”, and “80”. By displaying the fact that the count is related to the expectation as a message in this way, the gaming machine 10 can easily understand the content of the effect (the increase of the count being related to the expectation). .

The effect mode 514 shown in FIG. 51 (1) is an aspect after the effect mode 513 and indicates a state in which the sub display device 501 is counting up and displaying numbers in the count effect.
In the effect mode 514, the sub display device 501 has two 7-segment LEDs on both sides.
It is clearly indicated that the count-up is continuing by turning on any one of the points. In addition, the sub display device 501 indicates that the current count number is “20” by the three three-segment LEDs in the middle.

The effect mode 515 shown in FIG. 51 (2) is an aspect after the effect mode 514, and shows a state after the sub display device 501 ends the count-up display of numbers in the count effect.

In the effect mode 515, the sub display device 501 has two 7-segment LEDs on both sides.
It is clearly indicated that the count-up display has ended by turning off the light. In addition, the sub display device 501 has a counting result of “3
It shows that it is "0".

The effect mode 516 shown in FIG. 52 (1) is the mode after the effect mode 515 and shows the mode after the end of the count effect using the sub display device 501.
In the effect mode 516, the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the second position to the first position with the end of the count effect. Then, the display device 41 displays the display screen 502 of the configuration when the sub display device 501 is at the first position in response to the sub display device 501 being movably switched from the second position to the first position. There is.

The effect aspect 517 shown in FIG. 52 (2) is an aspect after the effect aspect 516, and shows an aspect in which the display device 41 is executing an effect corresponding to the count result.
In the effect mode 517, the display device 41 displays the display screen 518. Display screen 51
8 includes, in addition to the display elements displayed by the display screen 502, an effect display 519 for displaying an effect corresponding to the count result.

The effect display 519 displays the effect (conduction line effect) of the display mode according to the count result.
The effect display 519 displays an effect of a display mode in which the flame displayed on the other end side of the squib at a position where one end thereof corresponds to the board effect device 44 approaches the board effect device 44. The effect display 519 displays the flame of the display mode according to the count result. In other words, the effect display 519 clearly indicates the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game according to the display mode of the flame.

Here, the relationship between the display mode of the flame, the count result, and the degree of expectation will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a view showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the flame, the count result, and the expectation in the second embodiment.

There are 11 patterns of flame from P1 to P11. The pattern P1 is a white flame of a small size (first size). Pattern P2 is a small sized blue flame. Pattern P3 is a small sized green flame. Pattern P4
Is a green flame of medium size (second size larger than the first size). Pattern P5 is a medium sized yellow flame. Pattern P6 is a medium sized orange flame. The pattern P7 is an orange flame of a large size (third size larger than the second size). Pattern P8 is a large sized red flame. Pattern P9 is a large sized cherry flame. The pattern P10 is a cherry-colored flame having a shape in which a large-sized flame and a medium-sized flame overlap (a shape in which the third size and the second size are combined). The pattern P11 is an iridescent flame having a shape in which a large-sized flame and a medium-sized flame are superimposed.

The display mode of the flame of the pattern P1 corresponds to the count results "0" to "9" of the count effect. That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is “0” to “9”, the gaming machine 10 performs the lead-line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P1.

The display mode of the flame of the pattern P2 is that the counting result of the counting effect is “10” to “19”.
And correspond. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the counting result of the counting effect is “10” to “1”.
In the case of "9", squib effect with a flame of pattern P2 is performed.

The display mode of the flame of the pattern P3 is that the counting result of the counting effect is "20" to "29".
And correspond. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the counting result of the counting effect is "20" to "2".
In the case of “9”, squibing with a flame of pattern P3 is performed.

The display mode of the flame of the pattern P4 is that the counting result of the counting effect is "30" to "39".
And correspond. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the counting result of the counting effect is “30” to “3”.
In the case of “9”, convective line effect with a flame of pattern P4 is performed.

The display mode of the flame of the pattern P5 is that the counting result of the counting effect is "40" to "49".
And correspond. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the counting result of the counting effect is “40” to “4”.
In the case of “9”, convective effect with a flame of pattern P5 is performed.

In the display mode of the flame of pattern P6, the counting result of the counting effect is "50" to "59".
And correspond. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the counting result of the counting effect is “50” to “5”.
In the case of “9”, a convective line effect with a flame of pattern P6 is performed.

The display mode of the flame of the pattern P7 is that the counting result of the counting effect is "60" to "69".
And correspond. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the counting result of the counting effect is "60" to "6.
In the case of “9”, convective line effect with a flame of pattern P7 is performed.

The display mode of the flame of the pattern P8 is that the counting result of the counting effect is "70" to "79".
And correspond. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the counting result of the counting effect is “70” to “7.
In the case of “9”, the convective line effect with the flame of the pattern P8 is performed.

The display mode of the flame of pattern P9 is that the counting result of the counting effect is "80" to "89".
And correspond. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the counting result of the counting effect is "80" to "8.
In the case of “9”, convective effect with flame of pattern P9 is performed.

The display mode of the flame of the pattern P10 is that the counting result of the counting effect is “90” to “99”.
Corresponding. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the counting result of the counting effect is "90" to "
In the case of “99”, the convective line effect with the flame of the pattern P10 is performed.

In the display mode of the flame of the pattern P11, the count result of the count effect corresponds to "100". That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is “100”, the gaming machine 10 performs the convective line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P11.

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expectation to the pattern P1, sets the highest expectation (for example, big hit confirmation) to the pattern P11, and sets the expectation to increase stepwise from the pattern P1 to the pattern P11 . Note that the gaming machine 10 may set, for example, specific expectations from 0% to 100% in the patterns P1 to P11, and for example, “low”, “medium”, “high” As such, the size of a rough expectation may be set.

The gaming machine 10 may more specifically set the degree of expectation for each of the count results corresponding to each pattern. For example, the gaming machine 10 sets the degree of expectation so as to increase gradually as the count number increases (the count result "39" sets the degree of expectation higher than the count result "30"). The above is the relationship between the display mode of the flame, the count result, and the degree of expectation. Referring back to FIG. 52 (2), the description will be continued.

For example, when the effect display 519 ends the effect (ends the variable display game), it displays an effect (a flame does not reach the position corresponding to the board effect device 44) in which a part of the convective line is burned, When the effect is continued (developed), the effect that all the squibs burn out (the effect that the flame reaches the position corresponding to the board effect device 44) is displayed. According to such an effect, the player can grasp the end timing of the effect by the length of the squib. That is, the squib takes charge of specifying the end timing of the effect.

For example, when the gaming machine 10 displays an effect in which a part of the driving wire is burned, the effect is ended (the large symbol group is temporarily stopped in a mode of losing), and the variation display game is ended. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 continues (develops) the effect when it displays the effect that all the fuses burn out.
It transfers to the presentation mode of FIG. 52 (3). The gaming machine 10, for example, ends the effect when the result mode of the variable display game is off, and continues the effect when the result mode of the variable display game is a big hit (FIG. 52 (3) Transition to the presentation mode).

In addition, although the aspect of a flame was demonstrated as making it into an aspect corresponding to a count result, it is not restricted to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 may set the length of the squib line to a mode corresponding to the count result. In this case, for example, the gaming machine 10 may be configured to have a longer lead wire as the count result is smaller, or may be set to be longer as the count result is larger. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can also set the display mode (for example, the shape, the color, the pattern, etc.) of the squib line to the mode corresponding to the count result.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set the shortening speed of the squib to a fixed speed or a variable speed. As a result, even when the length of the squib is made to correspond to the count result, the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily adjust the time of presentation by the shortening speed of the squib.
For example, in the gaming machine 10, the duration of the fuse-line effect can be the same between the case where the fuse is long and the case where the fuse is short. In the game machine 10, the shortening speed of the squib may be set as an aspect corresponding to the count result, and the time of the effect may be adjusted arbitrarily according to the length of the squib.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 counts down the count result (“30” in the figure) displayed by the sub display device 501 so as to coincide with the termination timing of the convective effect, and clearly indicates the termination timing of the convective effect. May be In this case, the gaming machine 10 may movably switch the position of the sub display device 501 to the second position so that the countdown by the sub display device 501 can be more easily viewed.

The effect mode 520 shown in FIG. 52 (3) is an aspect after the effect mode 517, and is used to provide an effect (big hit notification effect) to notify that the variation display result is a big hit using the panel effect device 44. Shows an aspect of the moving state.

In the effect mode 520, the display device 41 displays the display screen 50 with the completion of the convective effect.
2 is displayed. Further, in the effect aspect 520, the board effect device 44 is located below (the display device 41
Operation toward the center of the), and notifies that the variation display result is a big hit.

In the effect mode 520, the sub display 501 performs an effect of clearly showing the jackpot symbol. The sub-display 501 clearly indicates that it is changing by turning on any one of the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides, and configured the big hit mode to the middle 3 7-segment LEDs Combination (“111”, “222”, “333”, “
“444”, “555”, “666”, “777”) are displayed in order. Then, the sub-display device 501 turns off the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides at a predetermined timing, and displays one of the combinations forming the big hit mode on the three 7-segment LEDs in the middle, It clearly indicates that the displayed combination is a jackpot symbol.

That is, the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides of the sub display device 501 are in charge of reporting that the big hit symbol continues to fluctuate in the big hit notification effect, and the sub display device 501
The three 7-segment LEDs in the middle are responsible for notification of the jackpot symbol combination.

Next, the execution timings of the count effect, the connecting line effect, and the big hit notification effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 shows count effect, convective effect effect according to the second embodiment,
And it is a timing chart which shows an example of execution timing of big hit information production.

The gaming machine 10 starts an N-th variable display game at timing t1 (FIG. 50 (1)).
. The gaming machine 10 has a timing t after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the Nth variable display game.
The counter effect is started to 2 and the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the first position to the second position (FIG. 50 (2)).

The gaming machine 10 movably switches the sub display device 501 to the second position, and starts count-up display using the sub display device 501 from timing t3 after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIG. 5).
0 (3), FIG. 51 (1). When the gaming machine 10 is executed for a predetermined time, counting up is finished at timing t4 (FIG. 51 (2)).

After the gaming machine 10 displays the count result for a predetermined time after the end of the count up,
At timing t5, the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the second position to the first position, and the counting effect is ended (FIG. 52 (1)). The gaming machine 10 starts conducting line effect at timing t6 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the counting effect (FIG. 52 (2)).

When the gaming machine 10 executes the conductor rendering for a predetermined time, the gaming effect ends at timing t7, and the jackpot notification rendering starts (FIG. 52 (3)).
Next, an effect mode determination process at the time of count effect execution will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect mode determination processing at the time of count effect execution of the second embodiment. The effect mode determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect mode determination process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit acquires the variation result of the target variation display game based on the reception command.
[Step D72] The control unit determines an aspect (count result) of the counting effect based on the reception command. For example, the control unit determines the count result using the lottery table based on the received command.

[Step D73] The control unit determines an aspect of the convective line effect based on the variation result (reception command) and the count result. The control unit determines the success or failure of the effect (whether or not to continue the effect) based on the variation result (reception command), and determines the display mode of the flame based on the count result.

[Step D74] The control unit determines whether the convective effect is successful and the effect continues. If the control unit determines that the effect does not continue (the variation result is not a big hit), it ends the presentation mode determination processing, and if it is determined that the effect continues (if the variation result is a big hit), the process proceeds to step D75. move on.

[Step D75] The control unit determines an aspect of the jackpot notification effect based on the received command. For example, the control unit determines a jackpot symbol indicated by the sub display device 501 in the jackpot notification effect based on the reception command.

In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine 10 reports the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game in the variable display game using the sub display device 501, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

For example, the gaming machine 10 can also notify the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game across the variable display game. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the start memory during standby for
The degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game of the start memory corresponding to the icon displayed on the hold display may be performed using the sub display device 501 continuously from in the digestion standby to after the digestion start . In this case, the gaming machine 10 notifies, for example, the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game of the start memory corresponding to the icon by turning on the icon displayed in the hold display. Clarify that.

In the above embodiment, the sub-display device 501 has been described as performing an effect corresponding to the time during which the sub-display device 501 is located at the second position. For example, the gaming machine 10 is between the first position and the second position when the movement limit (moving limit) from the first position is the second position. It is also possible to produce an effect corresponding to the duration of the state in the third position not including the first position. Here, the third position is a position including the second position.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first display means (display device 41), a second display means (sub display device 501), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The first display means can display the variable display game. The second display means is in the first position (FIG. 47 (1)
And the second position (FIG. 47 (2)), and a predetermined effect display can be displayed. The control means changes the display mode of the effect display according to the duration of the state in which the second display means is at the third position which is between the first position and the second position and does not include the first position. Count up display) to display information (expected degree) on the result mode of the variable display game on the second display means.

(2) The information on the result mode of the variable display game of (1) is the degree of expectation that the special variable display game derives the special result mode (big hit).
(3) The control means of (1) changes the display mode of the display element for notifying information on the result mode of the variable display game according to the duration.

(4) The control means of (1) displays the information corresponding to the information on the result aspect of the variable display game notified by the second display means after the display of the information on the result aspect of the variable display game by the second display means is finished The display effect (conduction line effect) of the mode (display mode of flame) is performed on the first display means.

(5) The second display unit of (1) is disposed on the front side of the first display unit, and the control unit is configured to display the display mode of the first display unit according to the position of the second display unit (display screen 502 , Display screen 50
9) Change it.

(6) The control means of (5) changes the display mode of the first display means so that the display element is not arranged in the portion located on the back side of the second display means.
Third Embodiment
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment can change the attitude of the sub display device 501, and can perform variable display of symbols in accordance with the attitude of the sub display device 501. First,
The posture state of the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the attitude state of the sub display device of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 can change the sub display device 501 into four attitude states. Figure 56.
(1) shows a posture state (standard posture state) which is a standard of the sub display device 501. The sub display 501 includes a 5-digit 7-segment display arranged in a row. Sub display 50
The standard posture state of 1 is a posture state in which the 5-digit 7-segment display device is in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the display device 41 (main display device). The sub display 501 projects to a position on the front of the display 41 where a 5-digit 7-segment display can be easily viewed by the player. For example, the sub display device 501 protrudes from the lower end of the display area of the display device 41 by a distance d1 into the display area.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the sub display device 501 in the standard posture state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a sub display device 50 with respect to the display device 41.
The visibility of 1 can be made superior.

FIG. 56 (2) shows a posture state (retraction posture state) in which the sub display device 501 is at least partially retracted from the front surface of the display device 41. The retreating posture state of the sub-display device 501 is a posture state in which the 5-digit seven-segment display in the front surface of the display device 41 is in the horizontal direction. However, the sub display device 501 retracts from the front of the display device 41 to a position where the 5-digit 7-segment display can not be easily viewed by the player. For example, a part of the sub display device 501 is accommodated in the center case (game effect structure) 40, and protrudes from the lower end of the display region of the display device 41 into the display region by a distance d2 (d2 <d1).

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the display device 41 in the retracted posture state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the visibility of the sub display device 501 inferior to the display device 41.

FIG. 56 (3) shows a state in which the sub display device 501 is tilted to the left (left tilt state). The left inclined posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the 5-digit 7-segment display device is inclined downward to the left on the front surface of the display device 41. The sub display device 501 protrudes to a position where the 5-digit seven-segment display can be easily viewed by the player while leaning leftward on the front surface of the display device 41. For example, the sub display device 501 projects from the lower end of the display area of the display device 41 into the display area at a left inclination of the angle α.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the sub display device 501 in the left inclined posture state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a sub display device 5 with respect to the display device 41.
The visibility of 01 can be made superior.

FIG. 56 (4) shows an attitude state in which the sub display device 501 is inclined to the right (right inclination state). The right inclination posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the 5-digit 7-segment display is inclined downward to the right on the front surface of the display device 41. The sub display device 501 protrudes to a position where the 5-digit seven-segment display can be easily viewed by the player while being inclined to the right on the front surface of the display device 41. For example, the sub display device 501 projects from the lower end of the display area of the display device 41 into the display area at the right inclination of the angle α.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the sub display device 501 in the right inclined posture state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a sub display device 5 with respect to the display device 41.
The visibility of 01 can be made superior.

First, the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 57.
These are figures (1) which show an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment.
In the variable display game shown in FIG. 57 (1), the display device 41 and the sub display device 50 while the symbols are stopped.
The display contents of 1 are shown. The gaming machine 10 can share the display content in the variable display game between the display device 41 and the sub display device 501, but the display device 41 shown in FIG.
The display in the variable display game is shared only by the display device 41. The display device 41 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, and a game guide 610 in the display content of the variable indication game while the symbols are stopped.

The two decorative patterns have a large symbol group 601 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 602 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 601 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is displayed large at the approximate center of the display device 41. Large symbol group 601
Includes the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R. The left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C and the right symbol 601R all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

Generally, the large symbol group 601 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C. Therefore, in the large symbol group 601, in many cases, the left symbol 601L and the right symbol 601R form a reach aspect, and it is possible to wait for the stop of the middle symbol 601C to form a hitting aspect.

The small symbol group 602 is in charge of reporting of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 602 is smallly displayed on the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. Small symbol group 602,
Includes left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 of the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

In general, the large symbol group 601 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 602, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be largely changed. On the contrary, small symbol group 602 is
Compared with the large symbol group 601, it is displayed smaller and the display position has less freedom (for example, position fixing).

The special figure 1 reservation number display 603 displays the number of pending storages (starting number of memories) of the special figure 1 game. A special figure 2 pending number display 604 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. The display device 41 displays the number “0” of the number of reservations stored in the special view 1 game on the special view 1 reservation number display 603, and the special view 2 reservation number display 60.
The number of reserved memories "0" of the special figure 2 game is displayed on 4.

The game guide 610 is a display for guiding the player of the game state. For example, game guide 61
The player is informed to the player by the message "right strike" that the game state is the gaming state corresponding to the right strike (more specifically, the general power support state etc.).

The display device 41 may include the hold display and the hold digest display in the display content. The hold display can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view variable display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 603 and the number of pending storage displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 604. With the display mode, it is possible to indicate that the special view variable display game is in the variable display state and to notify the degree of expectation for the game result.

In addition, although the gaming machine 10 has the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 each composed of three-digit symbols, it may have any number of digits as long as it includes one or more symbols. In addition, the gaming machine 10,
The large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 align the number of digits of the symbol, but the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 may have different numbers of digits of the symbol.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the transparency of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and the stop display, or even during the variable display (for example, changing the transparency from 0% to 50%), For the small symbol group 602, the transparency of the design can be fixed (for example, fixed to 0% transparency). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can ensure visibility of the small symbol group 602 while securing a variety of display effects for the large symbol group 601, and can easily grasp the gaming state of the player.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the hue of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 (for example, changing from red to blue) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display,
The hue of symbols for the small symbol group 602 can be fixed (for example, fixed to red). Further, the gaming machine 10 has a large symbol group 6 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display.
Even if the color saturation of the pattern is changed (for example, changed from 100% to 0%) for 01, the color saturation of the pattern for the small symbol group 602 may be fixed (for example, fixed to 100%) it can. In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the lightness of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 (for example, changing the lightness from 100% to 10%) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display, Fix the lightness of the symbol for the small symbol group 602 (for example
It can be fixed at 0%). In addition, the gaming machine 10 may change the size of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 (for example, change from the standard size to the enlargement (reduction) size) during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display. Even if it is, the size of the symbol can be fixed for the small symbol group 602. In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the display position of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 (during change, for example, from the center of the screen to the upper left of the screen) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display, The display position of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to the lower right of the screen) for the small symbol group 602. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may change the design of the symbol for the large symbol group 601 (for example, from rectangular to circular or from numeric to character) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display. Even if it is, the design of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to a number) for the small symbol group 602. Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the variation display mode of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 (for example, changing from vertical scrolling to horizontal scrolling) during the variable display, the variation display mode of the symbols for the small symbol group 602 Fixed (eg fixed to shaft rotation fluctuation)
can do.

Also with these features, the gaming machine 10 can ensure visibility of the small symbol group 602 while securing a variety of display effects for the large symbol group 601, and can make it easy for the player to grasp the gaming state.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the variation mode in the variation display different for the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602. For example, when vertically scrolling the large symbol group 601, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602. In addition, even when the gaming machine 10 updates the symbols asynchronously between the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

The sub display device 501 is a 5-digit display consisting of five 7-segment LEDs. Since each 7-segment LED functions as one display unit, the sub display device 501 includes five display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e. The sub display device 501 can display the display content related to the variable display game or the display content independent from the variable display game by the display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e. For example, the sub-display device 501 can display the number of acquired game balls, the cumulative number of fluctuations, the number of consecutive big hits, etc., and can display a lively display, an error notification, and the like. For example, Figure 5
The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 7 (1) includes the display portions 501a, 501b, 501c, and 501d.
, 501e in synchronization and in turn display a lively display in which one segment is sequentially lit.

In the variable display game shown in FIG. 57 (2), the display device 41 and the sub display device 50 are changing in symbol design.
The display contents of 1 are shown. The display device 41 shown in FIG. 57 (2) shares the display in the variable display game with only the display device 41.

The display device 41 displays the number of reserved memories "0" of the special figure 1 game on the special figure 1 number of reservations display 603, and displays the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 games "4" on the special figure 2 number of reservations display 604. . Further, the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R displayed by the display device 41 indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state. Further, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 displayed by the display device 41 indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

The gaming machine 10 forms a reach aspect in the process of forming the reach aspect because many players are interested in the formation of the reach aspect when the symbol variation is started from the symbol stop.
The 01L and the right symbol 601R are displayed larger than the middle symbol 601C.

The sub display device 501 performs the same display as during symbol stop. The sub display device 50
1 may have different displays during symbol variation and symbol suspension. For example,
The sub display device 501 performs a busy display as display content independent of the variable display game while symbol stoppage, and displays the number of acquired gaming balls and the cumulative number of fluctuations as display content related to the variable display game.

Next, a display example in which the sub display device 501 shares part of the display content in the variable display game will be described using FIG. FIG. 58 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the third embodiment.

In the variable display game, the display device 41 during symbol fluctuation and the sub display device 5 in the standard posture state
The display contents of 01 are shown in FIG. 58 (1). The display device 41 displays the small symbol group 602, the special figure 1 pending number indication 603, the special figure 2 pending number indication 604, the game guide 610, and the effect indication 611 as the display contents during the symbol variation of the variable indication game. Including. The sub display device 501 includes a large symbol group 601s in the display content during symbol variation of the variation display game.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 601 displayed on the display device 41 (FIG. 57 (1)).
, And (2)), the large symbol group 601s can be displayed on the sub display device 501. The large symbol group 601 s displayed by the sub display device 501 corresponds to the small symbol group 602 in the same manner as the large symbol group 601.

The sub display device 501 displays symbols using three arranged in the center of the display portions 501b, 501c, and 501d in the standard posture state, and displays decoration using two located at the end portions of the display portions 501a and 501e. . The display portions 501b, 501c, and 501d each have a left symbol 601.
L, the middle symbol 601C, the right symbol 601R are displayed, and symbol variations due to symbol switching are displayed. The symbol variation due to symbol switching will be described later with reference to FIG.

The display device 41 displays the effect display 611 instead of the large symbol group 601. Effect indication 611
Includes the character 612, the background 613, and the like. Thereby, the display device 41 is a large symbol group 6
By leaving the display of 01 to the sub display device 501, display effects can be performed using a large display area. The display device 41 also displays the large symbol group 601 as the sub display device 50.
By leaving it to 1, the interference between the large symbol group 601 and the display effect can be eliminated.

FIG. 58 (2) shows the display device 41 during symbol fluctuation in the variable display game and the display contents of the sub display device 501 in the left inclined posture state. The sub display device 501 displays symbols using five of the display portions 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e in the left inclined posture state. The display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e display symbol variations due to horizontal scrolling. The symbol variation due to the horizontal scroll will be described later with reference to FIG.

The display device 41 changes the display content according to the attitude of the sub display device 501. Display device 4
1 changes the display content of the effect display 611 corresponding to the attitude of the sub display device 501. For example, the character 612 is slide displayed to the left corresponding to the tilt of the sub display device 501. In addition, the background 613 is inclined corresponding to the inclination of the sub display device 501, and clearly indicates the correspondence between the attitude of the sub display device 501 and the effect display 611.

In addition, the display device 41 has display contents independent of the posture of the sub display device 501 for the small symbol group 602, the special figure 1 pending number indication 603, the special figure 2 pending number indication 604, and the game guide 610. Thereby, the display device 41 secures easy grasp of the gaming state by the player even if there is an effect according to the attitude of the sub display device 501.

Although the display content of the display device 41 when the sub display device 501 is in the left tilt posture state has been described, the same applies to the display content of the display device 41 when the sub display device 501 is in the right tilt posture state. it can. For example, when the sub display device 501 is in the right inclination posture state, the display device 41 slides the character 612 to the right corresponding to the inclination of the sub display device 501.

Next, symbol variation due to symbol switching in the sub display device 501 will be described using FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of symbol variation due to symbol switching in the sub display device of the third embodiment.

The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (1) is a large symbol group 60 in the symbol variation due to symbol switching.
Showing 1s. The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (1) includes the display portions 501b and 50b.
The symbols are switched and displayed using three arranged in the center of 1c and 501d, and display portions 501a and 501e
Display decoration (for example, G segment lighting, other lights off) using two located at the end of. In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (1), the display portion 501b switches the left symbol 601L, the display portion 501c switches the middle symbol 601C, and the display portion 501d switches the right symbol 601R at high speed by cross hatching. Show. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG.
Shows that the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C are being changed by symbol switching.

In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (2), the display portion 501b is "1" for the left symbol 601L.
Indicated by black filled numbers that stop display (including temporary stop) is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG.
In the sub display device 501 shown in 2), the display unit 501c displays the middle symbol 601C and the display unit 501d.
Cross hatching indicates that the right symbol 601R is being symbol switched.

In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (3), the display portion 501b is "1" for the left symbol 601L.
The black display indicates that the stop display is in progress and that the display portion 501c is in the stop display of the middle symbol 601C with "1". Further, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (3) indicates by cross hatching that the display portion 501d is switching the right symbol 601R. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (3) shows a state in which the reach is being changed.

In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (4), the display portion 501b is "1" for the left symbol 601L.
The stop display is in black, the display unit 501c is in the middle symbol 601C stop display with "1", and the display unit 501d is the right symbol 601R in stop display with "7" Indicated by filled numbers. That is, the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (4) shows the out-of-stop state after reach change.

In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (5), the display portion 501b is "1" for the left symbol 601L.
The stop display is in black, the display unit 501c is in the middle symbol 601C stop display with "1", and the display unit 501d is the right symbol 601R in stop display with "1". Indicated by filled numbers. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (5) shows the hit stop mode after the reach change.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform symbol variation by symbol switching using the sub display device 501. In addition, the sub display device 501 has a lighting mode (for example, a color of a symbol,
The symbol can be displayed by making it possible to distinguish between the stop state and the temporary stop state by the brightness, the blinking cycle, and the like.

Next, symbol variation due to horizontal scrolling in the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of symbol variation due to horizontal scrolling in the sub-display device of the third embodiment.

The sub display device 501 sets a symbol array 615 in which symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction when performing symbol variation by horizontal scroll. The symbol array 615 includes three symbols and two located on both sides thereof
One decoration indication (for example, G segment on, other off) is repeatedly arranged. For example,
The symbol array 615 is a partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2-" including an ornamental indication, "-, 1, 1
, 1,-","-, 1, 1, 2- ","-, 1, 1, 2- ","-, 1, 1, 1-
'In order from the left.

The gaming machine 10 performs horizontal scrolling while changing the posture state of the sub display device 501. First, the sub display device 501 displays a partial symbol array “−, 1, 1, 2, −” shown in FIG. 60A in the standard posture state as a large symbol group 601 s.

Next, the gaming machine 10 changes the attitude of the sub display device 501 from the standard attitude to the right inclination attitude. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 601 s to the left on the symbol array 615 when the posture state of the sub display device 501 is the right inclination posture state. That is, the sub display device 50
The symbol 1 indicates symbol variation in which the large symbol group 601s scrolls horizontally in the right direction.

When the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls in the right direction by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2,-" (see FIG. 60 (1)), the partial symbols in the large symbol group 601s Array "
-,-, 1, 1, 2 "(see FIG. 60 (2)) is displayed.

Similarly, the sub display device 501 displays the partial symbol array “−, −, 1, 1, 2” (FIG.
When 2) and 4) (four digits) are horizontally scrolled in the right direction, the partial symbol array “−, 1, 1, 1, −” (see FIG. 60 (3)) is displayed on the large symbol group 601s.

Then, when the sub display device 501 reaches the end of the symbol array 615 and displays the partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2,-" (see FIG. 60 (4)) on the large symbol group 601s, the sub display device The posture state of 501 is changed from the right inclined posture state to the standard posture state. At this time, the gaming machine 10
Can set the partial symbol array being displayed in the large symbol group 601s as a stop symbol. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can re-variate the partial symbol array being displayed on the large symbol group 601s as a temporary stop symbol.

For example, the gaming machine 10 changes the attitude state of the sub display device 501 from the standard attitude state to the left inclined attitude state. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 601s to the right in the symbol array 615 when the posture state of the sub display device 501 is the left slant posture state. That is, the sub display 5
The symbol 01 displays symbol variation in which the large symbol group 601s scrolls horizontally in the left direction.

When the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls in the left direction by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2,-" (see FIG. 60 (4)), the partial symbols in the large symbol group 601s Array "
“1, 1, 2 −, −” (see FIG. 60 (5)) is displayed.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can change the posture state of the sub display device 501, and can perform symbol variation according to the posture state of the sub display device 501. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform a novel display effect on the player, and can further improve the interest. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (operation state) of the sub display device 501.

The symbol array 615 includes three symbols “1, 1, 1” and “1” included in the partial symbol array.
, 1, 2-"" only, but may be a symbol combination not limited to this. Further, although the symbol array 615 has the same partial symbol array in an overlapping manner, it may have a partial symbol array having no overlap.

Next, display effect determination processing for determining a display effect corresponding to the posture state of the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of display effect determination processing in the effect control device of the third embodiment.

The display effect determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The display effect determination process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

[Step D81] The control unit determines the presence or absence of the variable display effect in the sub display device 501. When there is no variable display effect in the sub display device 501, that is, when the display in the variable display game is shared by only the display device 41, the control unit proceeds to step D82.
When there is a variable display effect in the sub display device 501, that is, when the display in the variable display game is shared by the display device 41 and the sub display device 501, the control unit performs step D
Go to 83.

[Step D82] Since the control unit shares the display in the variable display game with only the display device (main display device) 41, the control unit sets the variable display effect by the display device 41, and ends the display effect determination process.

[Step D83] The control unit determines whether or not there is a change in attitude of the sub display device 501. The control unit proceeds to step D84 when there is a posture change in the sub display device 501, and proceeds to step D88 when there is no posture change.

[Step D84] The control unit determines whether the posture change in the sub display device 501 is in the left inclined posture state. The control unit proceeds to step D85 if the posture change in the sub display device 501 is in the left tilt posture state, and proceeds to step D86 if it is not in the left tilt posture state.

[Step D85] The control unit controls the display device (main display device) 41 and the sub display device 501.
Set the left tilt fluctuation display effect by. The left tilt fluctuation display effect on the display device 41 is
The display content includes effect presentation 611 according to the left inclined posture state of the sub display device 501. Also,
The left tilt fluctuation display effect in the sub display device 501 is displayed on the display portions 501a, 501b, and 501.
Includes pattern variation by horizontal scroll using c, 501d, and 501e.

[Step D86] The control unit determines whether or not the posture change in the sub display device 501 is a right tilt posture state. The control unit proceeds to step D87 when the posture change in the sub display device 501 is the right inclination posture state, and proceeds to step D88 when the posture change in the sub display device 501 is not the right inclination posture state.

[Step D87] The control unit controls the display device (main display device) 41 and the sub display device 501.
Set the right tilt fluctuation display effect by. The right tilt fluctuation display effect on the display device 41 is
The display contents include effect display 611 according to the right inclination posture state of the sub display device 501. Also,
The right tilt fluctuation display effect in the sub display device 501 is displayed on the display portions 501a, 501b, and 501.
Includes pattern variation by horizontal scroll using c, 501d, and 501e.

[Step D88] The control unit sets, among the variable display effects, variable display effects (partial change display effects) not shared by the sub display device 501.
[Step D89] The control unit sets, among the variable display effects shared by the sub display device 501, a variable display effect (partial change display effect) that does not involve a posture change, and ends the display effect determination process.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform display effects according to the posture state of the sub display device 501 with the display device 41 and the sub display device 501.
Next, posture change of the sub display device 501 based on the player's operation received from the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. First, the push button (option setting unit) 25 provided in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an exemplary arrangement of push button LEDs and touch sensors in the push button according to the third embodiment.

The push button 25 is a push button LED, a touch sensor, and a push button S
Including W The push button LEDs are nine full color LEDs. The touch sensor can detect the player's touch operation at eight places. Push button SW, push button 2
The pressing operation of 5 can be detected.

The effect control device 300 and the push button 25 are electrically connected. The effect control device 300 outputs a control signal of the push button LED to the push button 25, and inputs a detection signal of the touch sensor and a detection signal of the push button SW from the push button 25.

Here, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b described with reference to FIG.
I will explain it again. The selection button switch 25 a and the determination button switch 25 b are signals detected by a combination of a detection signal of the touch sensor and a detection signal of the push button SW. For example, a state in which the touch sensor detects a touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW detects a press operation of the push button 25;
This corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. A state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25 b.

The push button 25 has a cylindrical shape in which the approximate shape of the surface, which is the upper surface when the player crawls, is substantially circular. The push button 25 has nine small circular portions 250 with a size of a fingertip on its upper surface.
Through the small circle 250 at the center of the upper surface, and 8 on the circumference surrounding the small circle 250.
Place the two small circles 251-258.

The small circle portion 250 arranges one push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW4) within its circumference. The small circle portion 251 is located in the left direction of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW1) within its circumference. The small circle portion 252 is positioned in the upper left direction of the small circle portion 250, and one push button LED and one
One touch sensor (TSW2) is disposed within its circumference. The small circle portion 253 is a small circle portion 25
One push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW3) located above 0
And are placed within its circumference. The small circle portion 254 is positioned obliquely upward to the right of the small circle portion 250, and 1
The system push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW5) are disposed within the circumference. The small circle portion 255 is located to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW6) within its circumference. Small circle part 256 is small circle part 2
Located 50 diagonally downward to the right, one push button LED and one touch sensor (T
Place SW7) within its circumference. The small circle portion 257 is located below the small circle portion 250,
One push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW8) are disposed within the circumference. The small circle portion 258 is positioned diagonally downward to the left of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED within its circumference. Since the small circle portion 258 does not arrange a touch sensor,
It has a star-shaped polygonal design to make it easy to distinguish it from the small circular portions 250-257 in which the touch sensor is disposed. Further, since the small circle portion 258 does not arrange a touch sensor, it can be a home position when the player operates eight touch sensors. When the push button 25 is at the center of the gaming machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side, the small circle portion 258 is positioned on the front left side among the small circle portions 251 to 258 when viewed from the player side. , Makes it easy for the player to treat the small circle portion 258 as a home position.

Although the push button 25 does not arrange a touch sensor in the small circle portion 258, a touch sensor may be arranged in the same manner as the small circle portions 250-257. Also, push button 25
In place of the touch sensor, the touch panel may be provided with a touch panel capable of detecting position coordinates of the player's touch operation. In that case, the effect control device 300 can detect the touch operation of the small circle portions 250 to 258 from the coordinates corresponding to the small circle portions 250 to 258 and the position coordinates detected by the touch panel.

Next, the relationship between the push button operation and the attitude change state of the sub display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the push button operation according to the third embodiment and the attitude change state of the sub display device.

The control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 can detect a predetermined touch operation from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25. The control unit can change the posture state of the sub display device 501 located on the front surface of the display device 41 according to the detected touch operation.

For example, the control unit can detect a counterclockwise touch operation as shown in (1A) from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25 and detects the counterclockwise touch operation of the push button 25. The posture state of the sub display device 501 can be changed from the standard posture state to the left inclined posture state as shown in (1B).

Further, the control unit can detect a clockwise touch operation as shown in (2A) from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25 and detects the clockwise touch operation of the push button 25 to display the sub display The posture state of the device 501 can be changed from the standard posture state to the right inclined posture state as shown in (2B).

Further, since the gaming machine 10 can perform symbol variation display according to the posture state of the sub display device 501, it is possible to perform an effect that the player operation intervenes in the symbol variation display.
Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (operation state) of the sub display device 501.

In the gaming machine 10, although the sub display device 501 is a 5-digit display composed of five 7-segment LEDs, a dot matrix display or an LCD display may be used. In addition, although the gaming machine 10 receives the player's operation from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25, the present invention is not limited to the touch operation, and pressing operation of the button SW, lever operation or stick operation, input operation by gesture or voice Or the like.

Although not shown, the gaming machine 10 can change and control the attitude of the sub display device 501 by the operation of one or more actuators (such as a motor and a solenoid).
Modification 1 of Third Embodiment
The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the third embodiment is capable of changing the posture state of the sub display device 501 in the front-rear direction, and performing variation display of symbols corresponding to the posture state of the sub display device 501. it can. About the attitude | position state of the sub display apparatus 501 of the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment FIG.
This will be described using 4. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the posture change state and the fluctuation display of the sub display device of the modification 1 of the third embodiment. The diagrams shown in FIGS. 64 (1A), (2A), and (3A) are
It is the image figure which looked at the display apparatus 41 and the sub display apparatus 501 from the side. Figure 64 (1B)
, (2B), (3B) are diagrams showing a variation display mode in the sub display device 501. The gaming machine 10 can change the sub display device 501 to, for example, three attitude states.

The drawing shown in (1A) shows a posture state (standard posture state) which is a standard of the sub display device 501. The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41 (main display device). The standard posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the display surface of the display device 41 and the display surface of the sub display device 501 are substantially parallel, and in the posture state in which the display surface of the sub display device 501 faces the front. is there. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by symbol switching in the sub display device 501 ((1B)).

The drawing shown in (2A) shows a posture state in which the sub display device 501 is tilted backward (backward tilt state). The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41. The backward tilt posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the display screen upper end side of the sub display device 501 is closer to the display surface of the display device 41 compared to the display screen lower end side, and the display surface of the sub display device 501 is It is a posture that turns diagonally upward. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by vertical scrolling downward on the sub display device 501 ((2B)).

The figure shown to (3A) shows the attitude | position state (forward inclination attitude | position state) which the sub display apparatus 501 leaned forward. The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41. The forwardly inclined posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the lower end side of the display surface of the sub display device 501 is closer to the display surface of the display device 41 as compared with the upper end side of the display surface It is in the posture that turns diagonally downward. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by vertical scroll upward in the sub display device 501 ((3B)).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform symbol variation display in accordance with the attitude state of the sub display device 501. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the posture state of the sub display device 501 in response to the player's operation, or may perform an effect in which the player intervenes in the symbol change display. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (operation state) of the sub display device 501.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the third embodiment is capable of changing the posture state of the sub display device 501 in the left and right direction, and performing variation display of symbols corresponding to the posture state of the sub display device 501. it can. About the attitude | position state of the sub display apparatus 501 of the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment FIG.
This will be described using 5. FIG. 65 is a view showing an example of the posture change state and the fluctuation display of the sub display device of the modified example 2 of the third embodiment. The diagrams shown in FIGS. 65 (1A), (2A) and (3A) are
It is the image figure which looked at the display apparatus 41 and the sub display apparatus 501 upwards. Figure 65 (1B)
, (2B), (3B) are diagrams showing a variation display mode in the sub display device 501. The gaming machine 10 can change the sub display device 501 to, for example, three attitude states.

The drawing shown in (1A) shows a posture state (standard posture state) which is a standard of the sub display device 501. The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41 (main display device). The standard posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the display surface of the display device 41 and the display surface of the sub display device 501 are substantially parallel, and in the posture state in which the display surface of the sub display device 501 faces the front. is there. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by symbol switching in the sub display device 501 ((1B)).

The drawing shown in (2A) shows a posture state in which the sub display device 501 is inclined backward to the right (right inclination posture state). The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41. In the right-tilt posture state of the sub display device 501, the display device 4 is compared with the display screen 4 at the right end side of the display surface 4 in comparison with the display surface 4 side.
In the posture state in which the display surface of the sub display device 501 is directed obliquely to the right. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by rightward horizontal scroll on the sub display device 501 ((2B)).

The drawing shown in (3A) shows a posture state in which the sub display device 501 is tilted backward to the left (left tilt posture state). The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41. In the left inclined posture state of the sub display device 501, the display surface 4 of the sub display device 501 on the left side is compared with the display surface 4 on the right side.
The display state is close to the display surface 1 and the display surface of the sub display device 501 is in the posture facing diagonally to the left. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by horizontal scroll in the left direction on the sub display device 501 ((3B)).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform symbol variation display in accordance with the attitude state of the sub display device 501. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the posture state of the sub display device 501 in response to the player's operation, or may perform an effect in which the player intervenes in the symbol change display. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (operation state) of the sub display device 501.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
The symbol array 615 of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes three symbols and two located on both sides thereof.
Although one decorative display is repeatedly arranged, the gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the third embodiment repetitively arranges only the symbols without including the decorative display. Sub Display Device 501 of Modification 3 of Third Embodiment
The symbol variation due to the horizontal scroll in the symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 shows the third.
It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display in the sub display apparatus of the modified example 3 of embodiment.

The sub display device 501 sets a symbol array 616 in which symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction when performing symbol variation by horizontal scroll. The symbol array 616 is a combination of hit symbols (eg,
"1, 1, 1", "2, 2, 2", etc. are repeatedly arranged.

The gaming machine 10 performs horizontal scrolling while changing the posture state of the sub display device 501. First, the sub display device 501 displays the partial symbol arrays “4, 4 and 5” shown in FIG. 66 (1) as the large symbol group 601s in the standard posture state.

Next, the gaming machine 10 changes the attitude of the sub display device 501 from the standard attitude to the right inclination attitude. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 617 to the left on the symbol array 616 when the sub display device 501 is in the right inclination posture state. That is, the sub display device 501
The symbol display indicates that the large symbol group 617 scrolls horizontally in the right direction.

When the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls in the right direction by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array “4, 4, 5” (see FIG. 66 (1)), the partial symbol array “4, 4,4
(See FIG. 66 (2)).

Similarly, when the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls in the right direction by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array “4, 4, 4” (see FIG. 66 (2)), the partial symbols in the large symbol group 617 The array "3, 4, 4" (see FIG. 66 (3)) is displayed.

Then, when the sub display device 501 reaches the end of the symbol array 616 and displays the partial symbol array "7, 1, 1" (see FIG. 66 (4)) in the large symbol group 617, the posture state of the sub display device 501. Is changed from the right inclined posture state to the standard posture state. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can set the partial symbol arrangement being displayed in the large symbol group 617 as a stop symbol. In addition, the gaming machine 10,
The partial symbol array being displayed in the large symbol group 617 can be temporarily stopped and re-varied.

For example, the gaming machine 10 changes the attitude state of the sub display device 501 from the standard attitude state to the left inclined attitude state. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 617 to the right by the symbol array 616 when the posture state of the sub display device 501 is the left inclination posture state. That is, the sub display device 50
The symbol 1 indicates symbol variation in which the large symbol group 617 horizontally scrolls in the left direction.

When the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls in the left direction by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array “7, 1, 1” (see FIG. 66 (4)), the partial symbol array “1, 1” 1,1
“(See FIG. 66 (5))”.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can change the posture state of the sub display device 501, and can perform symbol variation according to the posture state of the sub display device 501. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display a symbol combination that is a hit or a symbol combination that is “off” by merely moving the large symbol group 617 on the symbol array 616 by repeatedly arranging a combination of hit symbols. it can.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform a novel display effect on the player, and can further improve the interest. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (operation state) of the sub display device 501.

Although the gaming machine 10 is capable of changing the attitude state of the sub display device 501 based on the display device 41, it has an aspect that the attitude state of the sub display device 501 can be changed based on the gaming board 30.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth modification of the third embodiment can produce double reach using a 5-digit display (sub display device 501) composed of five 7-segment LEDs. Double reach produced using the sub display device 501 will be described using FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of variable display in the sub display according to the fourth modification of the third embodiment; FIG. 68 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the variable display in the sub display according to the fourth modification of the third embodiment;

The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (1) is a large symbol group 61 during symbol variation due to symbol switching.
8 is being displayed. The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (1) includes the display portions 501b and 501b.
The symbols are switched and displayed using three arranged in the center of c and 501d, and decoration display (for example, G segment lighting, other lights off) is performed using two located at the end of the display portions 501a and 501e.
In the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (1), the display 501b switches the left symbol 601L, the display 501c switches the middle symbol 601C, and the display 501d switches the right symbol 601R at high speed by cross hatching. Show. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (1) indicates that the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C are being changed by symbol switching.

In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (2), the display portion 501b is "4" for the left symbol 601L.
Indicated by black filled numbers that stop display (including temporary stop) is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG.
In the sub display device 501 shown in 2), the display unit 501c displays the middle symbol 601C and the display unit 501d.
Cross hatching indicates that the right symbol 601R is being symbol switched.

In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (3), the display portion 501b is "4" for the left symbol 601L.
The fact that the stop display is in progress and the fact that the display portion 501d is in the stop display at “5” of the right symbol 601R is indicated by a black fill number. Further, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (3) indicates by cross hatching that the display portion 501c is in the middle of the symbol 601C in symbol switching. That is, the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG.

Then, when the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (3) does not derive the reach, the sub display device 501 displays the middle symbol 601C in the stop state, and becomes the "outage stop mode". For example, the sub display device 501 shows the “falling stop mode” as shown in FIG. 68 (6). In the sub display device 501, the display portion 501b is displaying the left symbol 601L at "4" for stop display, the display portion 501c is displayed at the middle symbol 601C for "6", and the display portion 501d is displayed. Right pattern 601R "5"
Indicated that the stop display is displayed with a black fill number.

On the other hand, when the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (3) derives the reach, the decorative display of the display portions 501a and 501e is switched to the symbol display before the middle symbol 601C is stopped and displayed. At this time, the sub display device 501 displays the symbol displayed by the display unit 501 b on the display unit 5.
It is also displayed on 01a. The sub display device 501 also displays the symbol displayed by the display unit 501d on the display unit 501e.

As a result, the sub display device 501 shows a display mode as shown in FIG. Figure 6
The sub display device 501 shown in 7 (4) is a display mode for producing a double reach. The sub display device 501 indicates that the display units 501a and 501b are displaying the stop at "4" and that the display units 501d and 501e are displaying the stop at "5" by black-filled numerals. The cross hatching indicates that the display unit 501c is switching symbols.

The sub display device 501 sets two large symbol groups 619 and 620 instead of the large symbol group 618. As a result, the sub display device 501 receives the reach by the large symbol group 619 and the large symbol group 6.
Produce a double reach consisting of 20 reach.

Large symbol group 619 includes three symbols aligned from the left end of display portions 501a, 501b, and 501c as left symbol 601L, middle symbol 601C, and right symbol 601R. Large symbol group 620 includes three symbols arranged from the right end of display portions 501c, 501d, and 501e as left symbol 601L, middle symbol 601C, and right symbol 601R. That is, the display unit 501a is a large symbol group 619.
The left symbol 601 L is displayed, and the display unit 501 b displays the middle symbol 6 in the large symbol group 619.
01C is displayed, the display unit 501c displays the right symbol 601R in the large symbol group 619 and the left symbol 601L in the large symbol group 620, and the display unit 501d displays and displays the middle symbol 601C in the large symbol group 620. The part 501e displays the right symbol 601R in the large symbol group 620.

Thereby, the sub display device 501 displays reach for waiting for the stop of the right symbol 601R in the large symbol group 619, and displays reach for waiting for the stop of the left symbol 601L in the large symbol group 620.

Then, when the sub display device 501 derives the hit stop mode in the large symbol group 619, as shown in FIG. 68 (1), the sub display 501 stops and displays "4" on the display unit 501c. Thereby, the sub display device 501 displays the hit stop mode with the large symbol group 619 and displays the “disengagement stop mode” with the large symbol group 620. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (2), the sub display device 501 is based on the large symbol group 619 derived from the stop pattern of the large symbol group 619 and the stop pattern of the large symbol group 620 and derived from the stop pattern. The stop mode in the large symbol group 618 is displayed.

Further, when the sub display device 501 derives the hit stop mode in the large symbol group 620, as shown in FIG. 68 (3), the sub display 501 stops and displays "5" on the display unit 501c. Thereby, the sub display device 501 displays the hit stop mode with the large symbol group 620 and displays the “disengagement stop mode” with the large symbol group 619. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (4), the sub display device 501 is based on the large symbol group 620 derived from the stop pattern of the large symbol group 619 and the stop pattern of the large symbol group 620 and derived from the stop pattern. The stop mode in the large symbol group 618 is displayed.

In addition, when the sub display device 501 derives the “disengagement stop mode” in the large symbol group 620, as shown in FIG. 68 (5), for example, “6” is stopped and displayed on the display unit 501c. As a result, the sub display device 501 displays the “disengagement stop mode” in the large symbol groups 619 and 620. Then, based on the stop mode of large symbol group 619 and the stop mode of large symbol group 620, sub display device 501 displays the stop mode in large symbol group 618 as shown in FIG. 68 (6).

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can produce double reach using the sub display device 501.
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the modification) described above has the following features in one aspect.

(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display device (sub display device 501) and control means (game control device 1).
00, effect control device 300). The display device can change its posture. The control means causes the display device to perform the first operation when the display device is changed to the first attitude (for example, the left inclined attitude state).
The second display effect (for example, horizontal scroll in the right direction) on the display device when the display effect (for example, horizontal scroll in the left direction) is displayed and the display device is changed to the second posture (for example, right inclined posture state) Is displayed.

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes the rear display device (display device 41) at a position overlapping the display device on the rear surface side of the display device (sub display device 501). Furthermore, the control means of (1) is
When the display device is changed to the first posture, the third display effect (for example, the background 613 inclined according to the inclination of the sub display device 501, the character 612 slidingly displayed on the left side) is displayed on the back side display device And when the display device is changed to the second position,
The display effect (for example, a background 613 inclined according to the inclination of the sub display device 501, a character 612 which is slide displayed on the right side) is displayed.

(3) The gaming machine 10 has display means (sub display device 501) and control means (game control device 1).
00, effect control device 300). The display means can display the variable display game by arranging five displays (7-segment type LEDs) capable of displaying symbols respectively in a row. The control means is capable of displaying the variable display game on the first effective line (large symbol group 618) formed by three of the five displays (see FIG. 67 (3)) And a second effective line (large symbol group 619) formed by three indicators from one side end of the five indicators.
) And the second state (FIG. 67) in which the variable display game can be displayed on the third effective line (large symbol group 620) formed by the three displays from the other end of the five displays. (Refer to (4))
And can be switched and controlled.

Fourth Embodiment
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has a playability that can display the special view 1 and the special view 2 simultaneously in a variable manner. The game characteristics of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 shows a game state transition diagram of the fourth embodiment and an example of the probability fluctuation state.

A state transition diagram regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is shown in FIG. The gaming machine 10 sets the normal state St1, the big hit state St2, the specific state 1St3 and the specific state 2St4 as main game states.

The normal state St1 is a main gaming state, and both the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game have low probability states, and is a gaming state in which there is no power transmission support. Normal state St
1 is a gaming state in which the player is guided to the left strike game. In the left-handed game, the gaming ball flows down the lower left side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has the game property of making the gaming ball win the prize mainly in the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) in the normal state St1 and waiting for the occurrence of the big hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 has the game property of waiting for the occurrence of the big hit derived by the special view 1 variable display game in the normal state St1. The gaming machine 10 has a transition condition Tr from the normal state St1 to the big hit state St2.
Let 12 be the occurrence of a big hit.

The jackpot state St2 is the jackpot state derived from the special view 1 variation display game, and the special view 2
The game state includes the jackpot state derived by the variable display game. The gaming machine 10 is
In the big hit state, the special fluctuation winning device (big winning opening, big winning opening 2) 3 in the big hit derived by the special figure 1 variable display game and the big hit derived by the special figure 2 variable display game
Convert 8 to the open state.

The gaming machine 10 sets the end of the jackpot as a transition condition from the jackpot state St2 to another gaming state,
Among them, the gaming state after the big hit end is low probability and no general support is made transition condition Tr21 from the big hit state St2 to the normal state St1 and the gaming state after the big hit is high probability and the general power support is specified from the big hit state St2 The transition condition Tr23 to the state 1St3 is set as the transition condition Tr23, and the gaming state after the big hit is high probability and no general support is from the big hit state St2 to the specific state 2St
A transition condition Tr24 to 4 is set.

The specific state 1St3 is a high probability state in which both the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game are in a high probability state, and is a gaming state in which there is a power transmission support. The specific state 1St3 is a gaming state in which the player is guided to the right-handed game. In the right-handed game, the gaming ball flows down the right side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32. Therefore, the gaming machine 10
In the specific state 1St3, the game ball is played mainly in the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 1) to wait for the occurrence of a big hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 is in the specific state 1St.
It has the play characteristic which waits for generation | occurrence | production of the big hit derived | led by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in 3. The gaming machine 10 sets the transition condition Tr32 from the specific state 1St3 to the big hit state St2 as the occurrence of a big hit. Further, the gaming machine 10 sets the transition condition Tr34 from the specific state 1St3 to the specific state 2St4 as the termination of the power transmission support. For example, in the specific state 1St3, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are variably displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the gaming machine 10 ends the power transmission support.

The specific state 2St4 is a gaming state in which both the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game are in high probability states, and there is no power transmission support. The specific state 2St4 is a gaming state in which the player is guided to the right-handed game. In the right-handed game, the gaming ball flows down the right side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32. Therefore, the gaming machine 10
In the specific state 2St4, it has a playability that makes the game ball win the prize in the start winning opening 92 (starting opening 2) and waits for the occurrence of a big hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 has the game property of waiting for the occurrence of the big hit derived by the special view 2 variable display game in the specific state 2St4. The gaming machine 10 sets the transition condition Tr42 from the specific state 2St4 to the big hit state St2 as the occurrence of a big hit.

Here, the probability fluctuation state of the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game shown in FIG. 69 (2) will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can derive small hits in addition to the big hit. The gaming machine 10 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 into the open state by the occurrence of the big hit in the special view 1 variable display game and the special view 2 variable display game. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 converts the special variation winning device 95 into the open state by the occurrence of the small hit of the special view 1 variation display game, and the special variation winning device 38 by the occurrence of the small hitting of the special view 2 variation display game. Convert to open state. The small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is a relatively high value small hit because there are more prize balls obtainable than the small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, both the big hit probability and the small hit probability are set low probability in the low probability state, the high probability is set to the big hit probability in the high probability state, and the low probability is set to the small hit probability. For example, the special figure 1 variation display game has a big hit probability 1/2 in the low probability state.
50, and 1/50 in the high probability state. Further, in the special view 1 variation display game, the small hit probability is set to 1/10000 (low probability state).

In the special figure 2 variation display game, both the big hit probability and the small hit probability are set low probability in the low probability state, and the high probability is set both the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the high probability state. For example, in the special view 2 variation display game, the jackpot probability is set to 1/250 in the low probability state and 1/50 in the high probability state. In the special figure 2 variation display game, the small hitting probability is set to 1/10000 in the low probability state, and 9999/10000 in the high probability state.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 has the game property of increasing the number of winning balls by small hit in the specific state 2St4, in addition to the game of increasing the number of winning balls by the big hit in the big hit state St2.
Here, regarding the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 in the specific state 2St4, FIG.
This will be described using FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the display screen in the display device according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of the display screen in the display device according to the fourth embodiment.

The display contents of the display device 41 and the sub display device 501 in the specific state 2St4 are shown in FIG.
Shown in). The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 70 (1) indicates that the symbol is being changed in the variable display game. The display device 41 includes a small symbol 625, a special figure 1 pending number display 603, a special figure 2 pending number display 604, and a game guide 610 in the display contents of the variable display game while the symbol is stopped. The small symbol 625 is one of the decorative symbols, and is displayed small on the peripheral portion of the display device 41. The small symbol 625 is displayed as a single digit symbol variation.

Further, the display device 41 sets an effect area 622 and displays an effect display 623. For example, the effect display 623 produces a match between two characters (main character (left) and enemy character (right)).

In addition, the gaming machine 10, the sub display 5 in front of the display 41 in the specific state 2St4
01 is made to appear, and the cumulative number of acquired winning balls obtained during the specific state 2St4 is displayed on the sub display device 501. The cumulative winning number of balls is reset at the normal state St1. For example, the sub-display device 501 indicates that the accumulated winning number of balls is "410". In addition, the cumulative winning prize number of balls is
It may be the cumulative winning prize ball number acquired in the jackpot state St2, the specific state 1St3, and the specific state 2St4.

The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 70 (2) shows the state at the time of symbol stop in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “o” as a small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. Further, the display device 41 sets the effect area 622 and displays the effect display 624. For example, the effect display 624 produces a victory of the main character (left) of the two characters (the main character (left) and the enemy character (right)). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 guides the small hit occurrence with the small symbol 625 and the effect area 622.

The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71 (1) shows the state of a small hit in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “o” as a small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. Also,
The display device 41 displays a large symbol 626 in the effect area 622. The large design 626 is one of the decorative patterns, and is displayed large at the central portion of the effect area 622. The large symbol 626 is displayed with the symbol variation omitted. The display device 41 displays, for example, white “7” (hereinafter “white 7”) as a small hit symbol of the large symbol 626. Therefore, the large symbol 626 is a symbol for notifying that the result of the variable display game is a small hit.

The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71 (2) also shows the state of a small hit in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “o” as a small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. Further, the display device 41 displays a large symbol 627 in the effect area 622. The large design 627 is one of the decorative patterns, and is displayed large at the central portion of the effect area 622. The large symbol 627 is displayed with no symbol variation. The display device 41 displays, for example, “7” (hereinafter, “gold 7”) of gold (indicated by hatching) as a small hit symbol of the large symbol 627. Therefore, the large symbol 627 is also a symbol notifying that the result of the variable display game is a small hit.

However, the gaming machine 10 does not display the large pattern 627 only when the result of the variable display game is a small hit. In the gaming machine 10, the result of the variable display game is a small hit,
When the specific state 2St4 continues a predetermined number of times, the large symbol 627 is displayed with a predetermined probability.

For example, when there is no start memory for deriving a big hit in the start memory on hold, the gaming machine 10 is replaced with the large symbol 626 (i.e. "white 7") and the large symbol 627 (i.e. "gold 7")
Can be displayed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that there is no start memory for deriving a big hit among the start memories on hold. For example, the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71 (2) displays “4” in the special view 2 reservation number display 604, and thus can guide that no big hit is included in any of the four start memories. it can.

In the specified state 2St4, the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the specified state 2St4 continues until at least the pending start memory is digested by displaying "gold 7". Since the gaming machine 10 has the gaming property of increasing the number of award winning balls by a small hit in the specific state 2St4, displaying "gold 7" can improve the interest that the player can perceive.

Further, the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71 (2) displays a state guidance display 628 in the effect area 622. The state guidance display 628 is a band-shaped message display, which is vertically arranged on both sides of the effect area 622, displays the message "absolute invincibility", and guides the continuation of the specific state 2St4. The gaming machine 10 displays “gold 7” and the status guidance display 628 simultaneously,
It is possible to further improve the interest that the player can feel.

In addition, the gaming machine 10, large symbol 626 (ie "white 7") or large symbol 627 (ie "
Update the cumulative award winnings while displaying the gold 7 "). For example, the sub display device 501
Indicates that the cumulative award winning ball number is "420".

FIG. 72 (1) shows the display contents of the display device 41 for the next fluctuation after displaying "gold 7". The display device 41 shown in FIG. 72 (1) shows a state in which the symbol is being changed in the variable display game. The display device 41 continues to display the state guidance display 628 in the effect area 622 while displaying “gold 7” and continuing the specific state 2St 4 a predetermined number of times. Thereby, the gaming machine 1
Even if 0 is not displayed on "gold 7", the specific state 2St is displayed by the display of the state guidance display 628.
It can guide the continuation of 4. In addition, the gaming machine 10 updates the accumulated winning number of balls even during symbol change after displaying "Fri 7". For example, the sub-display device 501 indicates that the accumulated winning number of balls is “440”.

The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 72 (2) shows the state at the time of symbol stop in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “o” as a small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. The display device 41 displays the state guidance display 6 in the effect area 622 while the specific state 2St4 continues only a predetermined number of times during the symbol stop of the small symbol 625 as well as during the symbol variation of the small symbol 625.
Continue to display 28. Thereby, even when the display of "gold 7" is not performed, the gaming machine 10 can guide the continuation of the specific state 2St4 by the display of the state guidance display 628. In addition, the gaming machine 10 updates the cumulative winning prize ball count even while the symbol is stopped after displaying the "gold 7". For example, the sub-display device 501 indicates that the accumulated winning number of balls is "450".

After this, as shown in FIG. 70 (1) or FIG. 70 (2), the gaming machine 10 has a large symbol 6
26 (i.e. "white 7") or a large pattern 627 (i.e. "gold 7"). Although the case where the gaming machine 10 derives a small hit has been described, in the case of deriving a big hit or "off", the corresponding variable display is performed to derive a corresponding result.

The large symbols 626 and 627 are displayed as decorative symbols, but may be displayed as effect display during a small hit.
Although the large symbol 627 is displayed when there is no starting memory for deriving a big hit in the pending starting memory, the starting memory for deriving a specific result aspect in the pending starting memory is It may be displayed when there is no. For example, the large symbol 627 may be displayed when there is no start memory for deriving a jackpot without probability fluctuation among the pending start memories.

Next, the display mode of the large symbol selected at the time of a small hit will be described using FIG. Figure 7
3 is a figure which shows an example of the big symbol display aspect classified by conditions at the time of the small hit of 4th Embodiment.
When the special figure 2 reservation number display 604 is “1” or more, in addition to the start memory of “1” or more, when the jackpot is not derived in all of the start memories during digestion, small The display mode of the large symbol selected at the time of hitting is either "gold 7" or "white 7". For example, the gaming machine 10 selects "gold 7" with a probability of 10%, and selects "white 7" with a probability of 90%.

When "gold 7" is selected, the gaming machine 10 can reserve the selection of "gold 7" for small hits in the variable display after the next time within the range of the number of start memories. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can realize continuous selection of "gold 7". For example, the gaming machine 10 may select "gold 7" for five consecutive times including start memory during digestion when the special figure 2 hold number display 604 is "4".

In addition, when special figure 2 reservation number indication 604 is “1” or more, when there is a case that the big hit is derived with the starting memory of “1” or more, the big symbol of the big symbol which is selected at the time of small hit The display mode is set to "White 7". When special figure 2 reservation number indicator 604 is “0”, “white symbol display mode of the large symbol selected at the time of small hit is“ white regardless of whether or not the big hit is derived in starting memory during digestion 7 ”.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 is in the specific state 2 by setting the display mode of the large symbol to "gold 7".
It is possible to guide the continuation of St4. In addition, the gaming machine 10, "white 7 display mode of large symbol
"Can also guide the possibility of continuation of the specific state 2St4.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 selects "gold 7" with a probability of 10% when the display mode of the large symbol is either "gold 7" or "white 7", and "white 7" with a probability of 90%. Although the selection probability may be made to differ according to the number of starting memories.

For example, the gaming machine 10 has a probability of 10% when the special figure 2 hold number display 604 is "4".
Select "gold 7", select "white 7" with a probability of 90%, select "gold 7" with a probability of 30% when special figure 2 hold number display 604 is "1", 70% "White 7" may be selected by the probability. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the appearance rate of the “gold 7” in a state where the number of start memories stored by the player is small, while suppressing the appearance rate of the “gold 7” as a whole. Also,
The gaming machine 10 selects “gold 7” with a probability of 10% when the special figure 2 reserve number display 604 is “4”, selects “white 7” with a probability of 90%, and sets the special figure 2 reserve number When the display 604 is “1”, “gold 7” may be selected with a probability of 1%, and “white 7” may be selected with a probability of 99%. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the operation rate by giving a benefit to a state in which the number of start memories is large, while suppressing the appearance rate of the “gold 7” as a whole.

Next, a small hit design determination process for determining the display pattern (small hit design) of the large design displayed at the time of the small hit in the specific state 2St4 will be described using FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small hitting symbol determination processing in the effect control device of the fourth embodiment.

The small hit symbol determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. Small hit design decision processing, step D23 of main processing (see Figure 44)
Is a process executed by the control unit when it is in the specific state 2St4.

[Step D91] The control unit determines whether or not the result mode derived by any of the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game is “off”. The control unit proceeds to step D101 if the result mode derived by any of the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game is "disengagement", and proceeds to step D92 if not.

[Step D92] The control unit determines whether the number of informing symbol reservations is "1" or more. The control unit proceeds to step D 98 when the number of notification symbol reservations is “1” or more, and is less than “1” ((1)
That is, when it is "0", the process proceeds to step D93. Note that the number of informing symbol reservations is the number of starting memories (number of reservations) in which the selection of “gold 7” (informing symbol) is reserved for small hits in the subsequent variable display within the range of the number of starting memories.

[Step D93] The control unit acquires information (starting memory number information) relating to the special view 1 change display game and the start view storage of the special view 2 change display game. The start storage number information includes the start view storage numbers of the special view 1 fluctuation display game and the special view 2 change display game, and the result mode derived from the respective start storages.

[Step D94] The control unit determines whether or not there is a specific result mode (specific result) in the starting memory number information. The control unit proceeds to step D100 when there is a specific result in the start memory number information, and proceeds to step D95 when there is no specific result. Note that the specific result may be set as a big hit, a big hit without probability fluctuation, or the like.

[Step D95] The control unit performs a notification lottery.
[Step D96] The control unit determines whether the result of the notification lottery is a win or a win. The control unit is
If the result of the notification lottery is a win, the process proceeds to step D97, and if the result is a win, step D1.
Go to 00.

[Step D97] The control unit sets the number of times of informing symbol reservation. Note that the control unit may set the start storage number as the notification symbol reservation number, or may set the number determined with the start storage number as the upper limit as the notification symbol reservation number.

[Step D98] The control unit sets a notification symbol, that is, sets "gold 7".
[Step D99] The control unit decrements the number of informing symbol reservations by "1" and ends the small hit symbol determination process.

[Step D100] The control unit sets a non-informing symbol, that is, sets "White 7", and ends the small hitting symbol determination process.
[Step D101] The control unit cancels the display of the small hit symbol because it does not derive a small hit as a result of the variable display.

[Step D102] The control unit decrements the number of informing symbol reservations by "1" and ends the small hit symbol determination process.
In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can determine the display mode of the large symbol displayed at the time of the small hit in the specific state 2St4 according to the result mode derived from the start memory. In addition, when “gold 7” is selected, the gaming machine 10 can reserve the selection of “gold 7” for a small hit in the variable display after the next time within the range of the number of starting memories.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that there is no start memory for deriving a specific result mode (for example, a big hit) among the start memories on hold. Such a game machine 10 has an aspect that it can increase the player's interest in the hold notification effect.

Next, a selection example of the small hit design when the small hits continue will be described using FIG.
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of pending storage and a small hit symbol according to the fourth embodiment.
The pending start memory 630 represents the number of start memories for the pending start memory by the number of circle displays, represents the start memory for deriving the specific result by hatching display, and indicates the start memory for not deriving the specified result by white outline Show. The in-digestion starting memory 631 represents the presence or absence of the starting memory for the starting memory in the digestion by the presence or absence of the circular display, represents the starting memory for deriving the specific result with hatching display, and displays the starting memory for not deriving the specific result in white Show. A bold circle indicates that a notification symbol is reserved, and a thin circle indicates that a notification symbol is not reserved.

Since the small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (1) has a starting memory for deriving a specific result in the third of the pending start memories 630, the gaming machine 10 derives a starting memory 631 during digestion As a result, a large pattern 626 (that is, "White 7") is displayed.

The small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (2) is the pending start memory 630 and the digesting start memory 6
None of the 31 have a starting memory to derive a specific result. The gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol 626 as a result derived by the digesting start memory 631 when it is disqualified in the notification lottery of step D95 of the small hitting symbol determination processing.

The small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (3) is the pending start memory 630 and the digesting start memory 6
None of the 31 have a starting memory to derive a specific result. When the gaming machine 10 wins in the notification lottery of step D95 of the small hitting symbol determination process, the gaming machine 10 displays a large symbol 627 (that is, "gold 7") as a result derived by the starting memory during digestion 631. At this time, the gaming machine 10 reserves a notification symbol within the range (for example, three) of the number of memories stored in the starting memory 631 during digestion.

The selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75 (4) is the next variation of the selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75 (3). In the small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (4), since the notification symbol is reserved, the large symbol 627 is displayed as a result derived from the in-digestion start memory 631.

The selection example of the small hitting symbol shown in FIG. 75 (5) is the next variation of the selection example of the small hitting symbol shown in FIG. 75 (4). In the small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (5), since the notification symbol is reserved, the large symbol 627 is displayed as a result derived from the in-digestion starting memory 631.

The selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75 (6) is the next variation of the selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75 (5). In the small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (6), since the notification symbol is reserved, the large symbol 627 is displayed as a result derived from the in-digestion start memory 631. Note that
In the selection example of FIG. 75 (5) and the selection example of FIG. 75 (6), a new start memory is generated in the pending start memory 630, but the new start memory is not reserved as a notification symbol. Also, in the case where the new start-up memory is not a start-up memory that derives a specific result but is a start-up memory that derives a specific result, it is large in the selection example of FIG. 75 (5) and in the selection example of FIG. Pattern 6
27 may be replaced with a large symbol 626.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of storing a plurality of start memories as the right of execution of the variable display game, and includes control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). When the control means causes the display means (display device 41) to display predetermined identification information corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game, the control means is specified as a result of the variable display game in the starting memory stored as the execution right. The first identification information (for example, “gold 7” when there is nothing to derive the result aspect (big hit)
The second identification information different from the first identification information when the display means causes the display means to display the start result stored in the execution right as a result of the variable display game and derives a specific result aspect. (For example, other symbols including "White 7") are displayed on the display means.

(2) The control means of (1) may derive a specific result mode as a result of the variable display game among the starting memories stored as the execution right, and the result mode of the variable display game is a specific result When the predetermined identification information is displayed on the display means when the aspect is not derived, the third identification information (for example, "white 7") different from the first identification information (for example, "gold 7") is displayed Display on the means.

(3) The control means of (1) displays the first display effect (with the state guidance display 628) on the display means when the first identification information (for example, "gold 7") is displayed on the display means. When the second identification information (for example, other symbols including "white 7") is displayed on the display means, the second display effect (without the state guide display 628) is displayed on the display means.

(4) The control means of (3) derives the result mode corresponding to the starting memory stored at least as the execution right when the first identification information (for example, "gold 7") is displayed on the display means In the meantime, the first display effect (with the state guidance display 628) is continuously displayed on the display means.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is different in that a gaming board is provided instead of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the description of the fifth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configuration as that of the first embodiment and the description will be omitted.

First, the gaming board provided in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 76 is a front view showing an example of a game board according to the fifth embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 3000. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases and guide rails 31 respectively provided at four corners of the game board 3000. In the game area 32, a center case 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 substantially at the center is disposed. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. In addition, on the upper part of the center case 40, an effect lamp 540 capable of changing the display mode, and a board effect device 550 for effecting a game by operating.
, 551 are provided.

Below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common drawing start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common drawing variation display game. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the start winning opening 36, a normal change winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special view variable display game is provided. Regular fluctuation winning device 37
Is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened into the state where the game ball can easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right and the game ball can be easily converted. The closed state (convenient state for the player) is maintained. Then, when the result of the common view variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the common control solenoid 3 as a drive device
By 7c (see FIG. 3), it is possible to change the game ball to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize port or the like.
Furthermore, on the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the common drawing start gate 34, it is converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted. A possible special fluctuation winning device (big winning opening) 38 is provided.

The special variation winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c, and the opening / closing member 38c is closed as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. In the closed state, the opening / closing member 38 c retracts to convert the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) which can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 38 has a special winning opening which is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 38c driven by the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. During the big hit game state (the first special game state, the second special game state) as a result of the variable display game, the flow of the game ball into the big winning opening by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the opened state To give the player a predetermined gaming value (prize ball).
In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. .

Further, a general winning opening (not shown) is disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, and one general winning opening 351 is disposed on the right side of the center case 40. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 351 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, the game ball detected by the winning opening switch 35a is a collection flow path (not shown) for collecting the game ball by the distribution gate 353 disposed immediately below and a production flow path for reusing the game ball for effect And 354 are distributed. The distribution gate makes it possible to switch the distribution state by an actuator (for example, a solenoid, a motor or the like) controlled by the effect control device 300. Note that
The effect control device 300 receives a command to be transmitted based on the detection of the game ball by the game control device 100 by the winning opening switch 35a, and the effect flow of the game ball based on the switching state of the sorting gate 353. Downflow of the passage 354 can be detected.

The effect flow path 354 is a flow path continuing from the lower part of the general winning opening 351 to the effect start memory display 355 located below the center case 40, and is formed of a tubular transparent member, for example. Make the gaming ball visible. The effect channel 354 is a form of a collecting channel of game balls, and isolates the game ball flowing down the effect channel 354 and the game ball flowing down the game area 32.

The effect start memory display 355 is a display device for displaying start memory (effect start memory) of the effect game in which the right to execute is obtained by the game ball flowing down the effect channel 354. Sub display 530
The effect game is displayed based on the effect start memory displayed by the effect start memory display 355.

The effect control device 300 can use the reception of a command to be transmitted based on the detection of the game ball by the game control device 100 by the winning opening switch 35a as an occurrence trigger of the effect start storage. Further, the effect control device 300 sets the generation trigger of the effect start memory under the predetermined condition (
For example, it may be only when receiving a command in a predetermined gaming state or when the number of effect start memories is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number.

Next, the sub display device 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example of the sub display device according to the fifth embodiment.
The sub display unit 530 includes three matrix display units 530L, 530C, and 530R. In the matrix display sections 530L, 530C, and 530R, 56 petal-shaped dot display sections 531 are arranged in eight rows and seven columns, and each dot display section 531 can be displayed by gradation control (for example, 256 gradations). The matrix display units 530L, 530C, and 530R are control targets of the effect control device 300.

The sub display device 530 can display 3-digit symbol variation in the effect game, the matrix display unit 530L takes charge of the variation display of the left symbol, the matrix display unit 530C takes charge of the variation display of the middle symbol, and the matrix The display unit 530R is in charge of variable display of the right symbol.

The sub display device 530 includes three matrix display units 530L, 530C, and 530R.
Can be used as a matrix display of eight rows and twenty-one columns. Further, the sub display device 530 can perform display other than symbol variation, and can perform realistic character display or the like using gradation control, for example.

Next, display modes of the effect start memory display 355 and the effect start memory display 355 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of the effect start memory display of the fifth embodiment and an example of its display mode.

An overview of the effect start memory display 355 is shown in FIG. 78 (1). The effect start memory display 355 has five display parts 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d and 355e on the petals. The five display portions 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d and 355e are, for example, full color L.
It is an ED, which can be switched on / off / flashing, and can be illuminated in any color. The display units 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, and 355e share one changing start storage display and four on hold storage displays. The display units 355a, 355b,
355c, 355d and 355e make it possible to change at any time the division between one changing start memory display and four pending start memory displays. Note that the display units 355a, 355b, 355c, 35
5 d and 355 e are control targets of the effect control device 300.

An example of a display mode of the effect start memory display 355 is shown in FIG. 78 (2). Effect start memory display 3
When the change state "stop" and the number of start memories is "0", the display units 355a, 355b,
Turn off all of 355c, 355d and 355e.

The effect start memory display 355 shown in the display example 1 lights the display portion 355a as an initial state when the change state is “stop” and the number of start memories is “1”. At this time, the display unit 355a takes charge of the first pending start storage display.

The display example 2 is a display example following the display example 1. The effect start storage display 355 shown in the display example 2 lights the display portion 355a as an initial state when the change state is “stop” and the start storage number is “1”. At this time, the display unit 355a takes charge of the first pending start storage display.

The display example 3 is a display example following the display example 2. The effect start storage display 355 shown in the display example 3 blinks the display unit 355a when the change state is "variation" and the number of start memories is "0". At this time, the display unit 355a takes charge of start-up memory display during fluctuation.

The display example 4 is a display example following the display example 3. The effect start memory display 355 shown in the display example 4 blinks the display portion 355a when the change state is “variation” and the number of start memories is “1”, and the display portion 3 is displayed.
Turn on 55b. At this time, the display unit 355a takes charge of start-up memory display during fluctuation, and the display unit 3
55b is in charge of the first pending start memory display.

The display example 5 is a display example following the display example 4. The effect start memory display 355 shown in the display example 5 turns off the display section 355a when the change state is “stop” and the number of start memories is “1”, and the display section 3 is displayed.
Turn on 55b. At this time, the display unit 355b takes charge of the first pending start storage display.

The display example 6 is a display example following the display example 5. The effect start memory display 355 shown in the display example 6 blinks the display portion 355b when the change state is "variation" and the number of start memories is "0". At this time, the display unit 355b takes charge of start-up storage display during variation. That is, the effect start memory display 3
Even in the state of the fluctuation state “variation” and the number of start memories “0”, the display state 55 can take different display modes depending on the previous state as in the display example 3 and the display example 6.

The display example n is a display example in which four start memories are generated after the display example 6. The effect start memory display 355 shown in the display example n indicates the display unit 3 when the change state is “change” and the number of start memories is “4”.
It blinks 55b and lights all the display parts 355a, 355c, 355d, and 355e.
At this time, the display unit 355b takes charge of the start-up memory display during fluctuation, the display unit 355c takes charge of the first holding start-up memory display, and the display unit 355d takes charge of the second hold-up start memory display, The display unit 355e is responsible for the third pending start storage display, and the display unit 355a is responsible for the fourth pending start storage display.

As a result, the effect start memory display 355 does not require shift display, and realizes one in-duration start memory display and four on-hold start memory displays. Since such effect start memory display 355 does not require the player to grasp the correspondence between the display unit before the shift and the display unit after the shift, the start memory display that can be easily understood by the player can be realized. .

Note that the display portions 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, and 355e may be able to change the display color, and the display color can be used to produce an expectation and the like. Further, the effect start memory display 355 may fix in advance the person in charge of one moving start memory display and four pending start memory displays in the display portions 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, and 355e.

Further, the presentation start memory display 355 is a display for waiting display in the special view game (for example, FIG.
9 (1) or the hold digest display (for example, the hold digest display 508 shown in FIG. 49 (1)) may be used, and the target of the hold standby display or the hold digest display may be in the game state It may be possible to switch between the special drawing game and the rendering game according to the rendering mode or the like. For example, the gaming machine 10 can set the target of the hold on standby display and the hold on display in the effect start memory display 355 as a special view game in the left-handed game state and as an effect game in the right-handed game state. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set the target of the hold on standby display or the hold on display in the effect start memory display 355 as the effect game in the general power support gaming state, and as the special view game in the non-general power support gaming state.

Next, the structure of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the effect lamp 540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of the structure and display mode of the effect lamp according to the fifth embodiment.

The structure of the effect lamp 540 is shown in FIG. 79 (1). The effect lamp 540 includes a projection lens 541, a display content selection board 542, and a light source 543. The light source 543 is, for example, a full color LED, and can switch on, off, and blink, and can also turn on in any color. The display content selection board 542 is disk-shaped and can be rotated in the circumferential direction by an actuator. The display content selection board 542 is provided with small circular display plates 544 to 549 which can transmit the irradiation light of the light source 543 in the circumferential direction (FIG. 79 (2)). In addition, production lamp 54
0 is a control target of the effect control device 300.

The display plates 544 to 549 have predetermined images. For example, the display plate 544 has the message "super heat" on the transmission surface as a fixed image. Further, the display plate 546 has the character "Tora" on the transmission surface as a fixed image. In addition, the display plates 545, 547, 549 have the required pieces of the animation image on the transparent surface. In addition, the display plate 548 has a plain transparent surface. The display plate 548 is a standard transmission surface that is displayed from the normal time, and may not necessarily be plain and may have a predetermined pattern on the transmission surface. For example, the display plate 548 may have a background display (such as the moon or a mountain river) along the game theme on the transparent surface.

The light source 543 can irradiate one of the display plates 544 to 549, and the display content selection board 542 can switch the display plate to be irradiated by rotation. The projection lens 541 magnifies and projects the transmitted light of one of the display plates 544-549 on the projection surface. Thereby, the effect lamp 540 can project a predetermined display on the projection lens 541 by the combination of the light emission mode of the light source 543 and the display plates 544 to 549.

For example, as shown in FIG. 79 (3), the effect lamp 540 displays a message "super heat" corresponding to the display plate 544 as a fixed image display, or displays a character "tra" corresponding to the display plate 546. Can be Also, the effect lamp 540 can display an animation in which a petal dances by switching and displaying the display plates 545, 547, 549 as an animation display. At this time, the effect lamp 540 can realize animation display by rotating the display content selection board 542 at a constant speed and controlling the light emission timing of the light source 543. In addition, the effect lamp 540 is a display board 54 by switching the light emission timing.
The display order of 5, 547, 549 can be switched to change the manner in which the petals dance. For example, the effect lamp 540 can be switched and displayed using two of the display plates 545, 547, 549, or in the order of the display plates 545, 547, 549, or the display plate 549,
It is also possible to switch and display in the order of 547 and 545.

The animation display on the effect lamp 540 may be in cooperation with the display performed on other display units. For example, the animation display in the effect lamp 540 may have the same display mode as the animation display performed in the hold on standby display or the hold on display in the display device 41 or the effect start storage display 355. At this time, the gaming machine 10
Animation display on the effect lamp 540 and the display device 41 or effect start memory display 355
By synchronizing with the animation display in, it is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of unity. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform display effect with continuity by taking over the animation display in the effect lamp 540 by the display device 41 and the animation display in the effect start memory display 355. Further, the game machine 10 can perform display effects having various presentation opportunities by making the animation display in the effect lamp 540 asynchronous with the animation display in the display device 41 and the effect start memory display 355.

Also, the effect lamp 540 can perform color change display such as white, blue, red, green, yellow, cherry color, rainbow color, etc. by switching the light emission color of the light source 543 on the display plate 548.

Next, the operation mode of the panel effects devices 550 and 551 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 80
These are figures which show an example of the operation | movement aspect of the board production apparatus of 5th Embodiment.
FIG. 80 (1) shows the non-operating state of the panel effects devices 550, 551. The board effect device 550 is located on the lower left side of the effect lamp 540, and the board effect device 551 is located on the lower right side of the effect lamp 540. The board effect device 550 has the character "flower" in the disc-like structure, and the board effect device 551 has the character "snow" in the disc-like structure. Thereby, the board effect device 550, 55
The inactive state of 1 displays the characters "flower, snow".

FIG. 80 (2) shows the non-operating state of the panel rendering device 550 and the operating state of the panel rendering device 551. The operating state of the board effect device 551 is a state in which the movable member 551a hidden behind is moved directly below the effect lamp 540. The movable member 551a has a disk-like structure and the character "blow"
Have. Thus, the characters "flower, blow, snow" and left read, "flower blowing" are displayed as the non-operating state of the panel rendering device 550 and the operating state of the panel rendering device 551.

FIG. 80 (3) shows the non-operating state of the panel rendering device 551 and the operating state of the panel rendering device 550. The operating state of the board rendering device 550 is a state in which the movable member 550 a hidden behind the back side has moved immediately below the rendering lamp 540. The movable member 550a is a disk-shaped structure with the characters "moon"
Have. Thus, the characters “flower, moon, snow” and “Sukigetsuhana” are displayed as the right reading of the non-operating state of the panel rendering device 551 and the operating state of the panel rendering device 550.

As a result, the board effect devices 550 and 551 can produce a sense of expectation for the player by the characters displayed according to the operation mode or the operation mode. The board effect devices 550 and 551 can switch the operation state of the movable members 550 a and 551 a by the actuators controlled by the effect control device 300.

Although the board effect devices 550 and 551 arrange the movable member 551a on the back side of the board effect device 551, the movable member 551a may be arranged on the front side of the board effect device 551. In this case, the panel effect device 550 displays the character "flower", the movable member 551a displays the character "blow", and the panel effect device 551 displays the character "snow", so that the panel effect device 550, 551 is displayed. The characters "flower, blow" are displayed in the non-operating state, and the characters "in the operating state of the panel production device 550, 551.
Display "flower, wind, snow". Similarly, in the panel effect devices 550 and 551, the movable member 550 a is disposed on the back side of the panel effect device 550, but the movable member 550 a may be disposed on the front side of the panel effect device 550. In this case, the panel effect device 550 displays the character "flower", and the movable member 550a
Displays the character "Moon", and the panel effect device 551 displays the character "Snow", whereby the panel effect device 5 is displayed.
In the non-operating state of 50, 551, the letters "Month, snow" are displayed, and the board effect device 550, 551
The letters "flower, moon, snow" are displayed in the operating state of.

Next, an effect game performed by the sub display device 530 will be described. FIG. 81 is a view showing an example of a pattern of an effect game played by the sub display device of the fifth embodiment. The sub display device 530 performs a rendering game of a pattern (aspect) corresponding to the special view variation display game simultaneously executed on the display device 41 (main display device). The sub display device 530 plays an effect game of a pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game when the special figure fluctuation display game derives a reach effect.

In the effect game executed by the sub display device 530, the result aspect (combination of symbols) corresponding to the result aspect (combination of symbols) of the special view variation display game simultaneously executed by the display device 41 is derived and displayed.

As patterns of the effect game executed by the sub display device 530, there are five patterns of pattern 1, pattern 2, pattern 3, pattern 4, and pattern 5.
Pattern 1 is a pattern of an effect game that is executed when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 29 seconds or more and the result mode of the variation display is a hit. Pattern 1 includes reach derivation display for 5 seconds, reach effect display for 22 seconds, 3 symbol temporary stop display for 2 seconds, and swing display for n seconds until the special figure variation display game is ended. Configured Therefore, the rendering time in pattern 1 is 29 seconds + n seconds.

In the reach derivation display, the sub display device 530 temporarily stops two symbols from the state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are changed at high speed (for example, the order of the left symbol and the middle symbol)
A display for deriving a combination of the reach derived in the special view variable display game and the corresponding reach is performed.

In the reach effect display, the sub display device 530 temporarily stops the remaining one symbol (the third symbol) in the fluctuation after performing the lively effect (aim whether to derive a hit or not, to improve the interest) And a display for deriving a combination of symbols corresponding to the result mode (combination of symbols) of the special figure variation display game.

In the 3 symbol temporary stop display, the sub display device 530 displays 3 symbols in a state of temporary stop (combination of symbols resulting from the special view variation display game (combination of symbols and symbols)). In the swing display, the sub display device 530 displays the three symbols temporarily stopped in the combination of the hits while swinging the sub display device 530.

Pattern 2 is a pattern of an effect game that is executed when the remaining time of the special view variation display game is 29 seconds or more and the result mode of the variation display is out. The pattern 2 includes a reach derivation display of 5 seconds, a reach effect display of 22 seconds, and a 3 symbol temporary stop display of 2 seconds. Therefore, the rendering time in pattern 2 is 29 seconds.

Pattern 3 is a pattern of an effect game that is executed when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is less than 29 seconds and 9 seconds or more. Pattern 3 is 7 symbol temporary stop derivation display for 7 seconds,
It is comprised including three symbol temporary stop display for 2 seconds. Therefore, the rendering time in pattern 3 is 9 seconds.

In the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display, the sub display device 530 sequentially arranges three symbols from the state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are changed at high speed (for example, the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol)
The temporary stop is performed, and a display for deriving a combination of symbols corresponding to the result aspect (combination of symbols) of the special view variation display game is performed.

The pattern 4 is a pattern of an effect game to be executed when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is less than 9 seconds and not less than 3 seconds. Pattern 4 is 3 from the remaining time of the special figure variation display game
3 symbol temporary stop derivation display of n seconds (for example, 4 seconds if the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 6 seconds) except 2 seconds for performing symbol temporary stop display time, and 2 seconds 3 symbol temporary stop indication is constituted including.

Pattern 5 is a pattern of an effect game that is executed when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is less than 3 seconds and not less than 2 seconds (more than the time necessary to perform 3 symbol temporary stop display).
The pattern 5 is configured to include three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds.

Next, specific examples of the reach derivation display, the reach effect display, the swing display, and the three symbol temporary stop derivation display will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of the reach derivation display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of reach effect display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the reach effect display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of rocking display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment.

In addition, in the following, it is a special figure change display game which display 41 displays, after reaching reach whose reach eye (design for deriving a hit) is “treasure”, each of left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol A specific example corresponding to the case of executing reach effect of temporarily stopping at "treasure" and deriving a hit will be described.

First, a specific example of the reach derivation display will be described with reference to FIG.
In the reach derivation display, the sub display device 530 starts the left symbol in the special symbol variation display game result pattern and the left symbol from the state where three symbols are fluctuating rapidly (high speed vertical scroll variation) (FIG. 82 (a1)). Make a temporary stop state with the corresponding symbol ("treasure") (Fig. 82 (a2)), and then stop temporarily with the middle symbol in the special pattern variation display game result pattern ("treasure") corresponding to the middle symbol (FIG. 82 (a3)), the combination of the reach derived in the special view variation display game and the corresponding reach (a reach for which the symbol for deriving a hit is “treasure”) is derived.

Next, a specific example of reach effect display will be described using FIGS. 83 and 84. FIG.
In the reach effect display, the sub display device 530 switches the fluctuation speed of the right symbol to lower speed fluctuation (low speed vertical scroll fluctuation) than in FIG. 82 (a3) (FIG. 83 (b1)). Sub display 5
When the symbol 30 is moving the right symbol at a low speed, the symbol one month before the "treasure" (here, "month") is displayed (Fig. 83 (b2)). The change mode is switched from the low speed change (low speed vertical scroll change) to a different change mode (gradual change mode). Specifically, in the gradual change mode, the sub display device 530 gradually loses the character of "month" (progressive loss)
Gradually turn off the dot display portion 531 in charge of the character portion (see FIG. 83 (b3).
83 (b4), 83 (b5), and the dot display portion 531 in charge of the character portion so that the characters of “treasure” gradually appear (progressively appear) (FIG. 83). (B6),
Fig. 83 (b7) and Fig. 83 (b8). In addition, the sub display device 530 gradually turns off the dot display portion 531 in charge of the character portion so that the character of “treasure” gradually disappears (see FIG. 84).
(B9), FIG. 84 (b10), FIG. 84 (b11), the symbol after “treasure” (here “
The dot display portion 531 in charge of the character portion is gradually lighted so that the characters of "Sakura" gradually appear (Fig. 84 (b12), Fig. 84 (b13), Fig. 84 (b14)). The sub display device 530 switches the variation mode to the low-speed variation again (FIG. 83 (b1)) when it is in a state of displaying the symbol one behind “treasure” (FIG. 84 (b14)).

The sub-display device 530, while repeating such a change, finally puts the right symbol in the temporary stop state with the symbol ("treasure") corresponding to the right symbol in the result aspect of the special figure variation display game.

Thus, the fluctuation to the symbol ("treasure") that derives the hit, and the symbol ("treasure") that derives the hit
By making the variation mode in the variation from the next symbol ("Sakura") different from the variation mode in the variation from the other symbol to the symbol, the gaming machine 10 has an expectation that the symbol for deriving a hit is temporarily stopped Can be held by the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is a board effect device 55 among the three symbols displayed by the sub display device 530.
0, 551 (including movable members 550a, 551a) decoration (e.g. "flower", "snow",
When the pattern (panel decoration pattern) corresponding to “Mon”, “Blow” etc. is included, the board effect device 550
, 551 may be operated. Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 may use the sub display device 530.
If a panel decoration symbol is included in the three symbols displayed by the symbol, the panel effect devices 550 and 551 may be operated, and operation may be performed after the establishment of operation conditions such as detection of the push button 25 operation. . In the case where the panel display symbol is included in the three symbols displayed by the sub display device 530, it may be only one symbol out of the three symbols, or as a specific one symbol (for example, the final stop symbol) Also, any two of the three designs may be used, a specific two designs (for example, a reach configuration design) may be used, or all three designs may be used. For example, the gaming machine 10 operates the board effect devices 550 and 551 when the sub display device 530 displays "month (panel decoration symbol)" on the left symbol and the middle symbol and becomes a reach system. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 is a reach system after the sub display device 530 displays "treasure (non-panel decoration symbol)" on the left and middle symbols, and then "moon (panel decoration symbol)" is displayed on the right symbol. When displaying (including temporary stop), the panel effect devices 550 and 551 are made operable, the operation of the push button 25 is detected, the panel effect devices 550 and 551 are operated, and the sub display device 530 is re-varied.
The gaming machine 10 may make the operation modes of the board effect devices 550 and 551 different according to the type and combination of the board decoration symbol displayed by the sub display device 530.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not operate the board effect devices 550 and 551 when a sufficient effect time can not be secured even when a panel decoration symbol is included in the three symbols displayed by the sub display device 530. You may For example, in the case where the variation time of the sub display device 530 is shortened or can be shortened, the gaming machine 10 may not operate the board effect devices 550, 551. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can accelerate the effect game on the sub display device 530 without considering the operation time (including the return operation time) of the board effect devices 550 and 551.

Next, a specific example of the rocking display will be described with reference to FIG.
In the swing display, the sub display device 530 continuously displays the state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped with the symbol of "treasure" while swinging the device, and the special view change display The swing width is gradually decreased toward the end of the game (FIG. 85 (c1), FIG. 85 (c2)
), FIG. 85 (c3)).

As described above, by swinging the sub display device 530, it is possible to clearly indicate that the effect in the special view variation display game is being performed (is changing). In addition, the sub display device 530 gradually reduces the swing width as it approaches the timing at which the special figure variation display game ends,
It is possible to clearly indicate the end time of the special figure variation display game.

Next, 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display will be described with reference to FIG.
In the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display, the sub display device 530 performs the left symbol from the state (Fig. 86 (d1)) in which the 3 symbols are fluctuating rapidly (high speed vertical scroll fluctuation) in the result aspect of the special figure fluctuation display game In the temporary stop state with the left symbol and the corresponding symbol (“treasure”) (FIG. 86 (d2)), then, the middle symbol is the symbol corresponding to the middle symbol in the special pattern variation display game result (“treasure”) In the temporary stop state (Fig. 86 (d3)), the right symbol is put in the temporary stop state (Fig. 86 (d4)) with the symbol corresponding to the right symbol in the special pattern variation display game ("treasure") (Fig. 86 (d4)). Derivation of a combination of symbols corresponding to the result aspect (combination of symbols) of the figure variation display game. Thereby, the sub-display device 530 can notify not only the outcome mode (hit or miss), but also whether it is a hit with probability fluctuation.

Next, processing for counting up the effect start memory, which is the right to execute the effect game in the sub display device 530, will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect start storage count increase processing in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment. The effect start storage count increase process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The display effect determination process is a process executed when a command transmitted based on the detection of the game ball from the game control device 100 by the winning opening switch 35a is received, and the step D63 (FIG. 46) is a process executed by the control unit.

[Step D111] The control unit specifies the gaming state.
[Step D112] The control unit determines whether to operate the distribution gate 353 based on the gaming state. For example, the control unit determines to operate the distribution gate 353 when it is in the right-handed state. Note that the control unit determines whether or not to operate the distribution gate 353 based on whether or not it is a specific gaming state (right-handed state) is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control unit controls the sorting gate 3 based on the number of rotations after the game state is reached.
It may be determined whether to operate 53 or not.

When it is determined that the distribution gate 353 is not operated, the control unit ends the effect start storage count increase processing, and when it is determined that the distribution gate 353 is operated, the process proceeds to step D113.

[Step D113] The control unit switches the route so that the game ball flows in the distribution channel 353 to the effect channel 354.
[Step D114] The control unit sets a wait time.

[Step D115] The control unit increments the count of effect start storage by one.
[Step D116] The control unit determines whether or not the command to be transmitted has been received based on the detection of the game ball from the game control device 100 by the winning opening switch 35a.

When the control unit determines that the command transmitted based on the detection of the game ball from the game control device 100 by the winning opening switch 35a is determined to be received, the process proceeds to step D115, and the game control device 100 by the winning hole switch 35a. If it is determined that the transmitted command has not been received based on the detection of the gaming ball, the process proceeds to step D117.

[Step D117] The control unit determines whether the set wait time has timed out. When the control unit determines that the wait time has not timed out, the process proceeds to step D116, and when the control unit determines that the wait time has timed out, step D118.
Go to

[Step D118] The control unit switches the route so that the game ball does not flow into the effect flow path 354 at the sorting gate 353, and ends the effect start memory count increase process.
Next, processing for determining an execution trigger of the effect game in sub display device 530 will be described with reference to FIG.
This will be described using FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an effect game execution opportunity determination process in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment.

The effect game execution timing determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect game execution timing determination process is a process executed when the effect start memory increases, when the user operates the push button 25 and at the start timing of the special view change display game, and the main process step D23 (see FIG. 44) is a process executed by the control unit.

[Step D121] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game execution trigger determination process has started, triggered by the increase in the effect start storage. If the control unit determines that the special game variation display game start or the effect game execution trigger determination process has been started by accepting the operation of the push button 25, the process proceeds to step D122, and that the effect start memory has increased If it is determined that the effect game execution opportunity determination process has been started as a trigger, the process proceeds to step D123.

[Step D122] The control unit determines whether or not there is presentation start memory. The control unit proceeds to step D129 if the effect start memory is “0”, and proceeds to step D125 if the effect start memory is other than “0”, that is, if there is a effect start memory.

[Step D123] The control unit determines whether or not the special figure variation display game is being executed. If the control unit determines that the special figure variation display game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step D129, and if it is determined that the special figure variation display game is being performed, the process proceeds to step D124.

[Step D124] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game has been executed in the special figure variation display game being executed. If the control unit determines that the effect game has been executed in the special figure variation display game in progress, the control unit proceeds to step D129, and determines that the effect game has not been executed in the special figure variation display game in execution. To step D125.

[Step D125] The control unit specifies the contents of the effect of the special view variable display game.
[Step D126] The control unit determines whether or not the special view variable display game derives a reach effect. If the control unit determines that the special view variation display game does not derive the reach effect, the process proceeds to step D129. If the control unit determines that the special view change display game derives the reach effect, the process proceeds to step D127.

[Step D127] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more. If the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is not 2 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D129, and if it is determined that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D128. move on.

[Step D128] The control unit determines that it is an execution trigger of the effect game, and ends the effect game execution timing determination process.
[Step D129] The control unit determines that it is not an opportunity to execute the effect game, and ends the effect game execution opportunity determination process.

According to this, in addition to the timing synchronized with the start timing of the special view variation display game, the gaming machine 10 starts the rendering game at the timing asynchronous with the start timing of the special view variation display game (a trigger for executing the presentation game) It can be done.

Next, the process of setting the pattern of the effect game executed by the sub display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect game pattern setting processing in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment.

The effect game pattern setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect game pattern setting process is a process executed when it is determined that it is an execution trigger of the effect game, and the step D23 of the main process (FIG. 44 (FIG. 44)
Reference) is a process executed by the control unit.

[Step D131] The control unit specifies the remaining time of the special figure variation display game.
[Step D132] The control unit specifies a result mode of the special figure variation display game.
[Step D133] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 29 seconds or more. If the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 29 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D134, and if it is determined that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is not 29 seconds or more. Go to

[Step D134] The control unit determines whether or not the result mode of the special view variable display game is a hit. If the control unit determines that the result mode of the special figure change display game is a hit, the process proceeds to step D135, and if it is determined that the result mode of the special figure change display game is not a hit, the process proceeds to step D136.

[Step D135] The control unit sets Pattern 1 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.
[Step D136] The control unit sets Pattern 2 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.

[Step D137] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 9 seconds or more. If the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special view variation display game is 9 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D138, and if the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special view variation display game is not 9 seconds or more Go to

[Step D138] The control unit sets Pattern 3 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.
[Step D139] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 3 seconds or more. If the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 3 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D140, and if it is determined that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is not 3 seconds or more Go to

[Step D140] The control unit sets Pattern 4 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.
[Step D141] The control unit sets Pattern 5 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.

By setting the pattern of the effect game in this manner, the gaming machine 10 can store the effect game within the effect time of the corresponding special-image variation display game.
By the way, in the effect game executed by the sub display device 530, the effect can be skipped based on an instruction from the player. Such skipping of effects based on an instruction from the player will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect game skip processing in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment.

The effect game skip process is a process for skipping the effect of the effect game being executed on the sub display device 530 by the operation of the player (depression of the push button 25).
The effect game skip process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect game skip process is a process that is executed when the player's operation (the push of the push button) is detected, and the main process step D19 (FIG. 4) is performed.
4) processing executed by the control unit.

[Step D151] The control unit determines whether or not it is time to skip the effect game. When the effect game is in the 3 symbol temporary stop display or in the swing display, the control unit
That is, when the result aspect corresponding to the result aspect of the special figure variation display game is already derived, it is determined that the effect game is the timing that can not be skipped. On the other hand, the control unit is in the reach derivation display, in the reach effect display, or in the three symbol temporary stop derivation display (the state before the temporary stop in the combination of the three symbols corresponding to the result aspect of the special view variation display game) If it is determined that it is the timing at which the effect game can be skipped.

When the control unit determines that the timing for the effect game is skippable, the process proceeds to step D152, and when the control portion determines that the timing for the effect game is not skippable, the effect game skip processing is ended.

[Step D152] The control unit skips the effect game in execution and executes three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds.
[Step D153] The control unit ends the effect game when the three symbol temporary stop display is executed,
The effect game skip process ends.

According to such an effect skip, when the gaming machine 10 is executing the effect game,
It is possible to enable derivation of the result aspect corresponding to the result aspect of the special view variation display game to the sub display device 530 at the timing desired by the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can enable the player to grasp the result mode of the special view change display game at any timing (for example, early).

The effect skip may skip part of the effect in the effect game. For example, when the gaming machine 10 receives an instruction to skip the effect during reach derivation display, the game may skip to the reach effect.

Next, the flow of processing in the case where the effect game is played with pattern 1, in the case with pattern 2, in the case with pattern 3 and in the case with pattern 4 and in the case with pattern 5 will be described. FIG. 91 shows that the effect control device of the fifth embodiment has a pattern 1
It is a timing chart which shows the flow of processing in the case of performing in. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing when the effect control device of the fifth embodiment plays the effect game in pattern 2. FIG. 93 shows that the effect control device of the fifth embodiment is a pattern 3 for the effect game.
It is a timing chart which shows the flow of processing in the case of performing in. FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the effect control device of the fifth embodiment performs the effect game with the pattern 4. FIG. 95 shows that the effect control device of the fifth embodiment has a pattern 5 for the effect game.
It is a timing chart which shows the flow of processing in the case of performing in. In the following timing chart, when the effect game starts asynchronously with the special view fluctuation display game,
That is, description will be made using an example in the case where it is determined that the execution trigger is due to the increase in the effect start memory or the acceptance of the operation of the push button 25 by the user.

First, the flow of processing when the effect game is performed in pattern 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 (1) shows a flow of processing when the player does not skip the effect.
FIGS. 91 (2) and 91 (3) show the flow of processing when the player skips the effect.

In FIG. 91 (1), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t11, starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t12 and performs reach derivation display. Begin. The effect game (pattern 1) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed as the reach derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t12 to timing t14, performs reach effect display for twenty-two seconds from timing t14 to timing t18, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t18. In the effect game (pattern 1) being executed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip corresponding to the result aspect of the special figure fluctuation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t18, It will be possible.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t18 to the timing t19, and a timing t at which the Nth special figure fluctuation display game ends from the timing t19.
The rocking display is performed for n seconds up to 20, the effect game (pattern 1) is ended, and the N-th special view fluctuation display game is also ended.

In FIG. 91 (2), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from timing t11, starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at timing t12 and performs reach derivation display. Begin. The effect game (pattern 1) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed as the reach derivation display is started.

When the player receives a skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t13 during reach derivation display, the gaming machine 10 ends the reach derivation display and starts three symbol temporary stop display. The gaming machine 10 terminates the effect game (pattern 1) when three symbol temporary stop display is performed from the timing t13 to a timing t15 two seconds later, and ends the N-th special view fluctuation display game at a timing t20.

In FIG. 91 (3), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t11 and starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t12 to perform reach derivation display. Begin. The effect game (pattern 1) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed as the reach derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t12 to timing t14, and starts reach effect display from timing t14. When the player receives a skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t16 during reach effect display, the gaming machine 10 ends the reach effect display and starts three symbol temporary stop display. The gaming machine 10 terminates the effect game (pattern 1) when three symbol temporary stop display is performed from timing t16 to timing t17 two seconds later, and ends the N-th special view variation display game at timing t20. The above is the flow of processing when effect skip is performed in the effect game (pattern 1) and when effect skip is not performed.

Next, the flow of processing when the effect game is performed in pattern 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 (1) shows a flow of processing when the player does not perform the effect skip.
FIGS. 92 (2) and 92 (3) show the flow of processing when the player skips the effect.

In FIG. 92 (1), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t21 and starts the effect game (pattern 2) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t22 to perform reach derivation display. Begin. The effect game (pattern 2) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed with the start of the reach derivation display.

The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t22 to timing t24, performs reach effect display for twenty-two seconds from timing t24 to timing t28, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t28. The effect game (pattern 2) being played on the sub display device 530 is pushed by the player in accordance with having derived the result aspect corresponding to the result aspect of the special view fluctuation display game by the 3 symbol temporary stop display at timing t28. The effect skip of the effect game by the operation of the button 25 is impossible.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t28 to the timing t29, ends the effect game (pattern 2), and ends the Nth special figure fluctuation display game at the timing t30.

In FIG. 92 (2), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t21 and starts the effect game (pattern 2) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t22 to perform reach derivation display. Begin. The effect game (pattern 2) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed with the start of the reach derivation display.

When the player receives a skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t23 during reach derivation display, the gaming machine 10 ends the reach derivation display and starts three symbol temporary stop display. The gaming machine 10 terminates the effect game (pattern 2) when three symbol temporary stop display is performed from timing t23 to timing t25 two seconds later, and ends the N-th special view fluctuation display game at timing t30.

In FIG. 92 (3), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t21 and starts the effect game (pattern 2) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t22 to perform reach derivation display. Begin. In the effect game (pattern 2) being performed on the sub display device 530, with the start of the reach derivation display at the timing t21, the effect skip can be performed.

The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t22 to timing t24, and starts reach effect display from timing t24. When the player receives a skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t26 during reach effect display, the gaming machine 10 ends the reach effect display and starts the three symbol temporary stop display. The gaming machine 10 terminates the effect game (pattern 2) when three symbol temporary stop display is performed until timing t27 two seconds after timing t26, and ends the N-th special view fluctuation display game at timing t30. The above is the flow of processing when effect skip is performed in the effect game (pattern 2) and when effect skip is not performed.

Next, the flow of processing when the effect game is performed in pattern 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (1) shows a flow of processing when the player does not perform the effect skip.
FIG. 93 (2) shows a flow of processing when the player skips the effect.

In FIG. 93 (1), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from timing t31, starts the effect game (pattern 3) on the sub display device 530 at timing t32, and derives 3 symbol temporary stops Start to display. In the effect game (pattern 3) being executed on the sub display device 530, with the start of the three symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop derivation display from timing t32 for seven seconds from timing t35, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t35. Sub display 53
The effect game (pattern 3) being executed at 0 is a state in which the effect skip can not be performed due to having derived the result aspect corresponding to the result aspect of the special view variable display game by 3 symbol temporary stop display at timing t 35 It becomes.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t35 to the timing t36, ends the effect game (pattern 3), and ends the Nth special figure fluctuation display game at the timing t36.

In FIG. 93 (2), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from timing t31, starts the effect game (pattern 3) on the sub display device 530 at timing t32, and derives 3 symbol temporary stops Start to display. In the effect game (pattern 3) being executed on the sub display device 530, with the start of the three symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

When the gaming machine 10 receives the skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t33 during which the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display is in progress, the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display is ended, and 3
Design temporary stop display is started. The gaming machine 10 has a timing t two seconds after the timing t33.
When the 3 symbol temporary stop display is performed up to 34, the effect game (pattern 3) is ended, and the N-th special figure variation display game is ended at timing t36. The above is the flow of processing when effect skip is performed in the effect game (pattern 3) and when effect skip is not performed.

Next, the flow of processing in the case where the effect game is performed in pattern 4 will be described using FIG. FIG. 94 (1) shows a flow of processing when the player does not skip the effect.
FIG. 94 (2) shows a flow of processing when the player skips the effect.

In FIG. 94 (1), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t41, starts the effect game (pattern 4) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t42, and derives 3 symbol temporary stops Start to display. In the effect game (pattern 4) being executed on the sub display device 530, with the start of the three symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop derivation display from the timing t42 for n seconds from the timing t45 (remaining time until the special figure fluctuation display game is ended-2 seconds), and the timing t
45 to 3 Perform symbol temporary stop display. In the effect game (pattern 4) being executed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip corresponding to the result aspect of the special figure variation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t45, It will be possible.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t45 to the timing t46, ends the effect game (pattern 4), and ends the Nth special figure fluctuation display game at the timing t46.

In FIG. 94 (2), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t41, starts the effect game (pattern 4) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t42, and derives 3 symbol temporary stops Start to display. In the effect game (pattern 4) being executed on the sub display device 530, with the start of the three symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

When the gaming machine 10 receives the skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t43 during the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display, the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display is ended, and 3
Design temporary stop display is started. The gaming machine 10 has a timing t two seconds after the timing t43.
When the 3 symbol temporary stop display is performed up to 44, the effect game (pattern 4) is ended, and the N-th special figure variation display game is ended at timing t46. The above is the flow of processing when effect skip is performed in the effect game (pattern 4) and when effect skip is not performed.

Next, the flow of processing in the case where the effect game is performed in pattern 5 will be described using FIG.
The gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special figure variation display game from the timing t51, starts the effect game (pattern 5) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t52, and starts to perform the 3 symbol temporary stop display. The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t52 to the timing t53, ends the effect game (pattern 5), and ends the Nth special figure fluctuation display game at the timing t54. The above is the flow of processing of the effect game (pattern 5).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can simultaneously derive the result mode as the main display device (display device 4).
It is a result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special figure fluctuation display game executed in 1), and the sub display apparatus 5 can be an effect game that can be asynchronously controlled with the special figure fluctuation display game performed on the main display
Run at 30

According to this, the gaming machine 10 can make it possible to derive a result mode at free timing in the sub display device 530 while securing gaming performance (game rules) in the special view variation display game in the main display device. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can widen the range of games.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, although a case where a production game was performed only during execution of a special figure change display game was explained as an example, it is not restricted to this. For example, even if the special figure variation display game is in the stop state, the gaming machine 10 makes the three symbols in the high-speed variation state, and the special figure variation display game satisfying the condition is satisfied. It may be made to stand by in a high-speed fluctuation state until it starts (until it determines that it is an execution opportunity).

[Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, it is described that the swing display is performed after the three symbol temporary stop display (combination display of hits) is performed in the pattern 1 of the effect game. In the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the setting of the effect mode of the effect (hit effect) in the special game state performed by the main display device after the special view variation display game derives a hit is performed by changing to the swing display.

First, the display performed in place of the rocking display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the music selection display on the sub display device of the modification 1 of the fifth embodiment.
The song selection display is an example of a display for setting an effect mode of an effect (hit effect) in the special game state. The gaming machine 10 can also perform, for example, character selection display, mode selection display, etc., instead of or in addition to the song selection display, as the setting of the effect mode of the effect (hit effect) in the special game state.

In the song selection display, the sub display device 530 displays selectable songs as shown in FIGS. 96 (e1), (e2) and (e3) (“Song A?”, “Song B?”, “Song C And let the player choose which song to use in the special game state. And the sub display 530
When the player selects a song by operating the push button 25, as shown in FIG.
As shown in), the received song is displayed ("Song A !!") and the song selection display is ended.

Next, regarding the flow of processing when the rocking display is changed to the music selection display in FIG.
This will be described using
FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing when the effect control device of the modification 1 of the fifth embodiment plays the effect game with pattern 1. Here, the description will be made using the same timing as a comparison with FIG.

The gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t11, starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t12, and starts performing the reach derivation display. The effect game (pattern 1) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed as the reach derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t12 to timing t14, performs reach effect display for twenty-two seconds from timing t14 to timing t18, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t18. In the effect game (pattern 1) being executed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip corresponding to the result aspect of the special figure fluctuation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t18, It will be possible.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t18 to the timing t19, and a timing t at which the Nth special figure fluctuation display game ends from the timing t19.
The song selection display is performed for up to 20 seconds, and the effect game (pattern 1) is ended.

In this manner, by using the sub display device 530, before performing effects in the special gaming state on the main display device side (before deriving the result aspect), it is possible to set the effect aspect of the effects in the special gaming state There is no need to have the setting of the effect mode at the start of the special game state, and the effect time of the effect in the special game state can be long (the effect time of the effect in the special game state is reduced by the time for setting the effect mode Never). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure a longer rendering time for special effects in the special gaming state, increase the degree of freedom of the effects, and improve the interest.

In addition, although it changed and demonstrated to rocking display, it does not restrict to this. For example, in the gaming machine 10, when the special figure variation display game derives a hit, and there is time until the special figure variation display game ends after 3 symbol temporary stop display, the time until the particular figure variation display game ends. It may be performed at time (for example, at t15 in FIG. 91 (2)).

In addition, before the game machine 10 executes effects in the special game state on the main display device side (before the winning is derived), a part of the effects of the special game state in the sub display device 530 (for example, an introduction portion etc. ) May be performed.

It should be noted that switching of a song serving as an option at the time of song selection may be performed by an operation by the player, and switching of a song serving as an option is performed with time (for example, 2
The song may be switched every second). In the case where a song serving as an option is switched on the basis of time, the switching timing may be adjusted based on the display time of the song selection display. For example, in the case where the game selection display time is 4 seconds and there are 4 songs as choices, the gaming machine 10 allows the song to be switched within 1 second so that all options can be selected. Do.

[Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment]
In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the determination is made in consideration of the game state of the gaming machine 10 in addition to the effect contents of the special view variation display game in the determination of whether or not it is an execution trigger of the effect game. Figure 9
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an effect game execution timing determination process in the effect control device of the modification 2 of the fifth embodiment.

[Step D161] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game execution trigger determination process has started, triggered by the increase in the effect start storage. If the control unit determines that the special game variation display game start or the effect game execution trigger determination process has been started by accepting the operation of the push button 25, the process proceeds to step D162, and the effect start memory is increased If it is determined that the effect game execution opportunity determination process has been started as a trigger, the process proceeds to step D163.

[Step D162] The control unit determines whether or not there is presentation start memory. The control unit proceeds to step D170 when the effect start memory is “0”, and proceeds to step D165 when the effect start memory is other than “0”, that is, when the effect start memory is present.

[Step D163] The control unit determines whether or not the special figure variation display game is being executed. If the control unit determines that the special figure variation display game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step D170. If the control unit determines that the special figure variation display game is being performed, the process proceeds to step D164.

[Step D164] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game has been executed in the special figure variation display game being executed. If the control unit determines that the effect game has been executed in the special figure variation display game in progress, the control unit proceeds to step D170, and determines that the effect game has not been executed in the special figure variation display game in execution. The process proceeds to step D165.

[Step D165] The control unit specifies the contents of the effect of the special view variable display game.
[Step D166] The control unit determines whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is a gaming state that can trigger the execution of the effect game. For example, when the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is a predetermined state to be hit to the right, the control unit determines that the gaming state can be an execution trigger.

If the control unit determines that the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is a gaming state that can trigger execution of a rendering game, the process proceeds to step D167, and the gaming state in which the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 can not become a trigger of execution of a rendering game If it is determined that is, the process proceeds to step D170.

[Step D167] The control unit determines whether or not the special view variable display game derives the reach effect. If the control unit determines that the special view variation display game does not derive the reach effect, the process proceeds to step D170. If the control unit determines that the special view change display game derives the reach effect, the process proceeds to step D168.

[Step D168] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more. If the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is not 2 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D170, and if it is determined that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D169. move on.

[Step D169] The control unit determines that it is an execution trigger of the effect game, and ends the effect game execution timing determination process.
[Step D170] The control unit determines that it is not an opportunity to execute the effect game, and ends the effect game execution opportunity determination process.

As described above, by using the gaming machine 10 for determining whether or not the gaming state is an execution trigger, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the gaming state even if the presentation game is executed.

[Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, one effect game is played in one special figure variation display game. In the fifth embodiment, a rendering game can be executed a plurality of times in one special view variable display game.

For example, the gaming machine 10 determines the number of effect games to be executed in one special figure variation display game and the effect time thereof at the time of trigger event determination of the effect game. For example, gaming machine 1
0 is the number of effect games to be executed in the special figure variation display game when it is determined to be the execution opportunity in the execution opportunity determination process, and the presentation time assigned to each effect game is the remaining time of the special figure variation display game Determined based on the number of pending presentation start memories.

A flow of processing in the case of executing a plurality of presentation games in a single special figure variation display game will be described using FIG. FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the effect control device of the modification 3 of the fifth embodiment performs the effect game a plurality of times in one special view variable display game. The timing chart shown in FIG. 99 shows the flow of processing in the case where the special figure variation display game performs three rendering games when deriving a hit.

The gaming machine 10 starts an N-th special figure variation display game from timing t61 and starts a first effect game (pattern 3) to start three symbol temporary stop derivation display. In the first effect game (pattern 3) being executed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip can be performed as the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display is started to be performed.

The gaming machine 10 performs 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display for 7 seconds from timing t61 to timing t62, and performs 3 symbol temporary stop display from timing t62. Sub display 53
In the first effect game (pattern 3) being executed at 0, with the start of the 3 symbol temporary stop display at the timing t62, the effect skip becomes impossible.

The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from timing t62 to timing t63, terminates the first effect game (pattern 3), and starts the second effect game (pattern 3) for three symbols. Start to display temporary stop derivation. In the second effect game (pattern 3) being performed by the sub display device 530, with the start of the three symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop derivation display for seven seconds from timing t63 to timing t64, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t64. Sub display 53
In the second effect game (pattern 3) executed at 0, with the start of the 3 symbol temporary stop display at timing t64, the effect skip becomes impossible.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t64 to the timing t65, terminates the second effect game (pattern 3), and starts the third effect game (pattern 1) to reach out Start to display. In the third effect game (pattern 1) being performed by the sub display device 530, with the start of the reach derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t65 to timing t66, performs reach effect display for twenty two seconds from timing t66 to timing t67, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t67. In the third effect game (pattern 1) being played on the sub display device 530, with the start of the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display being performed at the timing t67, the effect skip becomes impossible.

The gaming machine 10 performs the three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t67 to the timing t68, and the timing t at which the Nth special figure fluctuation display game ends from the timing t68.
Swing display is performed for n seconds up to 69, and the third effect game (pattern 1) is ended.

In addition, the game machine 10 is a result aspect derived | led-out in the last production game of multiple times (3
The combination of the symbols in the symbol temporary stop display) is the result mode corresponding to the result aspect of the special figure variation display game, and the result aspect derived in the other effect games is the result of the disapproval not corresponding to the result aspect of the special figure variation display game It is an aspect.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 causes the player to grasp that the result mode of the special view variation display game is the out of the first and second production games, and then the special view variation is performed in the third production game. It can be made to grasp that the result mode of the display game is actually a hit. As a result, the amusement machine 10 can improve the interest as compared to the case where it is determined that the result mode of the special figure variation display game is a hit in one effect game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a function to skip the effect skip during each effect game and skip the effect of each effect game (for example, when the effect skip during the first effect game, 3 of the first effect game It may be made to skip to the symbol temporary stop display, or it functions as a skip of the entire three effect games (for example, when the effect skip during the first effect game, the third symbol temporary stop display of the third effect game May be skipped).

In addition, although it demonstrated as performing three times of presentation games in one special figure fluctuation display game, it changes to this, and, as for game machine 10, three times of presentation games are performed in one presentation game The processing shown in FIG. 99 may be realized by performing an effect (so-called pseudo link) to make it known.

[Modification 4 of the fifth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, when the special view variation display game is executed when the effect start memory increases (D121: YES) (D123: YES), the special game variation display game Even if the game has not been executed (D124: NO), the game is not a special-figure-variation display game for which the special-figure fluctuation display game is the target of the presentation game (D126: N)
It was determined that O or D127: NO) was not an execution trigger.

On the other hand, in the modification 4 of the fifth embodiment, when the special figure variation display game in progress does not derive reach effect (D 126: NO), or the remaining time of the special figure variation display game in execution is short. Even if there is a case (D127: NO), reach figure is derived in the pending storage, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game which is the target of execution of the production game) to perform effects for 2 seconds or more If there is a pending storage to be executed, and a hit does not occur before the start of the special view variation display game, it is determined that it is an execution trigger, and the effect game corresponding to the special view variation display game of the pending storage Is executed before the presentation of the corresponding special-image variation display game starts.

For example, the gaming machine 10 has a left symbol until the corresponding special view variation display game starts,
The middle symbol and the right symbol are continuously rotated at high speed (high speed fluctuation display), and when the corresponding special view variable display game is started, the effect game (pattern 1 to pattern 5) described in the fifth embodiment is started.

The flow of the process of the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 100 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the effect control device of the modification 4 of the fifth embodiment performs the effect game across a plurality of special view change display games.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 100, the N-th special view variation display game is a special view variation display game not subject to the execution of the effect game (for example, the special view variation display game without deriving the reach effect, the remaining time It is assumed that it is a special figure variation display game which is less than 2 seconds, or a special figure variation display game in which a rendering game has been executed. In addition, it is assumed that the (N + 1) th variable display game is a special view variable display game which is a target of execution of the effect game.

When start memory is generated at the timing t71 of the N-th special figure variation display game, the gaming machine 10 detects a special figure variation display game to be an object of execution of the effect game from within the hold storage, and N +
It is specified that the first special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game to be a target of execution of the effect game. For example, in the gaming machine 10, when the effect control device 300 generates hold storage (
Based on the reception command received from the game control device 100 at the time of winning that causes the generation of the hold storage, the special view variation display game to be the target of the execution of the effect game is detected from within the hold storage.

Then, the gaming machine 10 starts the effect game corresponding to the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game from the timing t71 and starts high-speed variation display. In the effect game being played on the sub display device 530, the corresponding special figure variation display game (the (N + 1) th) is not started, and therefore, the effect skip is impossible.

The gaming machine 10 ends the N-th special figure fluctuation display game at timing t72, starts the (N + 1) -th special figure fluctuation display game, ends the high-speed fluctuation display, and starts the reach derivation display. The effect game being played on the sub display device 530 is in a state in which effect skip is possible as the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display from timing t72 to timing t73 five seconds later, performs reach effect display from timing t73 to timing t74 for 22 seconds, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t74. The effect game being played on the sub display device 530 is in a state in which the effect skip can not be performed as the three symbol temporary stop display is started at the timing t74.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t74 to the timing t75, and performs a swing display for n seconds from the timing t75 to the timing t76 at which the N + 1th special figure variation display game ends. Finish.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 can execute the effect game even during the special figure variation display game which is not the target of the execution of the effect game. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can improve the player's interest.

In addition, the gaming machine 10, when there is a special figure variation display game to be the target of the execution of the effect game in the pending storage, across the special figure variation display game, the special feature to be the target of the execution of the relevant presentation game In order to play the effect game corresponding to the figure variable display game, it is possible to clearly show that the player has a holding memory for deriving the reach effect. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from missing a reach effect.

[Modification 5 of the fifth embodiment]
In the modification 4 of the fifth embodiment, the special figure fluctuation display game in progress does not derive reach effect (D 126: NO), or the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation display game in execution is a short time Even if (D127: NO), reach effect is derived in the pending storage, and the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game targeted for execution of the presentation game) is executed to produce effects for 2 seconds or more If there is a pending storage, and a hit does not occur before the start of the special view variation display game, it is determined that it is an execution opportunity, corresponding to the effect game corresponding to the special view variation display game of the pending storage It is assumed that it is executed before the production of the special figure variation display game starts.

In the fifth modification of the fifth embodiment, the special figure variation display game in progress does not derive reach effect (D 126: NO), or the remaining time of the special figure variation display game in execution is a short time Even if (D127: NO) (even if the special figure variation display game being executed is a special figure variation display game that is not the target of the execution of the presentation game), the presentation game is executed if there is a pending storage Do.

For example, the gaming machine 10 is a rendering game consisting of 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display and 3 symbol temporary stop display (2 seconds) regardless of the contents of the special pattern variation display game currently executed next time. Run. In this case, the gaming machine 10 sets, for example, the execution time of the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display so that the 3 symbol temporary stop display (2 seconds) can be performed in the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed next.

The flow of the process of the fifth modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 101 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the effect control device of the modification 5 of the fifth embodiment performs the effect game across a plurality of special view variable display games.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 101, the N-th special view variation display game is a special view variation display game not targeted for the execution of the effect game (for example, the special view variation display game without deriving the reach effect, the remaining time It is assumed that it is a special figure variation display game which is less than 2 seconds, or a special figure variation display game in which a rendering game has been executed.

When start storage is generated at the timing t81 of the N-th special view variation display game, the gaming machine 10 specifies that there is storage on hold (that storage on hold is not 0).
Then, the gaming machine 10 starts the effect game corresponding to the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game from the timing t81 and starts to perform the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display. Sub display 53
In the effect game being played at 0, with the start of the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display being performed, the corresponding special figure variation display game (N + 1st time) is not started, so a state where the effect skip is impossible It becomes.

The gaming machine 10 ends the N-th special figure variation display game at timing t82 and starts the (N + 1) -th special figure variation display game. The effect game being played on the sub display device 530 is in a state in which effect skip is possible as the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop derivation display from timing t82 to timing t83, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t83. The effect game being played on the sub display device 530 is in a state in which the effect skip can not be performed as the three symbol temporary stop display is started at the timing t83.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t83 to the timing t84, and ends the effect game.
According to this, the gaming machine 10 can secure an execution opportunity of the effect game. That is, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the start memory from saturating (exceeding the maximum number).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may interlock the feature and the effect game. For example, when the symbol is temporarily stopped at "month" in the effect game, the month of the character may be moved to the center, and when temporarily stopped at another symbol, the symbol may be returned to the stopped or initial position. .

Further, even when the game and the effect game are interlocked with each other, if the effect game is skippable, the operation may not be in time due to the skip, so that the function is not operated. It is also good.

Further, even in the case where the game and the effect game are interlocked with each other, the gaming machine 10 operates the character to clarify the boundaries of the game if the effect game can not be skipped instead of the above. You may not make it happen.

In addition, even when the game machine 10 interlocks the prize with the effect game, or during the effect game, even if the remaining time of the corresponding special view fluctuation display game is short, the effect game also ends. Since it is imminent, you may make it not operate an accessory.

In addition, even in the case where the gaming machine 10 interlocks the feature and the effect game, the special view variation display game performs a specific effect (for example, an effect that the effect may be hidden by the feature). May not operate the character. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the reduction in the visibility of the effects performed in the special view variable display game.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including the first to fourth modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes main control means (game control device 100) and slave control means (effect control device 300). The main control means supervises the progress of the first variation display game (special figure variation display game) whose right of execution is the detection of establishment of the first condition (winning on the start winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37). Control. The secondary control means causes the first display means (display device 41) to display the first variation display game in response to an instruction from the main control means, and establishes a second condition different from the first condition (effect flow path of gaming balls The second variable display game is controlled by making the progress (start timing, end timing) of the second variable display game (production game) whose detection right to 354 (flow down) is the execution right asynchronously to the first variable display game Are displayed on the second display means (sub display device 530),
At the same time, the result mode of the second variable display game is derived based on the result mode derived by the first variable display game in the variable display.

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) is an operation means (push button 25) capable of accepting an operation.
Further, when the operation of the operation means is accepted, the result mode of the second variable display game based on the result mode of the first variable display game is derived from the result mode of the first variable display game Are also derivable before.

(3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) further includes operation means (push button 25), the second variable display game is capable of shortening the effect (effect skip is possible), and the slave control device is the operation means When the operation of is detected, the effect of the second variable display game is shortened.

The result aspect of the second variation display game of (4) and (3) is the same as the result aspect of the first variation display game.
(5) The subsidiary control means of (4) derives the result mode in the second variable display game at a timing before deriving the result mode in the first variable display game.

(6) The slave control means of (5) derives the result mode of the second variable display game at the timing when the operation means is operated.
(7) The subsidiary control means of (6) determines the effect mode of the second variable display game based on the remaining time of the first variable display game to be executed simultaneously.

(8) The subsidiary control means of (7) determines the effect mode of the second variable display game based on the result mode of the first variable display game to be executed simultaneously.
(9) When the secondary control means of (8) derives a result mode (hit) that triggers the transition to the special game state, the first variable display game performs the result mode Before being derived, the second display means is used to set an effect mode in the special game state.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment includes a gaming board 3000 (see FIG. 76) as in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment uses the sub display device 530, the push button 25 (see FIG. 62), the effect lamp 540, and the board effect devices 550 and 551 in addition to the display device 41 to give notice of suspension. Make a presentation.

First, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 1
02 is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of 6th Embodiment.
In the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the position of the sub display device 530 can be changed, and the position to retract to the lower end of the center case 40 (retraction position) and the position to advance to the front of the display device 41 (advance position And can be switched.

First, FIG. 102A shows the display screen of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is in the retracted position while the symbol in the variable display game is changing. The effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 light up in a mode corresponding to the symbol variation.
For example, the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 blink in white. The panel effects devices 550, 551 are in a non-operating state.

The display device 41 shown in FIG. 102 (1) has two display patterns, a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, a pending indication 605, and a pending conclusion indication 606 as display contents. Including.

The two decorative patterns have a large symbol group 601 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 602 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 601 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is displayed large at the approximate center of the display device 41. Large symbol group 601
Includes the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R. The left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C and the right symbol 601R of the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in a symbol variation state.

The large symbol group 601 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is, in many cases, the left symbol 601 L and the middle symbol 601
C and L form a reach aspect, and wait for the stop of the right symbol 601R to form a hit aspect.

The small symbol group 602 is in charge of reporting of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 602 is smallly displayed on the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. Small symbol group 602,
Includes left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 of the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

In general, the large symbol group 601 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 602, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be largely changed. On the contrary, small symbol group 602 is
Compared with the large symbol group 601, it is displayed smaller and the display position has less freedom (for example, position fixing).

The special figure 1 reservation number display 603 displays the number of pending storages (starting number of memories) of the special figure 1 game. A special figure 2 pending number display 604 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 605 can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view fluctuation display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 605 corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 603 and the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 604. The holding and digest display 606 can indicate that the special view variable display game is in the variable display state and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode.

The number of pending storages for the special view 1 game indicated by the special view 1 pending count display 603 is “2”, and the number of pending storages for the special view 2 game shown by the special view 2 pending number display 604 is “0”, Pending display 605
The number of pending storages indicated by is “2”. In addition, the reserve consumption indication 606 indicates that the special figure variation display game is in symbol variation.

Next, the display screen of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is at the advanced position while the symbol is changing in the variable display game is shown in FIG. 102 (2). The effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 light up in a mode corresponding to the symbol variation.
The panel effects devices 550, 551 are in a non-operating state.

The display device 41 shown in FIG. 102 (2) includes a small symbol group 602, a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, and a pending conclusion indication 606 in the display content.
The sub display device 530 is at the advanced position and hides a part of the display area of the display device 41.
For example, the sub display 530 is in a position to hide the hold display 605. At this time, the display device 41 displays the hold display 605 in the display area hidden by the sub display device 530.
May or may not be displayed. The display device 41 can reduce the processing load of the effect control device 300 by not displaying the hold display 605 in the display area hidden by the sub display device 530.

The sub display device 530 can display an effect game. The display device 41 sets a rendering area 560 instead of the display of the large symbol group 601 in order to direct the player's attention to the rendering game, and displays a required rendering display. The effect game is a variable display game performed in association with the on-hold notice effect. The effect game is a variable display game for effects different from the special view change display game (including the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game) or the popular view change display. Note that the suspension notice effect is one mode of the prefetch effect, and the gaming machine 10 has the suspension display 605 and the suspension digest display 60.
Perform a reservation announcement effect using 6 and.

The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) means that the variable display game corresponding to the start winning memory (the start winning memory is held or just held) for which the special view variable display game is not yet executed In order to notify the player in advance with predetermined reliability whether or not it will be a big hit when it is played (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be), effects such as performing display of start winning memory storage etc. differently from normal It is. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the retention of the starting winning a prize memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

Here, the effect game displayed by the sub display device 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a view showing a display example of an effect game in the sub display device of the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103 (1), the sub display unit 530 includes three matrix display units 530.
A symbol or an image can be variably displayed for each L, 530C, 530R. For example, the sub display unit 530 displays the left partial image of the push button 25 on the matrix display unit 530L in a stopped state, and variably displays the matrix display units 530C and 530R (FIG.
2)). Subsequently, the sub display device 530 causes the matrix display unit 530C to select the push button 2
The middle part image of 5 is stopped and displayed, and the matrix display unit 530R is changed and displayed (FIG. 103).
(3)). Subsequently, the sub display unit 530 stops and displays the right partial image of the push button 25 on the matrix display unit 530R, and displays the entire image of the push button 25 on the matrix display units 530L, 530C, and 530R (FIG. 103 (4)). ).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can play the effect game in which the entire image of the push button 25 is derived in the sub display device 530. Production game, push button 2
Deriving the entire image of 5 is the success of the effect, and not deriving the entire image of the push button 25 is the failure of the effect.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may perform outlier fluctuation in the sub display device 530 so as not to derive the entire image of the push button 25, or performs reach variation in the sub display device 530 before deriving the entire image of the push button 25. May be Further, an execution trigger of the effect game may be the establishment of a predetermined event trigger, and may be, for example, a reception trigger of a prefetch command, or may be a winning trigger for a predetermined winning opening.

The gaming machine 10 receives the success of the effect game in the sub display device 530, and displays the display device 41.
Push button 25 for the player using the sub display device 530 and the effect lamp 540
Guide the operation of Here, with respect to the operation guide of the push button 25, FIGS. 104 and 105.
This will be described using FIG. 104 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of push button operation guidance using the display device of the sixth embodiment, the sub display device, and the effect lamp. FIG. 105 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of push button operation guidance using the display device according to the sixth embodiment, the sub display device, and the effect lamp.

First, the gaming machine 10 lights up the effect lamp 540 in a predetermined mode while notifying the sub display device 530 that the entire image of the push button 25 has been derived, and notifies success of the effect game (FIG. )).
Next, the gaming machine 10 scrolls the entire image of the push button 25 displayed on the sub display device 530 upward. At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays a range which is missing from the display range of the sub display device 530 in the entire image of the push button 25 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (FIG. 104 (2)). That is, the gaming machine 10 displays the entire image of the push button 25 by the display device 41 and the sub display device 530 while the sub display device 53 is displayed.
The entire image of the push button 25 is scrolled upward from the display range of 0 to the effect area 560 of the display device 41. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes the player easily feel the relation between the display on the result of the effect game performed on the sub display device 530 and the display on the operation guide of the push button 25 performed on the display device 41. be able to.

In addition, even when the gaming machine 10 displays the entire image of the push button 25 (the result mode of the effect game) on the sub display device 530, even if the effect lamp 540 performs advance notification for the operation result of the push button 25. Good. For example, the gaming machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 and displays the hold display mode (hold standby display or hold digest display).
When changing the display mode of the effect lamp 540 to a display mode corresponding to the pending display mode after the change. More specifically, when the gaming machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 and changes the display mode of the specific hold standby display from the white display to the red display, the push button 2 is used.
The change of the hold display mode is suggested in advance by using the effect lamp 540 as a red display mode before the detection of the pressing operation 5. Note that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily have to make the display mode of the effect lamp 540 consistent with the post-change display mode in the suggestion of a change in the pre-display mode, and a display that matches the post-change display mode. The display mode may have a lower degree (such as the degree of expectation or reliability) than the mode.

When the game machine 10 displays the entire image of the push button 25 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41, the sub display device 530 displays a message regarding operation guidance of the push button 25. For example, the sub-display device 530 horizontally scrolls the message "READY" before the operation acceptance timing of the push button 25 to prompt the player to prepare for the operation of the push button 25 (FIG. 105 (1)).

Then, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the entire image of the push button 25 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (for example, increases the lightness) to the player that it is the operation reception timing of the push button 25 invite. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 has a sub display 5
A message relating to the operation guide of the push button 25 is displayed at 30. For example, the sub display device 530 displays a message “Press!” At the operation reception timing of the push button 25 to urge the player to operate the push button 25 (FIG. 105 (2)).

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, when the display device 41 and the sub display device 530 cooperate to perform the operation guide of the push button 25, the operation guide can be notified to the player more surely and the interest is improved. Can be Although the gaming machine 10 displays the message etc. by the sub display device 530, the message etc. may be displayed by the display device 41 in addition to the sub display device 530 or in place of the sub display device 530. .

In the same manner as the entire image of the push button 25, the gaming machine 10 displays the message “READY” or the message “press!” Displayed on the sub display device 530 from the display range of the sub display device 530 to the effect area 560 of the display device 41. The display may be scrolled upward to the top.

The gaming machine 10 may display the image displayed by scrolling to the effect area 560 as a display mode such as the dot display displayed by the sub display device 530 or a low resolution display such as the dot display. Instead of the mode, the display mode may be switched to the high resolution display mode.

The gaming machine 10 accepts the operation of the push button 25 and performs a suspension notice effect accompanied by a change in the display mode of the suspension display 605 or the suspension digest display 606. With reference to FIG. 106 to FIG. 108, a description will be given of the hold notification effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. FIG. 106 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a reserve announcement effect accompanied by a change in display mode of the pause display or the pause digest display according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of the hold notification effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the hold display or the hold digest display according to the sixth embodiment (FIG. 107).
That is 2). FIG. 108 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of the hold notification effect with the change of the display mode of the hold display or the hold digest display according to the sixth embodiment;

The gaming machine 10 receives the operation (for example, the pressing operation) of the push button 25 and changes the display mode of the effect lamp 540 according to the reliability notified as the pre-reading effect (FIG. 106 (FIG.
1)). For example, the gaming machine 10 turns on the effect lamp 540 in a display mode corresponding to the display mode after the change of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. More specifically, the gaming machine 1
When 0 changes the hold indicator 605 or the hold digest indicator 606 to red, the effect lamp 54
Light 0 in red.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the effect lamp 540, and the board effect device 550
, 551 are changed (FIG. 106 (1)). For example, the gaming machine 10 moves the movable member 551a hidden behind the board effect device 551 directly below the effect lamp 540.
Such change of the operation mode of the board effect devices 550 and 551 can direct the player's attention to the upper part of the display device 41 and also directs the player's attention to the change of the display mode of the effect lamp 540 to be performed simultaneously be able to. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player easily feel that the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 take on the effect related to the on-hold notice effect. Also, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the display device 41.

Further, the gaming machine 10 changes the position of the sub display device 530 from the advanced position to the retracted position (see FIG.
Fig. 106 (1), (2). Thus, the display device 41 clearly indicates the hold display 605.
In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel the correspondence between the effect game and the on-hold notice effect from the interlock of the retraction of the sub display device 530 and the indication of the on-hold display 605. Note that the display device 41 provides a time lag in which the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606 is not changed for a predetermined time after the position of the sub display device 530 is at the retracted position (see FIG. )). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the effect lamp 540 changes the display mode, the board effect devices 550 and 551 change the operation mode, and the sub display device 530 changes the position, so that the hold display 605 or hold reservation is performed. The display mode of the display 606 is maintained.

Although the gaming machine 10 receives the operation of the push button 25 and changes the position of the sub display device 530 from the advanced position to the retracted position, it waits at the advanced position and pushes the push button 2
An image corresponding to the operation of 5 may be displayed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform various display effects using the sub display device 530 standing by at the advanced position and the display device 41.

Next, the gaming machine 10 changes the operation mode of the board effect devices 550 and 551 to the initial state (FIG. 107 (1)). For example, the gaming machine 10 moves the movable member 551a that has been moved immediately below the effect lamp 540 to a position (initial state) where the movable member 551a is hidden behind the board effect device 551.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can display the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 60 from the effect lamp 540.
The correspondence display 562 heading to 6 is displayed in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (FIG. 107 (1)).
). The correspondence display 562 is a display for informing the correspondence between the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold digestion display 606, and is, for example, a lightning-like effect of the same color as the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540. It superimposes on the inside pattern 601C. More specifically, when the effect lamp 540 is changed to red, the gaming machine 10 sets the corresponding display 562 to a red effect. The correspondence display 562 may be changeable in shape, size, color, display time, and the like according to the reliability notified as pre-reading effect regardless of the display mode of the effect lamp 540. In addition, correspondence display 562 is said to be superimposed on middle symbol 601C in large symbol group 601, but may be superimposed on symbols other than middle symbol (for example, left symbol 601L and right symbol 601R), which symbol should be superimposed Pending display 605 or Pending digest display 6 by
The display mode of 06 may be changed. For example, the correspondence display 562 may indicate which display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 is to be switched depending on which symbol is superimposed, or the hold display depending on which symbol is superimposed 6
The color, the shape, the size, and the like of the display mode after the change of the “05 or the reserve consumption display 606” may be made different.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 according to the reliability of notifying as pre-reading effect (FIG. 107 (1)). For example, gaming machine 1
0 changes the hold indicator 605 or the hold digest indicator 606 from white to red.

For example, it is not easy for the player to grasp the change timing and the change contents only by changing the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. However, in the gaming machine 10, various effect devices (display device 41, sub display device 530, push button 25, effect lamp 54
0, the board effect device 550, 551, etc.) can lead the player's interest to the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 by creating a warning.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 prioritizes the display contents of the effect area 560 over the display contents of the large symbol group 601 when setting the effect area 560 for holding notice in the display area of the display device 41 during execution of the hold notice effect. Do. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may hide the large symbol group 601 or may display the large symbol group 601 by reducing the transparency.

Next, the gaming machine 10 restores the display mode of the effect lamp 540 to a normal display mode (for example, white lighting) (FIG. 107 (2)). Further, the gaming machine 10 cancels the setting of the effect area 560 for the on-hold notice in the display area of the display device 41 (FIG. 107 (2)).

Thus, the gaming machine 10 includes the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551,
The correspondence display 562 and the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 cooperate with each other to produce the presentation mode (
Since the display mode and the operation mode are changed, it is possible to easily inform the player of the notification target and the notification content.

The effect lamp 540 is a light source 543 (FIG. 79) through the display plate 548 (see FIG. 79).
The emission color can be switched by projecting the emission color of (see FIG. 79) on the projection lens 541 (see FIG. 79). Also, the effect lamp 540 is a light source 5 through the display plate 546 (see FIG. 79).
By projecting the light emitted from the light source 43 onto the projection lens 541, a character like a tiger can be displayed (FIG. 108 (1)). At this time, the gaming machine 10 can display the correspondence display 562, the hold display 605, or the hold digest display 606 in a striped pattern in accordance with the display mode of the effect lamp 540.

In addition, the effect lamp 540 can display a message such as “superheat” by projecting the light emitted from the light source 543 onto the projection lens 541 through the display plate 544 (see FIG. 79) (see FIG. )). At this time, the gaming machine 10 can display the correspondence display 562, the hold display 605, or the hold digest display 606 in a display mode such as a flame in accordance with the display mode of the effect lamp 540. Although illustration is omitted, the effect lamp 540 projects light emitted from the light source 543 while switching the plurality of display plates 545, 547, 549.
You can display animations that make petals dance by projecting onto At this time,
The gaming machine 10 is made to correspond to the display mode of the effect lamp 540, and the corresponding display 562 and the hold display 60.
5 or the reserve digest indicator 606 may be displayed in a display mode such as a petal pattern.

Next, the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the on-hold notice effect of the sixth embodiment. In addition, although the display mode of the hold display 605 will be described, the display mode of the hold digest display 606 can be the same.

The display modes of the hold display 605 are from pattern P10 to pattern P19. The pattern P10 and the pattern P11 are default (standard) display modes, for example, circular and white display modes. The pattern P <b> 10 is a display mode (non-hidden) relating to pending storage for which pending advance announcement effects are not scheduled. The pattern P11 is a display mode (latency A) relating to pending storage for which a pending advance presentation effect is scheduled.

The pattern P12 is a non-default (non-standard) display mode, for example, a circular and white blinking display mode. The pattern P12 is a display mode (latency B) regarding pending storage for which pending advance presentation effects are scheduled.

The pattern P11 and the pattern P12 are both related to the holding memory for which the hold notification effect is scheduled, but the pattern P11 does not clarify that the hold notification effect is scheduled, and the pattern P12 is for the hold notification effect. It differs in the point of clarifying a thing.

The pattern P13 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and blue display mode. The pattern P14 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and green display mode. The pattern P15 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and red display mode. The pattern P16 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and petal (cherry blossom) pattern display mode. The pattern P17 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and rainbow display mode.

In the pattern P13 to the pattern P17, an expectation (for example, a hit expectation) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game is set. The degree of expectation is not limited to that corresponding to the possibility of winning per, but may correspond to the development stage of variable display effects such as reach and super reach. It should be noted that the general winning a prize opening notice display effect may be to notify the expectation level to the hold notice effect of the other stage and the independence independently, or to notify the expectation degree by the combination with the hold notice effect of the other stage It may be

The pattern P18 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and tiger pattern display mode. The pattern P18 is a temporary display mode, and changes from the pattern P15 to any of the patterns P17 at a delayed timing such as at the time of the hold shift. That is, pattern P
Reference numeral 18 denotes a display mode indicating an expectation of developing from the pattern P15 to any of the patterns P17.

The pattern P19 is a non-default display mode, such as a flame-like display mode. The pattern P19 is a temporary display mode, and changes to either the pattern P16 or the pattern P17 at a delayed timing such as a hold shift. That is, pattern P19
Is a display mode showing an expectation of developing into either the pattern P16 or the pattern P17.

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expectation in the pattern P13, sets the highest expectation in the pattern P17, and sets the expectation which increases stepwise from the pattern P13 to the pattern P17. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has, for example, a pattern P with a specific degree of expectation of 0% to 100%.
13 to pattern P17 may be set, for example, "low", "medium", "
As in the case of “high”, a rough expectation may be set.

Pattern P 18 and pattern 19 may be in a non-temporary display mode. In that case, the gaming machine 10 can set a predetermined degree of expectation for the pattern P18 and the pattern 19 as in the patterns P13 to P17.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform the on-hold notice effect as a series of operations ranging from the start point of the effect game on the sub display device 530 to the change in the display mode of the on-hold display 605 or the on-hold digest display 606. Such a gaming machine 10 performs the game of the player's attention during the game progress (for example, position switching of the sub display device 530, the board effect device 550, 551
While attracting to the operation mode of (1), it is possible to raise the player's interest in the holding notice effect. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can make the on-hold notice effect more easily understandable to the player by interposing the item operation.

Next, a modification of the on-hold notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of the hold notification effect accompanied by the change in the display mode of the hold display or the hold digest display according to the modification of the sixth embodiment.

In the panel effect devices 550 and 551 shown in FIG. 107 (1), the corresponding display 562 is an effect lamp 5.
The movable member 551 without waiting for heading from the 40 to the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606
a is moved to a position where it is hidden behind the board effect device 551, but the movable member 55 waits for the corresponding indication 562 to move from the effect lamp 540 to the hold indication 605 or the hold decision indication 606.
1a may be moved to a position where it is hidden behind the board effect device 551 (FIG. 110).
(1)).

At this time, the correspondence display 562 can have the same display mode regardless of the position of the movable member 551a. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the processing load of the effect control device 300, and can perform the corresponding display without a sense of discomfort even in an unexpected situation in which the movable member 551a does not operate.

In addition, the panel effect devices 550 and 551 may include a light emitting unit (for example, full color LED) including the movable member 551a, and a light emission mode (for example, synchronization) corresponding to the effect lamp 540. Display (Fig. 110 (1)). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the player's interest in the effect lamp 540 by the movable member 551a. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may set the light emission mode of the other light emission units included in the board effect devices 550 and 551 to a light emission mode different from the light emission unit included in the movable member 551a. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can move from the center case 40 to the movable member 551a and the effect lamp 540.
To further enhance the player's interest in the effect lamp 540.

The panel effect devices 550 and 551 shown in FIGS. 106 (1) and (2) move the movable member 551a from the back of the panel effect device 551 directly below the effect lamp 540, but the panel effect device 550
The movable member 550a may be moved directly below the effect lamp 540 from the back of the lens (FIG. 110 (2)). In the gaming machine 10, the board effect devices 550, 551 are movable members 550a,
It may be made to select which 551a should be moved in relation to the degree of reliability notified by the on-hold notice effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 transmits the movable member 550 by notifying different degrees of reliability when the movable member 551a moves and when the movable member 550a moves.
The player can be given a new interest about the movement of a, 551a.

Further, the gaming machine 10 depends on which of the movable members 550a and 551a is moved,
The operation content of the push button 25 may be different. For example, the movable member 551a
The movement of the movable member 550 a corresponds to the single pressing operation of the push button 25.
It corresponds to a plurality of pressing operations (continuous hitting operation) of the push button 25. At this time, the movable member 5
50a may be moved in relation to the number of pressing operations of the push button 25 (
Fig. 110 (2). For example, the movable member 550a moves little by little each time the push button 25 is pressed, and moves immediately below the effect lamp 540 when the number of press operations reaches 10 times.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can display the operation guidance display 561 on the effect area 560 of the display device 41 and can guide the continuous hitting operation of the push button 25. For example, the gaming machine 10 can display a continuous hitting operation image of the push button 25 as the operation guidance display 561.
In addition to or in place of the operation guidance display 561, the gaming machine 10 may display a message “Continuous strike!” Or the like on the sub display device 530.

Next, the execution timing of the on-hold notice effect will be described using FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of the on-hold notice effect according to the sixth embodiment. First, the start winning at timing t0 can be the starting point of the on-hold notice effect. Effect control device 300
In the timing t0, the start winning combination that can be the starting point of the on-hold notice effect is detected by receiving the prefetch system command from the game control device 100.

In addition, when the start winning combination at the timing t0 is “m (for example, any integer from 0 to 7)” before the starting winning combination, “1” is incremented to “m + 1” as the number of pending storages. Update to

Further, the effect control device 300 can set the on-hold notice effect standby state for waiting on the execution of the on-hold notice effect. Thereby, the effect control device 300 can adjust the start timing and the execution time of the effect game in the sub display device 530. For example, effect control device 300
Is enabled to release the on-hold notice effect standby state after timing t1 exceeding the on-hold shift timing, and starts the effect game by detecting the on-hold notice effect execution trigger at timing t2. The pending shift timing is a timing at which the number of fluctuation display times is updated to “n + 1” by incrementing “1” when the number of fluctuation display times is “n (for example, any integer of 1 or more)”. The on-hold notice effect execution trigger may be a timer trigger or an event trigger after the timing at which the on-hold notice effect standby state can be released. More specifically, the effect control device 300 may release the on-hold notice effect standby state using the timing at which 3000 ms has elapsed from the on-hold shift timing as a timer trigger, and may start the effect game. Alternatively, the effect control device 300 may release the on-hold notice effect standby state as an event trigger by detecting the flow-down (see FIG. 76) of the effect channel 354 of the game ball after the on-hold shift timing to start the effect game. Further, the effect control device 300 does not necessarily have to be capable of releasing the on-hold notice effect standby state beyond the on-hold shift timing. In addition, effect control device 300
Alternatively, the reception of the prefetching system command may be used as the start timing of the effect game without setting the on-hold notice effect standby state.

When the effect game starts at timing t2, the effect control device 300 continues the effect game for a predetermined time, and derives (displays) the result of the effect game at timing t3. When the whole image of the push button 25 is derived in the sub display device 530 as a result of the effect game, the effect control device 300 performs operation guide display of the push button 25 for a predetermined time from timing t3. In addition, when the operation of the push button 25 is detected at timing t4, the effect control device 300 does not wait for the elapse of a predetermined time, and the corresponding guidance (for example, the corresponding display 56).
2) Display. At time t5, the effect control device 300 changes the display mode (hold mode) of the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606 in response to the correspondence guidance.

In this manner, in the gaming machine 10, since the plurality of effect devices cooperate between the start winning combination and the holding mode change, it is possible to easily inform the player of the notification target and the notification content while maintaining high interest. it can. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a movable effect device (for example, the sub display device 53).
Even if 0 and the board effect device 550, 551 etc. operate, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from leaving the on-hold notice effect in order to cooperate with the on-hold notice effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10, the effect location (for example, sub display device 530 or board effect device 550, 551, effect lamp 540, hold display 6
Even if the display position 05 etc. and the display position etc. of the reserve digest display 606 are distributed and arranged, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being separated from the reserve notice effect because the respective rendering parts are linked.

The gaming machine 10 may be capable of executing effects (for example, the effect game of the fifth embodiment) other than the hold notification effect in the hold notification effect standby state. Further, the gaming machine 10 may stand by in the holding notice effect standby state for execution of effects including effects other than the holding notice effect (for example, the effect game of the fifth embodiment). In this case, the gaming machine 10
The notification of the duration of the on-hold notice effect standby state may be notified, for example, the duration of the on-off notice effect standby state or the special-image game on-off notice effect standby state by the sub display device 530 or another display device. You may make it display the fluctuation | variation display frequency etc. In addition, the gaming machine 10, in the holding notice effect waiting state, the duration of the holding notice effect waiting state or the special drawing game in the holding notice effect waiting state by the BGM and the sound effects (including sound) outputted by the speakers 19a and 19b. It is also possible to notify of the number of times of fluctuation display of Thus, the gaming machine 10
Can improve the player's sense of expectation for the release of the on-hold notice effect standby state. Further, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's attention to the release of the on-hold notice effect standby state, and can suppress the player's missed on-off notice effect after the on-off notice effect standby state is released.

In addition, the game machine 10 has a backup memory (for example, EEPR) in the effect control device 300.
In the power off state, the information regarding the on-hold notice effect standby state may be stored and held in the backup memory, and may be restored to the on-hold notice effect on standby state after the power is restored. For example, the information on the pending notification effect standby state includes the presence or absence of the pending notification effect standby state and the effect location (for example, the sub display device 530, the panel effect device 550, 551, the effect lamp 540, the pending display 605, or the pending end indication 606 It includes the current display mode and the final display mode for each display position etc.). At this time, the gaming machine 10 uses the effect location as the default mode after power recovery, and is triggered by the reception of a predetermined command (for example, a fluctuation start command, a hold number command, a prefetch command, etc.) from the game control apparatus 100. The information on the hold notice effect standby state is read out from the backup memory, and the hold notice effect standby state is restored. When the gaming machine 10 returns to the on-hold notice effect standby state after power recovery, the on-off notice effect may be made waiting for the on-off notice effect execution opportunity, or the on-off notice effect execution opportunity is established or not. However, it may be regarded as having been established and the on-hold notice effect may be performed.
In addition, when the gaming machine 10 returns to the on-hold notice effect standby state after the power is restored, the gaming machine 10 may display the final mode without passing through the intermediate process of the on-hold notice effect. In addition, when the effect control device 300 is not provided with a backup memory, the gaming machine 10 may not execute any on-hold notice effect related to the on-hold notice effect standby state after power recovery.

Next, detailed expectation degree notification performed by the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 as a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of anticipation degree notification according to the modification of the sixth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment receives the operation (for example, the pressing operation) of the push button 25 and changes the display mode of the effect lamp 540 according to the reliability notified as pre-reading effect (FIG. 106 (1)). ). The gaming machine 10 of the modification of the sixth embodiment is notified of the expectation by the five light emission modes of the light emission units of the panel effect devices 550 and 551, and the light emission units of the movable members 550a and 551a in addition to the effect lamp 540. Do.

The effect lamp 540 reports an approximate degree of expectation, and the board effect devices 550, 551 (movable members 5
50a, 551a) announces the detailed degree of expectation. For example, the directing lamp 540
An approximate degree of expectation is notified in the display mode as shown in FIG. More specifically, when the light emission mode is red, the effect lamp 540 has a higher expectation than the green and a lower expectation than the petal (cherry blossom) pattern. However, the degree of expectation notified by the gaming machine 10 may be close to a petal (sakura) pattern or a degree of expectation close to green even if the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is red.

Such an expectation degree notification that can not be expressed only by the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540, the board effect device 5
50, 551 will assist. In addition, the board effect devices 550, 551, the movable members 550a, 551.
The character “a” is described as “flower”, “snow”, “moon”, and “blow” by the letters of the respective structures.

"Flower", "Snow", "Month" and "Blow" notify that the detailed expectation is "1" when the respective display modes are "off". This indicates that the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is the lowest even in the red. In addition, the display mode of "flower" is "light" and "snow"
When the display mode of "Mon" and "Blow" is "off", it is informed that the detailed expectation is "2". This indicates that the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is one with low expectation among red. In addition, when the display mode of "flower" and "snow" is "lighting" and the display mode of "month" and "blow" is "lighting out", it is informed that the detailed expectation is "3". . This indicates that the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is of the medium degree of expectation among red. Also,
When the display mode of "flower", "snow" and "blow" is "light" and the display mode of "month" is "off", it is informed that the detailed expectation is "4". This indicates that the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is the one with high expectation among red. In addition, when the display mode of "Flower", "Snow" and "Month" is "On" and the display mode of "Blow" is "Off", the detailed expectation is "5"
Informing that it is. This indicates that the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is the highest even in red.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 has an expectation that can not be expressed by only one effect lamp 540,
It can represent with the aid of the panel effects devices 550, 551 (including the movable members 550a, 551a). In addition, the gaming machine 10 plays a game of mutual relationship by using the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550, 551 (including the movable members 550a, 551a) which cooperate between the start winning and the hold mode change. It is possible to inform the player and make it easy for the player to understand and improve the degree of interest and to perform detailed notification of the degree of expectation.

The assistance of the panel effect devices 550, 551 (including the movable members 550a, 551a) is assisted by the display mode of the display portion provided for each of the panel effects devices 550, 551 (including the movable members 550a, 551a) And assistance by the operation aspect of the members 550a, 551a.

Next, the pending change mode determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a flowchart of hold change mode determination processing in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The on-hold change mode determination process is a process of setting a series of on-hold notice effects. The on-hold change mode determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 each time a start winning occurs. The pending change mode determination process is the main process step D23 (FIG. 44).
Is the process executed by the control unit).

[Step D171] The control unit determines whether or not the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 is in a state where the hold change is possible. For example, when there is a predetermined number of pending storages, when a prefetch notice command is received, when a presentation time for a predetermined time can be secured, etc., the status can be changed when a combination of these conditions is met. It can be determined that The control unit proceeds to step D172 when the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 is in the state in which the hold change is possible, and ends the hold change mode determination process when the hold change is not possible.

[Step D172] The control unit executes an effect game setting process. The effect game setting process is a process of setting an effect game to be performed by the sub display device 530. The effect game setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D173] The control unit executes an operation guidance setting process. The operation guidance setting process is
This is processing for setting operation guidance of the push button 25. The operation guidance setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D174] The control unit executes a correspondence guidance setting process. Correspondence guidance setting processing is
Effect lamp 540, board effect devices 550 and 551, corresponding indication 562, and pending indication 605
Alternatively, it is a process of setting an effect mode of the pending consumption display 606. The correspondence guidance setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. The control unit ends the on-hold change mode determination process after executing the correspondence guidance setting process.

Next, the effect game setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect game setting processing in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The effect game setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in step D172 of the hold change mode determination process.

[Step D181] The control unit determines the final holding mode of the target holding memory. The final holding mode refers to the final display mode in the holding display 605 or the holding digestion display 606, and is, for example, any of patterns P10 to P17 (may include patterns P18 and P19) shown in FIG. The control unit can determine the final holding mode based on the pre-reading advance notice command and the like.

[Step D182] The control unit sets a pending notification effect standby state.
[Step D183] The control unit determines that the on-hold notice effect execution opportunity is established, proceeds to step D185 when the on-hold notice effect execution opportunity is established, and proceeds to step D184 if the on-hold notice effect execution opportunity is not established.

[Step D184] The control unit determines whether or not the on-hold notice effect standby state has ended, and proceeds to step D183 if the on-hold notice effect standby state is not ended, and waits for establishment of on-hold notice effect execution timing. On the other hand, the control unit ends the effect game setting process when the on-hold notice effect standby state is ended. The control unit ends the on-hold notice effect standby state by a predetermined timer trigger or event trigger.

[Step D185] The control unit sets the effect game by the establishment of the on-hold notice effect execution trigger. The setting of the effect game includes the effect time, the effect mode, and the result mode. The control unit ends the on-hold notice effect standby state after setting the effect game.

Next, the operation guidance setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a flowchart of operation guidance setting processing in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The operation guidance setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in step D173 of the hold change mode determination process.

[Step D191] The control unit determines whether or not a specific result mode (for example, the entire image of the push button 25) has been derived in the effect game. The control unit proceeds to step D192 when the specific result mode is derived in the effect game, and ends the operation guidance setting process when the specific result mode is not derived.

[Step D192] The control unit determines an operation guidance mode. For example, the operation guide mode includes single-shot guidance for guiding a single pressing operation of the push button 25 and continuous hitting guidance for guiding a plurality of pressing operations of the push button 25. The control unit can determine the operation guide mode in accordance with the final hold mode determined in step D181 of the effect game setting process.

[Step D193] The control unit sets an operation reception time according to the operation guidance mode determined in Step D192. For example, the control unit sets an operation reception time of 3 seconds when performing single hit guidance, and sets an operation reception time of 5 seconds when performing continuous hit guidance.

[Step D194] The control unit sets an operation guidance display. For example, the control unit sets the display content of the display device 41 and the display content of the sub display device 530 in response to single hit guidance and continuous hit guidance. The control unit ends the operation guidance setting process after setting the operation guidance display.

Next, the correspondence guidance setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a flowchart of correspondence guide setting processing in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The correspondence guidance setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in step D174 of the hold change mode determination process.

[Step D201] The control unit determines whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 25 has been detected within the operation reception time. The control unit proceeds to step D202 when a pressing operation of the push button 25 is detected within the operation reception time, and ends the correspondence guidance setting process when a pressing operation of the push button 25 is not detected.

Note that the control unit may not perform all of the on-hold notice effects by not detecting the pressing operation of the push button 25, the timing at which the corresponding on-hold standby display is switched to on-hold digest display, or the timing thereafter. It is also possible to switch to the final holding mode (for example, at the time of reach occurrence, at the time of presentation development during reach, etc.).

[Step D202] The control unit acquires the final holding mode determined in Step D181 of the effect game setting process.
[Step D203] The control unit determines a corresponding guidance mode in accordance with the final reserve mode. The corresponding guide mode referred to here includes the display mode of the effect lamp 540, the operation mode of the board effect devices 550 and 551, and the display mode of the corresponding display 562.

[Step D204] The control unit sets the determined correspondence guidance mode as correspondence guidance.
[Step D205] The control unit sets a display mode (hold display mode) of the corresponding hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 according to the final hold mode. The control unit ends the correspondence guidance setting process after setting the hold display mode.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can set a series of hold notification effects.
Next, regarding the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the modification 1 of the sixth embodiment, FIG.
This will be described using 17. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the modified example 1 of the sixth embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to the display apparatus 41 of 6th Embodiment described using FIG. 102, the code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the sixth embodiment also allows the position of the sub-display device 530 to be changed and retracts to the lower end of the center case 40 (retraction position) and advances to the front of the display device 41. It is possible to switch between the position to be moved (advanced position).

First, FIG. 117 (1) shows the display screen of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is in the retracted position while the symbol in the variable display game is changing. The display device 41 includes, in the display content, two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, a pending indication 605a, and a pending decision indication 606.

The hold display 605 a can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view fluctuation display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory, according to the display mode. Pending display 605a
The number of pending storages displayed by corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 603 and the number of pending storage displayed by the special view 2 pending count display 604. The hold display 605 a is a sub display device 5.
It is displayed in the display area which is not in the movement range of 30. For example, it is displayed on the left side of the display area in a row for each pending storage. In addition, the display device 41 displays the hold 6 on the left side of the large symbol group 601.
Since the 05a is arranged, and the special figure 1 hold number display 603 and the special figure 2 hold number display 604 are arranged on the right side, even if the player's line of sight moves largely in the display area, the hold storage is good. It is possible to check the number.

Next, a display screen of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is at the advanced position while the symbol is changing in the variable display game is shown in FIG. 117 (2). The display device 41 includes a small symbol group 602, a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, a pending indication 605a, and a pending decision indication 606 in the display content.

The sub-display device 530 is at the advanced position and hides a part of the display area of the display device 41. However, the hold display 605a is well visible because it is not in the movement range of the sub-display device 530.

Next, the execution timing of the suspension announcement effect of the modification 2 of the sixth embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of the reserve announcement effect of the modification 2 of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, from the staging game to the holding mode change is performed in one variation display in the holding notice effect, but in the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the holding mode is the holding mode from the presentation game The change is performed over two or more variable displays.

First, the start winning at timing t10 can be the starting point of the on-hold notice effect. The effect control device 300 detects the start winning combination that can be the starting point of the on-hold notice effect by receiving the pre-reading system command from the game control device 100 at timing t10.

Further, the effect control device 300 can set the on-hold notice effect standby state for waiting on the execution of the on-hold notice effect. Thereby, the effect control device 300 can adjust the start timing and the execution time of the effect game in the sub display device 530. For example, effect control device 300
Is enabled to release the on-hold notice effect standby state after timing t11 exceeding the on-hold shift timing, and starts the effect game by detecting the on-hold notice effect execution trigger at timing t12.

When starting the effect game at timing t12, the effect control device 300 continues the effect game for a predetermined time, and derives (displays) the result of the effect game at timing t13. Note that the duration of the effect game (from the start of the effect game to the derivation of the result of the effect game) may be a period within the range of one variable display being executed in parallel, or two or more changes. It may be a period spanning display.

The effect control device 300 changes the display mode of the effect lamp 540 from timing t13 and performs operation guide display of the push button 25 when the entire image of the push button 25 is derived in the sub display device 530 as a result of the effect game. . The change of the display mode of the effect lamp 540 functions as the advance notice for the change of the hold mode.

The effect control device 300 continues the change of the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the operation guide display of the push button 25 for a predetermined time. The predetermined time may be a period within the range of one variable display being executed in parallel, or may be a period spanning two or more variable displays.

When the effect control device 300 detects the operation of the push button 25 at timing t14, the effect control device 300 displays a correspondence guidance (for example, the correspondence display 562) without waiting for a predetermined time to elapse. At time t15, the effect control device 300 changes the display mode (hold mode) of the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606 in response to the correspondence guidance.

That is, the gaming machine 10 can start the effect game when the number of times of variation display is “n + 1”, and can display the corresponding guidance at the timing of the number of times of variation display “n + k (where k ≧ 2)”. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode (for example, red) as the advance notice on the effect lamp 540 across a plurality of variable display games, and displays the display mode corresponding to the display mode of the effect lamp 540 by the corresponding display It is handed over to the hold display 605 a and the hold digest display 606. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel more specific sense of expectation until the operation of the push button 25 is received. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can secure a holding effect time sufficient to perform various effects. Note that the effect unit that changes the display mode as the advance notice may be not only the effect lamp 540 but also other effect portions such as the board effect devices 550 and 551. In addition, the hold display 605a and the hold digest display 606, which take over the display mode of the effect section that changes the display mode as the advance notice, do not necessarily have to be the same display mode, and include development and demotion. It is also good.

The gaming machine 10 may be capable of executing effects (for example, the effect game of the fifth embodiment) other than the on-hold notice effect in the effect time sufficiently secured. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may notify the continuation time of the rendering time sufficiently secured, for example, the duration time or rendering time of the rendering time sufficiently secured by the sub display device 530 or another display device. It is also possible to display the number of times of variation display and the like of the special drawing game shown in FIG. In the gaming machine 10, the duration of the rendering time sufficiently secured by the BGM and the sound effects (including sound) output from the speakers 19a and 19b in the sufficiently secured rendering time, and the special drawing game during the rendering time You may make it alert | report the fluctuation | variation display frequency etc. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the player's sense of expectation for the release of the on-hold notice effect standby state. Further, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the attention of the player during the rendering time sufficiently secured, and can prevent the player from overlooking the staging announcement effect.

The gaming machine 10 may delay the derivation of the result of the effect game. For example, the gaming machine 10 maintains the variation state of the effect game when limiting the derivation of the result of the effect game by the progress of the special figure change display game. Maintenance of the fluctuation state of the effect game includes extension of a predetermined time with respect to the fluctuation time, and extension of a predetermined condition (for example, restriction release). For example, the gaming machine 10 maintains the variation state of the effect game, for example, when a predetermined effect occurs, when the special view game derives a hit, or when a predetermined error is detected. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may not accept the operation of the push button 25 during the delay in the derivation of the result of the effect game, and the provisional display mode (even when the operation of the push button 25 is detected) For example, the default display mode, the display mode to be set in advance, and the last mode may be temporarily displayed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may forcibly stop the progress of the effect game. For example, the gaming machine 10 forcibly stops the fluctuation of the effect game when the progress of the effect game is limited by the progress of the special figure change display game. The forced stop of the fluctuation of the effect game includes partial shortening of the fluctuation time, all shortening and the like. For example, the gaming machine 10 forcibly stops the fluctuation of the effect game, for example, when a predetermined error is detected, when the special effect game is generated, or when the special view game derives a hit. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display a display mode scheduled when the fluctuation of the effect game is forcibly stopped, or a provisional display mode (for example,
A default display mode, a display mode to be set in advance, a previous mode, etc. may be displayed. When the game machine 10 forcibly stops the variation of the effect game, the gaming machine 10 may forcibly end (cancel) the on-hold notice effect which is to be played the effect game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may have two or more effect parts that change the display mode as the advance notice, and for example, the advance notice of the on-hold notice effect may be performed by the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551. Good. Here, the advance notice of the on-hold notice effect performed by the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the advance notice of the on-hold notice effect in the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 switches the display mode of the effect lamp 540 first in the advance notice of the reserved advance effect, and switches the light emission mode of the light emitting unit of the board effect devices 550, 551 later. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can switch the light emission modes of the light emitting units of the board effect devices 550 and 551 in a plurality of stages in the effect time sufficiently secured.

In the switching example shown in FIG. 119 (1), the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is switched to red by the change trigger tr1, and the panel effect devices 550 and 551 during the extinguishing switch the light emission mode while synchronizing from the change trigger tr1 on. Show. Here, the panel effect device 550 will be described as "flower" and the panel effect device 551 as "snow". Further, the change trigger can be a predetermined event trigger or timer trigger such as a hold shift, a predetermined time lapse, an operation detection of the push button 25 or the like. "Flower" and "Snow" are switched to blue synchronously with change trigger tr2, and change trigger t
Switch to green synchronously with r3 and switch to red synchronously with change trigger tr4.

In the switching example shown in FIG. 119 (2), the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is switched to red by the change trigger tr1, and the light emission mode is switched asynchronously after the change trigger tr1 after "flower" and "snow" are turned off. Show. The "flower" is switched to blue at the change trigger tr2, switched to green at the change trigger tr3, and switched to red at the change trigger tr4. On the other hand, "snow" is switched to blue at change trigger tr3 and to green at change trigger tr4, and change trigger tr5
Switch to red at.

As described above, “flower” and “snow” (panel effect devices 550 and 551) become the display mode of the effect lamp 540 in stages by switching the light emission mode synchronously or asynchronously. Note that the light emission modes of "flower" and "snow" are changed so as to increase the degree of expectation in order to correspond to the display modes as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine 10, depending on the number of change triggers, the light emission mode of "flower" and "snow" may not reach the light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the effect lamp 540. The light emission mode corresponding to the display mode may be exceeded. In the gaming machine 10, the light emission modes of "flower" and "snow" may complement the display mode of the effect lamp 540 to notify more detailed reliability. For example, when the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is red, if the light emission modes of "flower" and "snow" are respectively red, the reliability of prior notice by the effect lamp 540 is improved, and "flower" and "snow" If the light emission mode of each does not reach red (for example, blue) the reliability of prior notice by the effect lamp 540 decreases, and if the light emission mode of “flower” and “snow” exceeds red (for example, petal (cherry blossom) pattern The reliability of prior notice by the effect lamp 540 is lowered. Also, the final light emission modes of "flower" and "snow" may be different,
In that case, compared with the case where the final light emission mode of "flower" and "snow" is the same, gaming machine 10 is "flower"
The light emission mode of “Snow” and “snow” can complement the display mode of the effect lamp 540 to notify a further detailed reliability.

Next, the on-hold notice effect according to the third modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of a reserve announcement effect accompanied by a change in the display mode of the hold display or the hold digest display according to the third modification of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the correspondence display 562 is displayed superimposed on the large symbol group 601 in the suspension notice effect, but in the modification 3 of the sixth embodiment, the correspondence display in the suspension notice effect is the large symbol It is displayed avoiding superimposition with the group 601.

The gaming machine 10 displays on the effect area 560 of the display device 41 a correspondence display 563 directed from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606 (FIG. 120 (1)). The correspondence display 563 is a display for informing the correspondence between the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606, and is, for example, a lightning-like effect of the same color as the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540. More specifically, when the effect lamp 540 is changed to red, the gaming machine 10 sets the corresponding display 563 to a red effect. The correspondence display 563 may be changeable in shape, size, color, display time, and the like according to the reliability notified as pre-reading effect regardless of the display mode of the effect lamp 540. In addition, correspondence indication 563 is large symbol group 601
To the left side of the large symbol group 601, it is directed to the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 so as not to overlap the symbol group. In addition, the correspondence indication 563 passes between the left symbol 601L and the middle symbol 601C, and the middle symbol 601C and the right symbol 601R so as not to overlap the right symbol group of the large symbol group 601 or to overlap the large symbol group. May be In addition, the corresponding display 563 is an effect lamp 540
It does not necessarily have to go from one to the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606,
As shown in FIG. 120 (2), the road may be branched into a plurality of from the effect lamp 540, and one or more of them may be directed to the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. In addition, the correspondence display 563 is from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606
May indicate which display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 is to be switched depending on which route the route is taken through, or if the color, shape, size, etc. of the display mode after change are different. You may make it

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the visibility of the large symbol group 601 while displaying the correspondence display 563. Also, the gaming machine 10 can increase the player's interest in the correspondence display 563.

Next, the execution timing of the on-hold notice effect of the modification 4 of the sixth embodiment will be described using FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a suspension notice effect accompanied by a change in display mode of the suspension display or the suspension digest display according to the fourth modification of the sixth embodiment; Figure 1
22 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a reserve announcement effect accompanied by a change in the display mode of the hold display or the hold termination display according to the fourth modification of the sixth embodiment; In the sixth embodiment, the correspondence display 562 in the hold notice effect is from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606
However, in the fourth modification of the sixth embodiment, the corresponding display in the reserved announcement effect goes from the effect lamp 540 to the reserved display 605 or the reserved digest display 606 via a relay point.

The gaming machine 10 switches the display mode of the effect lamp 540 (for example, white to green)
The character 564 is displayed in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (see FIG. 121 (1
)). The gaming machine 10 displays a correspondence display 565 directed from the effect lamp 540 to the character 564 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (FIG. 121 (2)). The gaming machine 10 integrally displays the character 564 and the correspondence display 566 (Fig. 122 (1)). Note that FIG.
In the above description, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode as the advance notice on the effect lamp 540 across multiple variable display games, but the gaming machine 10 of the fourth modification of the sixth embodiment is a character The display mode (for example, green) as the advance notice can be displayed on the correspondence display 566 which is displayed integrally with the above. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the hold notification effect while waiting for the progress of the hold notification effect. Note that the correspondence display 565 does not need to be distinguishable from the character 564 itself. For example,
By changing the display mode of the character 564, the character 564 corresponds to the display 565
It may have a function as For example, the corresponding display 565 is character 5
It may be an effect on the back of 64, or it may be an appearance change (color change, form change, etc.) of the character 564. The gaming machine 10 displays the correspondence display 567 directed from the character 564 to the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41, and switches the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 (FIG. 2)
).

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 receives the display lamp 540, the corresponding display 565, and the character 5
The display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 can be switched through the display 64 and the display 566, and the display 567 and the plurality of steps. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the hold notification effect even if the progress of the hold notification effect is long.

The correspondence displays 565, 566, and 567 are displays for notifying of the correspondence between the effect lamp 540, the character 564, and the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. Also,
The character 564 has a function as a relay display for relaying the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606, and as a prior notice hold in the case of giving a prior notice across a plurality of variable display games. It has a function.

Further, the gaming machine 10 clarified the correspondence relationship between the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606 by the correspondence display 565, 566, 567, but separately from this, the correspondence display 562 (see FIG. 110 (1) The correspondence relationship may be clearly indicated by the correspondence display 563 (see FIGS. 120 (1) and (2)). For example, the corresponding display 565, 566, 5
The correspondence between the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 is clearly indicated as the first correspondence, and the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606 by the correspondence display 562 or the correspondence display 563 The second correspondence relationship may be explicitly indicated, and the gaming machine 10 may indicate the second correspondence relationship later than the first correspondence relationship. In that case, the gaming machine 10 expects the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 by specifying the first correspondence relationship from the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 by specifying the second correspondence relation. 2 by setting the display mode to a low level
It is possible to produce a high sense of expectation for the explicitness of the stage correspondences.

Next, the on-hold notice effect according to the fifth modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of the hold notification effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the hold display or the hold digest display according to the fifth modification of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the correspondence display 562 linearly goes from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606 in the hold notice effect, but in the fifth modification of the sixth embodiment, the hold notice effect In the response display, from the effect lamp 540 to the suspension display 605a or the suspension processing display 606 linewise.

The correspondence display 568 shown in FIG. 123 (1) goes from the effect lamp 540 to the middle symbol 601C, and after going to a pause on the middle symbol 601C, goes to the hold display 605a or the hold digest display 606. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can change not only one of the hold display 605 a or the hold digest display 606 but also the corresponding display 568 to change two or more display modes, and the corresponding display 5
Branch 68 For example, the gaming machine 10 branches the correspondence display 568 into two on the middle symbol 601C, and goes to the first and second of the hold display 605a. Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 switches the first and second display modes of the hold display 605a. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can make the end point of the correspondence display 568 starting from the effect lamp 540 difficult to predict by displaying the correspondence display 568 in a broken line. In addition, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to have a sense of anticipation that two or more of the hold display 605 a or the hold digestion display 606 simultaneously change the display mode by enabling the correspondence display 568 to be branched at the midpoint (flexion point). Can be given.

The gaming machine 10 may set two or more middle points of the correspondence display 568 without being limited to one.
Also, the gaming machine 10 does not limit the middle point of the correspondence display 568 to the middle symbol 601C, but the left symbol 60
It may be set on 1L or on the right symbol 601R. At this time, the gaming machine 10 has a left symbol 601L,
The degree of expectation may be made different depending on which one of the middle symbol 601C and the right symbol 601R is to set the middle point. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the display mode of the symbol in which the middle point of the corresponding display is set. For example, the correspondence display 56 shown in FIG. 123 (2)
9 sets the middle point on the right symbol 601R, and the right symbol 601R is changed to the enlarged display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the design in which the middle point of the correspondence display is set is not limited to the enlargement or reduction of the design, but the change of color, the change of pattern type (from a number pattern to a character pattern or a pattern consisting of numbers and characters Character change etc.) or the like.

Next, the on-hold notice effect of the sixth modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the effect lamp, the correspondence display, and the hold display according to the sixth modification of the sixth embodiment. Although the correspondence display 562 of the sixth embodiment basically corresponds to the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the hold display 605 (including the hold display 605 a and the hold digest display 606), the sixth The corresponding display of modification 6 of the embodiment of FIG.
The correspondence between the display mode of 0 and the display mode of the hold display 605 is not limited to 1: 1.

The relationship between the effect lamp 540 and the correspondence display shown in FIG. 124 (1) is a one-to-one correspondence because the display manner of the correspondence display is white when the display manner of the effect lamp 540 is white. On the other hand, since the corresponding display in the display mode can correspond to the white, blue, green or red hold display 605 in the display mode, the correspondence display and the hold display 605 have a one-to-many correspondence relationship. It is. In addition, the corresponding display of the display mode is white has a correspondence with the display mode in which the degree of expectation higher than the degree of expectation set to white is set. That is, even when the effect lamp 540 and the corresponding display are white, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel an expectation for the possibility that the hold display 605 will be white, blue, green or red.

The relationship between the effect lamp 540 and the correspondence display shown in FIG. 124 (2) is a one-to-one correspondence because the display pattern of the correspondence display is a tiger pattern when the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is a tiger pattern. On the other hand, since the display mode corresponding to tiger pattern is compatible with the white, blue, green, or tiger pattern hold display 605, the relationship between the correspondence display and the hold display 605 is one-to-many. It is a correspondence relation. In addition, the correspondence display of a display aspect has a correspondence with the display aspect to which the expectation degree below the expectation degree set to the tiger pattern is set. Sawa, game machine 10
Although it is not guaranteed that the hold display 605 will be a tiger pattern even if the effect lamp 540 and the corresponding display have tiger patterns, it is possible to expand the opportunity for the player to touch the tiger pattern.

The relationship between the effect lamp and the corresponding display is not necessarily limited to 1: 1. As shown in FIG. 124 (3), the relation between the effect lamp and the correspondence display may be one-to-many correspondence, and the relation between the correspondence display and the hold display 605 may be one-to-one. Although the relationship between the effect lamp 540 and the corresponding display shown in FIG. 124 (1) indicates that the display corresponding to the effect lamp 540 has a higher degree of expectation when the display mode is white, for example, In the case of tiger pattern, the corresponding display may be set to a lower expectation. Thus, the gaming machine 10 has the effect lamp 54
The correspondence may be made different depending on the display mode of 0. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 may have different correspondence depending on the display mode of the correspondence display.

Next, the on-hold notice effect of the seventh modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the effect lamp, the correspondence display, and the hold display according to Modification 7 of the sixth embodiment. Although the correspondence display 562 of the sixth embodiment basically corresponds to the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the hold display 605 (including the hold display 605 a and the hold digest display 606), the sixth The corresponding display of modification 7 of the embodiment of FIG.
The correspondence between the display mode of 0 and the correspondence display relates to the correspondence between the correspondence display and the display mode of the hold display 605. That is, in the correspondence display of the seventh modification of the sixth embodiment, it is not determined whether the display form of the hold display 605 is only by the display form of the correspondence display, and the display form of the effect lamp 540 and the display form of the correspondence display And the display mode of the hold display 605 can be determined. In other words, in the correspondence display of the seventh modification of the sixth embodiment, the player can not predict what the display form of the hold display 605 will be with only the display form of the correspondence display. The player can predict the display mode of the hold display 605 in combination with the display mode of the corresponding display. The display mode of the effect lamp 540, the display mode of the correspondence display, and the display mode of the hold display 605 may be determined each time, or may be determined in advance as a combination.

First, the relationship example shown in FIG. 125 (1) will be described. When the display mode of the corresponding display is red when the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is red, the effect control device 300 displays the hold display 60.
The display mode of No. 5 is assumed to have a cherry (petal) pattern with probability p11, red with probability p12, and white with probability p13. Further, when the display mode of the corresponding display is white when the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is red, the effect control device 300 sets the display mode of the hold display 605 as a cherry (petal) pattern with probability p21 and as red with probability p22. , White with probability p23. At this time, the gaming machine 10 is p11
By setting <p21, even if the degree of expectation indicated by the effect lamp 540 is demoted by the correspondence display, it is possible to produce an expectation that the hold display 605 obtains a higher degree of expectation. The gaming machine 10 may further clarify the sense of expectation that the player can perceive by setting p11 = 0.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 is p12pp13 (for example, p12> p13), p22 ≠ p23 (
For example, by setting it as p22 <p23), it is possible to produce an entertainment that causes the player to predict the display mode of the hold display 605 by a combination of the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the correspondence display.

Next, a related example shown in FIG. 125 (2) will be described. Here, although some display modes are omitted for the sake of simplicity, as described with reference to FIG. 109, the effect control device 300 includes the hold display 605 (including the hold display 605 a and the hold digest display 606). Display mode is red>
Set the degree of expectation so that green>blue> white. Even when the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is red and the display mode of the hold display 605 is red, the effect control device 300 can differentiate the degree of expectation according to the display mode of the corresponding display. For example, the effect control device 300
The route r1 in which the display mode of the correspondence display is red, the route r2 in green, and the route r in blue
When there are 3 and the route r4 to be white, the expectation for each route is set such that r4>r3>r2> r1.

In addition, it can be made the same, when the display modes of the production lamp 540 used as the starting point of a path | route differ like the example of a relationship shown to FIG. 125 (3). For example, the effect control device 300 has a path r11 in which the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the correspondence display are red, a path r12 in green, a path r13 in blue, and a path r14 in white. When r1
The expectation for each route is set such that 4>r13>r12> r11.

In addition to the display on the display device 41 or the display on the display device 41, the suspension display 605 and the storage termination display 606 shown in FIG. 102 and the like, and the suspension display 605a and the storage termination display 606 shown in FIG. Instead of the display device 41, it may be displayed on a display device different from the display device 41. For example, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a dedicated display device for dedicated display of the hold display 605, 605a and the hold digest display 606. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a full color LED for each of the hold display 605, 605a and the hold digestion display 606 as a dedicated display device, and causes the full color LED to emit light in the light emission color corresponding to the display mode shown in FIG. . In addition, the gaming machine 10 can realize the distinction of the light emission mode corresponding to the display mode shown in FIG. 109 by the lighting color of the full color LED, the blinking cycle, the brightness, or a combination thereof. For example, the gaming machine 10 lights the full color LED with the corresponding luminescent color for display modes such as "white", "blue", "green", "red", "cherry blossom", etc., and the display mode for "rainbow" In the seven-color sequential switching lighting, yellow can be blinked for the "trad" display mode, and can be realized by sequential switching of the lightness in red for the "superheat" display mode. Also, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a single color LED instead of the full color LED, as shown in FIG.
The single color LED emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode shown in FIG. The gaming machine 10 is
The distinction of the light emission modes corresponding to the display modes shown in FIG.
Or it can implement | achieve by the combination of these. For example, the gaming machine 10 can indicate the degree of expectation corresponding to the display mode by delaying the flashing cycle as the degree of expectation is lower and setting the flashing cycle earlier as the degree of expectation is higher. In addition to the display device 41, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a second liquid crystal display device as a sub liquid crystal display device, and the hold display 605, 605a and the hold digest display 606 in the same display mode as the display device 41. It may be displayed on the second liquid crystal display device.

The effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 may be configured as the same unit, or may be configured separately. The effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 may be one effect device having both functions.

In the game machine 10, in addition to the game control apparatus 100 monitoring a required error, the effect control apparatus 300 monitors an operation error of the board effect apparatus 550, 551. The operation error of the panel effect device 550, 551 is a state where the panel effect device 550, 551 is not returned to the initial position in the initial state, or a state where the position movement of the panel effect device 550, 551 can not be confirmed in the operating state, etc. It is an error to notify as The operation error of the panel effect devices 550 and 551 may be notified by display on the display device 41 or the like, or the speaker 19a
, 19b, etc., and notification may be performed by sound (including voice)
, 551 may be notified by the light emission mode. Board production device 55
The operation error of 0, 551 may be terminated by removing the error cause, or may be terminated upon establishment of a predetermined condition regardless of the removal of the error cause. For example, the effect control device 300 may end the notification by detecting the pressing operation of the push button 25, the elapse of a predetermined time from the occurrence of an error, or turning on again after the power is turned off, or a combination of these (for example, power on again The error notification may be given later and the notification may be ended by the end of the error notification etc. after 30 seconds. Further, the effect control device 300 may cancel the power saving and perform an error notification when detecting an operation error of the board effect devices 550, 551 during power saving (while waiting for customers), and the result of the game may be immediately obtained. The error notification may be performed after waiting for the establishment of the power saving cancellation condition (for example, the start of the game). In addition, when the operation control device 300 detects an operation error of the panel effect devices 550, 551 when the power is turned on, the error notification is performed after the initialization process is finished (for example, in the normal processing state). It is also good. At this time, the effect control device 300 may make the notification modes different depending on whether or not it is a predetermined gaming state. For example, the effect control device 300 reports an operation error by sound and a lamp / LED when the gaming state is in the movement of the special view game, and generates an operation error as the sound when the gaming state is not in the movement of the special view game. In addition to lamps and LEDs, notification may be made by display. Further, the effect control device 300 may notify an operation error of the board effect devices 550, 551 without waiting for a command reception from the game control device 100 after the power is turned on, or may receive a predetermined command from the game control device 100. Waiting for the board production device 550,5
An operation error of 51 may be notified. The predetermined command referred to here may be, for example, an initialization command (power on command, power failure recovery command, model designation command, etc.) capable of confirming the start of the game control apparatus 100, or a game in which the player can confirm the game start It may be a progress system command (for example, a hold number command, a symbol variation command, a symbol stop command, etc.).

The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment (including the modification) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 stores start memory as an execution right of the first game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and the start memory is stored. Hold display according to starting memory in relation to the result of the corresponding first game (for example, hold display 605
The display mode (e.g., FIG. 109) of the hold digest display 606) can be changed to execute the hold notification effect, and the first display unit (e.g., the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 in the display device 41). A display area and a second display unit (for example, a hold display 605 on the display device 41)
And the display area of the reserve digest display 606), the third display unit (for example, the display area of the effect game in the sub display device 530), the fourth display unit (for example, the effect lamp 540), and the movable portion (for example, the board Effect devices 550, 551) and an operation unit (for example, push button 25)
And a control unit (game control apparatus 100, effect control apparatus 300). The first display unit can display the first game. The second display unit can display a hold display. The third display unit is
It is possible to display a second game (rendering game) executed in parallel with the first game. The fourth display unit can display a predetermined display. The movable portion is operable in a predetermined operation mode. The operation unit can accept an operation. The control unit is a guidance display for guiding the operation of the operation unit when the third display unit displays a specific result mode (for example, FIG. 103 (4)) in the second game
For example, when the operation guidance display 561 is displayed on the first display unit and the operation unit receives an operation, the movable unit is moved from the first state (for example, FIG. 80 (1)) to the second state (for example, FIG.
While changing to 0 (2), display the predetermined display on the fourth display unit (Fig. 106), and display the correspondence between the display mode of the predetermined display on the fourth display unit and the display mode of the hold display on the second display unit. A correspondence notification display (for example, correspondence display 562) to be notified is displayed on the first display unit, and the second
It is possible to execute an on-hold notice effect for changing the display mode of the on-hold display on the display unit (FIG. 107 (1)).

(2) The control unit of (1) is a combination of the display mode of the predetermined display on the fourth display unit and the operation mode of the movable portion and the display mode of the suspension display in the suspension announcement effect, The degree of expectation regarding the result of the first game is notified (FIG. 112).

(3) The gaming machine 10 stores the start memory as the right to execute the game (special figure 1 change display game, special figure 2 change display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and corresponds to the start memory It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the on-hold display (for example, on-hold display 605 and on-hold digest display 606) according to the starting memory in relation to the game result to execute on-hold notice effect 1 display unit (for example, large symbol group 601 or small symbol group 602 in display device 41
And a second display unit (for example, the effect lamp 540), and a control unit (the game control apparatus 100 and the effect control apparatus 300). The first display unit can display the game and the hold display. The second display unit can display a predetermined display. The control unit causes the second display unit to stand by for a predetermined display over a plurality of games, and notifies the correspondence between the predetermined display on the second display unit and the display mode of the hold display on the first display unit. The relationship notification display is displayed on the first display unit at the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display (see FIG. 118, FIG. 121, FIG. 122, etc.)
.

(4) The gaming machine 10 starts and stores the start memory as the right to execute the game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602) based on the predetermined condition being established. A game for storing and variably displaying a plurality of identification information corresponding to the start memory is executed, and a hold display according to the start memory in relation to the result of the game (for example, hold display 605 or hold digest display 606) It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the display and execute the suspension notice effect, and the first display unit (for example, the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 in the display device 41).
Display area), a second display unit (for example, a display area of the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606 on the display device 41), a third display unit (for example, the effect lamp 540), and a control unit (for example
Game control apparatus 100, effect control apparatus 300). The first display unit can display a game. The second display unit can display a hold display. The third display unit can display a predetermined display. The control unit changes the display of the correspondence notification informing the correspondence between the display mode of the predetermined display in the third display unit and the display mode of the hold display in the second display unit at the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display. It is displayed on the first display unit so as to straddle the identification information in (see FIG. 1).
18, Fig. 120 etc.).

(5) The gaming machine 10 stores start memory as an execution right of the game (special figure 1 change display game, special view 2 change display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and corresponds to the start memory It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the on-hold display (for example, on-hold display 605 and on-hold digest display 606) according to the start memory in relation to the game result to execute on-hold notice effect. 1 display unit (for example, large symbol group 601 or small symbol group 602 in display device 41
A display area of the display unit 41, a display area of the hold display 605 and the hold finish display 606 in the display device 41), a second display unit (for example, the effect lamp 540), and a control unit (the game control apparatus 100 and the effect control apparatus 300) including. The first display unit can display the game and the hold display. Second
The display unit can display a predetermined display. The control unit displays, on the first display unit, a correspondence notification display for notifying correspondence between the display mode of the predetermined display in the second display unit and the display mode of the hold display in the first display unit, and the correspondence notification display It is possible to execute an on-hold notice effect that acts on the display mode of the on-hold display via the specific display (for example, the character 564) that can be displayed on the first display unit (see FIG. 118, FIG. 121, FIG. 122 and others).

(6) The gaming machine 10 stores start memory as an execution right of the game (special figure 1 change display game, special view 2 change display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and corresponds to the start memory It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the on-hold display (for example, on-hold display 605 and on-hold digest display 606) according to the start memory in relation to the game result to execute on-hold notice effect. 1 display unit (for example, large symbol group 601 or small symbol group 602 in display device 41
And the second display unit (the hold display 605 on the display device 41 and the hold digest display 60).
6 and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The first display unit can display a game. The second display unit can display a hold display. The control unit can display, on the first display unit, a plurality of types of operation displays (for example, the correspondence display 563) capable of executing the suspension notice effect acting on the suspension display in the first display unit, and the plurality of types of operation displays The operation display of one of them is displayed, and the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode corresponding to the operation display of one (see FIG. 120 and others).
Seventh Embodiment
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 is a view showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the seventh embodiment and a front view of the game board.

First, an example of a screen configuration of a display screen displayed by the display device 41 in the seventh embodiment will be described. A display screen 650 shown in FIG. 126 (1) shows an example of the screen configuration of the display screen.

The display screen 650 includes, in the display content, two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, a pending indication 605, and a pending decision indication 606.
The two decorative patterns have a large symbol group 601 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 602 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 601 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is displayed large at the approximate center of the display device 41 (display screen). Large symbol group 601 includes left symbol 601L, middle symbol 601C and right symbol 601R. Left pattern 6
01L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

Generally, the large symbol group 601 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C. Therefore, in the large symbol group 601, in many cases, the left symbol 601L and the right symbol 601R form a reach aspect, and it is possible to wait for the stop of the middle symbol 601C to form a hitting aspect.

The small symbol group 602 is in charge of reporting of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 602 is displayed small on the periphery of the display device 41 (display screen) so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. The small symbol group 602 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 of the display screen 650 indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the pattern variation state (the special view variation display game is being executed).

In general, the large symbol group 601 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 602, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be largely changed. On the contrary, small symbol group 602 is
Compared with the large symbol group 601, it is displayed smaller and the display position has less freedom (for example, position fixing).

The special figure 1 reservation number display 603 displays the number of pending storages (starting number of memories) of the special figure 1 game. A special figure 2 pending number display 604 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 605 can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view fluctuation display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 605 corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 603 and the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 604. The holding and digest display 606 can indicate that the special view variable display game is in the variable display state and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode.

The number of pending storages for the special view 1 game indicated by the special view 1 pending count display 603 is “3”, and the number of pending storages for the special view 2 game shown by the special view 2 pending number display 604 is “0”. Pending display 605
The number of pending storages indicated by is “3”. In addition, the reserve consumption indication 606 indicates that the special figure variation display game is in symbol variation.

Next, an example of the configuration of the gaming board of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 (2) shows an example of a front view of the game board of the gaming machine.
In the game board 660, a center case 40 is disposed substantially at the center. Center case 4
Inside 0, a display device 41, an LED 661 for holding, an LED 662 for Special Drawing 1, and an LED 663 for Special Drawing 2 are disposed.

The hold LED 661 blinks during the hold process (during special display variation display game), and the hit result of the hold process is derived. When the hit effect starts, the hold LED 661 keeps on lighting until the finish operation is finished. The special view 1 LED 662 blinks while the special view 1 variation display game is being performed. The special view 2 LED 663 blinks while the special view 2 variation display game is being performed.

Next, the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the hold display in the seventh embodiment. In addition, although the display mode of the hold display 605 will be described, the display mode of the hold digest display 606 can be the same.

There are ten display modes of the reserve display 605: pattern P1, pattern P2, pattern P3, pattern P4, pattern P5, pattern P6, pattern P7, pattern P8, pattern P10, and pattern P20.

The pattern P1 and the pattern P2 are default (standard) display modes, for example, ring (ring-shaped) and white display modes. The pattern P1 is a display mode (non-hidden state) relating to pending storage for which pending advance announcement effects are not scheduled. The pattern P2 is a display mode (latency A) relating to pending storage for which pending advance presentation effects are scheduled.

Pattern P3 is a non-default (non-standard) display mode, for example, a ring (ring shape)
And it is a blinking display mode of white. The pattern P3 is a display mode (latency B) regarding pending storage for which pending advance presentation effects are scheduled.

The pattern P4 is a non-default display mode, for example, a ring (ring-shaped) and blue display mode. The pattern P5 is a non-default display mode, for example, a ring (ring shape) and a green display mode. The pattern P6 is a non-default display mode, for example, a ring (ring-shaped) and red display mode.

The pattern P7 is a non-default display mode, for example, a ring (ring shape) and a cherry-colored display mode. The pattern P8 is a non-default display mode, for example, a ring (ring shape) and a rainbow display mode.

In the pattern P4 to the pattern P8, an expectation (for example, a hit expectation) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game is set. The degree of expectation is not limited to that corresponding to the possibility of winning per, but may correspond to the development stage of variable display effects such as reach and super reach. It should be noted that the general winning a prize opening notice display effect may be to notify the expectation level to the hold notice effect of the other stage and the independence independently, or to notify the expectation degree by the combination with the hold notice effect of the other stage It may be

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expectation to the pattern P4, sets the highest expectation (reliability) to the pattern P8, and sets the expectation to be gradually increased from the pattern P4 to the pattern P8. Note that the gaming machine 10 may set, for example, a specific degree of expectation from 0% to 100% in the patterns P4 to P8, and for example, “low”, “medium”, “high” As such, the size of a rough expectation may be set.

The pattern P10 is a non-default display mode, for example, a display mode of PB (push button) type (display mode for inducing an operation to the player). The pattern P <b> 10 is a temporary display mode, and is a display mode (latency C) relating to the hold storage for which the hold preview effect is scheduled. The pattern P10 is a latency (intervention latency) that allows the player to intervene at the start timing of the hold notification effect.

The pattern P <b> 10 changes from the pattern P <b> 6 to one of the patterns P <b> 8 due to the hold notification effect. That is, the pattern P10 is a display mode showing an expectation of developing from the pattern P6 to any of the patterns P8.

The pattern P10 changes to the final display mode at one time when the start timing of the on-hold notice effect satisfies the predetermined condition, and the intermediate display mode if the start timing on the on-hold notice effect does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Change to the final display mode. The intermediate display mode is, for example, a display mode in which the degree of expectation is set lower than the final display mode (for example, when the final display mode is pattern P6, the intermediate display mode is pattern P4 or pattern P5)
.

In the pattern P10, in order to make the change mode different depending on the start timing of the hold notification effect, it is necessary to secure a certain time so that the start timing has a width. Therefore, pattern P10 occurs, for example, when the number of pending storages is 2 or more (when there is a margin of a predetermined time or more until the start of the pending digestion). In addition, the pattern P10 is an aspect which specifies operation intervention by a player, and is not limited to the PB type. For example, it may be a lever type.

The pattern P20 is a non-default display mode, and is, for example, a treasure box display mode.
The pattern P <b> 20 is a temporary display mode, and is a display mode (latency D) related to the hold storage for which a hold notification effect is scheduled. The pattern P20 is a latency (non-intervention latency) in which the player can not intervene at the start timing of the hold notification effect.

The pattern P20 changes from the pattern P5 to any one of the patterns P8 due to the hold notification effect. That is, the pattern P20 is a display mode indicating an expectation of developing from the pattern P5 to any of the patterns P8.

In the pattern P20, for example, the mode in which the pattern P20 can be changed to each pattern changes depending on the start timing of the hold notification effect. Further, in the pattern P20, the probability of changing to each pattern changes according to the start timing of the on-hold notice effect. The pattern P20 is a display set so that it changes more easily to a pattern with a higher degree of expectation (the longer it takes from the occurrence of the pattern P20 to the start of the suspension notice) as the start timing of the suspension notice effect delays. It is an aspect.

Since the pattern P20 is a mode in which the probability of changing to each pattern changes according to the start timing of the hold notification effect, it is necessary to secure a certain time so that the start timing of the hold notification effect can have a width. . Therefore, pattern P20 occurs, for example, when the number of pending storages is 2 or more (when there is a certain time or more until starting the special figure variation display game).

Next, the state transition of the hold display 605 in the display mode (intervention latent mode) of the pattern P10 will be described using FIG. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a state transition of the suspension display of the intervention latent aspect in the seventh embodiment.

The pending display 605 of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) is an intermediate display aspect (S) if the condition Tr1 is satisfied.
State transition to T2) (display mode changes) and condition Tr2 in the intermediate display mode (ST2)
When the above condition is satisfied, the state transition (the display mode changes) to the final display mode (ST3).

On the other hand, when the pending display 605 of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) satisfies the condition Tr3, the state transition (the display aspect changes) to the final display aspect (ST3) at a stretch.
Here, an example of the conditions Tr1, Tr2, and Tr3 of the state transition will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 129 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of conditions of a state transition of a suspension display of the intervention latent aspect in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 130 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the condition transition of the suspension display of the intervention latent aspect in the seventh embodiment;

FIG. 129 (1) shows an example of the condition of state transition. In the state transition condition shown in FIG. 129 (1), the player performs an intervention operation (PB depression) from the start of the display of the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect.
When transitioning to the final display mode (ST3) depending on the time until performing the step, it changes whether or not the intermediate display mode (ST2) is passed.

FIG. 129 (1) shows the suspension display of the intervention latency mode in the state of the intervention latency mode (ST1).
A condition that the depression of PB is detected before time T1 elapses from the display start time of 05 (Tr1
State transition to the intermediate display mode (ST2). Further, FIG. 129 (1) is the final display mode under the condition (Tr2) that the time T2 (T2> T1) has elapsed from the display start time of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode in the state of the intermediate display mode (ST2). State transition is shown in (ST3).

Further, FIG. 129 (1) is a condition that pressing of PB is detected after time T1 has elapsed from the start of display of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode in the state of the intervention latency mode (ST1) (FIG.
State transition to the final display mode (ST3) is shown by Tr3).

Further, FIG. 129 (1) shows the state in the final display mode (ST3) under the condition (Tr3) that the time T2 has elapsed from the start of the display of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode in the state of the intervention latent mode (ST1). Indicates transition.

FIG. 129 (2) shows an example of the condition of state transition. In the state transition condition shown in FIG. 129 (2), the player performs an intervention operation (PB depression) from the start of the display of the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect.
Whether or not to go through the intermediate display mode (ST2) changes when making a state transition to the final display mode (ST3) according to the number of reserved memories (the number of special figure variation display games executed) that were digested before performing .

FIG. 129 (2) shows the suspension display of the intervention latency mode in the state of the intervention latency mode (ST1).
State transition is made to the intermediate display mode (ST2) under the condition (Tr1) that the depression of PB is detected before the end of the display of 05 and the two pending memories are finished (execution of the special figure variation display game is executed twice). Indicates that.

Further, FIG. 129 (2) shows the final display mode under the condition (Tr2) that the time T2 (T2> T1) has elapsed from the display start time of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode in the state of the intermediate display mode (ST2). State transition is shown in (ST3).

Further, FIG. 129 (2) shows that two pending memories are digested from the start of the display of the pending display 605 of the intervention latent aspect in the state of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) (special map variation display game is executed twice)
The state transition to the final display mode (ST3) is shown under the condition (Tr3) that the depression of PB is detected after that.

Further, FIG. 129 (2) shows the state in the final display mode (ST3) under the condition (Tr3) that the time T2 has elapsed from the display start time of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode in the state of the intervention latent mode (ST1). Indicates transition.

FIG. 130 (1) shows an example of the condition of state transition. Under the condition of the state transition shown in FIG. 130 (1), the number of pending storages when the player performs the intervention operation (PB depression) increases from the number of pending storages at the start of the display of the pending display 605 of the intervention latent aspect. In the state transition to the final display mode (ST3), it is changed depending on whether the intermediate display mode (ST2) is passed or not.

In FIG. 130 (1), the number of pending storages is less than 8 (maximum number) in the state of the intervention latent aspect (ST1), and the number of pending storages at the start of display of the pending indication 605 of the intervention latent aspect +
An intermediate display mode (S1) is detected under the condition (Tr1) that pressing of PB is detected in a state of not 2 or more.
State transition to T2) is shown.

Further, FIG. 130 (1) is the final display mode under the condition (Tr2) that the time T2 (T2> T1) has elapsed from the display start time of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode in the state of the intermediate display mode (ST2). State transition is shown in (ST3).

Also, FIG. 130 (1) shows that the number of pending storages is 8 (in the state of the intervention latency mode (ST1).
In the final display mode (ST3), under the condition (Tr3) that the depression of PB is detected in the state where the maximum number is the maximum number or the number of pending storages at the start of display of the pending display 605 of the intervention latent aspect is 2 or more. Indicates state transition.

Further, FIG. 130 (1) shows the state in the final display mode (ST3) under the condition (Tr3) that the time T2 has elapsed from the start of the display of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode in the intervention latent mode (ST1). Indicates transition.

FIG. 130 (2) shows an example of the condition of state transition. Under the condition of the state transition shown in FIG. 130 (2), the player performs an intervention operation (PB depression) from the start of the display of the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect.
Whether or not to go through the intermediate display mode (ST2) changes when the state transition is made to the final display mode (ST3) according to the number of pending storages added before performing.

FIG. 130 (2) shows the suspension display of the intervention latency mode in the state of the intervention latency mode (ST1).
Condition that the depression of PB is detected before two pending storages are added from the display start time of 05 ((
State transition to the intermediate display mode (ST2) is shown by Tr1).

Further, FIG. 130 (2) is the final display mode under the condition (Tr2) that the time T2 (T2> T1) has elapsed from the display start time of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode in the state of the intermediate display mode (ST2). State transition is shown in (ST3).

Further, FIG. 130 (2) is a condition (Tr3) that pressing of PB is detected after two suspension memories are added from the start of display of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode in the state of the intervention latency mode (ST1). State transition to the final display mode (ST3).

FIG. 130 (2) shows the state in the final display mode (ST3) under the condition (Tr3) that the time T2 has elapsed from the start of the display of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode in the state of the intervention latent mode (ST1). Indicates transition.

In the following, the case where the state transition is made under the condition of FIG. 129 (1) will be particularly described as an example.
Next, timing of state transition of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect will be described using FIG. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing the state transition of the suspension display of the intervention latent aspect in the seventh embodiment.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 131 shows an example of the timing of state transition of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect in the case of state transition under the condition of FIG. 129 (1). FIG. 131 (1) shows the state transition of the hold display 605 when the player does not intervene.

The gaming machine 10 starts to display the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) at timing t61. The gaming machine 10 continues to display the intervention latency mode (ST1) from timing t61 to timing t64 after time T2 (T2> T1), and the condition (T) is set to timing t64
The state of the holding display 605 is changed from the intervention latent state (ST1) to the final display state (ST3) in accordance with the condition of r3).

FIG. 131 (2) shows the state transition of the hold display 605 in the case where the intervention operation by the player is performed before the time T1 has elapsed since the start of displaying the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect.
The gaming machine 10 starts to display the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) at timing t61. The gaming machine 10 accepts the intervention by the player at timing t62 before the time T1 from the timing t61, and the intervention display mode (ST1) from the intervention latency mode (ST1) in response to the intervention by the player satisfying the condition (Tr1). State transition of the hold display 605 is made at ST2). The gaming machine 10 continues to display the hold display 605 in the intermediate display mode (ST2) from timing t61 to timing t64 when time T2 (T2> T1) elapses, and timing t
In response to the condition (Tr2) being satisfied to 64, the pending display 605 is transitioned from the intermediate display mode (ST2) to the final display mode (ST3).

FIG. 131 (3) shows the state transition of the hold display 605 when the intervention operation by the player is performed after the time T1 has elapsed since the start of displaying the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect.
The gaming machine 10 starts to display the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) at timing t61. The gaming machine 10 accepts the intervention by the player at timing t63 after the time T1 from the timing t61, and when the condition (Tr3) is satisfied by the intervention by the player, the final display mode (ST1) is displayed from the intervention latency mode (ST1). State transition of the hold display 605 is made at ST3).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can make the state transition different according to the timing of the intervention operation, thereby enhancing the right to intervene in the contents of the presentation given to the player and enhancing the motivation of the intervention operation. As described above, by making it possible to display the effect contents desired by the player at the timing of the intervention operation by the player, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player.

Next, a display screen in a state in which the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the seventh embodiment.

The display screen 665 shown in FIG. 132 (1) shows an example of the display screen before the elapse of the time T1 since the display of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) is started.
The display screen 665 includes, as display contents, a hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect and an intervention suggestion display 666 arranged at a position corresponding to the hold display 605.

The intervention suggestion display 666 clearly indicates that the player is waiting for the intervention with respect to the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect.
In the display screen 665, since it is a state before time T1 elapses and state transition does not occur at one time until the final display mode (ST3), the intervention suggestion display 666 displays, for example, a message of "looking at the timing PUSH !!" By displaying, it is clearly indicated that intervention is possible but it is not preferable to intervene at present.

A display screen 667 shown in FIG. 132 (2) shows an example of a display screen after the lapse of time T1 since the display of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) is started.
The display screen 667 includes, as display contents, a hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect and an intervention indication 666 arranged at a position corresponding to the hold display 605.

In the display screen 667, since the time T1 has elapsed and the state transition is made at one time to the final display mode (ST3), the intervention suggestion display 666 is, for example,
USH! ! "" Indicates that intervention is possible and it is preferable to intervene at present.

By displaying such an intervention suggestion display 666, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from missing the intervention timing and failing in intervention. In addition, the gaming machine 10, intervention indication indication 6
By changing the display contents of 66 and displaying it, the player can clearly show that the different result will be obtained when the intervention operation is performed.

By the way, in the gaming machine 10, an effect of accepting an intervention operation (PB depression) may be performed even in the special figure variation display game. Such an effect, and the display of suspension of the intervention latent aspect 605
At the same time, the game content may be unclear to the player (the player may not know which way he is in the process). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 performs control so that the effect accompanied by the intervention operation in the special figure variation display game and the pending display 605 of the intervention latent aspect do not occur at the same timing.

A process of controlling the effect accompanied by the intervention operation in the special view fluctuation display game and the process of controlling the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode not to occur at the same timing will be described with reference to FIG. 133 and FIG.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an intervention latent mode suspension display prohibition flag setting process in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a PB rendering prohibition flag setting process in the seventh embodiment.

First, FIG. 133 will be described. The intervention latent mode suspension display prohibition flag setting process is a process of setting the prohibition flag so that the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode is not displayed.
The intervention latency mode suspension display prohibition flag setting process is performed by the control unit (CPU 3 of the effect control device 300
11) is a process performed every time the special view variable display game is started and when the hold display 605 changes (when it is newly displayed or when the display mode is changed). The intervention latency mode suspension display prohibition flag setting process is, for example, a process executed by the control unit in step D23 of the main process (FIG. 44).

[Step D221] The control unit determines whether or not an effect accompanied by a PB effect is being executed in the special figure variation display game. If the control unit determines that the effect with PB effect is being executed in the special figure variation display game, the process proceeds to step D223, and it is determined that the effect without PB effect is being executed in the special figure variation display game To step D222.

[Step D222] The control unit determines whether or not the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode is being displayed. If the control unit determines that the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode is being displayed, the process proceeds to step D223, and if it is determined that the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step D224.

[Step D223] The control unit sets an intervention latency mode prohibition flag, and makes the suspension indication 605 of the intervention latency mode non-displayable.
[Step D224] The control unit cancels the intervention latency mode prohibition flag, and sets the suspension status 605 for intervention latency mode to a displayable state.

According to such processing, the prohibition flag is set while the special figure variation display game with the PB effect is being executed, and the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect is in a non-displayable state. The machine 10 can prevent the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect from being generated during the rendering execution with the intervention operation in the special view variation display game.

In addition, since the prohibition flag is set while the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode is already displayed, and the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode can not be displayed, the gaming machine 10 performs the intervention latency mode. A plurality of hold displays 605 can be prevented from occurring simultaneously.

Next, FIG. 134 will be described. The PB effect prohibition flag setting process is a process of setting a prohibition flag so that an effect accompanied by an intervention operation is not performed in the special figure variation display game.

In the PB rendering prohibition flag setting process, a change occurs in the hold display 605 by the control unit (CPU 311) of the presentation control device 300 (when displaying newly or when the display mode changes)
Is a process performed by The PB rendering prohibition flag setting process is, for example, a process executed by the control unit in step D23 of the main process (FIG. 44).

[Step D231] The control unit determines whether or not the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode is being displayed. If the control unit determines that the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode is being displayed, the process proceeds to step D232, and if it is determined that the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step D233.

[Step D232] The control unit sets a PB effect prohibition flag to make it impossible to start the effect accompanied by the PB effect.
[Step D233] The control unit clears the PB effect prohibition flag, and enables the effect with the PB effect to be started.

According to such processing, while the pending display 605 of the intervention latent aspect is being displayed, the PB
Since the effect prohibition flag is set and it becomes impossible to start the effect accompanied by the PB effect, the game machine 10 performs the effect accompanied by the intervention operation in the special figure fluctuation display game while displaying the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect. Can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the relationship between the start timing of the hold notification effect in the hold display 605 of the non-intervention latent state (pattern P20) and the display mode (change mode) after the state transition will be described using FIG. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the relationship between the state transition timing of the non-intervention latent aspect and the display mode after the state transition in the seventh embodiment.

The non-intervention latent aspect occurs when the number of pending storages is 2 or more, so as shown in FIG. 135, the occurrence position (the position displayed on the display screen at the occurrence) is the third, fourth, fifth ,
It occurs at any of the sixth, seventh, and eighth positions.

FIG. 135 shows state transition at any timing when shifting from the second, when shifting from the second, when shifting from the third, when the hold display 605 of the non-intervention latent aspect occurs at the third position Indicates to do.

In addition, FIG. 135 shows that the pending display 605 in the non-intervention latent aspect generated at the third position transitions from the third position to the pattern P4, pattern P5, and pattern P6.
Transition (change) to any one of the patterns P6 and P7 in the case of state transition when shifting from the second, and pattern P7 in the case of state transition when shifting from the first. To transition to

Also, FIG. 135 shows that when the non-intervention latent aspect retention display 605 occurs at the fourth position,
When shifting from the fourth, when shifting from the third, when shifting from the second, it indicates that a state transition occurs at any of the timings when shifting from the first.

135 changes to the pattern P4 or the pattern P5 when the pending display 605 of the non-intervention latent aspect generated at the fourth position makes a state transition when shifting from the fourth position,
When shifting from the third position, transition is made to either pattern P5 or pattern P6, and when shifting from the second position to state transition, pattern P6, pattern P7
It shows transitioning to pattern P7 in the case of state transition when shifting from the first to one of the two.

Also, FIG. 135 shows that when the non-intervention latent aspect retention display 605 occurs at the fifth position,
When shifting from the fifth, when shifting from the fourth, when shifting from the third, and when shifting from the second, it indicates that a state transition occurs at any timing when shifting from the first.

Further, FIG. 135 shows that when the pending display 605 of the non-intervention latent aspect generated at the fifth position transitions to the pattern P4 when shifting from the fifth position, it transitions to the pattern P4 and shifts from the fourth position. In case of transition, transition is made to either pattern P4 or pattern P5, and in case of state transition when shifting from the third, transition is made to either pattern P5 or pattern P6, and state when shifting from the second In the case of transition, transition to either pattern P6 or pattern P7 is indicated, and in the case of state transition when shifting from the first, transition to pattern P7 is indicated.

Also, FIG. 135 shows that when the non-intervention latent aspect retention display 605 occurs at the sixth position,
When shifting from the sixth, when shifting from the fifth, when shifting from the fourth, when shifting from the third, when shifting from the second, state transition occurs at any of the timings when shifting from the first Indicates that.

Further, FIG. 135 shows that when the pending display 605 of the non-intervention latent aspect generated at the sixth position makes a state transition when shifting from the sixth position, it transitions to the pattern P4, and the state when shifting from the fifth position. In case of transition, transition is made to either pattern P4 or pattern P5, and in case of state transition when shifting from the fourth, transition is made to any of pattern P4, pattern P5, pattern P6 and shift is made from the third At the time of state transition, transition is made to any of pattern P5, pattern P6, or pattern P7, and when state transition is made at the time of shifting from the second, transition is made to either pattern P6 or pattern P7. In the case of a state transition when shifting from, it indicates transitioning to pattern P7.

Also, FIG. 135 shows that when the hold indication 605 of the non-intervention latent aspect occurs at the seventh position,
When shifting from the seventh, when shifting from the sixth, when shifting from the fifth, when shifting from the fourth, when shifting from the third, when shifting from the second, when shifting from the first State transition at some timing.

Further, FIG. 135 shows that when the pending display 605 of the non-intervention latent aspect generated at the seventh position transits to the pattern P4 when shifting from the seventh position, it transitions to the pattern P4 and shifts from the sixth position. In case of transition, transition is made to either pattern P4 or pattern P5, and in case of state transition when shifting from the fifth, transition is made to pattern P4, pattern P5 or pattern P6 and shift is made from the fourth In case of state transition, transition is made to any of pattern P4, pattern P5, pattern P6, pattern P7, and in case of state transition when shifting from the third, any of pattern P5, pattern P6, pattern P7 Transition to, 2
In the case of state transition when shifting from the second, transition to either pattern P6 or pattern P7 is shown, and in the case of state transition when shifting from the first, transition to pattern P7 is shown.

Also, FIG. 135 shows that when the hold display 605 of the non-intervention latent aspect occurs at the eighth position,
When shifting from the eighth, shifting from the seventh, shifting from the sixth, shifting from the fifth, shifting from the fourth, shifting from the third, shifting from the second, 1 The state transition is shown at any timing when shifting from the second.

Further, FIG. 135 shows that when the pending display 605 of the non-intervention latent aspect generated at the eighth position shifts to the pattern P4 when shifting from the eighth position, it transitions to the pattern P4 and shifts from the seventh position. In the case of transition, transition is made to either pattern P4 or pattern P5, and in the case of state transition when shifting from the sixth, transition is made to any of pattern P4, pattern P5, or pattern P6, and fifth and fourth In the case of a state transition when shifting from the third phase, the transition is made to any of pattern P4, pattern P5, pattern P6, or pattern P7, and in the state transition when shifting from the third, pattern P5, pattern P6, pattern P7 In the case of transition to any of the above and the state transition when shifting from the second, pattern P6, pattern P7
It shows transitioning to pattern P7 in the case of state transition when shifting from the first to one of the two.

The above is an example of the state transition timing of the pending display 605 in the non-intervention latent mode and the mode capable of transition. According to such a state transition, since the transitionable aspect changes depending on the transition timing, it is possible that the gaming machine 10 also brings value (meaning) to the timing (display time) of the state transition of the non-intervention latent aspect. it can. As a result, the gaming machine 10 continues the display of the non-intervention latent aspect (only by continuing to display the non-interventional latent aspect hold indication 605) even after the display of the non-intervention latent aspect hold indication 605 and before the state transition is started. Maintenance and improvement can be achieved.

The gaming machine 10 can also set the probability to be set to each of the above-described transitionable modes so that the higher the degree of expectation (reliability), the easier the state transition timing will be. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the hold display 605 of the non-intervention latent aspect generated at the eighth position is more likely to shift when shifting from the fourth position than when shifting from the fifth position. The probability is set so that the aspect (pattern P7) having a higher degree of expectation can be easily selected. In this manner, by making it easier to transition to the display mode having a higher degree of expectation as the state transition timing is delayed, the gaming machine 10 can start the state transition after the display of the non-intervention latent mode suspension display 605. Also, it is possible to maintain and improve the player's interest.

Note that the gaming machine 10 changes to a display mode with higher expectation by changing the appearance of the treasure box every time it shifts (for example, changing like a wooden box, a copper box, a silver box, a gold box). It may be clearly stated that

Moreover, the combination of the said state transition timing and the aspect which can be changed is an example, and is not restricted to this. For example, in addition to the combinations shown in FIG. 135, the gaming machine 10 further holds three different combination patterns (a total of four combination patterns are held), and the non-intervention latent aspect hold display 605 depending on the combination applied. The mode may be selected from any of a wooden box, a copper box, a silver box, and a gold box.

In the gaming machine 10, the state transition timing of the hold display 605 in the non-intervention latent mode has been described as the shift timing of the position of the hold display 605, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the gaming machine 10 may start the state transition start of the non-intervention latent aspect hold display 605 at any timing.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may make a state transition after the start of the special-image variation display game corresponding to the hold display 605 in the non-intervention latent mode. For example, in this case, the gaming machine 10 does not consider the time in which the non-intervention latent aspect hold display 605 is displayed before the start of the special view variable display game.
It is set to the mode that can be transitioned or the mode that can be transitioned only in accordance with the time from the start of the special view variation display game to the start of the state transition (the time for displaying the non-intervention latency mode's reserve digest display 606). The probability of doing so may vary.

Next, the transition mode of the non-intervention latent mode suspension display 605 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of a transition aspect of the hold display of the non-intervention latent aspect in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the gaming machine 10, the hold display 605 of the non-intervention latent mode is displayed in a display mode in which the lid of the treasure box is completely closed before the start of the state transition (FIG. 136 (1)
), When the state transition starts, the treasure box lid is gradually changed to the open state (Fig. 136 (2)).
). After that, when the lid of the treasure box is completely opened, the non-intervention latent state retention display 605 is replaced with the display status after transition transition display 605 with an effect (FIG. 136 (3)).

Although the above embodiment has been described using only one example of the intermediate display mode (ST2), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two or more intermediate display modes (ST2) can be provided.
Although the example on condition of time lapse was explained about the state transition from the middle display mode (ST2) to the final display mode (ST3), it does not restrict to this. For example, state transition may be made on condition that PB is pressed. In this case, for example, the hold display of the PB-type display mode (P10) can also be used as the intermediate display mode (ST2).

In addition, through the intermediate display mode (ST2) by pressing timing, the final display mode (ST3)
Although it has been described using an example in which whether or not a state transition occurs to is not limited thereto. The change mode to change to the final display mode (ST3) may be different depending on the press timing, for example, when pressed at the first timing, the state transition is made to the final display mode via the first intermediate display mode, and at the second timing When pressed, the intermediate display mode can be passed in any case so as to transit to the final display mode via the second intermediate display mode.

Modification 1 of Seventh Embodiment
Next, a modification 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described using FIG. Figure 137 shows the seventh
It is a timing chart which shows the change timing of the effectiveness change of intervention operation in modification 1 of an embodiment of a. The timing chart shown in FIG. 137 is a timing chart corresponding to FIG. 131 (1).

The gaming machine 10 starts to display the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) at timing t61. The gaming machine 10 enables the intervention operation by the player from a timing t61a after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t61. The gaming machine 10 starts from time t61 to time T2.
The intervention latent aspect (ST1) is continued to be displayed until the timing t64 after the lapse, and in response to the satisfaction of the condition (Tr3) at the timing t64, the pending display from the intervention latent aspect (ST1) to the final display aspect (ST3) State transition of 605 is performed. The gaming machine 10 has an intervention latency mode (ST1).
In response to the state transition of the hold display 605 from the) to the final display mode (ST3), the intervention operation is disabled.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 detects an unintended PB depression by the player as an intervention operation by shifting the timing of displaying the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode and the timing of making the intervention operation effective. Can deter things (prevent false interventions). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suppress a decrease in interest due to the absence of a desired state transition.

Next, an example of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode in which the intervention operation is valid and the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode in which the intervention operation is invalid will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 138
It is a figure which shows an example of the pending | holding display of the intervention latent aspect of the active state and the invalid state in the intervention operation in the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment.

The pending display 605 of the intervention latent mode shown in FIG. 138 (1) is a display mode in the enabled state (timing t61a to timing t64) of the intervention operation, and clearly indicates that a predetermined display effect is displayed around and enabled. doing.

The pending display 605 of the intervention latent mode shown in FIG. 138 (2) is a display mode when the intervention operation is in an invalid state (from timing t61 to timing t61a), and the predetermined display effect displayed in the valid state has disappeared. It clearly states that it is a state.

In addition, the display mode of the said valid state and an invalid state is an example, and is not restricted to this. For example,
In the gaming machine 10, part of the PB is turned on (including flashing) in the valid state, and all the PBs are turned off in the invalid state to indicate whether or not the intervention operation is possible. it can.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp whether or not it is possible to perform the intervention operation by clearly indicating the valid state and the invalid state. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 is at the timing t.
When the state transition is not performed by pressing at timing t61a from 61, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player may misidentify that the PB is broken.

[Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment]
A second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a flowchart of intervention operation determination processing in the modification 2 of the seventh embodiment.

The intervention operation determination process is a process performed when the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 detects the pressing of the PB while displaying the hold display 605 in which the intervention operation is in the valid state. The intervention operation determination process is, for example, a process executed by the control unit in step D23 of the main process (FIG. 44).

[Step D241] The control unit determines whether or not the PB pressing mode (a mode of the intervention operation) is a long press. For example, the control unit determines that it is a long press when it is detected that it is a press of a time equal to or more than a threshold.

If the control unit determines that the PB pressing mode is a long press, the process proceeds to step D243.
If it is determined that the PB pressing mode is not the long press, the process proceeds to step D242.
[Step D242] The control unit determines whether or not the PB pressing mode (a mode of the intervention operation) is a continuous hit. For example, when the control unit detects pressing of a threshold or more within a predetermined time, the control unit determines that a continuous hit is made.

If the control unit determines that the PB depression mode is a continuous hit, the control unit proceeds to step D243 and
If it is determined that the B pressing mode is not continuous hitting, the process proceeds to step D244.
[Step D243] The control unit determines that PB pressing is not an intervention operation.

[Step D244] The control unit determines that PB pressing is an intervention operation.
As described above, depending on the PB depression mode, the gaming machine 10 determines that it is not the intervention operation,
It is possible to prevent an unintended PB depression by the player from being detected as an intervention operation.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suppress a decrease in interest due to the absence of a desired state transition.
[Modification 3 of the seventh embodiment]
A third modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of intervention operation determination processing according to the third modification of the seventh embodiment.

The intervention operation determination process is a process performed when the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 detects the pressing of the PB while displaying the hold display 605 in which the intervention operation is in the valid state. The intervention operation determination process is, for example, a process executed by the control unit in step D23 of the main process (FIG. 44).

[Step D251] The control unit determines whether or not the PB pressing mode (a mode of the intervention operation) is a long press.
If the control unit determines that the PB pressing mode is a long press, the process proceeds to step D252.
If it is determined that the PB pressing mode is not the long press, the process proceeds to step D253.

[Step D252] The control unit determines whether or not a long press has been performed for a predetermined time or more. If the control unit determines that the long press has been performed for a predetermined time or more, the process proceeds to step D256. If the control unit determines that the long press is not performed for the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step D255.

[Step D253] The control unit determines whether or not the PB pressing mode (a mode of the intervention operation) is a continuous hit. For example, when the control unit detects pressing of a threshold or more within a predetermined time, the control unit determines that a continuous hit is made.

If the control unit determines that the PB depression mode is a continuous hit, the control unit proceeds to step D254 and
If it is determined that the B pressing mode is not continuous hitting, the process proceeds to step D256.
[Step D254] The control unit determines whether or not a predetermined number of consecutive strikes have occurred. If the control unit determines that the number of consecutive hits is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step D256. If the control unit determines that the number of consecutive hits is not equal to or more than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step D255.

[Step D255] The control unit determines that PB pressing is not an intervention operation.
[Step D256] The control unit determines that PB pressing is an intervention operation.
As described above, depending on the PB depression mode, the gaming machine 10 determines that it is not the intervention operation,
It is possible to prevent an unintended PB depression by the player from being detected as an intervention operation. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suppress a decrease in interest due to the absence of a desired state transition.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines that the PB is not operating normally and determines that the PB is not operating normally by determining that the long press for a predetermined time or more and the continuous hit for a predetermined number of times or more are intervention operations. It is possible to prevent it from Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the PB from being damaged or broken.

[Modification 4 of the seventh embodiment]
Next, a modification 4 of the seventh embodiment will be described using FIG. Figure 141 shows the seventh
It is a figure which shows an example of the conditions of the state transition of the pending | holding display of the intervention latent aspect in the modification 4 of embodiment.

The condition of the state transition shown in FIG. 141 is a modified example of the condition shown in FIG. 129 (1). Figure 1
Under the condition of the state transition shown in 41, when transitioning to the final display mode (ST3) according to the time from the start of the display of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode to the time the player performs the intervention (PB press), Whether or not to go through the display mode (ST2) changes. Furthermore, under the condition of state transition shown in FIG. 141, depending on the intervention mode (PB pressing mode), whether or not to go through the intermediate display mode (ST2) when changing to the final display mode (ST3) changes.

FIG. 141 shows the condition (Tr1) in which the single pressing of PB (player's operation) is detected before the elapse of time T1 from the start of the display of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode in the intervention latency mode (ST1). State transition to the intermediate display mode (ST2). Also, Figure 141.
Indicates a state transition to the final display mode (ST3) under the condition (Tr2) that the time T2 has elapsed from the display start time of the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode in the state of the intermediate display mode (ST2).

Further, FIG. 141 shows the state transition to the final display mode (ST3) under the condition (Tr3) that the long press of PB (player's operation) is detected in the state of the intervention latency mode (ST1).

Further, FIG. 141 shows that the state transition to the final display mode (ST3) is made under the condition (Tr3) that the continuous hit pressing (player's operation) of PB is detected in the state of the intervention latent mode (ST1).

Further, FIG. 141 shows the suspension display of the intervention latency mode in the state of the intervention latency mode (ST1).
The state transition to the final display mode (ST3) is shown under the condition (Tr3) that pressing of the PB (player's operation) is detected after the time T1 has elapsed from the display start time of 05.

Further, FIG. 141 shows the suspension display of the intervention latency mode in the state of the intervention latency mode (ST1).
Under the condition (Tr3) that time T2 has elapsed from the display start time of 05, the final display mode (ST)
State transition is shown in 3).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 changes the mode to transition to the final display mode (ST3) according to the intervention mode, and changes the presence or absence of the intermediate display mode (ST2) to allow the player to make an arbitrary timing. It is possible to enhance the right to intervene in the contents of the presentation given to the player. By this,
The gaming machine 10 can enhance the motivation for the intervention operation. As described above, the game machine 10 is capable of displaying the effect contents desired by the player according to the mode of the intervention operation by the player.
The interest of the player can be improved.

[Modification 5 of the seventh embodiment]
In the fifth modification of the seventh embodiment, an effect accompanied by PB effect in the special view variable display game,
It is allowed that the pending display 605 of the intervention latent aspect occurs simultaneously.

A fifth modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a timing chart showing the switching timing of the intervention operation in the fifth modification of the seventh embodiment.

First, the timing chart shown in FIG. 142 (1) will be described.
In the timing chart shown in FIG. 142 (1), the gaming machine 10 is executing the special view variation display game for the Nth time, and the pending display of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) at the timing t71 where the PB effect is not performed. Start to display 605. The gaming machine 10 has an intervention latency mode (ST1).
Of the intervention latent aspect by the player as the display of the suspension display 605 of the
Enable intervention operation to 5. In the gaming machine 10, when the PB effect is started in the (N + 1) th special view change display game at t73 when the (N + 1) th special view change display game is started, the intervention operation to the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect by the player is performed. Disable.

When the PB effect is ended in the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game at timing t74, the gaming machine 10 validates the intervention operation on the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect by the player.

The gaming machine 10 continues to display the intervention latency mode (ST1) from timing t71 to timing t75 after the elapse of time T2, and as the timing t75 satisfies the condition (Tr3), the intervention latency mode (ST1) The state of the hold display 605 is changed from the state of the display to the final display mode (ST3). The gaming machine 10 invalidates the intervention operation in accordance with the state transition of the hold display 605 from the intervention latent aspect (ST1) to the final display aspect (ST3).

Next, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 142 (2), the gaming machine 10 is in the intervention latency mode (ST1) at timing t71 when the N-th special view variation display game is being executed and PB effect is not performed Start displaying the hold display 605. The gaming machine 10 has an intervention latency mode (ST
With the start of displaying the hold display 605 of 1), the intervention operation on the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect by the player is enabled. When the (N + 1) -th special view variation display game with PB effect is started at timing t72, the gaming machine 10 invalidates the intervention operation on the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect by the player.

The gaming machine 10 performs P in the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game at the timing t74.
When the effect B is over, the intervention operation to the hold display 605 of the intervention latent mode by the player is enabled.

The gaming machine 10 continues to display the intervention latency mode (ST1) from timing t71 to timing t75 after the elapse of time T2, and as the timing t75 satisfies the condition (Tr3), the intervention latency mode (ST1) The state of the hold display 605 is changed from the state of the display to the final display mode (ST3). The gaming machine 10 invalidates the intervention operation in accordance with the state transition of the hold display 605 from the intervention latent aspect (ST1) to the final display aspect (ST3).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 in particular makes the intervention operation to the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect by the player invalid during the PB effect execution (from timing t73 to timing t74) in the special figure variation display game. It is possible to prioritize the intervention in the figure fluctuation display game. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the effects performed in the special view variable display game, and can suppress the execution of the intervention operation on the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode not intended by the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (2), the game is disabled by setting the intervention operation on the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect by the player from the start of the N + 1th special figure change display game with PB effect. The machine 10 can clearly indicate in advance that the PB effect is performed in the special figure variation display game. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the possibility of erroneously performing the intervention operation of the special view variation display game as a result of trying to perform the intervention operation on the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (1), the gaming machine 10 moves to the hold display 605 of the intervention latency mode by setting the intervention operation on the hold display 605 of the intervention latency mode to a valid state until immediately before executing the PB effect. The intervention time of

The switching timing of the above-mentioned effective / invalid is an example, and is not restricted to this. For example, gaming machine 10
In place of the invalidation state from the start of the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game with the PB effect, it may be in the ineffective state from a predetermined second before the PB effect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may enable the intervention operation to the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode after a lapse of predetermined seconds after the PB effect in the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game is finished. As described above, the gaming machine 10 erroneously performs the intervention operation on the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode by making the intervention operation on the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode effective after the lapse of predetermined seconds. Can be deterred.

[Modification 6 of the seventh embodiment]
In the sixth modification of the seventh embodiment, while displaying the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect, it is permitted to generate an effect with a PB effect in the special view change display game, and the PB in the special view change display game Intervention to the hold display 605 of the effect and the intervention latent aspect can be performed by one intervention operation.

A sixth modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a timing chart showing the switching timing of the intervention operation in the sixth modification of the seventh embodiment.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 143, the gaming machine 10 starts to display the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) at timing t81 when the PB effect is not performed. The gaming machine 10 activates the intervention operation on the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode by the player in accordance with the start of displaying the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode (ST1). The gaming machine 10 is t8
The PB effect is started in the special figure variation display game to 2. At this time, the gaming machine 10 leaves the intervention operation to the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect by the player in the valid state.

At timing t83, the gaming machine 10 ends the PB effect in the special view variable display game.
Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 continues to display the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode (ST1) from timing t81 to timing t84 after the elapse of time T2, and the condition (time t84)
The state of the holding display 605 is changed from the intervention latent state (ST1) to the final display state (ST3) in response to the filling of the Tr3). The gaming machine 10 invalidates the intervention operation in accordance with the state transition of the hold display 605 from the intervention latent aspect (ST1) to the final display aspect (ST3).

Next, a display screen in the case where an effect accompanied by PB effect in the special figure variation display game is generated while the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect is displayed will be described using FIG. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the sixth modification of the seventh embodiment.

A display screen 668 shown in FIG. 144 (1) shows an example of a display screen at the timing (timing t82) at which the PB effect is started in the special figure variation display game. The display screen 668 is a state in which only the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect (ST1) is displayed, and the display screen when the PB effect is started on the display screen after time T1 elapses (FIG. 132 (2)) It is.

On the display screen 668, the display content includes a suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode, an intervention suggestion display 666 arranged at a position corresponding to the suspension display 605, and a special view effect display 669.
Special figure effect display 669 displays an effect to be executed in the special figure variable display game. In the display screen 668, the special image effect display 669 displays the image of the PB as the hold display of the intervention latent aspect 6
The display is magnified from the 05 position toward the center. As a result, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates that an effect that allows the player to perform an intervention operation in the special view variable display game is started.

A display screen 670 shown in FIG. 144 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 668. The display screen 670 is a display screen in a state in which PB effect is started in the special view variation display game and operation intervention by the player is awaited. An example is shown.

In the display screen 670, the special image effect display 669 is waiting for an operation intervention such as “Push the button and lead the effect to success !!” (the image of PB, the image of the hand trying to press the PB, and so on Display a message that clearly indicates that the

In the display screen 670, the special view effect display 669 is displayed in priority (front side) over the intervention suggestion display 666, and the message of the intervention suggestion display 666 can be grasped (the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode is operated) It is superimposed on the intervention indication 666 so that it can be grasped that the intervention is awaited). Specifically, in the display screen 670, the special drawing effect display 669 is arranged so as not to overlap with the "PUSH !!" portion which is a part of the message of the intervention suggestion display 666, thereby the intervention latency mode. It is possible to grasp that the hold display 605 of is waiting for the operation intervention.

Next, the relationship between the PB depression mode and the intervention operation in the case where the PB effect in the special view variable display game and the suspension display 605 of the intervention latency mode are simultaneously generated will be described using FIG. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the PB pressing mode and the intervention operation in the modification 6 of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 145 shows whether or not the PB pressing mode and the PB pressing mode are detected as the intervention operation when the PB effect in the special view variation display game and the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode (ST1) occur simultaneously. Indicates the correspondence relationship of

FIG. 145 shows that, in the PB effect in the special view variation display game, the gaming machine 10 detects that the PB single hit and the long press are the intervention operations and detects that the continuous hit is not the intervention operations. Show.

On the other hand, the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent mode indicates that the gaming machine 10 detects that the PB single hit and the continuous hit are the intervention operations and detects that the long press is not the intervention operation.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 performs the intervention operation simultaneously to both the PB effect in the special figure variation display game and the suspension display 605 of the intervention latent aspect, the special figure variation display according to the PB depression mode It is possible to perform intervention operation only for the game, and to perform intervention operation only for the hold display 605 of the intervention latent aspect.

Modified Example 7 of Seventh Embodiment
In the seventh modification of the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays the non-intervention latent aspect retention display 605,
A hit effect after the special figure fluctuation display game is over, which is performed when the special figure fluctuation display game derives a hit before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the hold display 605 and during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. Used for the production of inside.

A hit effect to be performed after the end of the special view variation display game in the seventh modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 146 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in Modification 7 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 147 shows the seventh.
It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a modification 7 of an embodiment displays.

In the display screen 671 shown in FIG. 146 (1), the special view variation display game (the hold digest display 606) corresponding to the hold display 605 without the state transition of the hold display 605 of the non-intervention latent aspect.
Shows an example of a screen on which the special figure variable display game is being executed in the non-intervention latent state.

The display screen 672 shown in FIG. 146 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 671, and is displayed in the non-intervention latency mode without the state transition of the non-intervention latency mode pending digest display 606. The figure variation display game is over, and it is hit as a result aspect of the special figure variation display game ("777
] Shows an example of the screen which derived | led-out.

A display screen 673 shown in FIG. 147 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 672, and shows an example of a screen during execution of winning effect. The display screen 673 includes a hit effect display 674 in the display content. The hit effect display 674 displays the effect to be executed in the hit effect.

In the display screen 673, the hit effect display 674 displays the current round (“
1R / 4R ”), the display regarding the number of winning balls (“ 100 pt ”), the display of the treasure box in the same mode as the non-intervention latent mode retention / retention display 606, and the effect displayed for the purpose of improving interest in the hit effect Display an animation effect in which a character such as "Tiger" is flying on the space shuttle).

The display screen 675 shown in FIG. 147 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 673, and is the same as the non-intervention latent state retention digest display 606 which the hit effect display 674 displayed on the display screen 673. The screen shows the state of the treasure box.

In the display screen 675, the hit effect display 674 displays "4R / 4R" as a display regarding the current round, and indicates that it is currently 4R. In addition, in the display screen 675, the hit effect display 674 is a value that the lid of the treasure box of the same mode as the non-intervention latent mode of the retained digest display 606 is opened and the value of 8R increase from the treasure box is given to the user (“ It shows that + 8R ") came out.

A display screen 676 shown in FIG. 147 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 675, and shows a screen after the value coming out of the treasure box on the display screen 675 is given to the user.
On the display screen 676, the hit effect display 674 displays "4R / 12R" as a display regarding the current round, and increases from 8R to 4R displayed on the display screen 675 and continues to hit the effects for 12R. Indicates that it has

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment (including the modification) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 stores the start memory as the right to execute the game, and changes the display mode of the hold display 605 according to the start memory in relation to the result of the game corresponding to the start memory (from ST1 to ST3) And can execute a pending announcement effect. The game machine 10 includes display means (display device 41), operation means (PB 25), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The operation means can accept an operation. The display means can display a hold display.

The control means causes the first timing (condition Tr) to be displayed while the hold display is displayed in the first display mode (ST1).
When the operation (intervention operation, for example, PB pressed) is received at timing satisfying 1), the hold display changes from the first change mode (for example, ST1 to the second display mode (ST3) through the intermediate display mode (ST2) Change the mode to the second display mode (ST3) according to the mode), and when the operation is accepted at the second timing (timing satisfying the condition Tr3) while the hold display is displayed in the first display mode, the second display change The display mode is changed to the second display mode (ST3) according to the mode (for example, the mode in which ST1 changes to ST3 at a stretch).

(2) The first display mode of (1) is a display mode for guiding the player to the operation.
(3) The control means of (1) changes the display mode to the second display mode through the intermediate display mode when the press is detected at the first timing, and detects the press at the second timing later than the first timing In this case, the display mode is changed to the second display mode without passing through the intermediate display mode.

(4) The control means of (1) does not start the change to the second display mode in the operation performed for a predetermined time after the display start of the first display mode.
(5) The display means of (1) can display a special view change display game including an effect of receiving an operation by a player through the operation means, and the control means performs a special view change display game including an effect Control is performed so that the hold display of the first display mode does not occur while being turned on.

(6) The display means of (1) can display a special view fluctuation display game including an effect of receiving an operation by the player through the operation means, and the control means generates a hold display of the first display mode. In the meantime, control is performed so that the special figure variation display game does not occur.

(7) The display means of (2) can display a special view change display game including an effect of receiving an operation by a player through the operation means, and the control means performs a special view change display game including an effect While the hold display of the first display mode is being displayed while the display is in progress, if it is detected that the operation means has received an operation, the change to the second display mode of the hold display is not started.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is capable of executing a variable display game, and has the game characteristics of being able to generate a small hit, similarly to the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. First, the playability of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of a game state transition diagram of the eighth embodiment and an execution condition of the special small hit effect.

A state transition diagram regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is shown in FIG. 148 (1). The gaming machine 10 includes a non-big hit state Sta and a big hit state Stb. The non-big hit state Sta includes a gaming state including a probability fluctuation state (low probability state or high probability state), a general power support state (general power support presence state, general power support non support state), or a combination thereof.

The gaming machine 10 can derive a small hit, a lose, and a big hit as a variable display result in the special figure game (special figure 1 game and special figure 2 game) in the non-big hit state Sta. The gaming machine 10 transitions to the big hit state triggered by the derivation of the big hit in the non-big hit state Sta, and transitions to the non-big hit state triggered by the end of the big hit in the big hit state Stb.

The gaming machine 10 can display the variation display result in the non-big-hit state Sta on the batch display device 50 and can also display it on the display device 41. When displaying the variable display result on the batch display device 50, the gaming machine 10 performs the special display 1 in the special display 1 game.
It is displayed on the symbol display unit 53, and the variation display result in the special view 2 game is displayed on the special view 2 symbol display unit 54. In addition, when displaying the variation display result on the display device 41, the gaming machine 10 displays the decorative symbol (large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602) display portion common to the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game.

In this manner, as shown in FIG. 148 (2), the gaming machine 10 displays an ornament on the display device 41 when displaying the “disengagement symbol (disengagement aspect)” as a special symbol (special image) on the collective display device 50. As a symbol (large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), "disappeared symbol (destroyed pattern)" is displayed. The gaming machine 10 also displays the "big hit symbol (big hit feature)" as a decorative symbol on the display device 41 when the "big hit symbol (big hit feature)" is displayed on the collective display device 50 as a special symbol. In addition, when the game machine 10 displays the "small hit symbol (small hit aspect)" as a special symbol on the collective display device 50, "the small hit symbol 1 (small hit aspect 1)" or the small hit symbol as a decorative symbol on the display device 41 "Small hit pattern 2 (small hit mode 2)" is displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the decorative symbol "small hit symbol 1" or "small hit symbol 2" corresponding to the special symbol "small hit symbol", and makes the display pattern of the small hit diverse. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suppress monotonous game progress for a small hit. In addition, the gaming machine 10
Is a special small hit no effect when displaying the decorative symbol "small hit symbol 1", the decorative symbol "
It is possible to give variety to the progression of the game against the small hit by setting the special small hit effect when the small hit symbol 2 is displayed. The special small hit effect will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 1
49 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device of the eighth embodiment.
The display contents of the display device 41 during symbol variation in the variation display game are shown in FIG. 149 (1).
The display device 41 has two sets of decorative symbols (large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, a pending indication 605, a pending decision indication 606 When,
And a meter display 680.

The two decorative patterns have a large symbol group 601 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 602 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 601 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is displayed large at the approximate center of the display device 41. Large symbol group 601
Includes the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R. The left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

Generally, the large symbol group 601 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C. Therefore, in the large symbol group 601, in many cases, the left symbol 601L and the right symbol 601R form a reach aspect, and it is possible to wait for the stop of the middle symbol 601C to form a hitting aspect.

The small symbol group 602 is in charge of reporting of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 602 is smallly displayed on the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. Small symbol group 602,
Includes left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 of the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

The special figure 1 reservation number display 603 displays the number of pending storages (starting number of memories) of the special figure 1 game. A special figure 2 pending number display 604 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 605 can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view fluctuation display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 605 corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 603 and the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 604. The holding and digest display 606 can indicate the change state of the special view change display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode.

In the display device 41 shown in FIG. 149 (1), the number of pending storages of the special view 1 game indicated by the special view 1 pending count display 603 is “1”, and the special view 2 game of the special view 2 pending number display 604 is shown. Since the number of pending storages is “1”, the number of pending storages indicated by the pending display 605 is “2”, and the pending digest display 606 indicates that the special-image variation display game is under symbol variation.

The meter display 680 is a display for special small hit effects. The gaming machine 10 performs a meter full effect when the meter level of the meter display 680 is raised when the large symbol group 601 is displayed in a specific display mode in a small hit. Meter-full production is a special production that produces a sense of expectation for a big hit. Meter display 6 shown in Fig. 149 (1)
80 shows the state (for example, initial state) of meter level "0".

FIG. 149 (2) shows the display content of the display device 41 while the symbol is stopped by displaying the dislocated symbol in the variable display game. The hold and digest display 606 indicates that the special view variation display game is in a symbol stop state, according to the display mode. Large symbol group 601, left symbol 601L, middle symbol 601
C, the right symbol 601R is in the process of being stopped at the dislocated symbol (displacement aspect) "1, 2, 3". Also,
The small symbol group 602, like the large symbol group 601, indicates that the small symbol group 602 is in the process of being stopped at the symbol 1, 2, 3 '.

Next, among the symbol stop states of the special figure variation display game, a symbol stop state in which the decorative symbol displays a small hit symbol will be described using FIG. FIG. 150 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the eighth embodiment.

The display contents of the display device 41 while the symbol is stopped by displaying a small hit symbol in the variable display game are shown in FIGS. 150 (1) and (2). Large symbol group 601 shown in FIG. 150 (1) is a left symbol 601
L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C indicate stopping under small hit symbol 1 (small hit aspect 1) "triangular, triangular, triangular". A large symbol group 601 shown in FIG. 150 (2) indicates that the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C are stopped at the small hit symbol 2 (small hit embodiment 2) "star, star, star". Both the small hit symbol 1 and the small hit symbol 2 are decorative symbols corresponding to the same special symbol "small hit symbol". At this time, the small symbol group 602 shown in FIG. 150 (1), (2) is a special symbol “
The small hit symbol "3, 3, 7" corresponding to the small hit symbol "during stop" is shown. In addition, small symbol group 60
2 may display a small hit symbol different in FIGS. 150 (1) and 150 (2) corresponding to the large symbol group 601. For example, small symbol group 602 displays small hit symbols "3, 3, 7" corresponding to small hit symbol 1 of large symbol group 601, and small hit corresponding to small hit symbol 2 of large symbol group 601. A small hit symbol "3, 3, 1" different from the small hit symbol "3, 3, 7" corresponding to the symbol 1 can be displayed.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 may correspond two decorative symbols (small hit symbol 1, small hit symbol 2) to one small hit identified by the special view displayed by the collective display device 50. it can.

Further, the gaming machine 10 does not execute the special small hit effect when the display device 41 displays the small hit symbol 1, and executes the special small hit effect when the display device 41 displays the small hit symbol 2. Figure 15.
The special small hit effect shown in 0 (2) is the small hit pattern 2 “star, star, star” in the large symbol group 601
And a special small hit effect display 681 for clarifying the correspondence between the large symbol group 601 and the meter display 680 by an effect, and the meter level up of the meter display 680. For example, the gaming machine 10 puts an effect on the background of the small hit symbol 2 "stars, stars, stars" to highlight the large symbol group 601, and special small hit effect display 681 directed from the large symbol group 601 to the meter display 680 Thus, the correspondence between the large symbol group 601 and the meter display 680 is clearly indicated, and the meter level of the meter display 680 is increased by one.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide different display modes in the same small hit on game control. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can provide diversity to the game progress for the small hit depending on the presence or absence of the special small hit presentation. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel a sense of expectation of hitting from among the games that may be monotonous.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform effects over a plurality of variable displays by holding the display modes up to the previous variable display without resetting the display mode of the meter display 680 for each variable display. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform an effect of making the meter level of the meter display 680 full by displaying the small hitting symbol 2 a plurality of times as a result of the variable display game.

In the gaming machine 10, the meter level of the meter display 680 is increased by 1 when the small hit symbol 2 is displayed, but the invention is not limited to this and the meter level may be increased by 2 or more.

Next, a special small hit effect in which the UP number of the meter level is different depending on the effect mode will be described using FIG. FIG. 151 is a third diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the eighth embodiment;

The special small hit effect display 682 shown in FIG. 151 (1) is an effect corresponding to a medium expectation (or a medium appearance frequency), for example, a blue effect (indicated by hatching).
Is displayed, and the meter level of the meter display 680 is increased by 2. Also, the special small hit effect display 683 shown in FIG. 151 (2) displays an effect corresponding to a high degree of expectation (or low appearance frequency), for example, a red effect (shown by cross hatching), and a meter Increase the meter level of display 680 by 3

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can change the UP amount of the meter level of the meter display 680 according to the degree of expectation that the special small hit effect displays 682 and 683 produce. By this,
The gaming machine 10 can cause the player to feel a sense of expectation of hitting from among the games that may be monotonous.

In addition, although the color of the effect is mentioned as an example of the effect of the special small hit effect (special small hit effect display), the gaming machine 10 changes the shape of the effect instead of or in addition to the color of the effect. The size, type, or a combination of these may be used as the special small hit effect. The gaming machine 10 displays special small hit effects on the back and front of the large symbol group 601, but displays special small hit effects only on the back or front of the large symbol group 601. You may do so. Also, for example, the gaming machine 10 displays the effect of the special small hit effect on the back of the large symbol 601 L, and the large symbol 60
The display order of special small hit effects may be set for each of the large symbols 601L, 601C, 601R constituting the large symbol group 601, such as displaying special small hit effects on the front of 1C or 601R. .

In addition, the meter display 680 may be configured such that the display mode of the level display before the meter level update and the display mode of the meter level addition are different. For example, in the meter display 680 shown in FIG. 151 (1), the level display before the meter level update is green (shown by solid), and the display mode for the meter level addition is blue (indicated by hatching). Also, in the meter display 680 shown in FIG. 151 (2), the level display before the meter level update is green (shown by solid) and the display mode for the meter level addition is red (indicated by cross hatching). Thus, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player the meter level before update, the meter level for addition, and the meter level after update that is the sum of the meter level before update and the meter level for addition.

Next, the meter full effect when the meter level of the meter display 680 becomes full will be described using FIG. 152 to FIG. FIG. 152 is a fourth diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 153 is a fifth diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 154 is a sixth diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the eighth embodiment.

First, the special small hit effect display 685 shown in FIG. 152 (1) makes the meter level of the meter display 680 full. The gaming machine 10 displays a meter full display 684 when the meter level of the meter display 680 is full. The meter full display 684 is a display such as a rotating light (hereinafter referred to as a notification lamp), and is turned off when the meter level of the meter display 680 is not full, and is lit when the meter level of the meter display 680 is full ( It becomes an aspect including blink. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player the full meter level of the meter display 680. The meter display 680 can clearly indicate the meter level addition process until the meter level becomes full by the display mode. For example, the meter display 680 shown in FIG. 152 (1) is 1UP, 2UP, 1UP, 2UP, 1UP,
It clearly indicates that the meter level is full (16 UP) by the addition process of 1 UP, 2 UP, 1 UP, 1 UP, 1 UP, 1 UP, 2 UP.

Next, the gaming machine 10 performs meter full rendering after the meter level of the meter display 680 becomes full. In the meter-full effect, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the hold display 605 in accordance with the pre-reading result of the hold storage. For example, the gaming machine 10 switches the display mode of the second hold storage of the hold display 605 from white to red. At this time, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the correspondence between the meter full display 684 and the hold display 605 by the meter full effect display 686. The meter full effect display 686 is an effect display for connecting the meter full display 684 and the hold display 605. At this time, the meter display 680 is switched from the display mode that clearly shows the meter level addition process to the display mode that produces the meter full. Although the gaming machine 10 sets the target of meter full effect as the hold display 605, it is also possible to set the hold digest display 606 as a target of meter full effect. In addition, pending display 605
For the display mode of the hold and reserve display 606, a predetermined reliability can be notified by the display mode shown in FIG.

Thus, the meter-full effect produces an expectation for a big hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 makes the meter level of the meter display 680 full by displaying a specific small hit symbol (for example, the small hit symbol 2) a predetermined number of times, and executes a meter full effect as a benefit. Therefore, the meter-full effect is a relatively high reliability notification (for example, 90
It is desirable that the presentation be of high value for the player who performs% etc.). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 performs a meter full effect according to the pre-reading result of the hold storage. Further, the gaming machine 10 makes the meter level of the meter display 680 full in accordance with the pre-reading result of the hold storage. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set the small hit symbol displayed at the time of the small hit according to the pre-reading result of the holding memory as the specific small hit symbol (for example, the small hit symbol 2).

Next, another aspect of the meter full effect is shown in FIG. 153 (1). The gaming machine 10 displays the character as the meter full effect display 687 and stands by in the meter full effect. The gaming machine 10 produces an effect that the meter full effect display 687 acts on the variable display of the large symbol group 601 during standby display. For example, the gaming machine 10 waits for the start of symbol variation to display a big hit symbol, and interlocks the character with the symbol variation effect during symbol variation to display a big hit symbol. More specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the left and right large symbols 601L and 601R
In the reach state in which 3 "is displayed, the effect of connecting the character and the middle large pattern 601C is displayed. The gaming machine 10 displays the jackpot symbol by displaying "3" on the middle large symbol 601C as a result of the symbol variation, thereby making the player feel the reliability of the effect using the character, and the meter The player's expectation for the full effect can be fostered.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform meter full effect which does not conform to the pre-reading result of the on-hold memory by displaying the meter full effect display 687 on standby for a predetermined period (may be indefinite).

In the game machine 10, the meter full effect display 687 performs an effect that acts on the fluctuation display of the large symbol group 601 during the standby display, but an effect that acts on the hold display 605 and the hold digestion display 606 is performed. May be In that case, the gaming machine 10 can perform meter full effect according to the pre-reading result of the pending storage.

Further, another aspect of the meter full effect is shown in FIG. 153 (2). The gaming machine 10 displays the operation guidance of the push button 25 as the meter full effect display 688 in the meter full effect. The gaming machine 10 interlocks the pressing operation effect with the symbol variation if the large symbol group 601 in symbol variation displays a big hit when the pressing operation of the push button 25 is detected. In addition, if the large symbol group 601 during symbol variation does not display a big hit when detecting pressing operation of the push button 25, the gaming machine 10 suspends the pressing operation effect according to the pre-reading result of the holding storage It is interlocked with the display mode switching of the display 605 and the hold digest display 606.

Further, another aspect of the meter-full effect is shown in FIGS. 154 (1) and (2). In the meter full effect, the gaming machine 10 switches the display mode of the hold display 605 and the hold digestion display 606 as a meter full effect display 689 to a notification lamp and displays it (FIG. 154 (1)). For example, the gaming machine 10 displays eight notification lamps in the extinguishing mode when the special view 1 hold number display 603 is “4” and the special view 2 hold number display 604 is “4”. Further, when the symbol is changing, the gaming machine 10 displays the notification lamp of the holding and digest display 606 in the extinguished mode. The gaming machine 10 is
When the big hit design is not displayed as a result of the prefetch storage of reserved storage or as a result of design fluctuation, the displayed notification lamp is kept in the light off mode and stands by.

In the gaming machine 10, when there is a hold shift, the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606
The shift indicator is displayed on the display. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may use a new start memory to be added to the hold display 605 as the notification lamp when the hold storage is newly added.

The gaming machine 10 switches the corresponding notification lamp to the lighting mode when displaying the jackpot symbol as a result of the prefetch storage of the hold storage or as a result of symbol fluctuation. The gaming machine 10 switches the fifth notification lamp of the hold display 605 from the light-off mode to the lighting mode as a pre-read result of the hold storage (FIG. 154 (2)). When the game machine 10 displays the jackpot symbol as a result of symbol fluctuation, the gaming machine 10 switches the notification lamp of the holding and digest display 606 from the extinguishing mode to the lighting mode.

Since such a gaming machine 10 can perform meter-full effect only by the display mode of the notification lamp, it is possible to reduce the control processing load applied to the effect control device 300 without the need for cooperation with the symbol variation. For example, the effect control device 300 can switch the display mode of the notification lamp independently of the symbol variation. The gaming machine 10 may perform meter-full effect by linking the display mode of the notification lamp with the symbol variation.

Next, the small hit symbol display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small hitting symbol display processing in the effect control device of the eighth embodiment. The small hit symbol display process is a process for setting a small hit symbol 1 or a small hit symbol 2 (specific small hit symbol) as a small hit symbol to be displayed when deriving a small hit as a result of the special figure game. The small hit symbol display process is a process performed every time a small hit is derived as a result of the special figure game by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The small hit symbol display process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

[Step D261] The control unit determines whether or not there is a big hit in the prefetch result of the pending storage. For example, the control unit can determine whether or not there is a big hit in the prefetching result of the hold storage based on the prefetching notice command received from the game control device 100. The control unit proceeds to step D262 when there is no big hit in the prefetch result of the pending storage, and proceeds to step D270 when there is a big hit in the prefetch result of the pending storage.

[Step D262] The control unit determines whether the meter level of the meter display 680 is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold. The control unit proceeds to step D263 when the meter level of the meter display 680 is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold, and proceeds to step D264 when the meter level of the meter display 680 is not less than or equal to the predetermined threshold.

[Step D263] The control unit sets the small hit symbol 2 lottery probability to a high probability. The small hit symbol 2 lottery probability is the probability of selecting the small hit symbol 2 as the small hit symbol to be displayed.
[Step D264] The control unit sets the small hitting symbol 2 lottery probability to a low probability.

[Step D265] The control unit executes a small hit symbol 2 lottery that determines whether or not to select the small hit symbol 2 as the small hit symbol to be displayed.
[Step D266] If the result of the small hit symbol 2 lottery is a win, the control unit D2
Proceed to step 67. If it is a failure, then proceed to step D269.

[Step D267] The control unit sets the small hit symbol 2 as the small hit symbol to be displayed.
[Step D268] The control unit sets meter level effect, and ends the small hit symbol display process. The setting of the meter level effect includes setting of the addition amount of the meter level in the meter level effect and the type of the effect.

Thereby, the control unit can appropriately perform the setting of the small hit symbol 2 and the setting of the meter level effect according to the pre-reading result of the pending storage. For example, the control unit can select a presentation mode in which the meter level of the meter display 680 can reach full when there is a big hit in the prefetch result of the retention storage.

[Step D269] The control unit sets the small hit symbol 1 as the small hit symbol to be displayed, and ends the small hit symbol display processing.
[Step D270] The control unit determines whether or not there is a small hit before the big hit in the pre-read result, when there is a big hit in the pre-read result of the pending storage. The control unit proceeds to step D262 when there is a small hit before the big hit in the pre-read result, and determines a small hit symbol to be displayed by lottery. On the other hand, when there is no small hit before the big hit in the pre-reading result, the control unit proceeds to step D267, and determines the small hit symbol to be displayed as small hit symbol 2 without lottery.

In this manner, the control unit does not make a big hit in the prefetch result of the pending storage, and the meter level is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold, that is, when the meter level is not reached to execute the meter full effect. , Set small hit symbol 2 lottery probability to high probability. On the other hand, the control unit is small when there is no big hit in the prefetch result of the pending storage and the meter level is not below the predetermined threshold, that is, when the meter level can be added, the meter full effect can be performed. Set the winning symbol 2 lottery probability to a low probability.

As a result, the control unit can suppress execution of a meter full effect with low reliability while appropriately increasing the meter level of the meter display 680.
In addition, the control unit is a small hit symbol 2 with low probability even if there is no big hit in the prefetched result of pending storage
Can be selected, so that it is possible to wait for the jackpot to be detected in the pre-reading result of the retention memory during the meter-full effect, and perform the high expectation performance. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not detected in the pre-reading result of the pending storage in the meter-full effect, the control unit can perform the effect with a low degree of expectation, and can end the meter-full effect.

Next, meter full effect processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a flowchart of meter full effect processing of the eighth embodiment. The meter full effect process is a process of setting an effect content to be displayed when the meter level of the meter display 680 becomes full as a result of the meter level effect. The meter full effect process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The meter full effect process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

[Step D271] The control unit determines whether or not the effect before notification of the result has been set. Note that
The meter full effect includes the effect before the result notification and the result notification effect. The effect pre-informing effect is an effect on standby until the effect informing effect is executed, for example, the meter full display 684 (FIG. 1).
52 (1), meter full effect display 687 (FIG. 153 (1)), meter full effect display 688 (FIG. 153 (2)), meter full effect display 689 (FIG. 154 (1), (2))
Etc. The control unit proceeds to step D272 if the effect pre-notification effect is not set, and proceeds to step D275 if the result pre-notification effect is set.

[Step D272] The control unit sets an effect before notification of the result.
[Step D273] The control unit sets a timer trigger that is a setting trigger of the result notification effect. For example, the control unit sets a time-up time of 60 seconds as a timer trigger.

[Step D274] The control unit sets an event trigger serving as a setting trigger of the result notification effect, and ends the meter full effect process. For example, the control unit sets the jackpot detection from the prefetch result of the pending storage as an event trigger.

[Step D275] The control unit determines that the trigger (the timer trigger or the event trigger) of the result notification effect setting is established because the effect before the result notification is set, that is, in the standby state until the result notification effect is performed. The control unit proceeds to step D276 when the trigger for the result notification effect setting is established, and ends the meter full effect process when the trigger for the result notification effect setting is not realized, and the trigger for the result notification effect setting is Wait for the establishment.

[Step D276] The control unit sets up an effect notification effect. The control unit may make the effect mode of the result notification effect different depending on which of the timer trigger and the event trigger is established. For example, when the timer trigger is established, the control unit sets an effect mode with a low degree of expectation as the result notification effect, assuming that there is no big hit in the prefetch result of the pending storage. In addition, when the event trigger is established, the control unit sets an effect mode with a high degree of expectation as the result notification effect, assuming that there is a big hit in the prefetching result of the pending storage.

Next, a modified example of the meter display 680 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 157 shows
It is a figure which shows an example of the meter full display of the modification of 8th Embodiment.
The meter display 6801 (FIG. 157 (1)) is a meter display equivalent to 16 equal parts, and colors are set in advance for each meter level. For example, the meter display 6801
Meter levels 1 to 4 are blue (indicated by hatching), meter levels 5 to 8
Is green (indicated by cross hatching), meter levels 9 to 12 are yellow (indicated by light fill), and meter levels 13 to 16 are red (indicated by dark fill). Thus, the meter display 6801 makes it easy to grasp the meter level.

The meter display 6802 (FIG. 157 (2)) is a meter display of 12 equal parts, and colors are set in advance for each meter level. For example, the meter display 6802
Make meter levels 1 to 3 blue (indicated by hatching); meter levels 4 to 6
Is green (indicated by cross hatching), meter levels 7 to 9 are yellow (indicated by light fill), and meter levels 10 to 12 are red (indicated by dark fill). Thereby, the meter display 6802 makes it easy to grasp the meter level. The meter display 6802 has a rough meter level compared to the meter display 6801 and can give the player an impression that the meter level is likely to be full. In addition, the meter display 6801 can give the player an impression that the meter level is unlikely to be full because the meter level is finer than the meter display 6802.

The meter display 6803 (FIG. 157 (3)) is an unevenly divided 12 level meter display. The meter display 6803 can give an accent to an impression that the meter level is likely to be full for the player because the size of each level is different.

The meter display 6804 (Fig. 157 (4)) is a slide window type display, and the distinction of the small hitting design for each small hitting occurrence (for example, the small hitting design 1 is white (shown in achromatic color)
, Small hit symbol 2 is recorded in green (shown by cross hatching), and the display content is shifted (for example, right shift). Also, the meter display 6804 displays the number of small hit symbols 2 in the slide window in numbers. For example, the meter display 6804 indicates that the small hit symbol 2 is displayed in a total of three times of the second, fifth and seventh times in the past eight small hits. According to this, since it is sufficient for the gaming machine 10 to determine whether or not to execute the meter full effect for the past eight small hits, the meter level becomes full and the reliability is low because the big hit interval has become large. It is possible to suppress the execution of the meter full effect.

The gaming machine 10 may switch the meter displays 6801 to 6804 while the game is in progress. In this way, the gaming machine 10 may adjust the ease with which the meter level is full.

Next, one modified example of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating an example of a small hit type of a modification of the eighth embodiment and a special small hit presentation parameter for each small hit type. Although the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment represents one small hit with two small hitting symbols, the gaming machine 10 of the modification of the eighth embodiment has a plurality of small hits different from one another. Small hit symbol to represent.

The gaming machine 10 has three small hits (small hit types), as shown in FIG. 158 (1).
The small hit 1 opens the winning opening (for example, the special variation winning device (big winning opening) 38 (see FIG. 76)) only once in a period T10 (for example, 1.6 seconds). In addition, small per 2 is period T21
The winning opening is opened twice in a period T20 (for example, 0.8 seconds) with the closing of the winning opening (for example, 0.8 seconds) interposed. Also, the small hit 3 is a period T31 (for example, 0.5
The winning opening is opened three times in a period T30 (for example, 0.5 seconds), with the closing of the winning opening in second).

As shown in FIG. 158 (2), the gaming machine 10 sets two small hit symbols as an option for each of the three small hits. The small hit 1 is set with the small hit symbol 1 and the small hit symbol 2, the small hit 2 is set with the small hit symbol 1 and the small hit symbol 3, and the small hit 3 is the small hit symbol 1
And small hitting design 4 is set. Among these small hit symbols, the small hit symbol 1 is not a specific small hit symbol, and the small hit symbols 2, 3 and 4 are a specific small hit symbol.

The small hit symbol 1 that is not a specific small hit symbol has a meter level addition number “0”. The meter level addition number is one of the effect parameters, and indicates the meter level addition number when the corresponding small hit symbol is displayed. The small hit pattern 2 sets the meter level addition number to “1”, the small hit pattern 3 sets the meter level addition number to “2”, and the small hit pattern 4 sets the meter level addition number to “3”.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 may change the meter level addition number for each type of small hit. The meter level addition number may be a standard numerical value, and may be increased or decreased depending on the situation.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the meter level addition number different according to the small hit type (the opening mode of the special variation winning device (big winning opening) 38), and produces tonation in a game that may become monotonous. be able to. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel a sense of expectation of hitting from among the games that may be monotonous.

Furthermore, one modified example of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 159
These are figures which show an example of the small hitting design of the modification of 8th Embodiment, and the parameter for special small hitting presentation for every small hitting design. Although the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment represents one small hit with two small hitting symbols, the gaming machine 10 of the variation of the eighth embodiment has three small hits of one small hitting. Represented by a hit symbol.

The gaming machine 10 has three small hit symbols, as shown in FIG. 159 (1). For example,
Small hit symbol 1 is a symbol group "triangle, triangle, triangle", small hit symbol 2 is a symbol group "star, star, star", small hit symbol 3 is a symbol group "star group, star cluster , A group of stars.

As shown in FIG. 159 (2), the gaming machine 10 sets a meter level addition number to these three small hit symbols. Of the three small hit symbols, the small hit symbol 1 is not a specific small hit symbol, and the small hit symbols 2 and 3 are a specific small hit symbol.

The small hit symbol 1 that is not a specific small hit symbol has a meter level addition number “0”. The small hitting pattern 2 sets the meter level adding number to “1”, and the small hitting pattern 3 sets the meter level adding number to “MAX”. That is, when the small hit symbol 2 is displayed, the gaming machine 10 adds "1" to the meter level, and when the small hit symbol 3 is displayed, the meter level is added to the full.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 may set three or more small hit symbols in one small hit,
Two or more of them may be used as specific small hit symbols and the meter level addition numbers may be different. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set the meter level to full without losing time by setting the meter level addition number “MAX” to at least one of the specific small hit symbols.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can change the meter level addition number according to the small hit symbol, and can produce intonation in a game that may be monotonous. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel a sense of expectation of hitting from among the games that may be monotonous.

Although the gaming machine 10 performs special small hit effects via the meter display 680, it performs special small hit effects without passing through the meter display 680 when the small hit symbol is in a predetermined mode. May be For example, the gaming machine 10 does not go through the meter display 680, the special small hit effect display 681, 682, 683, 685, the meter full effect display 686,
687, 688, 689 may be displayed to perform special small hit effects such as acting directly on the hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606.

Although the gaming machine 10 displays the character as the meter full effect display 687 and performs an effect that acts on the variable display of the large symbol group 601 during standby display, other displays, or
It may act on other effects. For example, the gaming machine 10 may directly operate the character on the hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606, or various notices such as a step-up notice, a title notice of a super reach (special reach), a pseudo linked notice, etc. The notification mode may be ranked up (changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation).

Although the gaming machine 10 displays the meter display 680 on the display device 41, the present invention is not limited to this as long as a level change can be notified. For example, in the gaming machine 10, a frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 1) provided in the glass frame 15 and a push button LED provided in the push button 25 (see FIG.
62), the light emission mode of the light emitting unit such as the effect lamp 540 (see FIG. 76) provided on the game board 3000 may be changed to perform special small hit effects in place of the meter display 680. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 is a special small hit replacing the meter display 680 depending on the number of lighting of the light emitting portion having the star design on the side of the gaming machine 10 among the frame decoration device 18 and the lighting mode You may make it produce. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform special small hit effects in place of the meter display 680 depending on the number of lights of the push button LED provided in the push button 25 and the lighting mode such as the light emission color. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the display content of the effect lamp 540 (the change of the fixed image display or the animation display (FIG. 79 (3
Special small hit effects may be substituted for the meter display 680 depending on the display mode such as)) or luminescent color (color change from white to blue, blue to red etc. (see FIG. 79 (3))) .

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is a special small hitting effect replacing the meter display 680 depending on the sound output mode such as the volume (large and small), tone (high and low), voice (Lv1, Lv2,. It may be performed. In addition, the gaming machine 10, the board production device 550,
Meter display 6 depending on the operation mode (size of operation amount, operation position) such as 551 (see Figure 80).
A special small hit effect may be provided in place of 80.

The gaming machine 10 may have a setting change device capable of changing the hit probability.
For example, the setting change device can set one of one or two or more (for example, six or three steps) setting levels, and can make the big hit probability and the small hit probability different for each setting level. . The gaming machine 10 may display a specific small hit symbol at the time of a small hit, with a selection probability corresponding to the set level set. Specifically, the gaming machine 10 imparts a function as a setting suggestion effect to the display of a specific small hit symbol by making the appearance rate of the specific small hit symbol different between the setting level 1 and the setting level 2 Can. Thus, the gaming machine 10
It is possible to provide the player with a game in which the setting value is estimated, and to improve the interest in the game.

Although the gaming machine 10 performs special small hit effects when displaying a specific small hit symbol, even when displaying a non-specific small hit symbol or an off symbol, it is a special small hit with a predetermined probability. You may make it produce. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may execute meter full effect even when displaying an out pattern. For example, the gaming machine 10 executes the meter full effect according to the pre-reading result of the holding storage, but can not display a specific small hit symbol at the time of the off, so the out pattern is displayed to execute the meter full effect. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may display a specific out-of-order symbol (for example, a special symbol or the like that means meter full) different from the normal out-of-point symbol. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may execute meter-full effect without bringing the meter display 680 to full at the time of disconnection.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may execute the effect display performed when the non-specific small hit symbol is displayed, even when the undisplayed symbol is displayed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may not perform the effect display performed when the specific small hit symbol is displayed, when the off symbol is displayed.

Although the gaming machine 10 displays the notification lamp in the same manner as the notification lamp in the meter display 680 in FIG. 154 along with the notification lamp in the meter display 680 on the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606, the meter display 680 Instead of the notification lamp in the above, it may be displayed on the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. Specifically, the notice lamp in the meter display 680 may be separated and moved and displayed on the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606, or the notice lamp in the meter display 680 may be displayed on the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. The notification lamp in the meter display 680 may be hidden after the display mode of the hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606 is made to be the same as the notification lamp by operating the display unit 605 or the like.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 does not bring the meter display 680 to the meter full effect (a notification lamp effect) to display the notification lamp in the same manner as the notification lamp in the meter display 680 on the hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606. It may be performed. In that case, the gaming machine 10 may change the display mode of the notification lamp in accordance with the display mode of the meter display 680. For example, the gaming machine 10 can set the notification lamp to be red when the meter display 680 is full, and to be blue or green when the meter is not full. Further, the gaming machine 10 makes all of the hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606 the same mode as the notification lamp when the meter display 680 is meter full, and part of the hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606 when the meter display 680 is not meter full. Can be the same as the notification lamp. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the notification lamp of the hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606 in a large size when the meter display 680 is meter full, and the hold display 60 when the meter display 680 is not meter full.
The notification lamp of 5 and the pending consumption display 606 can be displayed small. Thus, even when the meter display 680 does not reach the meter full, the gaming machine 10 can execute the meter full effect according to the pre-reading result of the hold storage.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the meter level addition number is different because the pattern is different depending on the type of the small hit symbol (see FIG. 159), but instead of the small hit symbol type or in the small hit symbol type In addition, the meter level addition number may be made different by changing the color or the size. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can set the meter level addition number in more detail, and can perform the meter level addition effect more flexibly.

In addition, when the gaming machine 10 has a plurality of effect modes (stages), the small hit symbols (at least one of a specific small hit symbol and a non-specific small hit symbol) may be different for each effect mode. It may be good or common. In the case where the small hit symbols (at least specific small hit symbols) are shared in the plurality of effect modes, the gaming machine 10 may make the meter level addition number different depending on the effect mode. For example, in the first effect mode, the gaming machine 10 sets the small hit symbol 1 (non-specific small hit symbol) to the meter level addition number "0", and the small hit symbol 2 (specific small hit symbol) to the meter level addition. Number “1”, small hit symbol 2 (non-specific small hit symbol) in the second effect mode is meter level addition number “0”, small hit symbol 1 (specific small hit symbol) is meter level addition number It is assumed that "1". Alternatively, in the first effect mode, the gaming machine 10 sets the small hit symbol 1 (non-specific small hit symbol) to the meter level addition number “0”.
Small hit symbol 2 (specific small hit symbol) is the meter level addition number “1”, small hit symbol 3 (
A specific small hit symbol) is the meter level addition number “MAX”, and a small hit symbol 3 (non-specific small hit symbol) in the second rendering mode is the meter level addition number “0”, and the small hit symbol 2 (specific The small hit pattern of the meter) the meter level addition number "1", small hit pattern 1 (specific small hit pattern)
Is the meter level addition number “MAX”.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may prepare a small hit symbol as a special symbol. For example, the gaming machine 10 may guide the end of a predetermined gaming state (for example, small hit RUSH) by a special symbol. Specifically, at the end of the small hit RUSH, the gaming machine 10 displays the symbol group "triangle, triangle, triangle" as the small hit symbol 1 (as the small hit symbol 2 the symbol group "stars, stars, stars"
You may guide the end of the small hit RUSH by displaying the symbol group "end, end, end" and the symbol group "O, wa, ri". It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 may not only guide the end of the gaming state with a special symbol, but may also guide the start of a new gaming state, may guide the current gaming state, and other requirements. A game guide may be given through the information of. For example, when the gaming machine 10 switches from right to left, the symbol group "triangle, triangle, triangle" is displayed as the small hit symbol 1 (even if the symbol group "stars, stars, stars" is displayed as the small hit symbol 2 Good) and then guide the left strike by displaying the symbol group “left, hit, hit”.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may reset the meter level of the meter display 680 when returning from the gaming state transition (for example, from the high probability state (specific gaming state) to the low probability state (normal gaming state), The gaming machine 10 may update the meter level when a required event occurs in the normal gaming state to perform a specific gaming effect, for example, the gaming machine 10 may stop the symbol in the normal gaming state. It is possible to update the meter level at the timing, the appearance timing of the super reach (special reach), the out-of-stop timing, etc.

In the gaming machine 10, although the small hit symbol of 2 corresponds to the small hit type (open mode type) of 1 in FIG. 158 (2), the small hit symbol of 1 corresponds to the small hit type of 1 You may do so.

The gaming machine 10 may decrement or reset the meter level of the meter display 680 when the out-of-order symbol is displayed. In addition, when the game machine 10 displays the out symbol, it may increment the meter level of the meter display 680 as in the case of displaying the small hit symbol. For example, the gaming machine 10 can increment the meter level of the meter display 680 based on the display of the out-of-round symbol when the appearance rate of the out-of-edge symbol is smaller than the appearance ratio of the small hit symbol. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be one that adjusts the increment amount or the decrement amount according to the appearance rate of the off symbol.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may suppress the expectation for the meter level update of the meter display 680 when displaying the out-of-pattern as compared to the case of displaying the small hit symbol. For example, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the expectation for the meter level update of the meter display 680 based on the display of the out-of-round symbol when the appearance rate of the out-of-out symbol is larger than the appearance ratio of the small hit symbol. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may make the expectation for the meter level update of the meter display 680 different according to the stop mode (including the display mode and operation mode of the symbol) of the out-of-pattern. For example, the gaming machine 10 has a chance to set in advance such as the order of symbol groups "4, 5, 6" and the reach of symbol groups "3, 3, 7" etc., symbol group "4, The increment amount or the decrement amount may be added or subtracted depending on the variation, such as "8, 1". More specifically, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the expectation for updating the meter level of the meter display 680 with respect to the chance eye rather than the loose eye. Or, gaming machine 10
Suppresses the expectation for updating the meter level of the meter display 680 with respect to the scattered eyes rather than the chance eyes.

The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a hit aspect (for example, a big hit symbol) and a non hit aspect (for example, a big hit symbol) as a result of the game (special symbol 1 variable display game, special symbol 2 variable display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602). For example, the special game state (for example,
And a control unit (game control apparatus 100, effect control apparatus 300). The control unit includes a first mode (for example, a small hit symbol 2 (specific small hit symbol)) and a second mode (for example, a small hit symbol 1 (non-specific small hit symbol)) included in the non-hit mode. A special gaming state different from the special gaming state is to occur, and the special gaming state is not to occur in a third mode (for example, an out symbol) included in the non-hit mode, the first of the first mode and the second mode When the mode is the first effect (for example, special small hit effect) is executed, and when the first effect derives the predetermined execution result, the second effect (for example, the meter full effect) related to the hit mode is executed Do.

(2) The control unit of (1) stores the starting memory as the right to execute the game, and derives the execution result of the first effect in relation to the result of the game corresponding to the starting memory (prefetching result of the pending storage) Do.

(3) The gaming machine 10 has a hit aspect (for example, a big hit symbol) and a non hit feature (for example, a big hit symbol) as a result of the game (special symbol 1 variable display game, special symbol 2 variable display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602). For example, a special game state (for example, in relation to displaying the identification information on the display unit (for example, the display area of large symbol group 601 or small symbol group 602 in display device 41) in the hit mode among the big hit symbols. And a control unit (game control device 100,
The effect control device 300) is included. The control unit includes a first mode (for example, a small hit symbol 2 (specific small hit symbol)) and a second mode (for example, a small hit symbol 1 (non-specific small hit symbol)) included in the non-hit mode. The third mode (for example, a missing symbol) with a gaming state advantageous to the player.
The first effect (for example, special small hit effect) is executed when the game state advantageous to the player is made non-occurring in the first mode and the first mode out of the first mode and the second mode is displayed on the display unit. When the effect derives a predetermined execution result, the second effect (for example, meter full effect) related to the display of the hit mode is executed.

The ninth embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160 is a view showing an example of a front view of the game board of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating an example of a movable frame, a first notification device, and a second notification device in the ninth embodiment.

In the game board 700, a center case 40 is disposed substantially at the center. Center case 4
In the inside of 0, the display device 41, the board effect device 44, the movable frame 701, and the first notification device 70.
A second notification device 703, a third notification device 704, and a fourth notification device 705 are disposed.

The board effect device 44 produces a game by operating. In the game board 700, the board effect device 44 is in the shape of a character like a tiger. In game board 700, board effect device 44 is operable, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 160 toward the center of display device 41.

The movable frame 701 is a frame whose central portion is open. The movable frame 701 is movable (movable) at a position. The movable frame 701 is provided on the front side of the display device 41, and the display surface of the display device 41 is an area outside the movable frame 701 (first area) and an area inside the movable frame 701 (second area)
And divided into The movable frame 701 is, as shown in FIG.
The central portion is a rectangular frame which is opened in a substantially rectangular shape.

The movable frame 701 is, for example, from the state (first position) positioned at the lower end of the screen shown in FIG. 160 to the center of the display device 41 (second position closer to the center than the first position (first It is movable (upward movable) toward a second position (a second position where the amount of advance into the display area is larger than the position). The movable aspect of the movable frame 701 is not limited to the movement toward the center.
For example, the movable frame 701 may be movable downward or may be movable leftward or rightward.

The first notification device 702 notifies predetermined information by lighting up. First notification device 70
2 is attached to the front side of the movable frame 702. That is, the first notification device 702
It is a notification device of a movable type which is moved along with the movement of the movable frame 702.

In the game board 700, the first notification device 702 is, as shown in FIG. 161 (1), a display portion (indicating light) 702a, a display portion 702b, a display portion 702c, a display portion 702d, and a display portion 702e. The predetermined information is notified by controlling the lighting mode (lighting on / off) of each of the display units (displaying units 702a to 702e). More specifically, the first notification device 7
02 indicates the reliability (expected degree) of the effect by the lighting mode of each display unit during the effect of the game. The relationship between the lighting mode and the reliability will be described later with reference to FIG.

The display units (display units 702a to 702e) of the first notification device 702 each have a mode (a mode in which a face is displayed) corresponding to different characters (five types of characters A to E) appearing in effects in the game. There is. The display unit 702a has a mode corresponding to the character A, the display unit 702b has a mode corresponding to the character B, and the display unit 702c has a mode corresponding to the character C. 702 d has a mode corresponding to the character D, and the display unit 702 e has a mode corresponding to the character E.

The second notification device 703 notifies predetermined information by lighting up. Second notification device 70
3 is fixedly disposed at a position above the display device 41. That is, the second notification device 7
Reference numeral 03 denotes a fixed notification device disposed in a fixed manner.

In the game board 700, the second notification device 703 is, as shown in FIG. 161 (2), a display unit 703a, a display unit 703b, a display unit 703c, a display unit 703d, and a display unit 703e.
These five display units are provided, and the predetermined information is notified by controlling the lighting mode (lighting / extinguishing) of each display unit (display units 703a to 703e). More specifically, the second notification device 703 notifies the reliability (expected degree) of the effect by the lighting mode of each display unit during the effect of the game.

The display units (display units 703 a to 703 e) of the second notification device 703 each have an aspect corresponding to each display unit of the first notification device 702. That is, the display units (display units 703a to 703e) of the second notification device 703 each have an aspect (a mode in which a face is displayed) corresponding to different characters (five types of characters A to E) that appear in effects in the game. doing.

The display unit 703a is in a mode corresponding to the character A as in the display unit 702a.
The display unit 703b has an aspect corresponding to the character B in the same manner as the display unit 702b, the display unit 703c has an aspect corresponding to the character C in the same manner as the display unit 702c, and the display section 703d has a display A mode corresponding to the character D is performed in the same manner as the unit 702d, and a mode corresponding to the character E is performed in the same manner as the display unit 702e.

The second notification device 703 is provided to be able to execute control in synchronization (cooperation) with the first notification device 702. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the lighting mode of the display unit 702a and the display unit 703a, the lighting mode of the display unit 702b and the display unit 703b, the lighting mode of the display unit 702c and the display unit 703c, and the lighting mode of the display unit 702d and the display unit 703d. The second notification device 703 and the first notification device 702 can be controlled such that the lighting modes of the display unit 702e and the display unit 703e are the same.
Thus, the gaming machine 10 synchronizes (cooperations) the second notification device 703 and the first notification device 702.
The notification effect can be enhanced by executing the above control.

The third notification device 704 notifies predetermined information by lighting up. Third notification device 70
4 is disposed in a fixed position on the right side of the display device 41. That is, the third notification device 7
Reference numeral 04 denotes a fixed notification device disposed in a fixed manner. The third notification device 704 is shaped like a meter (instrument). For example, the third notification device 704 notifies predetermined information by controlling a lighting mode as a game effect and changing a value indicated by a meter.

The fourth notification device 705 notifies predetermined information by lighting up. Fourth notification device 70
The reference numeral 5 is fixedly disposed at the left position of the display device 41. That is, the fourth notification device 7
Reference numeral 05 denotes a fixed notification device disposed in a fixed manner. The fourth notification device 705 is shaped like a bomb. The fourth notification device 705 reports predetermined information by, for example, controlling a lighting mode as an effect of a game and setting a mode in which a squib of a bomb has a fire or a mode in which a bomb is detonating.

The above is an example of the game board 700 of the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment. Next, the relationship between the lighting mode and the reliability of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 will be described using FIG. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the lighting mode and the reliability in the ninth embodiment.

The lighting modes of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 have six patterns P1 to P6. The pattern P1 is an aspect in which one of the five display units is not lighted. The pattern P2 is an aspect in which one of the five display units is on.
The pattern P3 is an aspect in which two of the five display units are lit. The pattern P4 is an aspect in which three of the five display units are on. Pattern P5 is
Of the five display units, four display units are on. The pattern P5 is an aspect in which five of the five display units are on.

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest reliability to the pattern P1, sets the highest reliability (for example, a big hit confirmed) to the pattern P6, and sets the reliability so as to increase stepwise from the pattern P1 to the pattern P6. . In addition, the gaming machine 10 may set, for example, specific reliabilities from 0% to 100% in the patterns P1 to P6, for example,
Rough reliability levels may be set as “low”, “medium”, and “high”.

In addition, although it demonstrated as setting a reliability according to the lighting number, it does not restrict to this. For example,
The gaming machine 10 can set the reliability of the lighting mode to be high when the display unit of the specific combination is on.

Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the ninth embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the ninth embodiment.

The display screen 706 includes a first area 707 which is an area outside the movable frame 701 and a movable frame 701.
And a second area 708 which is an internal area of The first area 707 is an area (main display area) mainly in charge of displaying the progress of the game. The first area 707 has two sets of decorative symbols (large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), the special figure 1 pending number indication 603, and the special figure 2 pending number indication 60
4 and the hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606 are included in the display content.

The two decorative patterns have a large symbol group 601 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 602 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 601 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is displayed large at the approximate center of the display device 41. Large symbol group 601
Includes the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R. The left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

Generally, the large symbol group 601 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C. Therefore, in the large symbol group 601, in many cases, the left symbol 601L and the right symbol 601R form a reach aspect, and it is possible to wait for the stop of the middle symbol 601C to form a hitting aspect.

The small symbol group 602 is in charge of reporting of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 602 is smallly displayed on the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. Small symbol group 602,
Includes left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 of the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

The special figure 1 reservation number display 603 displays the number of pending storages (starting number of memories) of the special figure 1 game. A special figure 2 pending number display 604 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 605 can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view fluctuation display game and notify of the reliability (expected degree) for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 605 corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 603 and the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 604. The holding and digest display 606 can indicate the changing state of the special view fluctuation display game and notify of the reliability of the game result by the display mode.

The number of pending storages for the special view 1 game indicated by the special view 1 pending count display 603 is “3”, and the number of pending storages for the special view 2 game shown by the special view 2 pending number display 604 is “0”. Pending display 605
The number of pending storages indicated by is “3”. In addition, the reserve consumption indication 606 indicates that the special figure variation display game is in symbol variation.

The second area 708 is an area (sub-display area) mainly in charge of an auxiliary display, and at the time of a specific effect in a game (for example, an effect accompanied by movement of the movable frame 701 or lighting of the first notification device 702) Used for In FIG. 163, the second area 708 is the first notification device 7.
A character corresponding to each display unit 02 is included in the display content, and each character is displayed in a mode corresponding to the lighting mode of each display unit. Note that, in FIG. 163, all the display portions of the first notification device 702 are all turned off, and in the second area 708, the mode of each character is displayed in a mode indicating that it is turned off. Thus, the second area 708 functions as an auxiliary display that assists in more reliably grasping the lighting mode of the first notification device 702.

Next, an example of an effect in which the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 report the reliability with which the special view variable display game derives a hit will be described using FIGS.
FIG. 164 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display mode of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a second diagram showing an example of a display mode of the gaming machine in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of the display mode of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment (part 4)
It is.

A display mode 709 shown in FIG. 164 (1) is a display mode after the display mode in which the display screen 706 is displayed, and shows a state in which a reach has occurred. In the display screen 710 in the display mode 709, the left symbol 601L and the right symbol 601R are temporarily stopped at "7", and the middle symbol 601C is in motion. That is, the display screen 710 shows that the symbol for deriving a hit is a reach state in which "7" is shown.

A display mode 711 shown in FIG. 164 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 709, and shows a state after the reach effect is started along with the occurrence of the reach. The display screen 712 in the display mode 711 includes the reach effect display 713 in the display content. The reach effect display 713 displays the reach effect executed in the special view variable display game. In display screen 712, reach effect display 713 is character C (a character corresponding to display portion 702c).
The player is informed that the confrontation with the character F holding the weapon with the sunglasses is performed in the reach effect.

A display mode 714 shown in FIG. 165 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 711 and shows a state during reach effect. In the display screen 715 in the display mode 714, the reach effect display 713 displays a message from the character C saying "Everybody cooperate!" To the player that it is in a state where it is about to start the effect of calling reinforcements. It is reported against. In order to secure visibility of the message, the reach effect display 713 changes the aspect of the character from the aspect of the character on the display screen 712 so that the message and the character do not overlap.

In addition, in the display screen 715, the second area 708 “changes the degree of reliability depending on the number of reinforcements!
! The message “” is displayed, and the player is notified of the relationship between the effect that calls reinforcements performed in reach effect and the reliability. As a result, the gaming machine 10 aims to improve the level of understanding of the player's effect, so that even a player who is unfamiliar with the game can grasp the reliability of the effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can more effectively improve interest by the effect by enhancing the player's understanding of the effect.

A display mode 716 shown in FIG. 165 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 714, and an effect that calls reinforcements in reach effect (effect of notifying the reliability of reach effect (effect of determining the reliability to notify) Indicates the status of)). In the display mode 716, the movable frame 701 is moved from the first position toward the center to move to the second position. As a result, in the display screen 717 in the display mode 716, the second area 708 is wider than the display screen 715. The second area 708 rapidly changes the image of the character appearing as a reinforcement,
An effect of determining (determining) a character appearing as a reinforcement is performed. in this way,
The game machine 10 distinguishes it from a normal game (pattern change) by performing an effect (character image high-speed change) that determines the character in the second area 708 instead of the first area 707, and a special effect is performed. It is possible for the player to easily grasp that. This makes it possible to improve the interest more effectively by the effect.

A display mode 718 shown in FIG. 166 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 716, and shows a state in which the effect of calling reinforcement in reach effect is ended. In the display screen 719 in the display mode 718, the second area 708 displays "reinforcement failure", and indicates that no character appears as reinforcement. When it is determined that the one-on-one confrontation between the character C and the character F starts due to the reinforcement failure, the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 702
Notification device 703 corresponds to a display unit corresponding to character C (display unit 702 c and display unit 703
c) It lights in the lighting mode which made only the lighting state. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 reports that only the character C participates in the confrontation with the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703, that is, the reliability of the reach effect (a special figure fluctuation display game derives a hit) Reliability)).

As described above, the game machine 10 is synchronized with the first notification device 702 which moves with the movable frame 701, and the notification of the reliability is performed even in the fixed second notification device 703, whereby the player is more reliably trusted. It is possible to grasp the degree. According to this, for example, the player looks at the second notification device 703 at the fixed position even when the movable frame 701 moves frequently due to a flashy effect (complicated effect, diversified effect). Thus, the notification content (reliability) can be easily grasped. Furthermore, since the gaming machine 10 changes the lighting mode at the second position after movement from the first position toward the center, the lighting mode is different than when the lighting mode is changed at the first position (the lower end position). It is possible for the player to be able to more surely grasp that the has changed.

A display mode 720 shown in FIG. 166 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 718, and is a state before the confrontation between the character C and the character F is started after the effect calling the reinforcement is ended. Show.

In the display mode 720, the movable frame 701 ends the effect of calling a reinforcement, and the first area 70
As the presentation of the confrontation is started at 7, the second position from the center is moved to the first position. As a result, on the display screen 721 in the display mode 720, the second region 708 is narrower than the display screen 719. The second area 708 displays a mode (reliability) corresponding to the lighting mode of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703.
Specifically, the second area 708 displays the character C in a mode distinguishable from the characters A, B, D, and E so that the characters participating in the confrontation among the characters corresponding to the respective display units can be grasped (see FIG. For example, only the character C is displayed.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 more reliably trusts the player by notifying the reliability (informing the characters participating in the confrontation) with the first notification device 702, the second notification device 703, and the second area 708. It is possible to grasp the degree.

Further, the gaming machine 10 is synchronized with the first notification device 702 that moves with the movable frame 701,
By performing notification of the reliability also in the fixed second notification device 703, the player can grasp the reliability more reliably. According to this, for example, the player looks at the second notification device 703 at the fixed position even when the movable frame 701 moves frequently due to a flashy effect (complicated effect, diversified effect). Thus, the notification content (reliability) can be easily grasped. Furthermore, since the gaming machine 10 changes the lighting mode at the second position after movement from the first position toward the center, the lighting mode is different than when the lighting mode is changed at the first position (the lower end position). It is possible for the player to be able to more surely grasp that the has changed.

A display mode 722 shown in FIG. 167 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 716, and shows a state in which the effect of calling reinforcement in reach effect is ended. In the display screen 716 in the display mode 722, the second area 708 displays the characters A, B, D, and E, and indicates that four characters appear as reinforcements.

Then, the characters A, B, D, and E appear as reinforcements, and it is determined that all the characters of the characters A to E and the character F confront in a five-to-one relationship.
7 displays the message "All members will participate!", And in addition to the character C, the character A,
It reports that B, D, and E appear as reinforcements. In addition, the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 have display units (display units 702a to 702e corresponding to the characters A to E.
And the display portions 703a to 703e) in the lighting state. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 notifies that the characters A to E participate in the confrontation in the first notification device 702, the second notification device 703, and the first region 707, that is, notifies the reliability of the reach effect. There is.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 more reliably trusts the player by notifying the reliability (informing the characters participating in the confrontation) with the first notification device 702, the second notification device 703, and the first area 707. It is possible to grasp the degree.

A display mode 724 shown in FIG. 167 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 722, and after ending the effect calling reinforcement, and before the confrontation between the characters A to E and the character F is started. Indicates the status.

In the display mode 724, the movable frame 701 ends the effect of calling a reinforcement, and the first area 70
As the presentation of the confrontation is started at 7, the second position from the center is moved to the first position. As a result, on the display screen 725 in the display mode 724, the second region 708 is narrower than the display screen 726. The second area 708 displays a mode (reliability) corresponding to the lighting mode of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703.
Specifically, the second area 708 displays the characters A to E in a lighted state so that the characters participating in the confrontation among the characters corresponding to the respective display units can be grasped. Also,
In the first display area 707, the reach effect display 713 displays a message "All members participating" as information on the number of people participating in the confrontation.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 has the first notification device 702, the second notification device 703, and the first area 70.
In the seventh and second areas 708, notification that the characters A to E participate in the confrontation is notified, that is, the reliability of the reach effect is notified.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 includes the first notification device 702, the second notification device 703, and the first area 70.
By reporting the reliability in the 7 and the second area 708 (informing the characters participating in the confrontation), the player can more reliably grasp the reliability.

Next, the lighting timing of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 and the execution timing of movement of the movable frame 701 in the effect of notifying the reliability that the special view variation display game derives a hit will be described using FIG. 168. Do. FIG. 168 shows the first embodiment according to the ninth embodiment.
It is a timing chart (the 1) which shows an example of lighting of a alerting device and the 2nd alerting device, and movement execution timing of a movable frame. In addition, when reinforcement does not come here (display mode 718
, 720) as an example.

The gaming machine 10 executes a pre-reach fluctuation effect in which the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped from the state in which three symbols are varied (display mode displaying the display screen 706) in the N-th special figure variation display game Reach occurs at timing t1 due to pre-reach fluctuation effects (display mode 70
9) Then start the reach production.

In the reach effect, the gaming machine 10 performs a confrontation opponent display effect (display mode 711) for displaying the confrontation opponent from the timing t1 to the timing t2, and starts a reinforcement effect calling reinforcement at the timing t2.

In the reinforcement effect, the gaming machine 10 notifies the player that the reinforcement effect calling for reinforcement is performed from the timing t2 to the timing t3 (display mode 714), and the first position of the movable frame 701 at the timing t3. The movement from the second position to the second position is started, and an effect (display mode 716) for determining the character appearing as a reinforcement is started from the timing t4 of moving to the second position.

Thereafter, the game machine 10 performs an effect of fixing the character for a predetermined time, and then, when the character appearing as a reinforcement is fixed at the timing t5, the lighting mode according to the reinforcement (here, one of the five display portions The first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 are turned on (display mode 718). The gaming machine 10 starts moving the movable frame 701 from the second position to the first position at timing t6 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the character appearing as a reinforcement has been determined, and moves to the first position at timing t7. When the process is completed (display mode 720), the confrontation effect according to the battle character is started. The gaming machine 10 performs confrontation presentation from timing t7 to timing t8, and when the confrontation result is determined, reach presentation is ended, and the result mode of the special view fluctuation display game (if hit by confrontation, hit, if defeated by confrontation) To execute the variation result display effect to display the N-th special pattern variation display game.

The above is the first informing device 702 and the second informing device 702 of the reliability with which the special figure variation display game derives a hit.
It is an example of the effect notified using the notification device 703.
Next, as another example of the effect in which the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 notify the reliability with which the special figure fluctuation display game derives a hit, a pseudo-series effect (one special figure fluctuation display About notification of reliability using the 1st informing device 702 and the 2nd informing device 703 in the special figure change display game with the effect which makes it appear that the special figure change display game is performed several times in the game) Description will be made using 169-175.

FIG. 169 is a fifth diagram showing an example of a display mode of the gaming machine in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 170 is a diagram (part 6) illustrating an example of a display mode of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the gaming machine in the ninth embodiment (part 7)
It is. FIG. 172 shows an example of the display mode of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment (part 8
). FIG. 173 is a figure (No. 9) showing an example of the display mode of the gaming machine in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 174 is a figure (10) showing an example of a display mode of the gaming machine in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 175 is a diagram (No. 11) showing an example of the display mode of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment.

A display mode 726 shown in FIG. 169 (1) is a display mode after the display mode displaying the display screen 706, and the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped in the first change (the first pseudo link) in the special view change display game. Show the condition. In the display screen 727 in the display mode 726, the left symbol 60
1L is temporarily stopped at "5", the right symbol 601R is temporarily stopped at "6", and the middle symbol 601C is fluctuating.

A display mode 728 shown in FIG. 169 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 726, and shows a state in which it is notified that the variation of three symbols is performed again.
The display screen 729 in the display mode 728 includes a simulated connection effect display 730 displayed in association with the progression of the simulated connection effect performed in the special view variable display game. In the display screen 729, the pseudo series effect display 730 displays the message "NEXT", and the left symbol 601L and the right symbol 601R, which have been temporarily stopped, re-fluctuate from the temporarily stopped state, and become three symbol fluctuation states. The player is notified that the transition is to be made again (the second change (the second pseudo run) is performed).

A display mode 731 shown in FIG. 170 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 728, and the special figure fluctuation display game derives a hit before the second fluctuation is started in the special figure fluctuation display game. Shows a state in which an effect of notifying the user of the degree of reliability is started.

In the display mode 731, the movable frame 701 is moved from the first position toward the center to move to the second position. As a result, in the display screen 732 in the display mode 716, the second area 708 is wider than the display screen 729. The second area 708 causes the character appearing in the effect (variation result display effect) for deriving the result mode in the special figure fluctuation display game performed at the time of the pseudo-sequence to fluctuate the image of the character at high speed. The effect to notify in advance (appearing character notification effect) is performed as the effect to notify the reliability.

It should be noted that, in the appearance character notification effect (effect to notify the reliability that the special view fluctuation display game derives a hit) performed before the second start of the fluctuation (at the end of the first fluctuation), the gaming machine 10 notifies The notification content is determined such that the degree of reliability to be obtained is less than or equal to the degree of reliability to be finally notified. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can gradually increase the reliability to be notified as the game progresses, maintain interest in the game through the game, and improve the interest of the player through the game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 distinguishes it from the normal game (symbol variation) by displaying the notification content in the appearance character notification effect in the second region 708 instead of the first region 707, and a special effect is performed. Is made easy for the player to grasp. This makes it possible to improve the interest more effectively by the effect.

A display mode 733 shown in FIG. 170 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 731 and shows a state in which the appearance character notification effect is ended. In the display screen 734 in the display mode 733, the second area 708 displays the character E, and the character E is displayed as the variation result display effect.
Is notified to the player that

Then, the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 can recognize that the character E appears in the change result display effect as the notification that the character E appears in the change result display effect is started. , A display unit corresponding to the character E (display unit 702e
And the display portion 703e) is lit in a lighting state.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 is a character that appears in the variation result display effect by the first notification device 702 that moves with the movable frame 701 and the fixed second notification device 703, that is, the reliability of the variation result display effect The player can more reliably grasp the reliability by notifying the variable display game of the reliability of deriving a hit). According to this, for example, the player looks at the second notification device 703 at the fixed position even when the movable frame 701 moves frequently due to a flashy effect (complicated effect, diversified effect). Thus, the notification content (reliability) can be easily grasped. Furthermore, since the gaming machine 10 changes the lighting mode at the second position after movement from the first position toward the center, the lighting mode is different than when the lighting mode is changed at the first position (the lower end position). It is possible for the player to be able to more surely grasp that the has changed.

A display mode 735 shown in FIG. 171 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 733, and shows a state after the second change is started in the special view change display game.
In the display mode 735, the movable frame 701 ends the informing character notification effect before starting the second variation (at the end of the first variation) and starts the second variation in the first area 707 at the center. Moving from the second position to the first position.

As a result, on the display screen 736 in the display mode 735, the second region 708 is narrower than the display screen 734. The second area 708 displays a mode (reliability) corresponding to the lighting mode of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703. Specifically, the second area 708 displays the character E in a lighted state so that the character appearing in the variation result display effect can be grasped among the characters corresponding to each display unit. In the first display area 707, the pseudo connected effect display 730 displays “× 2” indicating that it is the second change.

Thus, in addition to the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703, the characters appearing in the variation result display effect also in the second region 708, that is, the reliability of the variation result display effect (a special figure variation display game hits By notifying the derived reliability), the player can grasp the reliability more reliably.

A display mode 737 shown in FIG. 171 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 735 and shows a state in which the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped in the second change in the special view change display game. In the display screen 738 in the display mode 737, the left symbol 601L is temporarily stopped at "5", the right symbol 601R is temporarily stopped at "6", and the middle symbol 601C is changed.

A display mode 739 shown in FIG. 172 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 737, and shows a state in which it is notified that the variation of three symbols is performed again.
In the display screen 740 in the display mode 739, the pseudo connected effect display 730 is “× 2
And the left symbol 60 that had been temporarily stopped by displaying the message "NEXT"
The player is notified that 1L and the right symbol 601R re-fluctuate from the temporary stop state, and shift to the three-symbol fluctuating state again (perform the third fluctuating (simulative third)).

A display mode 741 shown in FIG. 172 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 739, and shows a state in which an appearance character notification effect is started before the third change is started in the special view change display game. .

In the display mode 741, the movable frame 701 is moved from the first position toward the center to move to the second position. Thus, in the display screen 742 in the display mode 741, the second area 708 is wider than the display screen 740. Then, in the second area 708, the image of the character is changed at high speed to perform notification of appearing character.

It should be noted that, in the appearance character notification effect (effect to notify the reliability that the special figure fluctuation display game derives a hit) performed before the third fluctuation start (at the time of the second fluctuation end), the gaming machine 10 The notification content is determined such that the reliability to be notified is less than or equal to the reliability to be finally notified. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can gradually increase the reliability to be notified as the game progresses, maintain interest in the game through the game, and improve the interest of the player through the game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 distinguishes it from the normal game (symbol variation) by displaying the notification content in the appearance character notification effect in the second region 708 instead of the first region 707, and a special effect is performed. Is made easy for the player to grasp. This makes it possible to improve the interest more effectively by the effect.

A display mode 743 shown in FIG. 173 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 741, and shows a state in which the appearance character notification effect has ended. In the display screen 744 in the display mode 743, the second area 708 displays the characters A and B, and informs the player that the characters A and B appear in the variation result display effect.

Then, with the notification that the characters A and B appear in the change result display effect has been started, the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 are configured to change the character A to the change result display effect.
Display unit 702 corresponding to the character E so that it can be understood that
e and a display unit 702a corresponding to the characters A and B in addition to the display unit 703e).
The display unit 702b, the display unit 703a, and the display unit 703b) are lighted in a lighting mode in which the display unit 702b is newly turned on.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 is a character that appears in the variation result display effect by the first notification device 702 that moves with the movable frame 701 and the fixed second notification device 703, that is, the reliability of the variation result display effect The player can more reliably grasp the reliability by notifying the variable display game of the reliability of deriving a hit). According to this, for example, the player looks at the second notification device 703 at the fixed position even when the movable frame 701 moves frequently due to a flashy effect (complicated effect, diversified effect). Thus, the notification content (reliability) can be easily grasped. Furthermore, since the gaming machine 10 changes the lighting mode at the second position after movement from the first position toward the center, the lighting mode is different than when the lighting mode is changed at the first position (the lower end position). It is possible for the player to be able to more surely grasp that the has changed.

A display mode 745 shown in FIG. 173 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 743, and shows a state after the third change is started in the special view change display game.
In the display mode 745, the movable frame 701 ends the informing character announcement effect before the third start of the change (at the end of the second change) and starts the third change in the first area 707. Moving from the second position to the first position.

As a result, in the display screen 746 in the display mode 745, the second region 708 is narrower than the display screen 744. The second area 708 displays a mode (reliability) corresponding to the lighting mode of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703. Specifically, the second area 708 displays the characters A, B, and E in a lighted state so that the characters appearing in the variation result display effect can be grasped among the characters corresponding to the respective display portions. In the first display area 707, the pseudo connected effect display 730 displays “× 3” indicating that it is the third change.

Thus, in addition to the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703, the characters appearing in the variation result display effect also in the second region 708, that is, the reliability of the variation result display effect (a special figure variation display game hits By notifying the derived reliability), the player can grasp the reliability more reliably.

A display mode 747 shown in FIG. 174 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 745, and shows a state in which the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped in the third change in the special view change display game. In the display screen 748 in the display mode 747, the left symbol 601L is temporarily stopped at “5”, the right symbol 601R is temporarily stopped at “5”, and the middle symbol 601C is changed.

A display mode 749 shown in FIG. 174 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 747, and shows a state in which the appearing character notification effect (last appearing character notification effect) is started at the time of the third change.

In the display mode 749, the movable frame 701 is moved from the first position toward the center to move to the second position. As a result, on the display screen 750 in the display mode 749, the second area 708 is wider than the display screen 748. Then, in the second area 708, the image of the character is changed at high speed to perform notification of appearing character.

In addition, in the appearance character notification production performed at the time of the third fluctuation, the gaming machine 10
The content of the notification is determined so as to finally become the reliability to be notified. Thus, the gaming machine 10
Can gradually increase the reliability of notification according to the progress, maintain interest in the game throughout the game, and improve the interest of the player through the game.

In the display screen 750 in the display mode 749, in addition to “× 3”, the pseudo-series effect display 730 displays characters A, B, and E that have been notified to appear in the fluctuation result display effect, and the fluctuation result display effect Is notified to the player that the characters A, B and E appear.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 distinguishes it from the normal game (symbol variation) by displaying the notification content in the appearance character notification effect in the second region 708 instead of the first region 707, and a special effect is performed. Is made easy for the player to grasp. This makes it possible to improve the interest more effectively by the effect.

A display mode 751 shown in FIG. 175 is a display mode after the display mode 749, and shows a state (the state before the start of the variation result display effect) in which the last appearance character notification effect is finished. In the display screen 752 in the display mode 751, the second area 708 displays the characters C and D, and informs the player that the characters C and D appear in the variation result display effect.

Then, with the notification that the characters C and D appear in the variation result display effect has been started, the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 change the character C to the variation result display effect.
And D appear in the display units (display unit 702a, display unit 702b, display unit 702e, display unit 703a, display unit 703b, and display unit 703e) corresponding to the characters A, B, and E. In addition, the display unit (the display unit 702c, the display unit 702d, the display unit 703c, and the display unit 703d) corresponding to the characters C and D is lighted in a lighting mode in which the lighting unit is newly turned on.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 is a character that appears in the variation result display effect by the first notification device 702 that moves with the movable frame 701 and the fixed second notification device 703, that is, the reliability of the variation result display effect The player can more reliably grasp the reliability by notifying the variable display game of the reliability of deriving a hit). According to this, for example, the player looks at the second notification device 703 at the fixed position even when the movable frame 701 moves frequently due to a flashy effect (complicated effect, diversified effect). Thus, the notification content (reliability) can be easily grasped. Furthermore, since the gaming machine 10 changes the lighting mode at the second position after movement from the first position toward the center, the lighting mode is different than when the lighting mode is changed at the first position (the lower end position). It is possible for the player to be able to more surely grasp that the has changed.

Next, the lighting timing of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 and the execution timing of the movement of the movable frame 701 in the special view variation display game with the pseudo-series effect will be described with reference to FIG.
It demonstrates using 76. FIG. 176 is a timing chart showing an example of execution timings of lighting of the first notification device and the second notification device in the ninth embodiment and movement of the movable frame (part 2
).

The gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special-pattern variation display game, and performs the first pseudo-link. After temporarily stopping the left and right symbols (display mode 726) from the state in which three symbols are changed (display mode displaying the display screen 706) (display mode 726), the gaming machine 10 changes the second time at timing t11. When it is notified that (the pseudo ream second time) is performed (display mode 728), the movable frame 70
The movement from the first position 1 to the second position is started, and the appearance character notification effect is started from the timing t12 when the movement to the second position is made (display mode 731).

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 executes the notification content at the appearance character notification effect at timing t13.
The first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 are turned on in a lighting mode (here, a mode in which only one of five display units is lighted) according to the notification content (display mode 733).
). Then, the gaming machine 10 starts moving the movable frame 701 from the second position to the first position.

After moving to the first position at the timing t14, the gaming machine 10 starts the second simulated run. The gaming machine 10 is in a state in which three symbols are varied in the second simulated run (display mode 735).
After temporarily stopping the left and right symbols (display mode 737), change the third time at timing t15 (
When it is notified that the pseudo ream 3) is performed (display mode 739), movement of the movable frame 701 from the first position to the second position is started, and the appearance character notification effect is started from the timing t16 when the movable frame 701 is moved to the second position. Yes (display mode 741).

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 executes the notification content in the appearing character notification effect at timing t17.
The first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 are selected in the lighting mode according to the notification content (here, a mode in which two lights are newly turned on from the state in which one of the five display units is lighted).
Lights up (display mode 743). Then, the gaming machine 10 starts moving the movable frame 701 from the second position to the first position.

After moving to the first position at timing t18, the gaming machine 10 starts the third simulated ream. The gaming machine 10 is in a state where three symbols are varied in the third simulated run (display mode 745).
After temporarily stopping the left and right symbols (display mode 747), the movement of the movable frame 701 from the first position to the second position is started at timing t19, and appearance character notification effect is generated from timing t20 when moved to the second position. Start (Display Mode 749).

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 executes the notification content at the appearance character notification effect at timing t21.
The first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 are selected in lighting modes according to the content of the notification (in this case, two of the five display units are newly turned on).
Lights up (display mode 751). Then, the gaming machine 10 starts moving the movable frame 701 from the second position to the first position. When the game machine 10 finishes moving to the first position at the timing t22, it starts the variation result display effect according to the reliability (the appearing character).

The above is the first informing device 702 and the second informing device 702 of the reliability with which the special figure variation display game derives a hit.
It is another example of the effect notified using the notification device 703. In the above example, by increasing the number of lightings of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 in stages at the end of each pseudo link, the gaming machine 10 has a reliability to be finally notified. Although it has been described that the reliability is notified step by step, it is not limited thereto.

For example, the gaming machine 10 may notify the number of times of pseudo run by increasing the number of lights of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 in stages at the end of each pseudo run. Even in this case, when the reliability is set to be higher as the number of times of pseudo run increases in the effect of the gaming machine 10, the notification of the number of times of pseudo run gives substantially notification of the reliability. can do.

Next, a re-lottery effect using the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 as an example of using the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 for notification of the reliability other than the reliability for deriving the hit. Reliability (the degree of reliability that changes to a player's winning hit by the re-lottery effect)
The notification of will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the re-lottery effect is performed after notifying that it is a hit by displaying symbols in combinations of hits. Further, the re-lottery effect is an effect that can change the notification content (informing mode) of the hit value, and there is, for example, a promotion effect.

FIG. 177 is a figure (12) showing an example of a display mode of the gaming machine in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the gaming machine in the ninth embodiment (part 13
). FIG. 179 is a diagram (No. 14) showing an example of a display mode of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 180 is a view showing an example of the display mode of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment ((1)
The 15). FIG. 181 is a view (part 16) showing an example of a display mode of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment.

A display mode 753 shown in FIG. 177 (1) is a display mode after the display mode in which the display screen 706 is displayed, and shows a state in which a hit occurs in the special view variation display game. In the display screen 754 in the display mode 753, the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R are "4".
Stop temporarily, and notify that it has derived a hit. In the following, it is assumed that a hit having a hit symbol of “4” is a hit with a relatively low value (for example, 2R normal hit) for the player.

Moreover, in the display mode 753, the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703
The three display units corresponding to the characters A, B, and E are on, and the second area 708 of the display screen 754 displays the characters corresponding to the respective display units of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703. Each character is included in the content and is displayed in a mode corresponding to the lighting mode of each display unit.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is the first in the special effects variation display game effect until the hit is derived
The notification device 702, the second notification device 703, and the second area 708 may be rendered to have the above-described lighting mode, or the first notification device 702, the second notification device 703, and the second notification may be generated at the time of hit derivation (occurrence). The area 708 may be displayed in the above-described lighting mode. For example, when the gaming machine 10 sets the first notification device 702, the second notification device 703, and the second area 708 to the above-described lighting mode in the special view variation display game until the winning is derived, The lighting mode can be used as a notification that combines the reliability with which the special view variable display game derives a hit and the reliability with the re-lottery.

Further, instead of the above timing, the gaming machine 10 sets the first notification device 702, the second notification device 703, and the second area 708 to the above-mentioned lighting mode after the start of the re-lottery effect (for example, at the start of the re-lottery effect). You may make an effect.

A display mode 755 shown in FIG. 177 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 753, and shows a state at the start of the re-lottery effect.
On the display screen 756 of the display mode 755, the first area 707 displays a message of "re-lottery!" To notify the player that a re-lottery effect is to be performed.

A display mode 757 shown in FIG. 177 (3) is a display mode after the display mode 755, and shows a state in which the re-lottery effect is being executed.
In the display mode 757, the movable frame 701 is moved from the first position toward the center and moved to the second position because the re-drawing effect is started. As a result, in the display screen 758 in the display mode 757, the second region 708 is wider than the display screen 756. Then, the second area 708 displays a message of "BIG or SMALL", and for the player, the effect of "BALL or SMALL"("SMALL" symbol and
In the case where the symbol arrangement consisting of the IG 'symbol is changed and stopped with the' BIG 'symbol, it is reported that the effect of promoting the hit to an advantageous hit (for example, a probability change hit) is performed.

A display mode 759 shown in FIG. 178 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 757 and shows a state in which the re-lottery effect is being performed.
In the display screen 760 in the display aspect 759, the first region 707 includes “BIG included in the reels (pattern array consisting of five“ SMALL ”symbols) used for effect and the reels.
The percentage (“0/5”) of the symbol (preferred symbol) is displayed. In addition, the first area 707 displays a message of “strengthening the reel!”, And displays an arrow pointing to each display unit of the first notification device 702 to display the reels according to the lighting mode of the first notification device 702. It is reported that the reinforcement of (reel reinforcement effect of changing the symbol arrangement into a more reliable (favorable) aspect (in the aspect including the “BIG” symbol) is performed. Thereby, the first area 707 allows the player to easily grasp that the lighting mode of the first notification device 702 is related to the reliability of the re-lottery effect. In addition, the second area 708 displays a "SMALL" symbol to be strengthened (it becomes a "BIG" symbol by reel strengthening).

A display aspect 761 shown in FIG. 178 (2) is a display aspect after the display aspect 759, and in the reel reinforcement effect, the reel reinforcement is performed based on the lighting mode of the first display part of the five display parts. Indicates a running state. For example, the gaming machine 10 selects one of the five display units as a display unit to be used for reinforcing the reels in order from the display unit in the lighting state.

In the display screen 762 in the display aspect 761, the first area 707 is a display aspect 75.
9 corresponding to the character E of the first notification device 702 that was on at 9
The arrow pointing to e is displayed, and it is informed that the reel reinforcement is performed based on the lighting mode of the display portion 702e.

On the other hand, the second area 708 causes the image of the character E to appear at a position corresponding to the display portion 702e corresponding to the character E, and moves toward the “SMALL” symbol, “S
It is displayed that the MALL symbol is being destroyed. Then, the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 turn the display unit 702e and the display unit 703e corresponding to the character E from the light-on state to the light-off state along with the effect displayed in the second area 708.

A display mode 763 shown in FIG. 178 (3) is a display mode after the display mode 761, and in the reel strengthening effect, the reel strengthening is performed based on the lighting mode of the first display unit of the five display units. Indicates a running state.

In the display screen 764 in the display mode 763, the second area 708 is “SMALL
The second area 708 and the first area 707 display the symbol arrangement in which the first area 707 displays the "BIG" design displayed by the second area 708. Move toward the "SMALL" symbol to compose, "BALL" the "SMALL" symbol
It is displayed that it is changing to the design.

A display mode 765 shown in FIG. 179 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 763, and in the reel strengthening effect, the reel strengthening is performed based on the lighting mode of the second display unit of the five display units. Indicates a running state.

In the display screen 766 in the display mode 765, the first area 707 is a display mode 75.
9 corresponding to the character A of the first notification device 702 that has been on in 9
An arrow pointing to “a” is displayed, and it is informed that the reel reinforcement is performed based on the lighting mode of the display section 702 a. Also, the first area 707 is the current reel (1
It displays the proportion (“1/5”) of the “BIG” symbols included in the current reel, and the symbol array consisting of four “BIG” symbols and four “SMALL” symbols.

On the other hand, in the second area 708, the image of the character A appears at a position corresponding to the display portion 702a corresponding to the character A, and is moved toward the "SMALL" symbol.
It is displayed that the MALL symbol is being destroyed. Then, the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 cause the display unit 702a and the display unit 703a corresponding to the character A to be turned off from the lighted state along with the effect displayed in the second area 708.

A display mode 767 shown in FIG. 179 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 765, and the reel strengthening is performed based on the lighting mode of the second display unit of the five display units in the reel reinforcement effect. Indicates a running state.

In the display screen 768 in the display mode 767, the second area 708 is “SMALL
The second area 708 and the first area 707 display the symbol arrangement in which the first area 707 displays the "BIG" design displayed by the second area 708. Move toward the "SMALL" symbol to compose, "BALL" the "SMALL" symbol
It is displayed that it is changing to the design.

A display mode 769 shown in FIG. 180 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 767, and the reel strengthening is performed based on the lighting mode of the third display unit of the five display units in the reel reinforcement effect. Indicates a running state.

In the display screen 770 in the display mode 769, the first area 707 is a display mode 76.
7, the display unit 702 corresponding to the character B of the first notification device 702 that has been lit.
The arrow pointing to b is displayed, and it is informed that the reel reinforcement is performed based on the lighting mode of the display portion 702b. Also, the first area 707 is the current reel (2
A symbol array consisting of two “BIG” symbols and three “SMALL” symbols) and the proportion (“2/5”) of “BIG” symbols included in the current reel are displayed.

On the other hand, the second area 708 causes the image of the character B to appear from the position corresponding to the display portion 702 b corresponding to the character B, and moves it toward the “SMALL” symbol, “
It is displayed that the symbol "SMALL" is destroyed. Then, the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 cause the display portion 702b and the display portion 703b corresponding to the character B to be turned off from the lighted state in accordance with the effect displayed in the second area 708.

A display mode 771 shown in FIG. 180 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 769, and the reel strengthening is performed based on the lighting mode of the third display unit of the five display units in the reel reinforcement effect. Indicates a running state.

In the display screen 772 in the display aspect 771, the second area 708 is “SMALL
The second area 708 and the first area 707 display the symbol arrangement in which the first area 707 displays the "BIG" design displayed by the second area 708. Move toward the "SMALL" symbol to compose, "BALL" the "SMALL" symbol
It is displayed that it is changing to the design.

A display mode 773 shown in FIG. 181 (1) is a display mode after the display mode 771, and the reel strengthening is performed based on the lighting mode of the fourth display unit of the five display units in the reel reinforcement effect. Indicates a running state.

In the display screen 774 in the display mode 773, the first area 707 is the display mode 77.
1 and the display unit 702 corresponding to the character C of the first notification device 702 that has been turned off
The arrow pointing to c is displayed, and it is informed that the reel reinforcement is performed based on the lighting mode of the display portion 702c. In addition, the first area 707 is the current reel (3
It displays the proportion (“3/5”) of “BIG” symbols included in the reel and an array consisting of two “BIG” symbols and two “SMALL” symbols.

On the other hand, in the second area 708, the display unit 702c corresponding to the character C displays the display manner 771.
Since it was in the light-off state in, it is displayed that the "SMALL" symbol does not change.

A display mode 775 shown in FIG. 181 (2) is a display mode after the display mode 773, and in the reel strengthening effect, the reel strengthening is performed based on the lighting mode of the fifth display unit of the five display units. Indicates a running state.

In the display screen 776 in the display mode 775, the first area 707 is a display mode 77.
4 corresponding to the character D of the first notification device 702 that has been turned off in 4
An arrow pointing to d is displayed, and it is informed that the reel reinforcement is performed based on the lighting mode of the display portion 702d. In addition, the first area 707 is the current reel (3
It displays the proportion (“3/5”) of “BIG” symbols included in the reel and an array consisting of two “BIG” symbols and two “SMALL” symbols.

On the other hand, in the second area 708, the display unit 702d corresponding to the character D displays the display manner 773.
Since it was in the light-off state in, it is displayed that the "SMALL" symbol does not change.

A display mode 777 shown in FIG. 181 (3) is a display mode after the display mode 775, and the reel strengthening effect is ended with the end of the reel strengthening based on the lighting mode of each display portion, and the redrawing The state which started the presentation (re-lottery result derivation presentation) which derives the result of is shown.

In the display screen 778 in the display mode 777, the second area 708 displays a state in which the symbol is fluctuating using the reinforced reel (pattern arrangement), and informs that the result of the re-lottery is being derived doing. On the other hand, the first area 707 displays the image of the hand pressing the PB, thereby informing the player that the stop of the symbol being changed in the second area 708 is performed by the PB operation, and the PB operation Prompting.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 notifies the reliability of the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703, and performs an effect of reflecting the reliability on the reels (pattern arrangement), This enables the player to more intuitively grasp the reliability of the re-lottery.

Next, the lighting timing of the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 and the execution timing of the movable frame 701 in the notification of the reliability of the re-lottery effect using the first notification device 702 and the second notification device 703 This will be described using FIG. FIG. 182 is a timing chart (part 3) illustrating an example of execution timings of lighting of the first notification device and the second notification device and movement of the movable frame in the ninth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game, and when the third display unit of the first notification device 702 is lit, when the winning is derived in the result display effect (display mode 753), the timing t31 is re-started. Start lottery production. The gaming machine 10 performs re-lottery start display effect that displays the start of the re-lottery effect when the re-lottery effect is started (display mode 755), and the contents of the effect performed in the re-lottery effect (the effect called BIGorSMALL is performed) Is notified (display mode 757).

Then, the gaming machine 10 starts the reel strengthening effect of strengthening the reel used for the effect of BIGorSMALL at timing t32, and the reel is strengthened according to the lighting mode of the five display portions of the first notification device 702. To the player (display mode 7
59). The gaming machine 10 executes reinforcement of the reel based on the lighting mode of the first display unit (the display unit in the lighting state) of the five display units from timing t33 (display modes 761 and 7
63). The gaming machine 10 changes the lighting mode of the first display unit from the lighting state to the lighting-off state along with the reinforcement of the reel based on the lighting mode of the first display unit (display unit in the lighting state). As a result, the number of lightings of the first notification device 702 changes from "3" to "2".

When the game machine 10 finishes strengthening the reel based on the lighting mode of the first display unit at timing t34, the lighting mode of the second display unit (the display unit of the lighting condition) of the five display units. Execute the reinforcement of the reel based on (display mode 765, 767). The gaming machine 10 changes the lighting mode of the second display unit from the lighting state to the lighting off state along with the reinforcement of the reel based on the lighting mode of the second display unit (the display unit in the lighting state). As a result, the number of lightings of the first notification device 702 changes from "2" to "1".

When the game machine 10 finishes strengthening the reel based on the lighting mode of the second display unit at timing t35, the lighting mode of the third display unit (the display unit of the lighting state) of the five display units. The reinforcement of the reel based on is performed (display mode 769, 771). The gaming machine 10 changes the lighting mode of the third display unit from the lighting state to the lighting off state along with the reinforcement of the reel based on the lighting mode of the third display unit (the display unit in the lighting state). As a result, the number of lightings of the first notification device 702 changes from "1" to "0" (all in the light-off state).

When the game machine 10 finishes strengthening the reel based on the lighting mode of the third display unit at timing t36, the lighting mode of the fourth display unit (display unit in the unlit state) of the five display units. The reinforcement of the reels is performed based on (display aspect 773).

When the game machine 10 finishes strengthening the reel based on the lighting mode of the fourth display unit at timing t37, the lighting mode of the fifth display unit (display unit in the unlit state) of the five display units. The reinforcement of the reels is performed based on (display mode 775).

The gaming machine 10 ends reinforcement of the reel based on the lighting mode of the fifth display unit at timing t38, and the reel reinforcement effect (reliability is achieved with completion of reel reinforcement based on the lighting mode of each display unit. (Reel reinforcement based on the above) is started, the re-lottery result derivation effect is started, and when the result of the re-lottery is finished at timing t39, the hit effect according to the value of the hit is started.

[Modification 1 of the ninth embodiment]
In the first modification of the ninth embodiment, the position of the movable frame 701 is changed according to the content of notification.
The relationship between the content of notification and the position of the movable frame 701 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the relationship between notification content and the position of a movable frame in Modification 1 of the ninth embodiment.

As shown in the figure, the notification content includes the reliability of hit derivation and the reliability of re-lottery.
When the gaming machine 10 reports the reliability of winning out, the movable frame 701 at the first position is
Position (the position from the lower end of the display 41 of the upper frame portion of the movable frame 701) is set as "h1" and when notifying the reliability of the re-lottery, the position of the movable frame 701 at the first position (The position of the upper frame portion of the movable frame 701 from the lower end of the display device 41) is set to “h2” (for example, h2> h1).

According to this, according to the position of the movable frame 701, the gaming machine 10 notifies the player of the first notification device 70.
It can be made possible to grasp what degree of reliability 2 is informing. That is, the gaming machine 10 can easily understand the contents of the effect.

[Modification 2 of the ninth embodiment]
In the second modification of the ninth embodiment, the position of the movable frame 701 is changed according to the number of lights. The relationship between the number of lights and the position of the movable frame 701 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of lighting and the position of the movable frame in Modification 2 of the ninth embodiment.

The lighting modes of the first notification device 702 include six patterns P1 to P6. Pattern P
A mode 1 is an embodiment in which one of the five display units is not lighted. Pattern P2 is
This is an aspect in which one of the five display units is on. The pattern P3 is an aspect in which two of the five display units are lit. The pattern P4 is an aspect in which three of the five display units are on. In the pattern P5, four display units of the five display units are on. The pattern P6 is an aspect in which five of the five display units are on.

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest reliability to the pattern P1, sets the highest reliability (for example, a big hit confirmed) to the pattern P6, and sets the reliability so as to increase stepwise from the pattern P1 to the pattern P6. . In addition, the gaming machine 10 may set, for example, specific reliabilities from 0% to 100% in the patterns P1 to P6, for example,
Rough reliability levels may be set as “low”, “medium”, and “high”.

Further, the gaming machine 10 sets the position of the movable frame 701 at the first position in the pattern P1 to be the lowest, and sets the position of the movable frame 701 at the first position in the pattern P6 to the highest. The position of the movable frame 701 at the first position is set so as to increase gradually from P1 to the pattern P6.

According to this, as the number of lightings increases and the reliability increases, the gaming machine 10 makes the movable frame 701 (the first notification device 702) noticeable when positioned at the first position (it is easy for the player to see in the visual field) I can get a sense of expectation. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player. Furthermore, according to this, it is possible for the gaming machine 10 to easily grasp that the reliability is changing. That is, the gaming machine 10 can easily understand the contents of the effect.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described ninth embodiment (including the modification) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has effect means (display device 41, board effect device 44) and notification means (first)
A notification device 702, a second notification device 703), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) are provided. The effect means performs effects in the game. The notification means notifies the reliability in the effect by using a plurality of indicator lights (the display portions 702a to 702e and the display portions 703a to 703e) capable of switching the lighting state and the extinguishing state. The control means controls the lighting mode of the plurality of indicator lights to the lighting mode (FIG. 162) according to the reliability of the effect.

(2) The effect means of (1) includes a display means (display device 41) for displaying an effect, and the notification means is provided on the front of the display means.
(3) The gaming machine 10 of (2) includes the movable frame 701 movable on the front surface of the display means, and the movable frame 701 is provided with notification means.

(4) The notification means of (3) includes the first notification means (the first notification device 702) and the second notification means (the second notification device 703), and the movable frame 701 is provided with the first notification means. It fixes with respect to the machine 10 and provides a 2nd alerting | reporting means.

(5) A plurality of indicator lights in the second notification means of (4) (display section 703a to display section 703e
Is an aspect corresponding to a plurality of indicator lights (display unit 702a to display unit 702e) in the first notification means (FIG. 161).

(6) The movable frame 701 of (4) divides the display area of the display means into a first area (first area 707) and a second area (second area 708).
(7) The movable frame 701 of (4) is a rectangle having an opening, and the inside of the opening is a first region,
Let the outside of the opening be a second region.

The movable frame 701 of (8) and (4) has a region overlapping the movable range of the movable frame 701 as a first region, and a region not overlapping the movable range of the movable frame 701 as a second region.
(9) The movable frame 701 in (4) has a first position (display mode 714) and a larger advancing amount into the display area than the first position (closer to the center in the display area than the first position) It is movable between the second position (display mode 716).

(10) The control means of (9) updates the lighting modes of the first notification means and the second notification means at the timing when the movable frame is positioned at the second position (Fig. 168, 176 and the like).
(11) The control means of (8) causes the display means to display an image corresponding to the lighting mode of the first notification means in the first area of the display means (display mode 720).

(12) The control means of (4) synchronously controls the first notification means and the second notification means.
(13) The indicator lights (the display portions 702a to 702e and the display portions 703a to 703e) of the first notification means and the second notification means of (5) are modes corresponding to the characters appearing in the effect (Figure 161).

(14) The effect of (1) is a pseudo-series effect set so that the reliability becomes higher as the number of pseudo-sequences increases, and the control means makes the lighting mode of the plurality of indicator lights according to the number of pseudo-sequences Control the lighting mode.

(15) The reliability of (1) is the reliability of deriving a hit (FIGS. 164 to 176).
(16) The effect means of (1) performs an effect of informing the value of the hit, and the reliability value of the informing device is the reliability of notification of the value of the effect in the effect (FIGS. 177 to 182).

Tenth Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. Game machine 10 of the tenth embodiment
Makes it possible to increase the opportunity to sense expectation in the symbol stopping process in the variable display game.
First, a decorative symbol (decorative symbol) of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol according to the tenth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 configures a decorative symbol (large symbol group) to be described later by the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol, and stops the symbols in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol in symbol variation. The gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A for the left symbol and the right symbol capable of forming a symbol combination to be a reach, and uses the decorative symbol B for a middle symbol capable of forming a symbol combination to be a big hit after reach formation.

The decorative symbol A includes symbols 801, 802, 803, 804, 805, 806, and 807. The symbols 801, 802, 803, 804, 805, 806, 807 can be distinguished from other symbols according to different display modes. The decorative symbol A includes two or more symbol components, of which at least one symbol component has a discriminating power distinguishable from other symbols. The decorative symbol A is a decorative symbol that includes one character (number) and displays the character as a symbol component having a discriminating power.

The symbol 801 is a symbol for displaying the number "1". The pattern 801 includes a base 801 d which is an outer shape having a distinctiveness as a pattern by a figure (for example, a white circle pattern), and a number element 801 n having the distinctiveness as a pattern by a numeral “1”.

The symbol 802 is a symbol for displaying the number "2". The pattern 802 includes a base 802 d which is an outer shape having a distinctiveness as a pattern by a figure (for example, a black circle pattern), and a number element 802 n having the distinctiveness as a pattern by a numeral “2”.

The symbol 803 is a symbol for displaying the number "3". The pattern 803 has a base 803d which is an outer shape having distinctiveness as a pattern by a figure (for example, a white square pattern), and a numeral "3".
And a numeric element 803 n having distinctiveness as a symbol.

The symbol 804 is a symbol for displaying the number "4". The pattern 804 has a base 804d which is an outer shape having a distinctiveness as a pattern by a figure (for example, a black square pattern), and a numeral "4".
And a numeric element 804 n having distinctiveness as a symbol.

The symbol 805 is a symbol for displaying the number "5". The pattern 805 has a base 805d which is an outer shape having a distinctiveness as a pattern by a figure (for example, a white triangle pattern) and a numeral "5".
And the numeral element 805 n having the distinctiveness as the symbol.

A symbol 806 is a symbol for displaying the number "6". The pattern 806 has a base 806d which is an outer shape having a distinctiveness as a pattern by a figure (for example, a black triangular pattern), and a numeral "6".
And a numeric element 806 n having the distinctiveness as a symbol.

The symbol 807 is a symbol for displaying the number "7". The pattern 807 includes a base 807d which is an outer shape having a distinctiveness as a pattern by a figure (for example, a white star pattern), and a number element 807n having a distinctiveness as a pattern by a numeral "7".

The decorative pattern B is a pattern, the decorative pattern B is a pattern 811, 812, 813, 814, 815, 816
, 817. The symbols 811, 812, 813, 814, 815, 816, and 817 are distinguishable from other symbols by different display modes. The decorative symbol B includes one symbol component, and one symbol component has a discriminating power distinguishable from other symbols. The decorative symbol B is a decorative symbol that includes one character (number) and displays the character as a symbol component having a discriminating power.

The symbol 811 is a symbol for displaying the number "1". The symbol 812 is a symbol for displaying the number "2". The symbol 813 is a symbol for displaying the number "3". The symbol 814 is a number "
It is a symbol that displays 4 ". The symbol 815 is a symbol for displaying the number "5". Pattern 81
6 is a symbol for displaying the number "6". The symbol 817 is a symbol for displaying the number "7".

The gaming machine 10 is a symbol normally used by the decorative symbols A and B. When the symbol is used as a standard symbol, a special symbol is prepared separately from the standard symbol as a symbol not normally used or temporarily used. Do. The special symbol is sometimes referred to as a dedicated symbol, but is a symbol included in the large symbol group as in the standard symbol.

A special symbol is one form of a decorative symbol (decorative symbol). The special symbol 820 is a substantially pentagon-shaped symbol with a pattern of five petals. The special symbol 820 is a symbol (a pseudo continuous continuation guide symbol) for guiding a pseudo continuous continuation in a pseudo continuous effect.

The gaming machine 10 guides the pseudo-run continuation by using the special symbol 820 for the middle symbol which is the final stop symbol. In addition, the gaming machine 10 gives notice (proposes of) pseudo-continuous continuation by replacing the number elements 801 n to 807 n of the decorative symbol A with the special symbol 820.

Next, the pseudo-series effect of the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 is
The variable display game is displayed on the display device 41, and the pseudo continuous effect is performed in the variable display game. The pseudo-series effect is 1 as if 2 or more variable display is performed based on 1 start memory
It is an effect of performing a variable display of times. About the pseudo-series effect which game machine 10 does Figure 186
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a first diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 187 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 188 is a third diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 189 is a diagram (part 4) illustrating an example of the display screen in the display device according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 190 is a fifth diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 191 is a figure (6) showing an example of the display screen in the display device of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 192 is a figure (7) showing an example of the display screen in the display device of the tenth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbol before the start of change in the variable display game. An example of the screen display before the start of the change is shown in the display screen 830 of FIG. 186 (1). The display screen 830 has a large symbol group 8
31, a small symbol group 832, a special figure 1 reserve number display 833, a special figure 2 reserve number display 834, a reserve indication 835, and a reserve digest indication 836 are displayed.

Large symbol group 831 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, large symbol group 8
A variable display area 31 is set in a substantially central portion of the display device 41 and displayed in a large size. Large symbol group 831 includes left symbol 831L, middle symbol 831C and right symbol 831R.

In the display screen 830, the left symbol 831L and the right symbol 831R are the decorative symbol A, and the middle symbol 83 is displayed.
1C is a decorative pattern B. In the display screen 830, the left symbol 831L indicates that the symbol has stopped at "1", the right symbol 831R indicates that the symbol has stopped at "3", and the middle symbol 831C has the symbol It shows that it stopped at "2". That is, on the display screen 830, the large symbol group 831 (the left symbol 831L, the middle symbol 831C, and the right symbol 831R) indicates that the special view variation display game is in a stopped state (during symbol stop).

The small symbol group 832 takes charge of notification of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 832 is displayed small on the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 831. Small symbol group 832 is
Includes left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol. On the display screen 830, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 832 indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in a stopped state.

A special figure 1 pending number display 833 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 830, the special view 1 hold count display 833 indicates that the special view 1 game has a hold storage count of "4".
A special figure 2 pending number display 834 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 830, the special view 2 hold count display 834 indicates that the special view 2 game has a hold storage count of "4". The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 835 corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 833 and the number of pending storage displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 834.

For example, as shown in the display screen 830, when the special figure 1 pending number display 833 displays "4" and the special figure 2 pending number display 834 displays "4", the pending display 835 displays eight pending storage displays Indicates that the number of pending storages is "8".

The hold display 835 is based on the display mode (the hold storage display displayed on the hold display 835),
In addition to clearly indicating the number of pending storages of the special view variable display game, it is possible to notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each pending storage. On the display screen 830, the hold display 835 displays eight hold storage displays, and indicates that the number of hold storages is "8".

The holding and digest display 836 can indicate whether or not the special view variable display game is in the variable display state, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result, according to the display mode. In the display screen 830, the holding and digest display 836 makes the inside of the frame blank (blank) to indicate that the special feature variation display game is stopped.

When the change start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine 10 variably displays the symbol. An example of the screen display after the start of the change is shown in the display screen 838 of FIG. 186 (2). In the display screen 838, the large symbol group 831 and the small symbol group 832 change the symbols, and indicate that the special view variation display game is in the variation display (during symbol variation) (the variation display is started).

Further, in the display screen 838, the special figure 2 reserve number indication 834 shows that the reserve figure number of the special figure 2 game is “3”, and the reserve indication 835 shows that the reserve figure number of the special figure variation display game is “7
To indicate that In addition, on the display screen 838, the hold and digest display 836 indicates that the special view fluctuation display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the left symbol 831L (first stop symbol), which is initially stopped after the start of the variation, and continues the variation of the remaining symbols (the middle symbol 831C and the right symbol 831R). Figure 18
The display screen 840 shown in 6 (3) shows that the left symbol 831L (the symbol 802 including the numeral "2" (decorative symbol A)) is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol 831C and the right symbol 831R continue to fluctuate.

Next, the gaming machine 10 is stopped for the second time after the start of fluctuation. Right symbol 831R (second stop symbol)
Temporarily stop, and continue the fluctuation of the other symbols (middle symbol 831C). The display screen 842 shown in FIG. 186 (4) is a left pattern 831L followed by a right pattern 831R (pattern 80 including the numeral "1".
It shows that 1 (decorative symbol A)) is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol 831C continues to change.

Here, the gaming machine 10 performs a pseudo-series suggestion effect as shown on the display screen 844 (FIG. 187 (1)). The gaming machine 10 replaces the symbol component 801 n of the right symbol 831 R during temporary stoppage with the special symbol 820. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 suggests that the middle symbol 831 C stops (temporarily stops) at the special symbol 820 by replacing one of the symbol components of the right symbol 831 R with the special symbol 820 (pseudo-joining suggestion). Also, the gaming machine 10 has a right symbol 831 during temporary stop.
The display mode of the symbol component 801d of R is updated (for example, enlarged) to draw the player's attention to the right symbol 831R.

Next, the gaming machine 10 displays the right symbol 831R as shown in the display screen 846 (FIG. 187 (2)).
Slide to switch to the implicit state. It should be noted that the switching of the right symbol 831R to the non-displayed state may be by changing the transmittance, moving to the outside of the display area, superimposing by other effect display, or the like. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 distinguishes the pseudo link suggestion by the right symbol 831R from the pseudo link notification. Further, the gaming machine 10 narrows down the middle symbol 831 C by excluding the right symbol 831 R from the gaze position of the player in the large symbol group 831.

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the middle symbol 831 C (third stop symbol), which is the last stop after the start of the change. In the display screen 848 shown in FIG. 187 (3), the middle symbol 831C is a special symbol 820.
Shows a state of temporary stop at. The gaming machine 10 enlarges and displays the special symbol 820 which is temporarily stopped as the middle symbol 831 C as shown in the display screen 850 (FIG. 187 (4)). Furthermore, the gaming machine 10
, The special symbol 820 which is temporarily stopped as the middle symbol 831 C is enlarged and displayed as shown in the display screen 852 (FIG. 188 (1)). At this time, the gaming machine 10 has the left symbol 831L and the right symbol 831.
Increase the visibility of the middle pattern 831C compared to R. For example, the gaming machine 10 has a left symbol 831.
By enlarging and displaying the middle symbol 831C on the front surface of L and the right symbol 831R, the degree of attention of the left symbol 831L and the right symbol 831R is reduced, and the degree of attention to the middle symbol 831C is increased. In this way, the gaming machine 10 suggests a pseudo-link with the right symbol 831R, and the special symbol 8 with the middle symbol 831C.
The pseudo link is reported by 20.

Next, the gaming machine 10 displays the special symbol 820 as shown in the display screen 854 (FIG. 188 (2)).
Hide the symbol and display the symbol again. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel the correspondence between the pseudo linked notification with the special symbol 820 and the re-variation of the symbol. Also,
The display screen 854 includes a pseudo link notification display 855 in the display content, and guides that the re-variation is a pseudo link, and also guides the pseudo link 2 by the message “second volume”. In addition, the gaming machine 10 keeps changing the small symbol group 832 continuously regardless of the display pattern of the large symbol group 831, and the special view variation display game is being displayed consistently during variation (in symbol variation). To guide you.

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the left symbol 831L, which is the first stop in the second consecutive pseudo run, and continues the variation of the remaining symbols (the middle symbol 831C and the right symbol 831R). In the display screen 856 shown in FIG. 188 (3), the left symbol 831L (the symbol 802 including the numeral "2" (decorative symbol A)) is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol 831C and the right symbol 831R continue to fluctuate. .

Here, the gaming machine 10 performs pseudo-series suggestion effects as shown on the display screen 858 (FIG. 188 (4)). The gaming machine 10 replaces the symbol component 802 n of the left symbol 831 L during temporary stoppage with the special symbol 820. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 suggests that the middle symbol 831 C is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the special symbol 820 by replacing one of the symbol components of the left symbol 831 L with the special symbol 820 (pseudo-joining suggestion). Also, the gaming machine 10 has a left symbol 831 during temporary stop.
The display mode of the symbol component 802d of L is updated (for example, enlarged) to draw the player's attention to the left symbol 831L.

Next, the gaming machine 10 displays the left symbol 831 L as shown in the display screen 860 (FIG. 189 (1)).
Slide to switch to the implicit state. Thus, the gaming machine 10 has the left symbol 831 L.
To distinguish pseudo-indications from In addition, the gaming machine 10 excludes the left symbol 831 L from the gaze point of the player in the large symbol group 831. In addition, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the right symbol 831R which is to be stopped second, and continues the fluctuation of the remaining symbols (the middle symbol 831C). The display screen 860 shows that the right symbol 831R (the symbol 803 including the numeral “3” (decorative symbol A)) is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol 831C continues the fluctuation.

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the middle symbol 831C which is finally stopped at the second consecutive pseudo run. A display screen 862 shown in FIG. 189 (2) shows that the middle symbol 831C is temporarily stopped at the special symbol 820. The gaming machine 10 displays the middle symbol 831 as shown in the display screen 864 (FIG. 189 (3)).
The special symbol 820 temporarily stopped as C is enlarged and displayed. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 has a display screen 8
As shown in 66 (FIG. 189 (4)), the special symbol 820 temporarily stopped as the middle symbol 831C is enlarged and displayed. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 suggests a pseudo-link with the left symbol 831L, and notifies the pseudo-link with the special symbol 820 with the middle symbol 831C.

Next, the gaming machine 10 displays a special symbol 820 as shown on the display screen 868 (FIG. 190 (1)).
Hide the symbol and display the symbol again. Further, the display screen 868 is a pseudo link notification display 869.
Is included in the display content to indicate that the re-variation is a pseudo-link, and also to indicate that it is a pseudo-link third time by the message “three-roll”. In addition, the gaming machine 10, large symbol group 831
Regardless of the display mode of, the small symbol group 832 is continuously varied, and it is guided that the special figure variation display game is in the variation display mode (during symbol variation) consistently.

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the left symbol 831L, which is the first stop in the third consecutive run, and continues the variation of the other symbols (the middle symbol 831C and the right symbol 831R). In the display screen 870 shown in FIG. 190 (2), the left symbol 831L (the symbol 802 including the numeral “2” (decorative symbol A)) is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol 831C and the right symbol 831R continue to fluctuate. .

Here, the gaming machine 10 performs a pseudo-series suggestion effect as shown on the display screen 872 (FIG. 190 (3)). The gaming machine 10 replaces the symbol component 802 n of the left symbol 831 L during temporary stoppage with the special symbol 820. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 suggests that the middle symbol 831 C is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the special symbol 820 by replacing one of the symbol components of the left symbol 831 L with the special symbol 820 (pseudo-joining suggestion). Also, the gaming machine 10 has a left symbol 831 during temporary stop.
The display mode of the symbol component 802d of L is updated (for example, enlarged) to draw the player's attention to the left symbol 831L.

Next, the gaming machine 10 displays the left symbol 831 L as shown in the display screen 874 (FIG. 190 (4)).
Slide to switch to the implicit state. Thus, the gaming machine 10 has the left symbol 831 L.
To distinguish pseudo-indications from In addition, the gaming machine 10 excludes the left symbol 831 L from the gaze point of the player in the large symbol group 831. In addition, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the right symbol 831R which is to be stopped second, and continues the fluctuation of the remaining symbols (the middle symbol 831C). Display screen 874 shows that right symbol 831R (symbol 801 (decorative symbol A) including numeral "1") is temporarily stopped, and middle symbol 831C continues to change.

Here, the gaming machine 10 performs a pseudo-series suggestion effect as shown on the display screen 876 (FIG. 191 (1)). The gaming machine 10 replaces the symbol component 801 n of the right symbol 831 R during temporary stoppage with the special symbol 820. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 suggests that the middle symbol 831 C stops (temporarily stops) at the special symbol 820 by replacing one of the symbol components of the right symbol 831 R with the special symbol 820 (pseudo-joining suggestion). Also, the gaming machine 10 has a right symbol 831 during temporary stop.
The display mode of the symbol component 801d of R is updated (for example, enlarged) to draw the player's attention to the right symbol 831R.

Next, the gaming machine 10 displays the right symbol 831R as shown on the display screen 878 (FIG. 191 (2)).
Slide to switch to the implicit state. Thus, the gaming machine 10 has the right symbol 831R.
To distinguish pseudo-indications from In addition, the gaming machine 10 excludes the right symbol 831R from the gaze point of the player in the large symbol group 831. In addition, the display screen 878 has a middle symbol 8
It shows how 31C continues to fluctuate.

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the middle symbol 831C, which is the last stop in the third consecutive run. A display screen 880 shown in FIG. 191 (3) shows that the middle symbol 831C is temporarily stopped at the special symbol 820. The gaming machine 10 displays the middle symbol 831 as shown in the display screen 882 (FIG. 191 (4)).
The special symbol 820 temporarily stopped as C is enlarged and displayed. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 has a display screen 8
As shown in 84 (FIG. 192 (1)), the special symbol 820 which is temporarily stopped as the middle symbol 831C is enlarged and displayed. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 suggests a pseudo-link by the left symbol 831L and the right symbol 831R, and notifies the pseudo-link by the special symbol 820 by the middle symbol 831C.

Next, the gaming machine 10 displays the special symbol 820 as shown in the display screen 886 (FIG. 192 (2)).
Hide the symbol and display the symbol again. Further, the display screen 886 is a pseudo link notification display 887.
Is included in the display content to indicate that the re-variation is a pseudo-link, and also to indicate that it is a pseudo-link fourth by the message “volume 4”. In addition, the gaming machine 10, large symbol group 831
Regardless of the display mode of, the small symbol group 832 is continuously varied, and it is guided that the special figure variation display game is in the variation display mode (during symbol variation) consistently. Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 may similarly perform the pseudo fourth run and perform the fifth and subsequent pseudo runs, or may develop into a predetermined reach effect. After the predetermined effect, the gaming machine 10 stops and displays the decorative symbol A on the left symbol 831L and the right symbol 831R, and stops and displays the decorative symbol B on the middle symbol 831C.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 stops the small symbol group 832 in response to the stop display of the large symbol group 831, makes the inside of the frame of the reserve digest display 836 blank (blank), and the special figure variation display game is stopped. Indicates that there is.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 uses at least one of the left symbol 831L and the right symbol 831R to indicate a pseudo-link, and notifies the middle symbol 831C of the pseudo-link by the special symbol 820. In the gaming machine 10, when it is assumed that the left symbol 831L and / or the right symbol 831R indicate a pseudo-link, the middle symbol 831C reports the pseudo-link by the special symbol 820, but the pseudo-link notification by the special symbol 820 May be performed with a predetermined probability. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes the probability of performing pseudo linked notification different between when the suggestion of the pseudo linked is by only the left symbol 831L, by only the right symbol 831R, and when by the left symbol 831L and the right symbol 831R. You may For example, when the gaming machine 10 suggests a pseudo-link by only the left symbol 831L, the probability of performing pseudo-link notification is 70%, and the left symbol 831L and the right symbol 831R
The probability of performing pseudo linked notification can be set to 100% when suggesting pseudo linked.

Such a gaming machine 10 does not display the symbol for exclusive use for pseudo ream (for example, the left symbol 831 L
The relationship between the right symbol 831R) and the symbol (for example, the middle symbol 831C) for displaying the pseudo-link dedicated symbol can be clarified, and the variation of the symbol not displaying the pseudo link-only symbol can not be made redundant. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can increase the opportunity to sense expectations in the symbol stopping process.

Next, the pseudo accompanying display symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a pseudo accompanying display symbol determination process in the tenth embodiment. The pseudo attendant display symbol determination process is a process of setting a symbol to be displayed during the pseudo run when performing the pseudo run effect. The pseudo attendant display symbol determination process is a control unit (CPU of the effect control device 300 (CPU
It is a process performed whenever it derives the symbol which carries out temporary stop display during pseudo run by 311). The pseudo accompanying display symbol determination process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

[Step D281] The control unit sets the pseudo continuous continuation guide symbol (special symbol 820) in the middle symbol 83.
Set as a temporary stop symbol of 1C.
[Step D282] The control unit performs a lottery (pseudo-connected suggestion lottery) whether or not to display the pseudo-connected suggestion pattern as the temporary stop symbol of the left symbol 831L. The pseudo connected suggestion design is a design in which one of the design components of the decorative design A is replaced with a special design 820.

[Step D <b> 283] The control unit proceeds to Step D <b> 284 if the pseudo linked suggestion lottery is won, and proceeds to Step D <b> 287 if the pseudo linked suggested lottery is not selected.
[Step D284] The control unit sets a pseudo link pattern as a temporary stop symbol of the left symbol 831L.

[Step D285] The control unit performs a lottery (pseudo-connected suggestion lottery) whether or not to display the pseudo-connected suggestion pattern as the temporary stop symbol of the right symbol 831R.
[Step D286] The control unit proceeds to Step D287 when the pseudo linked suggestion lottery is won, and ends the pseudo linked display symbol determination process when the pseudo linked suggested lottery is failed.

[Step D287] The control unit sets a pseudo connected suggestion symbol as a temporary stop symbol of the right symbol 831R, and ends the pseudo accompanying display symbol determination process.
In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can indicate the pseudo run with the left pattern 831 L or the right design 831 R, or both, when reporting the pseudo run continuation with the middle symbol 831C. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can execute the pseudo-interactive display symbol determination process for each pseudo-continuous continuation.

Next, the non-pseudo accompanying display symbol determination process will be described using FIG. Figure 194
It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the non-pseudo-interactive display symbol determination processing in 10th Embodiment. The non-pseudo-interlocking display symbol determination process is a process for setting a symbol to be displayed when the pseudo-linking effect is not performed but the pseudo-linking effect is performed or when the pseudo connection effect is aborted. The non-pseudo accompanying display symbol determination process is a process that is performed when the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 does not perform the pseudo-series effect but performs the pseudo-series suggestion effect or when the pseudo-series effect is aborted is there. The non-pseudo accompanying display symbol determination process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

[Step D291] The control unit is a non-pseudo consecutive continuation guidance symbol (a symbol excluding the special symbol 820,
For example, the decorative symbol B) is set as a temporary stop symbol of the middle symbol 831C.
[Step D292] The control unit performs a lottery (pseudo linked suggestion lottery) whether or not to display the pseudo linked suggestion pattern as a temporary stop symbol of the left symbol 831L.

[Step D293] The control unit proceeds to Step D294 if the pseudo linked suggestion lottery is won, and proceeds to Step D295 if the pseudo linked suggested lottery is dropped.
[Step D294] The control unit sets a pseudo link pattern as a temporary stop symbol of the left symbol 831L.

[Step D295] The control unit performs a lottery (pseudo-connected suggestion lottery) whether or not to display the pseudo-connected suggestion pattern as the temporary stop symbol of the right symbol 831R.
[Step D296] The control unit proceeds to Step D297 if a pseudo linked suggestion lottery is won, and ends the non-pseudo linked display symbol determination process if a false linked suggested lottery is not selected.

[Step D297] The control unit sets a pseudo link symbol as a temporary stop symbol of the left symbol 831L, and ends the non-pseudo interne display symbol determination process.
In this manner, the gaming machine 10 does not perform pseudo linked effects, but performs the linked linked effects as well, or even if the pseudo linked effects are terminated midway, with the left symbol 831 L or the right symbol 831 R, or Both can suggest a pseudo ream. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the opportunity of feeling a sense of expectation in the symbol stopping process.

Modification 1 of Tenth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine 10 of a first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment uses the decorative symbol B for the middle symbol 831C, but the gaming machine 10 of the modification 1 of the tenth embodiment has the middle symbol 831C similar to the left symbol 831L and the right symbol 831R. Decorative pattern A
Use

The pseudo-series effect of the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a display device of Modification Example 1 of the tenth embodiment.

The display screen 890 in FIG. 195 (1) shows that the left symbol 831L performs slip variation, the right symbol 831R performs pseudo link suggestion, and the middle symbol 831C is in symbol variation. Figure 1
The display screen 892 of 95 (2) shows that the left symbol 831L and the right symbol 831R slide and the middle symbol 831C temporarily stops. The middle symbol 831 C replaces one of the symbol components of the decorative symbol A with the special symbol 820 and temporarily stops. And, middle pattern 831C
Is a display pattern 894 shown in FIG. 195 (3), replacing one of the symbol components with the special symbol 820 and temporarily displaying the special symbol 820 of the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped, thereby displaying a pseudo-series Inform.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 selects one of the symbol components of the decorative symbol A as the special symbol 820.
Not only can it be replaced with and pseudo-linked suggestions can be made, but also pseudo linked notification can be performed.
In the pseudo linked message, the gaming machine 10 displays the special symbol 820 in an enlarged scale, and the left symbol 831
The L and the right symbol 831R are made to be in the non-display state, and the other symbol components in the middle pattern 831C are made to be in the non-display state. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can distinguish between the pseudo link suggestion function in the special symbol 820 and the pseudo link notification function.

Modification 2 of Tenth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine 10 of a second modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol of the modification 2 of the tenth embodiment. Although the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is assumed to perform the pseudo linked suggestion effect and the pseudo linked notification, the game machine 10 of the modification 2 of the tenth embodiment is indicative of other effects and game state transition. (Suggestment of game progress)
And other effects and game state transition notification (notification of game progress) can be performed.

The special symbol 821 shown in FIG. 196 (1) includes the letter "super heat" in the oval outer shape. The gaming machine 10 displays the special symbol 821 on the middle symbol 831C to notify that the big hit expectation is high (expected degree notification). In addition, for example, the gaming machine 10 has a special symbol 821 for the numeric element 801 n among the symbol components (base 801 d and the numeric component 801 n) of the symbol 801 (see FIG. 185).
The middle design 83 is displayed by displaying the replacement design 821a replaced in the left design 831L and the right design 831R.
Suggests notification of degree of expectation by 1C. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform the expectation degree notification effect and the suggestion effect of the expectation degree notification. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the opportunity of feeling a sense of expectation in the symbol stopping process.

The special symbol 822 shown in FIG. 196 (2) includes the letter "mode B" in the oval outline. The gaming machine 10 displays the special symbol 822 on the middle symbol 831C to transition the gaming state (mode
Informing (state transition informing) of transition to B). Also, for example, the gaming machine 10 has a symbol 80
The left symbol 831 L or the right symbol 8 is a substitute symbol 822 a in which the number element 801 n is replaced with the special symbol 822 among symbol components (the base 801 d and the number component 801 n) of 1 (see FIG. 185)
It is displayed on 31R to suggest state transition notification by the middle symbol 831C. Thus, the gaming machine 1
0 can perform a state transition notification effect or an indication effect of the state transition notification. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the opportunity of feeling a sense of expectation in the symbol stopping process.

The special symbol 823 shown in FIG. 196 (3) includes the character "press!" In the oval outer shape. The gaming machine 10 displays the special symbol 823 on the middle symbol 831C to guide the pressing operation of the push button 25 (operation guidance notification). In addition, the gaming machine 10 may, for example, substitute the left symbol 831 L or the right symbol 831 L, which is the symbol component (base 801 d and the number component 801 n) of the symbol 801 (see FIG. 185). It is displayed on the symbol 831R to suggest an operation guide notification by the middle symbol 831C. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform the operation guidance notification effect and the suggestion operation of the operation guidance notification. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the opportunity of feeling a sense of expectation in the symbol stopping process.

The special symbol 824 shown in FIG. 196 (4) includes the character "hit" in the oval outline. The gaming machine 10 displays a special symbol 824 on the middle symbol 831C to give notice of a hit. In addition, for example, in the gaming machine 10, of the symbol components (the base 801d and the number elements 801n) of the symbol 801 (see FIG. 185), the substitution symbol 824a obtained by replacing part or all of the base 801d with the special symbol 824 is left It is displayed on the symbol 831L or the right symbol 831R to suggest a notice by the middle symbol 831C. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform the advance notice notification effect and the suggested effect of the advance notification. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can hold the identification power of the large symbol group 831 to perform advance notice notification effect or suggestion effect of advance notification. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the opportunity of feeling a sense of expectation in the symbol stopping process.

The special symbol 825 shown in FIG. 196 (5) includes the character "continuation" in the oval outline. The gaming machine 10 displays the special symbol 825 on the middle symbol 831C to notify the continuation of the gaming state (continuation notification)
Do. For example, the gaming machine 10 can guide the special symbol 825 that there is no transition from the gaming state advantageous to the player to the disadvantageous gaming state. In addition, the gaming machine 10,
For example, the symbol components (base 801 d and number component 80) of symbol 801 (see FIG. 185)
A replacement symbol 825a in which both the base 801d and the numeral element 801n are replaced with the special symbol 825 among the symbols 1n is displayed on the left symbol 831L and the right symbol 831R to suggest continuous notification by the middle symbol 831C. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform the continuous notification effect or the suggested effect of the continuous notification. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the opportunity of feeling a sense of expectation in the symbol stopping process.

In the gaming machine 10, the reliability of the suggested effect may be made different depending on the symbol component replacement mode. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the symbol component (the base 801d and the numeral
30% of the suggested production reliability when replacing the base 801d with a special symbol among 01n)
When we replace number element 801 n with special symbol, we assume reliability of suggestion production 70%,
When both of the base 801 d and the numeral element 801 n are replaced with a special symbol, the reliability of the suggested effect may be 100%.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described tenth embodiment (including the modification) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 variably displays the symbols included in a predetermined symbol array (for example, the decorative symbol A, the decorative symbol B), and the variable display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special 2 variation display game: to derive the result aspect of large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602).
The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display the variable display game. The control means is
The symbol combination is a combination including at least a first stop symbol (left symbol 831L or right symbol 831R) and a second stop symbol (middle symbol 831C), and the symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. When a specific symbol (special symbol 820) for displaying and guiding re-variation is displayed on the second stop symbol and displayed again, the symbol component (for example, number element 801 n) included in the symbol corresponds to the particular symbol Change symbol (for example, number element 80) which changed to specific symbol component (for example, symbol component which replaced number element 801 n with special symbol 820)
The symbol which replaced 1 n with the special symbol 820 is displayed on the first stop symbol.

(2) The control means of (1) displays the changed symbol on the first stop symbol (for example, the display screen 84
4) After making the first stop symbol invisible (for example, display screen 846), the specific symbol is displayed on the second stop symbol (for example, display screen 848).

(3) The control means of (2) causes the first stop symbol to be in an invisible state (for example, the display screen 846) by fluctuation (for example, slip fluctuation).
(4) The control means of (2) makes the first stop symbol invisible by increasing the transmittance.

(5) The gaming machine 10 variably displays the symbols included in the predetermined symbol array, and derives the result mode of the variation display game in relation to the symbol combination. The gaming machine 10 includes display means and control means. The display means can display the variable display game. The control means is a combination including at least a first stop symbol (left symbol 831L), a second stop symbol (right symbol 831R) and a third stop symbol (middle symbol 831C), and the first stop symbol, the second Stop pattern,
When the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the third stop symbol, and the specific symbol guiding the re-variation is displayed on the third stop symbol and re-varied, the symbol component included in the symbol corresponds to the specific symbol The changed symbol changed to the specific symbol component is displayed on at least one of the first stop symbol or the second stop symbol.

(6) The control means of (5) follows the presence or absence of the display of the change symbol in the first stop symbol and the display of the change symbol in the second stop symbol according to whether or not the specific symbol is displayed in the third stop symbol. The presence or absence is determined (pseudo associate display symbol determination processing).

(7) The gaming machine 10 variably displays the symbols included in the predetermined symbol array, and derives the result mode of the variation display game in relation to the symbol combination. The gaming machine 10 includes display means and control means. The display means can display the variable display game. The control means makes the symbol combination a combination including at least a first stop symbol and a second stop symbol, temporarily displays symbols in the order of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol, and guides the game progress. When the second stop symbol is displayed, the first stop symbol displays a changed symbol in which the symbol component included in the symbol is changed to the specific symbol component corresponding to the specific symbol (see FIG. 196).

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described. Game machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment
Enhances both the interest by the special image variation display game and the interest by the suspension notice effect.
First, the suspension display mode of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the suspension storage in the suspension notice effect of the eleventh embodiment.
In addition, although the display mode of a pending | holding display in a special figure fluctuation display game is demonstrated, it can be made the same about the display mode of a pending | holding digestion display.

The display modes of the hold display are from pattern P10 to pattern P19. Pattern P10
The pattern P11 is a default (standard) display mode, for example, a circular and white display mode. The pattern P <b> 10 is a display mode (non-hidden) relating to pending storage for which pending advance announcement effects are not scheduled. The pattern P11 is a display mode (latency A) relating to pending storage for which a pending advance presentation effect is scheduled.

The pattern P12 is a non-default (non-standard) display mode, for example, a circular and white blinking display mode. The pattern P12 is a display mode (latency B) regarding pending storage for which pending advance presentation effects are scheduled.

The pattern P11 and the pattern P12 are both related to the holding memory for which the hold notification effect is scheduled, but the pattern P11 does not clarify that the hold notification effect is scheduled, and the pattern P12 is for the hold notification effect. It differs in the point of clarifying a thing.

The pattern P13 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and blue display mode. The pattern P14 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and green display mode. The pattern P15 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and red display mode. The pattern P16 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and petal (cherry blossom) pattern display mode. The pattern P17 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and rainbow display mode.

The pattern P18 is a non-default display mode, and is a display mode including, for example, circular and tiger-like character displays. The pattern P18 is a display mode indicating the development to the corresponding variable display effect (for example, tiger reach).

The pattern P19 is a non-default display mode, and is a display mode including, for example, circular and space-like character displays. The pattern P19 is a display mode indicating the development to the corresponding variable display effect (for example, spacecraft reach).

In the pattern P13 to the pattern P19, an expectation (for example, a hit expectation) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game is set. The degree of expectation is not limited to that corresponding to the possibility of winning per, but may correspond to the development stage of variable display effects such as reach and super reach. It should be noted that the general winning a prize opening notice display effect may be to notify the expectation level to the hold notice effect of the other stage and the independence independently, or to notify the expectation degree by the combination with the hold notice effect of the other stage It may be

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expectation in the pattern P13, sets the highest expectation in the pattern P17, and sets the expectation which increases stepwise from the pattern P13 to the pattern P17. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has, for example, a pattern P with a specific degree of expectation of 0% to 100%.
13 to pattern P17 may be set, for example, "low", "medium", "
As in the case of “high”, a rough expectation may be set. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 sets a predetermined degree of expectation also for the pattern P18 and the pattern P19.

Next, the change announcement effect and the suspension announcement effect of the gaming machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 displays the variable display game on the display device 41, and performs the change notification effect and the hold notification effect in the variable display game. The gaming machine 10 executes the on-hold notice effect corresponding to one start memory. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes a change-prediction effect to execute the on-hold notice effect, that is, to change the display mode of the on-hold display in a game corresponding to another start memory having a game execution order earlier than the one start memory. Run. The change notice effect and the hold notice effect performed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 to 201. FIG. 198 is a first diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in a display device according to an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 199 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in a display device according to an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 200 is a third diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in a display device according to an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 201 shows the eleventh
It is FIG. (4) which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbol before the start of change in the variable display game. An example of the screen display before the start of the change is shown in the display screen 900 of FIG. 198 (1). Display screen 900 is large symbol group 9
01, a small symbol group 902, a special figure 1 reserve number display 903, a special figure 2 reserve number display 904, a reserve indication 905, and a reserve digest indication 906 are displayed.

The large symbol group 901 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, large symbol group 9
01 is displayed in a large size by setting the variable display area in the approximate center of the display device 41. Large symbol group 901 includes left symbol 901L, middle symbol 901C and right symbol 901R.

In the display screen 900, the left symbol 901L indicates that the symbol has stopped at "1", the right symbol 901R indicates that the symbol has stopped at "3", and the middle symbol 901C has a symbol "
It shows that it has stopped at 2 ". That is, on the display screen 900, the large symbol group 901 (the left symbol 901L, the middle symbol 901C, and the right symbol 901R) indicates that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state (during symbol suspension).

The small symbol group 902 is in charge of reporting of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 902 is displayed small on the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 901. Small symbol group 902,
Includes left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol. In the display screen 900, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in a stopped state.

The special figure 1 pending number display 903 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 1 game. In the display screen 900, the special figure 1 pending number display 903 indicates that the number of pending storages of the special figure 1 game is “0”.
A special figure 2 pending number display 904 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. In the display screen 900, the special figure 2 pending number display 904 indicates that the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game is “0”. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending indication 905 is the special figure 1 pending number indication 9 in the non-general power support state.
03 is the number of pending storages to be displayed, and is the number of pending storages to be displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 904 in the normal power transmission support state.

The hold display 905 depends on the display mode (the hold storage display displayed on the hold display 905).
The number of pending storages of the special view variable display game can be specified up to four, and the degree of expectation for the game result for each pending storage can be notified. On the display screen 900, the pending display 905 indicates that the number of pending storages is "
It shows that it is "0".

The holding and digest display 906 indicates whether or not the special view variable display game is in the variable display state by the display mode, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result. In the display screen 900, the reserve consumption display 906 makes the inside of the frame blank (blank), and indicates that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

When the change start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine 10 shifts the hold and displays the symbols. Note that
Since the variable display is started before the pending storage 909 occurs, it is not the target of the change preview effect. The change preview effect is an effect for giving a notice of execution of the hold preview effect by the hold memory 909.

Here, a screen display example after the start of fluctuation is shown in a display screen 908 of FIG. 198 (2). In the display screen 908, the large symbol group 901 and the small symbol group 902 change the symbols, and it is shown that the special view variation display game is in the variation display (during symbol variation) (the variation display is started). Further, in the display screen 908, the special figure 1 pending number display 903 shows that the number of pending storages of the special figure 1 game is “4
The special figure 2 suspension number display 904 indicates that the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game is “0”.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 is in the non-power support state, and the hold display 905 indicates that the number of held memories is “4” as in the special view 1 hold number display 903. In addition, on the display screen 908, the hold and digest display 906 indicates that the special view fluctuation display game is being displayed in a variable manner. Here, it is assumed that the fourth hold storage 909 displayed by the hold display 905 is the target of the hold notification effect. The retention memory 909 is a display mode (latency A) corresponding to the pattern P11, but may be a display mode (latency B) corresponding to the pattern P12. The gaming machine 10 can produce unexpectedness by making it as a display mode (latency A) the holding memory 909 as to which holding memory is a target of the holding notice effect in the holding notice. Further, the gaming machine 10 can produce an expectation by clarifying which pending storage is a target of pending notification effect in the pending notification by setting the pending memory 909 as a display mode (latency B).

When the game machine 10 variably displays the symbol for a predetermined time, the symbol is stopped and displayed. An example of the screen display after the stop display is shown in the display screen 910 of FIG. 198 (3). Large symbol group 9 on display screen 910
01 and the small symbol group 902 have stopped the symbols, and indicate that the special view variation display game is in the stop display (during symbol stop). On the display screen 910, the left symbol 901L has a symbol “4”.
The right symbol 901R indicates that the symbol is stopped at "7", and the middle symbol 901C indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3". In display screen 910,
The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the stopped state. In addition, in the display screen 910, the holding and digest display 906 makes the inside of the frame blank (blank) to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

When the change start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine 10 shifts the hold and displays the symbols. Note that
The variable display is a target of the change preview effect since the variable display is started after the pending storage 909 is generated. An example of the screen display after the start of the change is shown in the display screen 912 of FIG. 198 (4). In the display screen 912, the large symbol group 901 and the small symbol group 902 change the symbols, and it is shown that the special view variation display game is in the variation display (during symbol variation). In addition, display screen 91
In 2, the special figure 1 reserve number display 903 indicates that the reserve memory number of the special figure 1 game is decremented by “1” to “3”, and the special figure 2 reserve number display 904 is the special figure 2 game Indicates that the number of pending storages of is “0”. Further, in the display screen 912, the hold display 905 is a special view 1
As in the case of the number-of-holds display 903, it is displayed that the number of held memories is "3". In addition, display screen 9
At 12, the reserve consumption display 906 indicates that the special view variable display game is in a variable display mode.

Here, the gaming machine 10 is the first (1
Perform the change notice effect for the second time. The screen display example of the first (first) change notice effect is shown in FIG.
9 (1) is shown on the display screen 914. The display screen 914 displays a small symbol group 902, a special figure 1 reservation number display 903, a special figure 2 reservation number display 904, and a change notice effect indication 915. In addition, the display screen 914 hides the large symbol group 901, the hold display 905, and the hold digest display 906. The change notice effect display 915 is a display regarding a change notice effect. For example,
The display screen 914 cuts in the display of the large symbol group 901, the hold display 905, and the hold digestion display 906 with the change notice effect display 915, and as the change notice effect display 915, for example, a character (small) 916 like a tiger. Display

The gaming machine 10 displays the change notice effect display 915, and when the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the symbol is stopped and displayed. An example of the screen display after the stop display is shown in the display screen 918 of FIG. 199 (2). In the display screen 918, the large symbol group 901 and the small symbol group 902 have stopped symbols, and it is shown that the special view variation display game is in stop display (during symbol stop). In the display screen 918, the left symbol 901L indicates that the symbol has stopped at "2", the right symbol 901R indicates that the symbol has stopped at "7", and the middle symbol 901C has a symbol It shows that it stopped at "5". On the display screen 918, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in a stopped state. In addition, display screen 9
At 18, the reserve consumption display 906 makes the inside of the frame blank (blank) to indicate that the special feature variation display game is in a stopped state.

When the change start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine 10 shifts the hold and displays the symbols. Note that
The variable display is a target of the change preview effect since the variable display is started after the pending storage 909 is generated. An example of the screen display after the start of the change is shown in the display screen 920 of FIG. 199 (3). In the display screen 920, the large symbol group 901 and the small symbol group 902 are changing the symbols, and it is shown that the special view variation display game is in a variation display (during symbol variation). In addition, display screen 92
At 0, the special figure 1 reserve number display 903 indicates that the reserve memory number of the special figure 1 game is decremented by “1” to “2”, and the special figure 2 reserve number display 904 is the special figure 2 game Indicates that the number of pending storages of is “0”. Further, in the display screen 912, the hold display 905 is a special view 1
As in the case of the number-of-holds display 903, it is displayed that the number of held memories is "2". In addition, display screen 9
At 12, the reserve consumption display 906 indicates that the special view variable display game is in a variable display mode.

Here, the gaming machine 10 performs a second change notification effect with the variable display whose execution order is earlier than that of the hold storage 909. A screen display example of the second change notification effect is shown on the display screen 922 of FIG. 199 (4). The display screen 922 displays a small symbol group 902, a special figure 1 reservation number display 903, a special figure 2 reservation number display 904, and a change notice effect indication 915. Also, the display screen 922
, Hide the large symbol group 901, the hold display 905, and the hold digest display 906. For example, the display screen 922 cuts in the display of the large symbol group 901, the hold display 905, and the hold digest display 906 with the change notice effect display 915, and as the change notice effect display 915, a character such as tiger (middle ) 923 is displayed.

The gaming machine 10 displays the change notice effect display 915, and when the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the symbol is stopped and displayed. An example of the screen display after the stop display is shown in the display screen 924 of FIG. 200 (1). In the display screen 924, the large symbol group 901 and the small symbol group 902 stop the symbols, and indicate that the special view variation display game is in the stop display (during symbol stop). In the display screen 924, the left symbol 901L indicates that the symbol has stopped at "3", the right symbol 901R indicates that the symbol has stopped at "7", and the middle symbol 901C has a symbol It shows that it stopped at "4". On the display screen 924, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in a stopped state. In addition, display screen 9
At 24, the reserve consumption display 906 makes the inside of the frame blank (blank) to indicate that the special feature variation display game is in a stopped state.

When the change start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine 10 shifts the hold and displays the symbols. Note that
The variable display is a target of the change preview effect since the variable display is started after the pending storage 909 is generated. An example of the screen display after the start of fluctuation is shown in the display screen 926 of FIG. 200 (2). In the display screen 926, the large symbol group 901 and the small symbol group 902 are changing the symbols, and it is shown that the special view variation display game is in the variation display (during symbol variation). In addition, display screen 92
In 6, the special figure 1 reserve number display 903 indicates that the reserve memory number of the special figure 1 game is decremented by "1" and becomes "1", and the special figure 2 reserve number display 904 is the special figure 2 game Indicates that the number of pending storages of is “0”. Further, in the display screen 926, the hold display 905 is a special view 1
As with the number-of-holds display 903, it is displayed that the number of stored memories is "1". In addition, display screen 9
At 26, the reserve consumption display 906 indicates that the special view variable display game is in a variable display mode.

Here, the gaming machine 10 is the last in the variation display whose execution order is earlier than the hold storage 909 (3
Perform the change notice effect for the second time. An example of the screen display example of the last (third) change notice effect is shown in FIG.
It is shown on the display screen 928 of 0 (3). The display screen 928 includes a small symbol group 902, a special figure 1 pending number indication 903, a special figure 2 pending number indication 904, a pending indication 905, and a pending decision indication 906;
A change notice effect display 915 is displayed. In addition, the display screen 928 hides the large symbol group 901. For example, the display screen 928 changes the display of the large symbol group 901, and the notice effect display 91
Cut in 5 and display a character (large) 929 such as a tiger as a change notice effect display 915, for example.

Next, the gaming machine 10 performs the last (third) change announcement effect, and then holds storage 909.
Performs on-hold preview effects. A display screen 930 shown in FIG. 200 (4) is one of display examples of the on-hold notice effect. The display screen 930 includes a small symbol group 902 and a special figure 1 reservation number display 903.
A special figure 2 pending number display 904, a pending display 905, a pending end indication 906, and a pending notice effect indication 931 are displayed. In addition, the display screen 930 hides the large symbol group 901. The on-hold notice effect display 931 is a display related to on-hold notice effect. For example, display screen 930 displays, for example, on-hold change image 932 and on-hold change message 933 as on-hold notice effect display 931. The pending change image 932 shows the changing mode of the pending storage 909 as an image in advance. For example, the pending change image 932 suggests a change in aspect associated with a tiger-like character with a tiger image. Also, pending change message 9
Reference numeral 33 denotes a change mode of the retention memory 909 or an expectation degree by a message. For example, the pending change message 933 indicates a predetermined degree of expectation by the message "chance!".

A display screen 934 shown in FIG. 201 (1) is a display for specifying the correspondence between the pending change image 932 and the pending storage 909 by moving and displaying the pending change image 932 toward the pending storage 909. In the display screen 934, since the pending display 905 displays only the pending storage 909, the correspondence between the pending change image 932 and the pending storage 909 is clear, but the pending display 905 displays two or more pending storages. It is effective when Note that although the pending change image 932 indicates the correspondence between the pending change image 932 and the pending storage 909 by moving and displaying toward the pending storage 909, by moving and displaying the pending transition display 906. The correspondence between the pending change image 932 and the pending consumption display 906 may be specified.

In the display screen 936 shown in FIG. 201 (2), after the pending change image 932 is moved and displayed toward the pending storage 909, the pending storage effect 909 corresponds to the pattern P 11 as the pending notice effect from the display mode (latency A) to the pattern P 18. FIG. 6 shows a change to a non-default display mode (display mode including a circular and tiger-like character display) corresponding to FIG. The gaming machine 10 notifies a predetermined degree of expectation for the change display result of the hold storage 909 by the change of the display mode of the hold storage 909. In addition, the gaming machine 10 guides the change display progress (for example, the presence or absence, the type, etc. of the reach) of the hold storage 909 by the change of the display mode of the hold storage 909.

In addition, the display screen 936 includes a large symbol group 901, a small symbol group 902, and the special image 1 number-of-holds display 9
03, the special figure 2 pending number display 904, the pending display 905, and the pending processing indication 906 are displayed. In the display screen 936, the large symbol group 901 and the small symbol group 902 stop the symbols, and indicate that the special view variation display game is in the stop display (during symbol stop). Display screen 936
Then, the left symbol 901L indicates that the symbol is stopped at "4", and the right symbol 901R is
The symbol indicates that the symbol has stopped at "1", and the middle symbol 901C indicates that the symbol has stopped at "5". On the display screen 936, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in a stopped state. In addition, in the display screen 936, the holding and digesting display 906 makes the inside of the frame blank (blank) to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

When the change start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine 10 shifts the hold and displays the symbols. An example of the screen display after the start of the change is shown in the display screen 938 of FIG. 201 (3). On the display screen 938, the large symbol group 901 and the small symbol group 902 change the symbols, and it is shown that the special view variation display game is in a variation display (during symbol variation). Further, in the display screen 938, the special figure 1 pending number display 903 shows that the pending memory number of the special figure 1 game is decremented by “1” to “0”, and the special figure 2 pending number display 904 is 2 shows that the number of pending storage of the game is "0". Further, on the display screen 938, the hold display 905 displays that the number of held memories is “0” as in the special view 1 hold number display 903. In addition, in the display screen 938, the pending digest display 90
6 shows that the special figure variation display game is in a variation display. At this time, the pending digest display 90
6 displays the pending storage 909 in the non-default display mode corresponding to the pattern P18.

A screen display example of the variable display effect performed by the gaming machine 10 corresponding to the display mode of the hold storage 909 is shown in a display screen 940 of FIG. 201 (4). The display screen 940 shows a reach state in which the left symbol 901L and the right symbol 901R in the large symbol group 901 are temporarily stopped with the symbol “1”. The display screen 940 includes the effect message 941 and guides the variable display effect performed corresponding to the display mode of the hold storage 909 with the character “tra reach” that it is a tra reach.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform the on-hold notice effect of changing the display mode of the on-hold display according to the start storage in association with the result of the game (special view 1 game). In addition, gaming machine 1
0 can perform the variable display effect according to the display mode of the hold display after the change. In addition, when the gaming machine 10 performs the on-hold notice effect according to the start memory (the hold memory 909), it performs the on-change notice effect in the game corresponding to another start memory having a game execution order earlier than the start memory. Can. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance both the interest by the game effect and the interest by the on-hold notice effect.

The gaming machine 10 displays a character (for example, a character (small) 916, a character (medium) 923, a character (large) 929) as the change notice effect display 915 in each change notice effect. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can guide the presence or absence of the development of the reserved announcement effect and the development mode by the combination of the displayed characters.

The gaming machine 10 hides the hold display 905 and the hold digest display 906 in the first and second change notice effects, and displays the hold display 905 and the hold digest display 906 in the last change notice effect. As a result, since the gaming machine 10 changes the display content depending on the number of times of the change notice effect, it is possible to make clear to the player which is the last change notice effect even if the change notice effect is performed multiple times. it can.

Next, an effect pattern of the change preview effect will be described using FIG. Figure 202:
It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation pattern in the change notification production | presentation of 11th Embodiment, and a pending | holding notification production | presentation.

The gaming machine 10 performs on-hold notice effect based on the pre-reading result of on-hold storage. Then, prior to the on-hold notice effect, a change on-off effect is performed in the preceding on-hold memory game. For example, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the hold display as the hold notice effect, and performs cut-in during the variable display as the change notice effect. The gaming machine 10 prepares, as a pair, an effect pattern of such on-hold notice effect and change on-off effect effect. For example, the effect pattern A is the first (first)
A character-like character (small) 916 is displayed with a change-notice effect (cut-in 1) and a character-like character (middle) 923 is displayed with a second change-notice effect (cut-in 2), 3
A character (large) 929 like a tiger is displayed in the second (last) change notice effect (cut-in 3). Further, the effect pattern A sets the display mode after the change of the hold display (the hold display after change) as the pattern P18, and sets the variable display effect corresponding to the hold display as the trareach.

In addition, the effect pattern B displays a character (small) like a spacecraft in the first (first) change notice effect (cut-in 1), and the second change notice effect (cut-in 2) of the spacecraft Such a character (middle) is displayed, and a character (large) like a spacecraft is displayed in the third (last) change notice effect (cut-in 3). Further, the effect pattern B sets the display mode after the change of the hold display (the hold display after change) as the pattern P19, and sets the variable display effect corresponding to the hold display as the spaceship reach.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 suggests the presence / absence of the on-hold notice effect and the effect mode by the effect mode on the change-off effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10, due to the post-change pending display in the pending notification effect,
We will show you a variable display effect.

Although the effect pattern shown in FIG. 202 is developed in order from cut-in 1 to cut-in 2 and cut-in 3 by three cut-ins, there may be development modes other than this. Next, the cut-in pattern (development pattern) of the change advance presentation effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in pattern in the change noticing effect of the eleventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 can perform the change notice effect not only when the hold notice effect is performed but also when the hold notice effect is not performed. First, the cut-in pattern in the case of performing the on-hold notice effect will be described. The cut-in pattern 1 is the advance hold 1 (the hold 3
Cut in 1), 2 in advance hold 2 (2 in front of the hold) and 2 in advance hold 3 (previous hold)
Step up one by one so as to become cut-in 3 and develop one by one so as to become cut-in 3 in the previous one of the hold, and display the cut-in 3 to notify the development of the reserve announcement effect. Although cut-in pattern 2 is cut-in 1 in advance hold 1 and advance hold 2, it is developed by stepping up 2 steps to cut-in 3 in advance hold 3 and development of the hold announcement effect with the indication of cut-in 3 To inform

Next, the cut-in pattern in the case where the on-hold notice effect is not performed will be described. The cut-in pattern 3 displays the cut-in 1 in all of the preliminary holding 1, the preliminary holding 2, and the preliminary holding 3, and notifies that the cut-in 3 can not be displayed and does not develop into the holding advance notice effect. The cut-in pattern 4 is cut-in 1 by the advance hold 1 and the advance hold 2, and although it steps up to the cut-in 2 by the advance hold 3, it does not reach to display the cut-in 3 and does not develop into the hold notice effect. Inform. The cut-in pattern 5 is a cut-in 1 at the advance hold 1 and a step-up to the cut-in 2 at the advance hold 2 but is a cut-in 2 at the advance hold 3 and does not lead to the display of the cut-in 3 Report that it does not evolve.

Although the gaming machine 10 reports that the advance reserve 3 (final cut-in) does not reach the cut-in 3 to notify that the advance notice effect is not developed, the advance notice effect may be set. In that case, the development probability to the on-hold notice effect may be made different for each cut-in pattern.

Note that the cut-in patterns of the change preview effect described with reference to FIG. 203 all start from the cut-in 1, but not limited to this, the cut-in 2 and the cut-in 3 may be started.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can prepare various cut-in patterns. The number of cut-ins is not limited to three, and may be any number of one or more. In addition, although the gaming machine 10 cuts in for each advance hold, it does not need to cut in for all the advance holds, and may provide surprises by putting one break, for example. In addition, the gaming machine 10
Is performing up to 3 cut-ins with up to 4 pending displays in the pending display 905, but when combining 8 special game and 2 special game games, the maximum is 7 cut-ins. May be performed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform two or more cut-ins during one change display. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform two or more cut-ins in response to the pseudo-series effect.

In addition, although it is stated that the gaming machine 10 makes the development probability to the reserve notification effect different for each cut-in pattern, additionally or alternatively, the combination of two or more cut-in patterns sequentially displayed is for reserve notification The development probability to the presentation may be made different. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the cut-in 1, cut-in 2, and cut-in 3 are cut-in 1, when the development probability to the hold notification effect is in the relation of cut-in 1 <cut-in 2 <cut-in 3.
Combination of cut-in patterns in order of cut-in 2 and cut-in 3 (step-up)
And, the combination of the cut-in patterns (step-down) in the order of the cut-in 3, the cut-in 2, and the cut-in 1 makes the development probability to the holding notice effect different. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may set the development probability to the suspension notice effect in the combination of the cut-in patterns being step-down higher than the development probability to the suspension notice effect in the combination of the cut-in patterns being step-up .

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can associate the display mode of the cut-in pattern with the development probability to the reserved announcement effect set. For example, the gaming machine 10 may suggest the development probability to the on-hold notice effect set in the cut-in pattern by the size, type, motion, lightness, saturation, or a combination of characters included in the cut-in pattern. it can.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 prepares two or more suggestive factors of the development probability to the reserve notification effect for each cut-in pattern, and uses one of them as a suggestion for the development probability to the reserve notification effect set as the cut-in pattern. , And others may be used to indicate the development probability to the reserved announcement effect set as a combination of cut-in patterns. For example, the gaming machine 10 suggests the development probability to the pending announcement effect set in the cut-in pattern according to the size of the character included in the cut-in pattern, and cuts in according to the saturation of the character included in the cut-in pattern. It suggests the development probability to the pending notice effect set to the combination of patterns.

Next, the execution timings of the change notice effect and the hold notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart in the change announcement effect and the suspension announcement effect of the eleventh embodiment.

At timing t10, the gaming machine 10 detects a start winning that can be a starting point of the on-hold notice effect. In addition, the presentation control device 300, which is the control subject of the on-hold notice effect, can detect the start winning that can be the starting point of the on-hold notice effect by receiving the look-ahead system command from the game control device 100. At this time, for example, in the gaming machine 10, the variable display count is “N
The holding position (target holding position) of the start winning combination (target holding) that is the starting point of the holding advance notice effect is “4”.

The gaming machine 10 shifts to hold at timing t11, the number of times of variable display becomes “N + 1”, and sets the target hold position to “3”. Here, the gaming machine 10 performs the cut-in effect (first time) from the predetermined period timing t12 to the timing t13 in the fluctuation display period of the “N + 1” -th fluctuation display number, and the hold display during the period (hold display 905 , Reserve digest display 906
Hide).

The gaming machine 10 shifts to hold at timing t14, the number of times of variable display becomes “N + 2”, and sets the target hold position to “2”. Here, the gaming machine 10 performs the cut-in effect (second time) from the predetermined period timing t15 to the timing t16 during the fluctuation display period of the “N + 2” -th fluctuation display period, and does not display the suspension display during the period. Do.

The gaming machine 10 shifts to hold at timing t17, the number of times of variable display becomes “N + 3”, and sets the target hold position to “1”. Here, the gaming machine 10 performs the cut-in effect (third time, last) from the predetermined period timing t18 to the timing t19 during the fluctuation display period of the “N + 3” -th fluctuation display period, but the suspension display during the period is performed. Do not hide. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can distinguish between the last cut-in effect and the non-last cut-in effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to suggest a change in the display mode of the hold display by displaying the hold display in the last cut-in effect. At timing t19, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the hold display (target hold change).

The gaming machine 10 shifts to hold at timing t20, and the variable display count is the “N + 4” -th time, and the target hold position is “digested”. That is, the display position of the target hold is the hold display 905
Shift to the hold digest display 906. Here, in the gaming machine 10, the variable display count is “N + 4.
The notification target effect (for example, variable display effect such as spacecraft reach) is performed from the predetermined period timing t21 during the second variable display period, and the hold display during the period is not displayed.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described eleventh embodiment (including the modification) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 stores start memory as an execution right of the game (special figure 1 change display game, special view 2 change display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and corresponds to the start memory It is possible to change the display mode of the hold display according to the start memory in relation to the result of the game to execute the hold notification effect, and the display means (display device 41), the control means (game control device 100, effect control) Apparatus 300). The display means can display the game and the hold display. When the control means executes the on-hold notice effect corresponding to one starting memory (holding memory 909), another starting memory (holding memory preceding the holding memory 909) has a game execution order earlier than the one starting memory. In the game corresponding to b), a change notice effect for giving notice of the execution of the hold notice effect is executed.

(2) The control means of (1) sets the combination of the effect modes for each game corresponding to the other start memory in the change notice effect as the combination corresponding to the effect mode of the hold notice effect. (See Figure 202)
(3) The control means of (1) sets the combination of the effect mode for each game corresponding to the other start memory in the change preview effect as the combination corresponding to the display mode of the hold display according to the one start memory. (See Figure 202)
(4) The control means of (1) sets the display mode of the hold display according to the one start storage as the display mode corresponding to the game effect to be executed in the game corresponding to the one start storage. (See Figure 202)
(5) The control means of (1) executes the change notice effect for each game corresponding to the other start memory in the change notice effect. (See Figure 204)
(6) The control means of (1) or (5) executes the change notice effect during the game corresponding to the other start memory in the change notice effect. (See Figure 204)
Twelfth Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. Game machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment
Is transitioned to the gaming state without the universal power support that executes the variable display a predetermined number of times in the gaming state with the universal power support. At this time, the gaming machine 10 guides the number of times of the variable display until the game state transition by the decorative symbol.

First, the game state transition of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 205
Is a diagram showing an example of game state transition of the twelfth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes, in the gaming state, a non-power support state Sta, a power support state Stb, and a big hit state Stc. The non-power support state Sta is a gaming state in a non-big hit and a game state without power support, which is a disadvantageous game state for the player. The universal power support state Stb is a gaming state in a non-big hit and a gaming state with the universal power support, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. The jackpot state Stc is a gaming state during the jackpot.

The gaming machine 10 can derive a big hit as a variation display result in the special figure game (special figure 1 game and special figure 2 game) in the non-general power support state Sta or the general power support state Stb. The gaming machine 10 transitions to the jackpot state Stc triggered by the derivation of the jackpot in the non-power support state Sta or the power support state Stb, and the jackpot state Stc.
The transition to the power transmission support state Stb is triggered by the termination of the big hit in.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 transitions to the non-power support state Sta when the variable power display of the predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) is performed without deriving a big hit in the power support state Stb. .

The normal power support state Stb includes mode A and mode B as an effect mode. Mode A
Can derive various stop modes as a variable display result, for example, derives a stop mode consisting of a combination of three symbols. Mode B can derive a monotonous stop mode as a variation display result as compared with mode A, and for example, derives a stop mode consisting of one large symbol. In the mode B, the number of fluctuation indications until transition to the non-general power support state Sta is guided by the stop mode. In other words, mode A is a non-power support state S as a variable display result.
The stop mode not related to the number of variable display until transition to ta is derived, and the mode B derives the stop mode related to the number of variable display until transition to the non-power support state Sta as a variable display result.

The gaming machine 10 changes the initial state to mode A when transitioning from the jackpot state Stc to the power transmission support state Stb, and transitions to mode B when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. For example, gaming machine 1
The state 0 changes from mode A to mode B when the number of times of the variable display before transitioning to the non-general power support state Sta is less than 10.

Here, the large design (decorative design) used in mode A and mode B is shown in FIG. 206.
This will be described using FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol according to the twelfth embodiment.
In the mode A, the gaming machine 10 configures the large symbol group with the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and uses a decorative symbol for displaying the large symbol in symbol variation. Further, in the game machine 10, the large symbol is configured with only one symbol in mode B, and the special symbol is used to display the large symbol in symbol variation.

The description of the decorative symbol is omitted because it is the same as the decorative symbol A used in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 185). The special symbols are 10 symbols corresponding to the numbers 0 to 9 respectively,
It includes three symbols corresponding to three characters "flower", "blow" and "snow", respectively. Letter "flower"
The three patterns corresponding to "Blow" and "Snow" can be formed in order by forming a idiom "Flower Fubuki".

Next, the display screen in mode A and the display screen in mode B of the gaming machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 207 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen in a display device according to a twelfth embodiment. FIG. 208 shows the twelfth
It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of embodiment. Figure 209 shows
It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 12th embodiment.

First, an example of a display screen during variable display in mode A is shown on the display screen 942 of FIG. In addition, about the structure similar to the game machine 10 of 11th Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

The display screen 942 includes a large symbol group 901, a small symbol group 902, a special figure 1 holding number display 903, a special figure 2 holding number display 904, a holding display 905, a holding digest display 906, and a mode display 9
The display contents include 43, the remaining number display 944, and the game guide display 945. Display screen 94
2 comprises the large symbol group 901 with three symbols consisting of a left symbol 901L, a middle symbol 901C and a right symbol 901R.

The display screen 942 changes the symbols of the large symbol group 901 and the small symbol group 902, and indicates that the special view variation display game is in a variation display mode (during symbol variation). Further, in the display screen 942, the special figure 1 reserve number display 903 indicates that the reserve figure number of the special figure 1 game is "0", and the special figure 2 reserve number display 904 shows the reserve figure number of the special figure 2 game Indicates "4". The pending display 905 indicates that the number of pending storages is “4”. The hold and digest display 906 indicates that the special view variable display game is in a variable display state according to the display mode.

The mode display 943 displays the message “mode A” and indicates that the mode is A.
The remaining number display 944 displays the message “10 more times” and
Indicates that the number of fluctuation display until transitioning to is ten. The game information display 945 displays a message "right-handed" and guides a right-handed game in the power-on support state Stb.

Next, a display screen example during symbol stop in mode A is shown in a display screen 946 of FIG. 207 (2). The display screen 946 is the display content when the variable display on the display screen 942 is stopped.

In the display screen 946, the left symbol 901L indicates that the symbol has stopped at "1", the right symbol 901R indicates that the symbol has stopped at "3", and the middle symbol 901C has the symbol "
It shows that it has stopped at 2 ". That is, on the display screen 946, the large symbol group 901 (the left symbol 901L, the middle symbol 901C, and the right symbol 901R) indicates that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state (during symbol suspension). In addition, on the display screen 946, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in a stopped state. In addition, stop display mode "1, 2, 3" of large symbol group 901 which display screen 946 displays is
It does not have a relation with the number of times of change indication “10” before transitioning to the non-general power support state Sta.

When the change start condition is satisfied, the gaming machine 10 shifts the hold and displays the symbols. Here, the gaming machine 10 updates the number of times of variable display, and the number of times of variable display until transitioning to the non-power support state Sta is nine times, and the mode A changes to mode B. An example of the screen display after the start of the change is shown in a display screen 948 of FIG. 207 (3). The display screen 948 configures the large symbol group 901 with one symbol 901S. Also, the mode display 943 displays the message "mode B",
Indicates that the mode is B. The number of remaining times display 944 displays the message "9 more times",
It shows that the number of variable display until transitioning to the non-power support state Sta is nine times.

Next, an example of a display screen during symbol stop in mode B is shown on the display screen 950 of FIG. 207 (4). The display screen 950 is the display content when the variable display on the display screen 948 is stopped.

On the display screen 950, the symbol 901S indicates that the symbol has stopped at "9". That is, on the display screen 950, the large symbol group 901 (symbol 901S) indicates that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state (during symbol suspension). In addition, on the display screen 950, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the stop state. In addition, stop display mode "9" of large symbol group 901 which display screen 950 displays.
Is associated with the variation display number “9” before transitioning to the non-power support state Sta. That is, the gaming machine 10 guides the player the number of times of change display until transitioning to the non-power support state Sta by the large symbol group 901 (the symbol 901S). Similarly, whenever the variable display frequency is updated, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player of the variable display frequency until transition to the non-power support state Sta by the large symbol group 901 (the symbol 901S). .

Thus, the gaming machine 10 displays the remaining number of times display 94 in addition to the large symbol group 901 to the player.
Do not ask players to pay attention to 4. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can improve interest in the variable display effect of the large symbol group 901.

Next, the variable display in the case of deriving a big hit in mode B will be described. Gaming machine 1
When 0 is, the change start condition is satisfied, the hold shift is made and the symbol is changed and displayed. Where the gaming machine 1
0: The number of fluctuation display is updated, and the number of fluctuation display until transition to the non-general power transmission support state Sta is eight. A display screen 952 shown in FIG. 208 (1) shows a display screen during the variable display in which the number of times of the variable display until transitioning to the non-power support state Sta is eight. Remaining times display 94
4 indicates that the message “eight more times” is displayed, and indicates that the number of variable display times before transitioning to the non-general power transmission support state Sta is eight. Here, the gaming machine 10 performs a pseudo-series effect. The gaming machine 10 performs the first pseudo continuous change.

In the display screen 954 shown in FIG. 208 (2), the "flower" is temporarily stopped in the large symbol group 901 (the symbol 901S) while the message "8 more times" is displayed on the remaining number display 944. At this time,
In the display screen 954, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 indicate that the corresponding special view variable display game is in the variable display state (provisional stop state).

A display screen 956 shown in FIG. 208 (3) shows a display screen during the variable display in which the number of variable displays until transitioning to the non-power support state Sta is eight. Here, the gaming machine 10 performs the second pseudo continuous change.

In the display screen 958 shown in FIG. 208 (4), "blow" is temporarily stopped on the large symbol group 901 (the symbol 901S) while the message "eight more times" is displayed on the remaining number display 944. At this time,
On the display screen 958, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the variation display state (provisional stop state).

A display screen 960 shown in FIG. 209 (1) shows a display screen during the variable display in which the number of times of the variable display until transitioning to the non-power support state Sta is eight. Here, the gaming machine 10 performs the third pseudo continuous change.

In the display screen 962 shown in FIG. 209 (2), "snow" is temporarily stopped in the large symbol group 901 (the symbol 901S) while the message "eight more times" is displayed on the remaining number display 944. As a result, the gaming machine 10 forms the idiom "flower blowing snow" by three times of pseudo continuous change. At this time, in the display screen 954, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the variation display state (provisional stop state).

The display screen 964 shown in FIG. 209 (3) guides the formation of the idiom "flower blowing snow" by the effect display 965. Further, the panel effect devices 550, 551a, 551 cause the characters "flower, blow, snow" to appear on the front of the display device 41, and "flower blow snow" is displayed by left reading. At this time, the display screen 964
Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the stopped state. Further, the display screen 964 hides the hold display 905 and the hold digest display 906 instead of displaying the effect display 965. Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 changes the large symbol group 901 (symbol 901S) again, and derives a result mode by the large symbol group 901 (left symbol 901L, middle symbol 901C, and right symbol 901R).

The display screen 966 shown in FIG. 209 (4) is a left symbol 901L, a right symbol 901R, and a middle symbol 9
It shows that the symbol combination which becomes a big hit is displayed by stopping and displaying "4" on 01C. At this time, on the display screen 966, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 indicate that a symbol combination in which the corresponding special figure variation display game is a big hit has been derived. In addition, although the display screen 966 displayed "4" of a special symbol on the large symbol group 901 and derived the symbol combination which becomes a big hit, "4" of the decorative symbol is displayed on the large symbol group 901 and becomes a big hit. The symbol combination may be derived.

The gaming machine 10 is a variable display in the case where a big hit is not derived in mode B,
In the case of performing the reach effect, it is also possible to perform a pseudo-series change that does not form the idiom "flower blowing snow".

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is a special symbol (for example, the special symbol 820 (see FIG. 185) and the special symbol 825 (FIG. 196) in the temporary stop state in the formation process of the idiom "flower blowing snow". Reference) etc. may be displayed. Thus, the gaming machine 10
In the first and second temporary stops, "flower" and "blow" are displayed on the large symbol group 901 (pattern 901S), and the special symbol 820 is displayed in the third temporary stop, and the idiom "flower blowing snow" is displayed. The formation may be divided again. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the special symbol 820 not only when displaying the special symbol 820 at the third temporary stop but also displaying the special symbol 820 at the first and second temporary stops and repartitioning the formation of the idiom "flower blowing snow" It is also good.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may increase the sense of expectation of the jackpot derivation each time the formation of the idiom “flower blowing snow” is repartitioned. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is a special symbol (for example, the special symbol 824 (FIG. 10 described in the tenth embodiment) for guiding the big hit when the formation of the idiom "flower blowing snow" is repartitioned or repartitioned. 196) or the like) may be displayed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a special symbol (for example, the special symbol 821, as described in the tenth embodiment) for guiding the development effect when repartitioning or forming the idiom "flower blowing snow". 822 and 823 (see FIG. 196) or the like may be displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display, in the display area, a history of a symbol that has been temporarily stopped in the process of forming the idiom “flower blowing”. For example, when the gaming machine 10 displays "flower" on the large symbol group 901 (symbol 901S) at the first time, the large symbol group 901 (symbol 901S) is re-varied while leaving the display of "flower" in the display area. Do. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 is the first and second temporary stop.
Even if the player misses the symbols displayed on the large symbol group 901 (symbol 901S) in the second round, the formation process of the idiom "flower blowing snow" can be easily understood.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described twelfth embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 variably displays the symbols included in the first symbol array (decorative symbols), and the variable display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display in relation to derivation of the symbol combination) Game: Deriving the result form of large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602). The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display the variable display game. The second symbol array (special symbol) when the control means does not derive a hit as a result of the variable display game in a predetermined gaming state
In the second symbol array (special symbol), when the symbol combination included in the is variably displayed to derive the symbol combination for guiding the predetermined gaming state and the winning is derived as a result of the variable display game in the predetermined gaming state After the symbols included are variably displayed and temporarily stopped, the first symbol arrangement symbol combination is derived.

(2) The control means of (1) guides the number of variable display until transition to another gaming state (non-general power support state Sta) in a predetermined gaming state (general power support state Stb) by symbol combination.

(3) The symbol combination of (1) includes a combination of one or more symbols.
(4) The control means of (1) is the number of symbols constituting the symbol combination derived by the variable display using the symbols included in the first symbol array (for example, the left symbol 901L and the middle symbol 901C
The number of symbols (for example, one of the symbols 901S) constituting the symbol combination derived by the variable display using the symbols included in the second symbol array is smaller than the three symbols of the right symbol 901R and the right symbol 901R.

(5) The control means of (4) sets the number of symbols constituting the symbol combination derived by the variable display using the symbols included in the second symbol array to one.
(6) The control means of (5) displays the fluctuation of the symbols included in the second symbol array (special symbol) by the pseudo run variation, and temporarily stops at the pseudo stop which is performed twice or more during the pseudo run variation. When the symbol combination is a predetermined combination (the idiom "flower blowing snow"), the first symbol arrangement symbol combination is derived.

Thirteenth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a thirteenth embodiment will be described. Game machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment
Is for accumulation and release of effect execution elements in display effects. Gaming machine 10
Can perform a display effect according to the number of elements when the elements are opened.

First, element effect state transition will be described using FIG. Figure 210 shows the first
It is a figure which shows an example of the element production | presentation state transition of 3rd Embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 changes the effect control state to the element accumulation state Sta by a predetermined start trigger (for example, symbol fluctuation). The gaming machine 10 performs element storage effect every time the storage condition of the element is satisfied in the element storage state Sta, and stores the element. The elements (effect execution elements) can be counted, and the gaming machine 10 can represent the accumulated elements by a cumulative number. The storage condition of the element includes the elapse of a predetermined time and the occurrence of a predetermined event. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the elapse of a predetermined variation display time, the detection of winning on a predetermined winning opening, the detection of pressing the push button 25 and the like can be regarded as the accumulation condition of the elements. Further, the occurrence of a predetermined event includes the execution of a preset event. For example, in the gaming machine 10, execution of a display effect set in advance (for example, occurrence of a pseudo continuous effect, etc.) can be regarded as establishment of the storage condition of the element.

When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the gaming machine 10 transitions from the element storage state Sta to the element release state Stb. The gaming machine 10 can perform release effect according to the number of elements accumulated in the element release state Stb. The gaming machine 10 can perform a unit number element release effect, with a predetermined number (for example, five) of element numbers as one unit. The gaming machine 10 updates the number of elements by decrementing the number of units from the number of elements stored each time a unit number element release effect is performed.

In addition, when the number of elements is less than one, the gaming machine 10 can perform the fractional element release effect. The gaming machine 10 updates the element number to “0” by decrementing the fraction (remaining number) from the element number accumulated when performing the fractional element release effect.

The gaming machine 10 can perform failure presentation or success presentation corresponding to the presentation result each time the unit number element release presentation or the fractional element release presentation is performed. Gaming machine 10
The element release state Stb can be ended by a predetermined end trigger (for example, symbol stop). The gaming machine 10 is in the element release state S after the success or failure rendition.
It is possible to end tb, and when there is no accumulated element, it is possible to end the element release state Stb without performing the unit number element release effect or the fractional element release effect. The gaming machine 10 can perform the unit number element release effect or the fraction element release effect again if there is a remaining number in the element number even after the failure effect.

Next, a display screen in effect control of the gaming machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be described using FIG. 211 to FIG. FIG. 211 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device of the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 212 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 213 is a figure (3) showing an example of the display screen in the display device of the thirteenth embodiment.

First, a display screen example before the start of the variable display is shown on the display screen 970 of FIG. 211 (1). Note that
About the structure similar to the game machine 10 of 11th Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

Display screen 970 includes large symbol group 901, small symbol group 902, special figure 1 hold number display 903, special figure 2 hold number display 904, hold display 905, and hold digest display 906 in the display content. . The display screen 970 includes the large symbol group 901 as the left symbol 901L, the middle symbol 901C, and the right symbol 90.
It consists of three symbols consisting of 1R. Further, the gaming machine 10 is provided with an element display 971 on the front surface of the display device 41. The element indicator 971 is provided with five element indicator lights 9711, 9712, 9713, 9714, 9715 in a laterally extending frame. The element indicator 971 can turn on the element indicator light 9711 to the element indicator light 9715 in order each time the number of elements is accumulated. The element indicator light 9715 is one size larger than the element indicator lights 9711, 9712, 9713, 9714, and guides the accumulation of the number of elements by turning on the element indicator light 9715.

In the display screen 970, the left symbol 901L indicates that the symbol has stopped at "1", the right symbol 901R indicates that the symbol has stopped at "3", and the middle symbol 901C has the symbol "
It shows that it has stopped at 2 ". That is, on the display screen 970, the large symbol group 901 (the left symbol 901L, the middle symbol 901C, and the right symbol 901R) indicates that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state (during symbol suspension). Further, on the display screen 970, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 902 all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in a stopped state.

Next, a display screen example after the start of the variable display is shown on the display screen 972 of FIG. 211 (2). The display screen 972 changes the symbols of the large symbol group 901 and the small symbol group 902, and indicates that the special view variation display game is in a variation display mode (during symbol variation). Further, in the display screen 972, the special figure 1 pending number display 903 shows that the number of pending storages of the special figure 1 game is “4”, and the special figure 2 is displayed.
The on-hold number display 904 indicates that the on-hold storage number of the special-figure 2 game is “0”. Pending display 9
05 indicates that the number of pending storages is "4". The hold and digest display 906 indicates that the special view variable display game is in a variable display state according to the display mode.

Further, the display screen 972 includes an element storage number display 973 in the display content. The element storage number display 973 displays “00” and indicates that the element storage number is “0 (initial value)”. In addition, the element indicator 971 has five element indicators 9711 and 971.
2, 9713, 9714 and 9715 are turned off to indicate that the number of stored elements is "0".

The gaming machine 10 sets the effect control state as the element accumulation state Sta, with the variable display start as the start trigger of the element effect control. Here, the gaming machine 10 performs element accumulation effect. The screen display 974 shown in FIG. 211 (3) displays an element effect display 975 instead of or in addition to the variable display effect. For example, element effect display 97
5 displays a predetermined number (for example, two) of element displays 976 in relation to the variable display effect. The number of display element display 976 is the operation mode or display mode of the appearing character,
It may be a number or something related to the outcome of a given mini-game.

The gaming machine 10 may display the element display 976 together with the large symbol group 901. For example, the gaming machine 10 may include the element display 976 in the symbol array in the large symbol group 901 to display the element display 976 instead of or in addition to the large symbol.

The screen display 978 shown in FIG. 212 (1) is an element display 9 displayed by the screen display 974.
An element display 977 indicating the correspondence between 76 and the element display 971 is displayed. The element display 977 moves and displays from the element display 976 toward the element indicator light provided in the element display 971. Element display 9 displayed on screen display 974
The element display 977 corresponding to one of the display 76 is moved toward the element indicator light 9711. Further, the element display 977 corresponding to the other of the element display 976 displayed on the screen display 974 is moved and displayed toward the element indicator light 9712.

The element indicator 971 is a movable body that can move up and down, and the element indicator 9
When lighting 711 and 9712, it rises and falls after lighting. Thus, the gaming machine 10
Clearly indicates the correspondence between the element display 976 and the element display 971. In addition, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the update timing of the lighting mode of the element display 971.

The gaming machine 10 uses the element display 971 to store the two elements thus accumulated.
Clearly indicates by turning on the element indicator lights 9711 and 9712, and clearly by displaying "02" on the element storage number indication 973.

A screen display 980 shown in FIG. 212 (2) shows a state where elements are further accumulated from the screen display 978. The element indicator 971 clearly indicates that the element storage number has reached “5” by lighting all the element indicator lights including the element indicator light 9715. Further, the element storage number display 973 clearly indicates that the element storage number has reached “5” by displaying “05”.

A screen display 982 shown in FIG. 212 (3) shows a state where elements are further accumulated from the screen display 980. The element indicator 971 clearly indicates that the number of stored elements exceeds “5” by lighting all the element indicator lights including the element indicator light 9715. Further, the element storage number display 973 clearly indicates that the element storage number has reached "10" by displaying "10".

Moreover, although the element display 971 does not differ in the lighting mode even when the number of stored elements exceeds “5”, it can be easily understood that the number of stored elements secures the number of units “5”. . The element indicator 971 indicates that the number of stored elements has exceeded “5” and reached “10” (lighting cycle or lighting color, or a combination thereof, etc.)
It may be made explicit by.

In this way, the stored element is released in the element release state Stb which has transitioned from the element storage state Sta when the predetermined transition condition is met. Screen display 984 shown in FIG. 213 (1) is an example of a unit number element release effect (a unit number release effect). The screen display 984 includes an element release effect display 985 in the display content. The element release effect display 985 displays a unit number release effect 986. For example, the unit number release effect 986 guides the pressing operation of the push button 25 by an image or a message, and the push button 25
The success or failure of the predetermined effect based on the pressing operation of The message included in the number-of-units release effect 986 sets the start point of the balloon to the element indicator light 9715 and the element indicator light 971
Specify the correspondence with 5. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 performs failure presentation or success presentation according to the presentation result. The gaming machine 10 fails in the unit number release effect 986, and ends the element release state Stb when the element storage number reaches “0”.

In the gaming machine 10, the element storage number is “12” according to the element storage number display 973.
Although it clearly indicates that there is a unit number, the unit number “5” is subtracted and updated to “7” by one execution of the unit number element release effect. The element display 971 rises when updating the element storage number, and drops the element storage number after updating. The gaming machine 10 repeats the unit number element release effect (for example, the unit number release effect 986) when the element storage number is 5 or more even if the unit number element release effect fails.

Screen display 988 shown in FIG. 213 (2) is an example of the fractional element release effect (fraction release effect). The screen display 988 includes an element release effect display 985 in the display content. The element release effect display 985 displays a fraction release effect 987. For example, the fraction release effect 987 performs a cut-in effect starting from the element indicator light 9712 that displays the fraction. The fraction release effect 987 may notify the player of the success or failure of the effect by the display content of the cut-in effect without requiring the player to perform a required operation, or may notify the success or failure of the predetermined effect following the cut-in effect. May be Thereby, the gaming machine 10 performs failure presentation or success presentation according to the presentation result.

In addition, the fraction release presentation 987 can differ the element indicator light used as the starting point of a cut-in production by the difference in a fraction. In addition, the fraction release effect 987 can make the display mode (position, size, display content, number, etc.) of the cut-in effect different depending on the difference in fraction.

Although the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates that the number of stored elements is "2" by means of the number of stored elements display 973, the fractional number "2" is obtained by one execution of the fractional element release effect thereafter.
Subtract all of "" and update to "0". The game machine 10 ends the element release state Stb when the fraction release presentation 987 fails.

The screen display 990 shown in FIG. 213 (3) includes in the display content a success effect 991 when the unit number element release effect or the fractional element release effect is successful. The success effect 991 notifies the success of the effect by an image or a message.

[Modification of the thirteenth embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the element storage state Sta and the element release state Stb are set during one change display, but a setting example that is not limited to this will be described using FIG. FIG. 214 is a diagram showing an example of element effect state transition of the modification of the thirteenth embodiment.

The setting example shown in FIG. 214 (1) is the setting example described in the thirteenth embodiment, for example, the number of times of the N-th variable display, that is, the element storage state Sta and the element release state Stb during one variable display. Set one by one in the order of.

The setting example shown in FIG. 214 (2) is a modification of the setting example described in the thirteenth embodiment,
For example, the element accumulation state St during the N-th fluctuation display count, that is, during one fluctuation display
The repetition of the order of a, the element release state Stb is set twice. Thus, the gaming machine 10
Can increase the notification opportunity of the success or failure of the rendition. Although the repetition of the order of the element storage state Sta and the element release state Stb is set twice during one variation display, it may be set three or more times.

The setting example shown in FIG. 214 (3) is a modification of the setting example described in the thirteenth embodiment,
For example, the repetition of the order of the element storage state Sta and the element release state Stb is set once during the N-th to (N + m) -th variable display times, that is, (m + 1) variable display. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 has the element storage state Sta and the element release state Stb.
Setting period can be increased. Note that the element storage state Sta is displayed during (m + 1) times of variable display
Although the repetition of the order of the element release state Stb is set once, it may be set twice or more.

Note that the element storage state Sta and the element release state St across multiple times of variable display
When setting b, the gaming machine 10 may reset the state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the gaming machine 10 detects the customer waiting state, and the element storage state St
It is possible to reset the setting of a and the element release state Stb. The detection of the customer waiting state and resetting of the setting of the element storage state Sta and the element release state Stb include 0 clear of the number of element storages.

Note that the display modes of the element displays 976 and 977 may clearly indicate relationships with other display elements. For example, the gaming machine 10 can display the element displays 976 and 977 in the display mode related to the operation mode and display mode of the appearing character (the correspondence described using FIGS. 121 and 122 in the sixth embodiment) See 565, 566, 567).

In addition, the gaming machine 10, element display 976, 9 in the display mode related to the display mode of the symbol
77 can be displayed (see the correspondence display 563, 568, 569 described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 123 in the sixth embodiment).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can display the element displays 976 and 977 in a display mode related to the display mode of the hold display and the hold digestion display (Correspondence described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108 in the sixth embodiment) See display 562).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the element display 9 in the display mode related to the result of the predetermined mini game.
76 and 977 can be displayed (refer to the effect area 560 described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108 in the sixth embodiment and the correspondence display 562).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can display the element displays 976 and 977 in a display mode related to an effect mode of a predetermined effect means (the sub-display device 530 described with reference to FIG. 77 in the fifth embodiment) The effect start memory display 355 described with reference to FIG. 78, the effect lamp 540 described with reference to FIG. 79, and the panel effect devices 550 and 551 described with reference to FIG. For example, the game machine 10 displays the element displays 976 and 977 as the correspondence display 562 described with reference to FIG. 110, thereby displaying the display mode related to the effect mode of the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551. Element display 976, 977 can be displayed.

In addition, when the game machine 10 displays the element displays 976 and 977 in the display mode related to the presentation mode of the predetermined presentation means, the gaming mode 10 necessarily displays the presentation mode of the predetermined presentation means and the display mode of the element displays 976 and 977. It may not be limited to one to one. For example, as in the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125, the gaming machine 10 sets a predetermined relationship between the effect mode of the predetermined effect means and the display mode of the element displays 976 and 977. can do.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, in the unit number element release effect and the fractional element release effect,
The operation guide display of the push button 25 described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105 may be performed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may notify the game progress (for example, reach development, big hit, etc.) as a result of the success effect, and other effects (for example, the hold display 905 or the hold digest display 90).
It is also possible to perform a suspension notice effect to change the display mode of 6.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a large symbol group 90 in place of or in addition to displaying the element display 976, 977 in the element storage effect performed in the element storage state Sta.
A special symbol may be displayed on 1. For example, the gaming machine 10 can temporarily stop a special symbol that displays an element addition number such as “+1” or “+2” on the large symbol group 901. Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 can perform element storage effect as in the special small hit effect of the eighth embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 154.

The gaming machine 10 also displays the number of stored elements on the element display 971, as shown in FIG.
As in the meter display 680 of the eighth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 50 to FIG. 154, the number of stored elements may be displayed. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may indicate that the number of stored elements has reached the number of units by the display mode of the meter full display 684.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may selectively display a fraction release effect 987 (see FIG. 213 (2)) among a plurality of patterns (see FIG. 202). In that case, the gaming machine 10
The specific result may be associated with a predetermined pattern. For example, when the gaming machine 10 displays the character (large) 929 as the fraction release effect 987, it may be developed to tiger reach (development effect corresponding to the fraction release effect 987), or the hold display 905 or the hold digestion. Display 9
The display mode 06 may be changed to a tiger pattern (pending notice effect corresponding to the fraction release effect 987).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform the various effects shown above independently, and can also cooperate in arbitrary combinations.
The gaming machine 10 of the above-described thirteenth embodiment (including the modification) has the following features in one aspect.

(1) The gaming machine 10 variably displays the symbols included in the first symbol array (decorative symbols), and the variable display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display in relation to derivation of the symbol combination) Game: Deriving the result form of large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602). The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display the variable display game. The control means can set the effect execution element accumulation state (element accumulation state) and the effect execution element release state (element release state) as the effect control state, and the predetermined effect execution of the variable display game is performed in the effect execution element accumulation state. Relatedly, the effect execution element (element) is accumulated, the effect execution element is released (subtracted) in the effect execution element released state, and the effect execution element is released.

(2) The gaming machine 10 according to (1) further includes a plurality of lighting units (element indicator lights 9711, 9712, 9713, 9714, 9715) that change lighting modes according to the number of stored effect execution elements.
Storage indicator means (element indicator 971).

(3) The storage number notification means of (2) is capable of moving the front surface of the display means, and has a first state retracted from the front surface of the display means and a second state advanced to the front surface of the display means It is switchable.

(4) The storage number notification means of (3) switches from the first state to the second state when updating the lighting mode of the lighting unit.
(5) The control means of (1), when the number of stored effect execution elements is equal to or more than a predetermined number of units,
A predetermined number of units is subtracted from the accumulated number of effect execution elements to perform a unit number release effect (a unit number element release effect).

(6) The control means of (1) or (5) subtracts all of the accumulated number of effect execution elements from the accumulated number of effect execution elements when the accumulated number of effect execution elements does not reach the predetermined number of units, Perform element release presentation).

(7) The control means of (5) makes the unit number release effect by clarifying the correspondence with the lighting unit corresponding to the unit number.
(8) The control means of (6) makes the correspondence relationship with the lighting part corresponding to the fraction clear and performs the fraction release effect.

(9) The control means of (2), when the accumulated number of effect execution elements is equal to or more than the predetermined number of units,
A predetermined number of units is subtracted from the accumulated number of effect execution elements to perform unit number release effect (unit number element release effect), and the number of lighting parts is a predetermined unit number.

The above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program is provided which describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have. The above processing functions are realized on the computer by executing the program on the computer. The program in which the processing content is described can be recorded on a computer readable recording medium. As a computer readable recording medium, a magnetic storage device,
There are optical disks, magneto-optical recording media, semiconductor memories and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk drive (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape and the like. Optical disks include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk)-RO
There are M / RW (ReWritable) etc. Magneto-optical recording media include MO (Magneto-Optical disk)
Etc.

When distributing a program, for example, a DVD or C on which the program is recorded
Portable recording media such as D-ROMs are sold. Alternatively, the program may be stored in the storage device of the server computer, and the program may be transferred from the server computer to another computer via a network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Also, each time a program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network, the computer can sequentially execute processing in accordance with the received program.

In addition, at least a part of the processing functions described above can be implemented using a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic Decode)
It can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of the present invention and to slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

In addition, the disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by claims.
It is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

10 game machine 41 display device 100 game control device 300 effect control device

Claims (1)

Producing means for producing a play in the game;
Notification means for notifying of the reliability in the effect by a plurality of indicator lights capable of switching on and off states;
Control means for controlling the lighting mode of the plurality of indicator lights to the lighting mode according to the reliability of the effect;
Equipped with
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means reports, when a hit occurs as a result of the effect, the reliability of the effect as the reliability of a re-lottery effect for notifying the value of the hit.

Images